sanskrit reader - forgotten books
TRANSCRIPT
PREFA CE.
Tan results of comparative philology are now so general ly incorporated
into our modern cl assical grammars , lexicons , and text-books , that even a
slight knowledge of Sanskr it, if it be accurate so far as it goes , is of great
service to the classical teacher in making h is instruction interesting and
cfiective. As independent discipl ines, moreover , Sanskr it and comparative
philology, and the l iteratures and religions of India, are constantly gaining
in importance, so that, for example, Sanskr it is now taught at al l but one of
the twenty universities of the German Empire.
The design of this work, then , is twofold. In the first place, it is to
serve as an introduction to these subjects for the students of our colleges
and universities . The excellent Chrestomathy of Bonn '
rnmcx has no
vocabulary ; and few persons can be expected to buy the costly dictionary
of WILLIAMS or that of Bonnruncx AND Rom , at the outset, when they
are uncertain whether Sanskrit wil l be of sufficient interest or use to them
to warrant their continuing its study. What the beginner needs is an
elementary work comprehending both text and vocabulary in a s ingle
volume. And accordingly , th is Reader is meant to furnish ample material
for about fifty weeks’reading, in a course of three hours a week, and ,
with the text, the appropriate lexical apparatus . The Reader is made as
a companion-volume to Wa rn er
’s S anslm
'
t Grammar , and these two books
supply al l that is needed for the first year’
s study.
This Reader is designed, in the second place, to render a knowledge of
Sanskrit accessible to the classical teachers of h igh-school s , academ ics , and
colleges. These teachers , if they pursue this study at al l , usual ly do so
without the aid of an instructor . And it is especial ly the requirements ofuna ided p r ivate study that I have taken constant pains to meet. I state th is
fact thus expl icitly , because, both here at Cambridge , and during my con
nection with the Johns Hopkins U n iversity (where the plan for th is workwas formed) , numerous inquiries for such a book have been addressed to me
by persons very remote from any of the h igher institutions of learning.
I f , incidentally , th is work should help to correct some of the false
notions wh ich are prevalent respecting the relations of Sanskr it to other
languages of the Indo-European family , and to save the l iterature from
[iV]
undue depreciation and from exaggerated praise , it wil l have served a
worthy object.
So cuinbrous or so meagre have been hitherto the appl iances for acquiring
even a moderate knowledge of Sanskr it, that classica l students , when seeking
such knowledge as an auxil iary to their special work, have found the labor
discouragingly great. These students unquestionably have a legitimate and
sufi‘
icient reason for undertaking Sanskr it, and I venture to hope that the
difficulties of the beginning ( see p. xv) have been so material ly lessened
that,they wil l now find even a modicum of Sanskr it well worth the trouble of
attainment.
In making my selections ‘ from the var ious Sanskr it writings , I have had
two practical aims in view : first, to provide abundant mater ial for thorough
dr il l in the language of the class ical period ; and, secondly , to furnish a
br ief introduction to the works of the Vedic period, Mantra , Brahmana ,
and Sfitta. Accordingly I have not sought to give any th ing new, but
rather that wh ich is best suited for beginners . The easy Nala is the
Xenophon’s Anabasis of Sanskr it students , and quotations from it appear
very often in the grammars . And the first five chapters here given form a
complete story . For an elementary reader , the Hitopadeca is unrival led ,
and to leave it out would have been an inexcusable om iss ion , unl ess , indeed ,
its place were taken by the Panchatantra . From th is latter work I attempted
to prepare some selections ; but the text is in so unsatisfactory a condition,
that I rel inquished the plan . And so, although the Hitopadeca has been
printed very often , I have given a considerable part’of it here , choosing the
fables on the ground of their intrinsic excel lence and their interest as
original s of wel l-known occidental stories .3 For similar reasons the six
tales from the Katha-sarit-sagara were selected . On account of their easy
style and simple narrative , they furnish admirable matter for exercise in rapid
reading. The selections from Mann are so made as to il lustrate some of
the most important and interesting matters of Hinducustom and bel ief .‘
Among the Vedic hymns ( or Mantra-mater ial ) are , first, some of the
easiest“; then some taken on account of their poeticcor dramatic7 merit, or
1 These include 68 pages of classica l San wh ich was appealed to as scriptural author
skrit and 37 pages of Vedic Sanskr it. ity for the practice of widow-burning. Com
9 Nineteen fables : there are forty-three pare also the notes on 28 23, 573, and 65
° ff.,
in al l . with those on and respec
See the introductions to the fables in tively.
the Notes. Such are selections xxxi . (Rigveda i.l ) ,Compare the table of contents. The xxxi ii., xxxviii ., xxxix.
, x1i ., and lix.
text-selections are intended to be mutual ly5 Selection xxxii . is the best.
i l lustrative as far as may be. Thus the 7 Selections xxxv., xxxvi i., and lvi . are in
passage 643 5 . is given for its interesting dramatic form (see Wn rr nnr , page xviii ) ,
bearing on Rigveda th e verse and are among the most difiicul t.
their ethical interest“; and final ly some taken because of their historical im
portance .“ For the most part, a repetition of the hymns given by DELBRUECK
and by Bonm m cx in their Chrestomath ies has been avoided. The
Brahmana pieces are chosen in such a way as to show the relation of th is
kind of l iterature to the hymns or Mantras .“ The selections from the
Grihya-s iitras are the two most interesting chapters of Indian private
antiquities , the wedding and the burial service. These texts are , to a
certain extent, rubrics , and prescribe that numerous specified stanzas of
the Rigveda be repeated at these ceremonial s. Care has therefore been
taken that al l the stanzas here cited by their first words should be given
in full among the selections from the hymns .‘
Concerning the text, l ittle need be said. It would have been either
folly or idle pretense to make elaborate text-studies for the short extracts
of wh ich the Reader is composed.“ I have accordingly contented mysel f,
in the main , with reprinting the text of the best editions. M ispr ints have
of course been corrected, and I have endeavored to make the orthography
nformablc to the best standard“and consistent throughout.“ Of some
sl ight emendations , due mention wil l be made in the Notes . For the Nala,
I followed the edition of Bonan za in h is Th ird Book of S anskr it“; for
the Hitopadeca , the text of Bosm uncx in the second edition of h is
Chrestomathy ,“and MUELLER ; for the Katha-sarit-sz
‘
igara , Bnocxn s ns ;
and for Mann ,”LOI SELEUR Dnsnoxecm ur s. I regret that the results
of the studies of BUEIILER, BURNELL, HOPKINS , and JOLLY on the text of
Mann are not yet avail able.
from Rigveda x. 9,14, 16, 17, 18 , 53, 154,
and 1 55 (selections and i. 97 (selection Th is last hymn is mere trash ,and would not have been included among
the texts, had not Aewa layana (at iv.6.1 8 )
prescribed that it be used as a bur ial-hymn ;
but I could not a l low room for the Sun
hymns (si uryi ni ) and the Blessings
(svasty-ayan i n i ) , wh ich are also mentioned
at iv.6.18.
See A.WEBER, I ndr'
sche S tadt'
en , n . 151 .
0Especial ly in the use of anusvdra and of
1 Such are the Van na-hymns, selections
xl ii i.- xlv.
2 Such are the hymns for the dead and
thewedding-hymn ; l ikewise se lection xxxvi i.,
and selection xxxv i. (wh ich contains the
Savitri ) . Selection lxi i. is the Maitreyani
version of the Hiranya-
garbha hymn,Rig
veda x. 121, and is given partly in order th at
those who possess copies of th e Rigveda
m y study th e two versions comparatively .
3 Thus the Brahmana selections lxvi.,
1xvi i ., lxviii., and lxxi i. stand in connection
I h avewith the Mantra selections lvi ., xlvii ., lxii .,
and xlvi . respectively .
4 Th e stanzas required for the wedding
ceremonia l are given in se lections l vii i., lvi i.,
and iv . From th is the student wi ll see why
there are some selections consisting of only
one or two stanzas. Th e bur ial-stanzas are
the nasal mutes, of b and of 9.
wr itten cch wh ere e ns r (see 227)wr ites ch.7 But some of the interesting orthograph
ical pecul iarities of the Maitri yani Sanh itfi
I have a l lowed to stand.
3 See the Brief List, page xvii .
[vi]
It is a pleasant duty to acknowledge my thanks to Bonnn mox, who , in
a way no less generous than unexpected, volunteered to look over al l the
proofs of the class ical part of the text. For the wel l -establ ished and wel l
edited Vedic texts , such help was of course not nee ded.
For the Rigveda , Aurascnr’
s second edition was made the standard.
For the selections from the Maitrayani Sanh ita, I am indebted to the kind
ness of its editor ,l Dr . LEOPOLD vox Scunonns a , of Dorpat. The extracts
from the Brahmanas natural ly fol low the editions of Wanna and Aum cn'r .
The chapters from Aewalayana are a repr int from Sr anznnn’
s edition , with
some unimportant typograph ical l icenses.
The vocabulary , it is almost needless to say , is based on the great Lex
icon of Bonm uncx AND Rom . I should of course deviate from it only
with the utmost circumspection ; but I trust that I have not fol lowed it
slavish ly.
As for the extent of the vocabulary , it is designed to be complete for
the text given in the Reader , and also , it may be added, for the text in the
Appendix to the Grammar .
It is proper to mention here several matters touching the general plan of
the vocabulary. It is not a mere l ist of the actual ly occurr ing Sanskrit
words with their Engl ish equivalents . So far as possible , it aims to do with
thoroughness two things
First, as regards the forms , To enable the student to trace every word
back to its root, by giving references to Wn rrns r’
s chapters (xvi. and
xvii .) on word-formation , and by giving the root itsel f , and, in the case of
secondary and tertiary der ivatives , the intermediate forms , even when these
do not occur in the text at al l . Thus , for the complete explanation of
mithyopaci ra (p. are given , first, mithyi , then the older form thereof,
mi thuyi ,’ then the adjective mithu from wh ich the adverb is derive d, and
final ly the root m ith , although neither the adverbs nor the adjective nor
any verbal form of the root occurs in the text. In l ike manner , car upa
is given solely on account of upaci ra .
Secondly, as regards the meanings , To enable the student to trace everys ignification back to the radical idea , by giving not only the meaning
required for translating a particular passage , but also , if this is a secondary
or tertiary or later mean ing, the intermediate meanings , and in their logical
order of development. Thus the only meanings of the word pads , as it
1 He gave th em to me in manuscript, attention drawn to the pecul iar form and
before he h imself began pr inting. accent of the adverb and wil l find the ex
2 By looking out the reference to 1 1 12e planation thereof.
(under mithu) , the student wil l have his
[m ]
occurs in the text of this Reader , are foot’or
‘ leg,’in ten passages , and
verse of a three-versed stanza ,’
in one passage ( 60 The history and
uses of the word may be clearly understood f rom BOEBTLINGK AND Bor n .
The or iginal mean ing foot was extended to that of ‘ leg then special ized
to the mean ing‘ l imb of a quadruped
’
; then general ized to the meaning
quarter’
(as , conversely, the English word qua rter is special ized to the
mean ing fourth part of a quadruped, including a leg,’
e.g., in quarter ofbeef ) once more it is special ized to the meaning quarter of a four-versed
stanza,’i .s . verse and then , at last, the use of the word is illogically
extended , and it is made to denote a verse of even a three-versed stanza.
To have given the meanings foot, leg, verse ,’in three words , and perhaps
in the order verse, leg, foot,’woul d have sufficed , it is true, for the purpose
of making a translation ; but such translation demands of the student onlythe most thoughtless and mechanical labor . On the other hand, by in
dicating br iefly the development and connection of meanings , the attention
of the student is directed to the processes wh ich are constantly going on
in the l ife and growth of language ; and thus , although Sanskrit is a dead
language, the study of Sanskrit may be made a study of life and growth .
The il lustration of the transitions of meaning by analogies from the
English and other famil iar tongues would, it seemed to me, greatly increase
the interest and usefulness of the vocabulary. And so , cons iderable space
has been devoted to th is matter . Thus under vyi ma (p. 254 , top) , a
stretch -out,’i .s . a fathom ,
’
are adduced the closely parall el Engl ish fathom ,
from Anglo-Saxon fw
'
lSm , the extended arms ,’and also dp
'
yvta'
. and French
toise, both meaning fathom ,
’and of common origin respectively with «Spe
'
yw
and Latin tenders , stretch .
’
In a book intended partly for persons whose chief interest in Sanskri t
is from the side of its relations to the classical languages and to our mother
tongue, etymological comparisons are plainly cal led for . Accordingly , the
kindred words from the Greek, Latin, Anglo-Saxon , and Engl ish have been
given ,’and always along with their mean ings . It is hoped that these com
parisons , presenting, as they do , many famil iar words with wh ich the learner
can as sociate what is new and strange, will prove a useful aid to the mem
ory. Etymology is a subject in wh ich there is large room for reasonable
1 For other paral lel s, compare, for exam to find how these words are paral lel in
pie, i bharana, barhis , bhavans , vanes , special ization and metaphor . On th is sub
varna . Sometimes th e understanding of ject in general , compare Cum-m s, Grund
the paral lel ism depends on a knowledge ziige5, pp. 1 1 1- 1 18 , and Bantam , Dis
of the etymology of an Engl ish word ; thus Metaphem , Bonn, 1 878.
under root nud + vi, are adduced the Eng9 To give them without their meanings
lish di-vert, dis-port, and s-port, and a refer and without showing the connection of
enee to a r’s dictionary or to Ws ssr s n
’
s ideas is, for an elementary book, a useless
may be necessary for the student, in order task.
[viii]
difi'
erence of opin ion on matters of detail , and on such matters wel l-recognized
authorities often disagree . I have tried to use the standard works of refer
ence in the l ight of the best and latest etymological cr iticism at my command ,
and to distinguish with care between what is certain and wh at is mere conjee
ture. In the revision of the greater part of my manuscript for the press , I
had the benefit of KLUGE’
s valuable dictionary.l His acceptance of the cur
rent comparisons has often given me assurance , and h is sober judgment has
often confirmed me in scepticism or silence on doubtful points . In the
numerous cases where the undoubtedly al lied words are too many to be
given in ful l , I have usual ly selected those forms which were the simplest
or the most interesting, or those whose kinsh ip was clearest.“
These compar isons include only genuinely cognate words , as distinguished
from borrowed words ; the latter have as a rule been excluded, or , if given ,
have been characterized as borrowings .“ Thus Eros , Latin sen-ex, and
English sen-
green are given on page 266, all as genuine cognates of aana ;
the words senate, senator , senator ial , senescent, senile, sen il ity , senior , sire,
sir , seign iorage, etc., are not mentioned, because they are not genuine
Engl ish cognates , but only more or less ancient borrowings or more or less
direct derivatives from the Latin .“ So under the root arp ( p. 276) are given
Latin serp ens and r eptilie, and it would be superfluous to add the borrowed
Engl ish serp ent and reptile.
The accents of al l words have been regularly marked in the headings of
the articles , so far as the accents are known f rom the occurrence of th e
words in any accentuated texts of the l iterature.“ But in addition to these
words , the verb-forms immediately following the root have been uniformlyaccented, according to the rules , except in a few doubtful cases ; and a
number of compounds occurr ing on the pages of Nala have been accented ,
1 Entitled Etymologisches Warterbuch der
deutschen Sprache. Strassburg, Kar l J.
Tr iibner . 1883. Royal Price 10Mark
50Pfennige.
1‘ Thus under sana (p. 266 ) m igh t h ave
been given, in addition to Latin senex, the
words sen ior,senectus, seni lis, senesco, senator ,
sesame, etc. ; but these are readi ly suggested
by senez .
3 Thus th e interesting compound sene-schal
is added under sana,not as a genuine Eng
l ish cognate, but as a borrowing th rough
the French from Continental Germanic,
where its fir st member is indeed a genuine
cognate.
4 Compare note 9, above.
5 For these accents I h ave rel ied on
Bonm nl NGK’
s S anskr i'
t-Wdrterbuch in Kurzqersr Fassung as far as it has appeared, i .e.
to the end of bh , and for the rest of the
alphabet, on th e great thesaurus of Boa-a r
LINGE AND Rom . There are many words
accented in more than one way r i jya,rajya, r i jya, deana, i sana, dar idra , dar
idra, di iva, di iva, bh iiti , bhati , vrsti ,
vtsti , vend, venu) such have genera l ly
been l eft unmarked ; but of a few common
words l ike mAnu, dviptd , paeti , papA, and
mati , the prevail ing accent is given , espe
cial ly , if (as in the case of bhrti or pi tri )the oth er accent is rare, or (as in the case
of quake.) not auth enticated.
[11 ]
according to the rules , in order to make more tangible the difference between
homonymous determ inatives and possess ives .l
What form should be given to the headings of articles is often a question .
For denominative verbs , I have chosen the stem-form mantraya rather
than mantray ) ; to th is is prefixed the root-sign ( V) , merely in order to
catch the eye ; the sign must not be understood as meaning that such stems
are in any wise cc-ordinate with roots . The stems of the perfect active
participle and of the pr imary comparatives are given as ending in vans and
yi ns, but without any impl ication that these are theoretical ly better than the
weaker forms . Roots with medial or final ar or r are given in the latter
form , and so are the stems in at or r.“
The synopses of conjugational forms wh ich fol low each verbal root are
based on the col lections , stil l in manuscript, made by Professor Wa r-m ar .
These were placed at my disposal by h im with the greatest kindness . They
include al l the verb-forms cited by the St. Petersburg Lexicon and Bonn-r
LINGx’
s Abridgment, as occurring in the actual l iterature , besides very
extensive gleanings made independently by Professor WH ITNEY from texts
represented in the Lexicon ,
‘and from others publ ished s ince its completion ,
“
or even not yet publ ished.“
,Ia the description and classification of the forms ,
I have fol lowed WHITNEY. I t often happens that there are severa l forms in
actual use for the same tense ; in such cas es , the commonest one has been
given , or else the one prescribed by the H induRoot-book (dhc
‘
itu-pdtha ) or
sometimes more than one form . Although in the case of many roots the
aor ist is confined almost exclusively to the Vedic language , I have neverthe
less given the aor ist in such cases in order to fil l out the conjugational
scheme, since th is seemed desirable from a pedagogical point of view. For
pedagogical reasons , also , the secondary conjugations have been for the
most part om itted. M any roots wh ich are conjugated regularly in only one
voice show forms of the other voice in the Epos , especial ly where the metre
demands them . It is very difficult to say just how far such form s should
be included, and my course in accepting or rejecting them has been , I fear ,not whol ly consistent.
The Notes , wh ich form the th ird part of th is work , wil l be issued as soon
as is practicable . I t is des igned that they shal l be as brief as possible , but
shall render ample assistance in the interpretation of diflcult passages and
1 Compare bh i'
mapar i kr amaand bh imd For example, th e Catapatha and Aita
pat i h ran a , p. 206. reya Brahmanas.3 See e NEr
,107 and 108 , and com
5 Especia l ly GAnnE’
s edition of Apastam
pare 5 370. ba’s Crauta Sfitra, and 1701: Scanos DEn
’s
3 See Proceedings of the Amer ican Orienta l Maitr i yani .
Society for May, 1882, p. xiii . The Jaim in'
iya Brahmana.
[X]
the explanation of allusions to the antiquities of India. The plan includes
also concise l iterary introductions to the various selections.
An open acknowledgment of my thanks is due to the printers of the
vocabulary, Messrs . J. S . CUSHING Co. They have performed their part
with such intell igence, accuracy , and sk ill as to merit most cordial
recognition .
In conclusion,I desire to make publ ic express ion of my gratitude to my
honored teacher , Professor WILLIAM DWI GHT WHITNEY , for h is constant
interest in this undertaking and for h is generous aid. I can only hope
that the book may do someth ing to further the cause in which he has labored
long and devotedly , and that it may help to enlarge the mom of classical
teach ing, to quicken the interest in the h istory of our mother-tongue , and to
make Sanskrit study among us increasingly fruitful .
C. R. L.
HAEVAaD COLLEGE,CAMBRIDGE, MAssAcnusnr
'rs,
December, 1883.
C ONTENTS .
n an
Introductory suggestions
Brief list of books for students of Sanskr it
PART I .
A. From th e Mah i -bh i rata.
m ac-n on
I . The sto ry of Nale and Damayanti
B. Fr om th e Hitopadeca .
Pre face and introduction
The old tiger and the travel ler
Th e deer and the crow, and the jackalThe blind vulture, the birdl ings, and the cat
The ass, the dog, and the th ief
The l ion, the mouse, and the cat
The crows and the serpent
IX. The l ion , the old hare, and the well
The birds and the apes
The ass in the tiger-skin
The elephant, the hares, and the moon
The blue jackalThe two geese and the tortoise
XV. The three fishes
XVI . The herons, the serpent, and the ichneumons
The herm it, and the mouse th at was changed to a tiger
The heron , the fishes, and the crab
The Brahman and h is'
jar .
The Brahman with th e goat, and the th ree rogues
The Brahman and h is faithful ichneumon
C. From th e Kath i -sar it-si gara .
King Putraka and the seven-league boots
XXI II . Story of Mousey, the th r ifty merchant
King Cibi, the falcon, and the doveXXV. Story of Ah alyi
[I n]
XXVI . The king who didn’
t know h is Sanskr it grammar
XXVII . The pathetic h istory of the stor ies
D. From th e'
Mi nava-dharmaci str
a. The creation
b. The four ages of the wor ld
c. The Brahman’s life, etc.
d. The transm igration of souls
XXIX. Riddl e
XXXV.
E. From the Rigveda.
Hymn to Agn i, the Fire-god
Indra slays the dragon
To Surya, the Sun-
god
To Agn i .
Indra and the Maruts
To Savitar
Indra contests the supremacy of Varuna
To U shas, the Dawn-
goddess
To Agni .
Indra and Atr i, andthe Sun ecl ipsed by the demon
Magic spel ls to produce sleep .
To the Maruts or gods of the storm-winds
To Varuna
To Varuna
To Varuna
To Indra. Indra and Namuchi .
Indra and the Maruts, and Vr itra
To Agni .
To the Waters
Funeral -hymn
Funeral-hymn
Funeral-hymn
Funeral-hym n
The aged pr iest to the young prince
Wedding-stanza
The gods instal l Agn i as oblation-bearer
Burial and wedding-stanzas
The wedding-hymn
Exci cism for a sick person
To Yarns . Funeral-hymn
Bur ials tanza .
For detailed synopsis, see Notes.
M OTION
LXII . Hiranya-garbha The god Ka or WhoLXII I . Legend of Yama and Yami . The creation of night
LXIV. Legend of the winged mountains
LXV. The potency of the sacrifice
6 . Other Br i hmana-piecea.
Legend of Agni th e oblation-bearer , and of the fish
Legend of Indra and the Maruts, and Vr itra
Legend of Indra and the god Ka or WhoThe two kinds of deities, the gods and the BrahmansTruth, untruth , and silence
How the gods got immortality and how Death got hIsLegend of Indra and Namuch I
Nirukta on RV. i .32.10, selection xxxI I .
LXXIV. Wedding-customs and the wedding
-service
LXXV. The customs and ritual of cremation and bur ial
PART II .
VocabularyExplanations and abbreviationsList of abbreviations .
After these, selections xxxvi., xl ., xl ii., xl I ., xlviii ., liv., and lxii . may be rapidly
road. There wil l then remain the selections for the burial-service, xlix.—1ii i., lvii.,
1x., h i , and xxxiv.,f and those for the wedding, lvi ii., lvii ., and iv. These may
proper ly be read last, in order that they may be fresh in the mind when reading the
Siitras, where constant reference is made to them.
The Brahmana pieces may be read in the order in which they are printed ; but
selections lxvi ., lxvii., mm, and lxxii . ought not to be taken up, unless selections
lvi., x1vn., lxii ., and xlvi . have previously been studied.
It is very undesirable to attempt to read the Siitra chapters until one is familiar
with the bur ial and wedding stanzas just mentioned. It is advisable to wr ite out a
translation of these chapters, and to insert therein each mantr a in its proper place,
writing out the original of the mantra in ful l , and its translation , the latter also in
metre, if possible.
Since the synopses following each verbal root in the vocabulary represent the
great mass of al l the forms in actual use ( rather than those simply prescribed by the
grammarians) , and so correspond to the principal parts of the Latin and Greek
verbs, the student should make it h is duty to learn the synopsis for each root when
he first meets verbal forms of that root in the text.
Attention is cal led to th e explanations and abbreviations (pages sea
these should be looked over careful ly before using th e vocabulary.
A BRIEF LIST OF BOOKS FOR STUDENTS OF SANSKRIT.
Tm s l ist has a purely practical aim ,
1and is restricted to a few of the
more important and useful books and ’ to such as are neither rare nor
out of pr int. I t includes (a ) a grammar , (b) readers , (0) dictionaries ,
(d) classical works , books for the study (e) of the Rigveda and its l itera
ture , and (f) of the Atharvaveda , and last (9) some books on antiquities
and the h isto ry of the l iterature and the rel igions of India.
1 . W h itney , Wil l iam Dwigh t. A Sanskri t Grammar , including both the classical
language, and the older dialects, of Veda and Brahmana. Le ipzig, Breitkopf
and Harte] . London , Tr iibner Co . 1 879. Price (bound in cloth )12 sh il l ings .
Th is may be had in Boston of Ginn, Heath . and Co. The work exists also in a German
translation, wh ich may be had of the Leipzig publ ishers.
2. Bl ih l er. Georg. Th ird Book of Sanskrit. With a glossary by Vishnu P.
Shastr i Pandit. Second edition. Bombay. 1877. 128 pages of text
and 97 of glossary. Pr ice 9 annas .
Th is book can be rocured from Triibner dz Co . in London (pr ice 3“ high;It contains
the entire Story of s in (26 chapters) , Dacaratha
'
s Death (Ramayana, ii . and fourstories from the Panchatantra. or beginners, th e typogra hy proves troublesome and the
glossary too meagre ; but the l ittle volume is inexpensive and)
contains excel l ent material foreasy and rapid readin
figand so is h i h ly to be recommended to th ose who have finished the
clas'
sical rt of th is ad er and wis to continue their Sanskrit. For such students th e gloswo d be quite suflicient.
3. Bbh tl i ngk , Otto. Sanskr it-Ch restomath ie. Zweite, ganzlich umgearbeitete
Aufiage. St. Petersburg. 1 877. Large 372 pages. Pr ice 4 Mark
80Pfenn ige.
This work and the two fol lowing are publ ications of the Russ ian Im rial Academy , andshould be ordered through theAcademy
’
s agent, Leo ld Voss , of Lei zig. he volume containsselections from th e Veda (Mantra , Brahm sna , and I
'
itrai from th e hap bharata , RamayanaV ishnu-pur i ne, Katha-sarit-sagara , Hitopadeca , Mann ’
s Laws ,"and Panini
'
s Grammar , anfrom var ious other books ; a r ich col lection of roverbs ; the Vedanta-ears . a ph ilosophicaltreatise , in text and translation ; and the entire rama , Ratnaval i . The Vedic hymns are al ltranslated in the volume mentioned below , no. 15 ; and the notes sh ow where many of theother selections may be found translated . Like al l publ ications of th e Academy, th is is soldat an extremel y low pr ice. Since the book has no vocabul ary , the student wil l at this pointneed to get a dictionary.
1 Hence the prices are included. Both the Mark cent. The books wil l cost th e American purchaser
and the sh il ling may be reckoned as a quar ter of a somewhat more or less according to h is faci l ities for
dol lar . The prices given with th e titles are pub obtaining foreign hooks.
iishers 'prices. To these prices , except when given3With perhaps one exception.no. 18, wh ich can,
in dol lars , should be added the duty , wh ich is 25 per however.be had of second-hand dealers.
[xviii]
4. Bdh tl ingk. Otto. Sanskr it-Worterbuch in kurzerer Fassung. St. Petersburg.
1 879
To be ordered through Voss (see above) . Parts I. to IV. have appeared, and reach to the
end of bh ; they cover 1 167 pages, i .s . nigh two-th irds of th e whole, and cost 34 Mark 80
Pfennige. The rest may be expected in the course of 1885. The manuscr ipt is ready as
far as varna . Th e work is an abr idgment of th e foll owing.
5. Bbh tl ingk , Otto, dud Rudolph Roth . Sanskrit-Worterbuch . St. Petersburg.
1855—1875. Seven volumes. Pr ice 177 Mark 90Pfennige .
To be ordered th rough Voss (see above) . Th is work , which is often cal led the St. Peters
mLexicon ,
”is by far th e most important production of Sanskr it scholarship. To such as
to make any special study of the language and literature, it is absolutely indispensable.
6. W i l l iams , Monier . A Sanskrit-Engl ish Dictionary, etymologically and ph ilo
logical ly arranged, w ith special reference to Greek, Latin , Goth ic, German,
Anglo-Saxon , and other cognate Indo—European languages. London and
New York, Macm il lan and Co. 1872. 1 1 86 pages. Pr ice 94 shi l lings
6d. in England, or $24 in the U nited States.
This is th e onl dictions of Sanskr it into Engl ish wh ich approach es compl eteness. It isin one com act an handy vo ume and is very convenient for readin works of th e classical
per iod. nfortunately , the common mean ings of a word are not tinguished from thosewhich are seldom or never found. Al l Sanskr it words are given in translite ration, and the
ts and more immrtant words in migar i letters also.
7. W il l i ams , Monier . S'akuntala, a Sanskrit drama in seven acts, by Kal idasa.
Second edition . London and New York, Macm i ll an and Co. 1 876.
339 pages. Pr ice 21 sh illings in England, or in the U S .
Th is gives l iteral Engl ish translations of al l th e metr ical passages , exp lanatory notes , andthe Sausk ritization of th e Prakrit passages, and all on th e same page with the text of th is,the most famous of th e plays .
8. K iel h om . Franz, and Georg Bil h l er . Panchatantra. Edited with notes.
Bombay. 1 868.
The work constitutes numbersW ., UL, and I .of the“Bomba Sanskr it Series . Number
IV. (comgehending book I .) appeared in a second edition in 1 87 Th e book may be had of
Tr iibner Cc .,London. The pr ice of th e entire work is 8 shil l ings ; but th e first book may
be had separately for 3 sh il l ings. The Panchatantra is easy and entertain ing reading. It has
been admrrabl translated into German by Benfey : Pantsch atantra. Leipzig , F.A.Brockhaus .1859. 2 vols. 8 Pr ice 24 Mark . The translation is accompanied by a very valuable h istoryof fable-l iterature.
9. Del b r li ck , Berthold. Vedische Ch restomath ie. Mit Anmerkungen und Glos
sar . Hall s, Buchhandlung desWaisenh auses . 1874. Pr ice 3 Mark.
Th is contains 47 hymns from the Rigveda. Of these , onl y five are repeated in th is Reader .Both text and glossary are in trans l iteration. On account of th e smal l price of the book , its
mention ma prove useful to such as do not wish to buy the two complete editions fol lowing(numbers 1 and
10. W indisch , Ernst. Zwol f Hymnen des Rigveda. M it Sayana’
s Commentar.
Text. Warterbuch zuSayana. Appendices. Leipzig, S. Hirzel . 1883.
Price 5 Mark.
Thislgives th e text, and the comment of the great schol last, both in nd
‘
gar i letters. The
is p ted with the genuine accentuation (as in this Reader ) . The book serves a useful
purpose as introduction to the native Hinduor traditional exegesis of the Veda. The vocabuary does not cover the hymns themselves ; but seven of the twelve hymns are translated inthe l ittle book mentioned below, no. 15.
1 1 . Aufrech t. Theodor. Die Hymnen des Rigveda. Herausgegeben . Zweite
Auflage. Bonn , Adolph Marcus. 1877 . 2 volumes. Price 20Mark.
The entire sanh ita text is ven in transl iteration , and extracts from the pada text at the
foot of each page. The exc gl y valuable a pendix conta ins l ists of the poe divin ities ,and metres , and a complete table of first l ines 0 every stanza, with references to concord
ant texts of other Vedas .
12. Mul l er , F. Max. The Hymns of the Rigveda, in the Samh ita and Pada texts,
reprinted from the editio princeps. Second edition. London, Tr iibner
Co. 1877. 2 volumes. Price 32 sh il l ings.
Th is edition gives th e two texts complete on paral lel pas“ and in migar i letters. Thenames of the poets, divini ties , and metres are given at the beginn ing of each hymn.
13. Grassm ann , Hermann. Worterbuch zum Rig-veda. Leipzig, F. A. Brockhaus.
1 873 Pr ice 30Mark .
Th is is not onl y a dictionary , but also a complete concordance to the Rigveda. It is a work
of wonderful industry , method , clearness , and accurac Aside from the t. Pete rsb Lexith is dictionary stands next in importance, for V c students , after the Vedic tasif .
14 . Gr assmann, Hermann. Rig-veda. U ebersetzt und m it kr itischen und erlau
ternden Anmerkungen versehen._Leipzig, F. A. Brockhaus. 1876. 1877.
2 volumes . Price 24 Mark.
Th is translation is entirely in metre, except for a few corrupt or difi cul t hymns. Thestudent can almost invar ia
TlfiE
see just what word Grassmann intended as the render ing of anygiven word of the text. work is especially useful as giving a convenient general viewof th e contents of the Rigveda, and as enabl ing the student to p easily many matterstouch ing th e metres, the arrangement, and the textual condition 0 the or iginal .
15. Geidn er , Kar l, und Adol f K l gi. Siebenzig Lieder des Rigveda. Uebersetzt.
M it Beitr’
a'
gen von R. Roth. Tiibingen. H. Laupp’
sche Buchhandlung.
1875. Pr ice 3 Mark .
Th irty-six of the seventy h of which th is book gives metricallater incorporated by Boh tl ingk to his Ch restomathy (no. 3, above) .
16. Aufr ech t.Theodor . Das Aitareya Brahmana. M it Ausziigen aus dem Com
mentare von Sayanacarya und anderen Bei lagen herausgegeben . Bonn,Adolph Marcus . 1879. Price 1 1 Mark.
This Brahmm a belon to the Rigveda. The text is in transl iteration. The translation ofHang (London, Trii bner Co. 1863) would be of help ; but it is inaccurate and hard to t.
A good man passages are transl ated in volumes I ., and V. of Muir (below, no. U s025these as an troduction, and the St. Petersburg l exicon for help in hard places , an advan
student can make good progress wi th th is text.
17. Btsnal er , Adolf Fr iedr ich . Indische Hausregeln . Sanskr it und deutsch heraus
gegeben . I . Acvalayana. Erstes Heft. Text. Le ipzig. 1 864. Pr ice
2Mark. Zweites Heft. Uebersetzung. 1 865. Price 3 Mark.
Publ ished by th e German Or iental Society , in volumes III . and IV. of the Abhandlungenfii r die Kunde des Morgenlandes. To be ordered th ro h the Society
’s agent, F.A.Brockhans,
in Leipzig. These are the Grihya-sutras belonging to e Rigveda.
18. Roth , R.,und W h itney .W. D. Atharva Veda Sanhita. Herausgegebeu.
Erster Band.Text. Ber lin , Ferd.Diimm ler. 1856. Royal Price 28 Mark
50Pfenn ige.
Th is is the most important and interesting of th e Vedas, after theRik. It is full of magicincantations and other products of curious superstitions.
[XX]
19. Garbo, Richard. Vaitana Sfitra. The Ritual of the Atharvaveda. Edited with
critical notes and indices. London, Triibner 8:Co. 1878. Price 5 sh il l ings.
20. Garbo, Rich ard. Vaitana Sfitra. Das Ritual des Atharvaveda. Aus dem San
skr it iibersetzt und m it Anmerkungen versehen . London , Tr iibner 81: Co .
1878 . Pr ice 5 sh il lings.
Since this is th e only Grauta-s i’
i tra publ ished with translation , and since it is to be hadeasily and ch eaply , it is recommended as an introduction to the works of th is class .
21 . W eber , Albrecht. The history of Indian Literature . Translated from the
second German edition by John Mann and Theodor Zacharias . Second
edition. London , Tr iibner 8r 00. 1878. Pr ice 10 sh ill ings 6 pence.
Th is is a tematic treatise covering both th e Vedic and the class ical Sanskrit literature.It gives abun nt and practical bibliographical information. As a guide and as a work ofreference it is of th e utmost value.
22. Zimm er. Heinr ich . Altindisches Leben . Die Cultur der vedischen Ar ier .
Nach den Sa i'
n h ita dargestellt. Ber lin,Weidmannsche Buchhandlung. 1879.
Pr ice 10Mark.
U nder th e different categor ies geography , cl imate , minerals , plants , animal s , agricul
ture, commerce, dress , food, amusements , smil y relations , art. etc. the Vedic texts touch ingth ese subjects are discussed , and the resul ts deducible from th em are put togeth er in a veryreadable and pleasant way .
23. 8 351, Adol f. Der Rigveda. Die alteste Literatur der Inder . Zweite, umgear
beitete und erweiterte, m it vol lstandigem Sach undWortregister versehene
Aufiage . Le ipzig, Otto Schulze. 188 1 . Price 4 Mark.
This contains an account of th e Vedic writings in general , descr iptions of the gods inlanguage agreeing closely with the actual words of th e original as cited in th e notes , andsketches of some of th e more im rtant bases of Vedic l ife and though t. The numerous notesare h igh ly useful as a ide to e si rseg extensive l iterature of these subjects . and point outmany i nteresting els of custom , be ef , and expression to be found in biblical and classical antiquity.
24. Bar th , Auguste . The religions of Indi a. Authorized translation by Rev. J.
Wood. London , Tr iibner St Co . 1 882. Pr ice 16 sh il lings.
The subject is treated in five ch a ters corresponding to th e five grand phases of rel igiousdevelopment in India : the Vedic religion ; Brahmanism ( ritual . ph i l osoph i c speculation , decl ine) ; Buddh ism ; Jainism ; and duism ( the sects and th ei r t deities , Vishnuismand Oivaism reform in
glsects , cul tus) . The copious references to e l iterature of th e sub
jeeta in handadd grea y to the value of the work.
25. Ol denb erg.Hermann. Buddh a ; h is l ife, his doctr ine, his order . Translated
from the German by Will iam Hoey. London ,Wil l iam s and Norgate. 1 882.
Price 1 8 sh ill ings.
Oldenberg has recently finish ed editin ( in five volumes ) the Vinaya Pitakam , one of themost important among the Buddh ist sacredbooks. He has a wide and dee knowl edge of theor iginal Pall sources, and in h is use of th em h e is guided by rare cr iti acumen and goodcommon-sense. His account of Buddha ’
s l ife, doctr ine, and order contains th e best results ofh is studies and th ey are presented in an extremel y attractive form .
26. M ui r .John . Or iginal Sanskr it texts on the origin and h istory of the people
of India, their religions and institutions. Col lected, translated, and illus
trated. London, Tr iibner 8: Co. 1872- 1874. 5 volumes.
The first four volumes have appeared in a second edition , and th e second volume in a
third edition. The th ird volume costs 16 sh il l ings. The r ice of each of the oth ers is 21 shill ings. The first volume discusses the or igin of caste. e fifth is devoted to the cosmogony ,mythology , religious ideas, l ife, and manners of the Indians in the Vedic age.
PART I.
SANSKRIT TEXT.
HITOPADECA.
e ars
fi séwfin
W fifl iw we
aé’lfim l
s t im u l an
mm
48 KATHASARIT-SAGARA.
KATHASARITSAGARA.
m ai n si sfil fi ii m i
vi i-alarm
firsm e w qm i
M fl iflafifififlm ifi u
51
KATHASARITSAGARA. 53
XXXI . RIGVEDA I. 1 .
afi u im fien
m adm an
fi ififin flauuqn
fi fi tfiwfih
wm eaeaeflm em n q
flfii fltfil tflfil ne n
M Q fi nt-n
udzfififi sit
W W I: 8 133 new
69
XXXII. RIGVEDA I. 32.
W m fii'
fi‘i i
ll ‘i ll
« m m m zm mu
VEDA. 7 1
Test!“{a ( Q uit
waffle zfifii
m “fa-“Rafi
“ Jj j’mfi lfiifi nwn
unfit am 351: trftrn
XXXIII . RIGVEDA I. 50.
sgsi wmi ze ififlsfis m‘i ll
72
XXXIV. RIGVEDA I. 97.
d im e?
m H e ll
“ENTIRE—3 H ‘i ll
wa fi tahflr. I
m w m am am m
m ines"
i n fi fltfi fiwfimm m flwfi nqsn
u a éfi iw fi ffifimfid flm m i
awn
XXXVI . RIGVEDA II I. 62.
wfii ifld tflflfs
fifi i'
fii fizfi dm mon
W M MW
31 31: efm finhfim ffii fiti fwm: um “
VEDA. 75
XXXVII . RIGVEDA IV. 42.
flfifim flfimfifim
mm w m fi mw m m
a tmfimw tafitfit ifi sflsfim
nW W W n
W i ni dfim ea
XXXVIII . RIGVEDA IV. 52.
76 VEDA.
XXXIX. RIGVEDA V. 24.
fim fifiW a u
i t: IR“
fi m zm ii
XL. RIGVEDA V. 40.
flfwfi dfilm w m tmns h
afifiifli k fiw fii fiifi sfi i q
w am m w
m m:neon
XLIII . RIGVEDA
w w m ae m mm
VEDA.
XLIV. RIGVEDA VII . 88.
EAW s a flh
s i mfiifi
fi m m m z
80 VEDA.
XLV. RIGVEDA VII . 89.
in seam
wfii’
i 'l ifa zi
IIQ II
” Ii i :“ W W sh i n I
11361 as“f:
8"
fi atfl fi fi sfiifit
fi lm -fi r
XLVI . RIGVEDA VIII. 14.
W m afi iflaw m ml im fififimm usn
“Wh i tma n?“
i’
l su
a am m a a a nc
"8"
82 VEDA.
XLVII. RIGVEDA VIII. 85.
m um m fii im
wafi m fifi fifl am m20 II
W W M W W |
W W W ?“
VEDA. 83
XLIX. RIGVEDA X. 9.
i dw i ntfiw"sou
84 VEDA.
W fi fi m m m sm
m "S?“
LI . RIGVEDA X. 16.
W fi tfimfii fi m fl fi fafi 117mmcm ll ‘l ii
Haifa"
M ust
a rufiiz l
“
stunts:
wlfii viuan
W wfifififim’
86 VEDA.
sfiwfiafisfiwmM W s W s afi m n
LIII RIGVEDA X. 18.
mgfitf‘
e tm ta
ia rfi m
HiJ aififteifilfl
fla gran t ly:W aist?“
{3 353 1 53gmuiaa amm nen
3553‘s:Wftfii éttrfil afl
'
i
( trai nififl nsn
nun
if"
wfit s l
fi s tula“
W WII
g fé l
VEDA.
W W W W W M SN
LIV. RIGVEDA X. 33.
VEDA.
W ai n“aw wm w m .
inh gm fii
LV. RIGVEDA X. 40. i s.
a i é dfifi'
i w ufihfi adi zwfia i u
LVI. RIGVEDA X. 52.
90 VEDA.
t m fimfi fi
em am agwwrgfi nssn
LIX. RIGVEDA X. 137.
l ow h wi fgfi im sdw zu
IIQ II
nan
a m tfi M fi fimm wwfii fefiwflfi m g fl i nsn
h as“
m m w rmn
LX. RIGVEDA X. 154.
w m zm qafiagm imfi
LXI . RIGVEDA X. 155.
ufiw ‘
amwfi w ififit lmn
LXII. MAITRAYANI SANHITA II. 13. 23.
m zflfififim
VEDA.
i m m flm fiwsflmfinfiv flmfim
{fim ffi n usu
ftflflm u‘
fiwtflfi ifiizfi m gfiim fm n
than
i fm m 48 1 1: fi fimgfimfifimmn
flfiw w m h wfi l
fi gm fiwm afiwfltfiq
3131 2411 1 zfi iflm afimfilfiwusu
LXIII . MAITRAYANI SANHITA I. 5. 12.
s m e a r ed :
LXIV. MAITRAYANI SANHITA I. 10. 13.
namifi i ai n’t M i d-3m: aWe tu
BRAHMANA.
gm wfszflfifil m fil fisi m m
LXVII . AITAREYA BRAHMANA II I. 20.
warm i fitsafifififiw fim fi m
v m .
“
AITAREYA BRAHMANA
{fi fiq‘ i sfli efi fififififimm qfit
wan fii ssfifi m’
fim m l afitfifi
m aswfim ufi fi am m fimw srfi
i ts traw l
LXIX. CATAPATHA BRAHMANA n. 2. 2.
m ai n limfi a imzlm am m
LXXIV. AQVALAYANA’S GRIHYASUTRA 5
,7, s.
SUTRA. 99
sa fa m fim m fi sm i
5m{fir ifil wfiaflwufilflflm fizfi
m m s fism sa
{fa as :W m isfitmm
mm
“ :imm l s luwfiw ri
m figh
SW : l i s t
3&1: l
102 SUTRA.
m m m fi a afiwmrfinm
m amfi fifimfi m lw mi i i im fiufim mwfi awfi awfifi fa
firfii fi alfalfa W sh
fiflrfimm I“!s i l l s : W61 1 M iugwafimw
afifii ifim fiifi mmfi‘
r its
mg: no:
“
al l: muwfimi
m nan
m m m ulfl iflzfim me
w sum m {Fa-
ii mi n i m-3 8Wnan firtfe mus-fitmm :m afie
[For Esplaaati ons and Abbreviations , see pages 2894 95]
1 a , pm». roof, see idam and 502.
2a , negative prefix, see an.
M i ca ,m. (that wh ich one gets, i.s.) one
’s
portion ; and so, genera lized, portion, part.
[if1 as‘
set’
]a li en,
m. juicy internodium or shoot of th e
Soma -plant and so, shooting ray (of
l igh t) .
a ficum i n t , a . rich in beams, radiant ; as
m. the sun,16 [angih i 235b.]
ans a , m. shoulder . [perhaps ,‘ the strong
’
(part ) , V am, 1 197a : cf . Sp o or , Lat.uni-eras ,
Goth . am,
a -k a sm at , adv.without any“wherefore
wi thout apparent cause ; unexpectedly
accidental ly .
a k a sm ad -ag a n ta , m. an accidental ar
rival , a chance comer .
a -k ar a , m. th e sound or letter a. [Whitney ,
a -k ar ana , a. lack of cause ; -am, adv.
ceaselessly .
a -k i r t i , j : non-fame, disgrace.
a k i r t i -k a r a ,a . causing disgrace, dis
graceful .a-k rta ,
a. not done uncooked.
a k t ii , m. — 1 . ointment ; —2. light, beam
of ligh t ; - 3. nigh t. [for 2, cf . tin ts,
a k r i y amana a .notbeing accomplished.
[il 1 kr, do,’770c.]
a -k r r'
i r a , a . not harsh .
1 a k sa, a . f or aksAn at end qf cpds [1315s].2 a k sa,
m. a die for playing. [named,
perhaps, from its eyes ( l akad) or
‘cpots f i
M us , m. axle. [cf. tige r , Lat. axis, AS.
sax, Eng. ar e ( i.s.‘axle and axle ]
[agni
a-k sa ta ,a .unhurt, uninjured ; unbroken ;
as m. pl . unbroken or unhusked grains,
esp. of bar ley .
a k sa t a -k e s a r a , a . having an uninjuredmane.
ak sa ta -d eh a , a. having an unhurt or
perfect body .
ak san n. eye. [cf . Jim 's -a,‘ have
seen,’W,
‘eye
’
; 5cm , cdx-j e,‘eyes
’
; Lat.
ao-ulus, ey
'
e the kinsh ip of AS. 2592,
Eng. eye, remains to be proved : cf . V iks.]a k sa - p r i y a , a . beloved of the dice, i.s .
lucky at gaming.
a -k sam a , a . not equal to a thing ; unable,w. in] :
a -k sa y a , a . immrishable.
a k sa y a tv a ,n . imperishabil ity . [aksaya ]
a -k sar a , a . imperishable ; as n. word
sy l lable ; the sacred sy l lable, cm,
sound, letter , 614.
a k sa r a - n y as a ,m. the comm itment to
letters, the writing.
a -k sar a , a . not pungent.
a k sar al a v ana , n. thatwh ich is not pun
gent and not suit. [alavana : i 253b.]a k sar al a v anaci n , a . eating thatwhich
is not pungent and not salt, abstaining
from seasoned and salted food. [Spin ]ak si n. eye ; see aksAn.
a k sauh i ni , j 2 a complete army .
ak sauh ini -pa t i , m. master of an army ;
general .
a -k h i l a , a . wi thout a gap, entire ; al l .
a g a da a .nothaving disease,wel l , healthy ,
whole ; wholesome ; as m.medicine.
a gar a , m. a. h ouse.
a g n f , is . fire ; esp. a sacred fire ; the god
of fire, Agni, mediator between men and
a nikundag( b ffi ’
,
flsfi
gods, messengefi hc carr ies the sacr ifice
to them , protector from the terrors and
spir its of darkness, and keeper of h ouse
and hearth . [perhaps, the quick ly mov
ing or agile one,’wl aj , 1 158 : cf . Lat. ignis,
‘ fire,’ayil ia,
‘agiie
’
; akin, poss., is cxi-71 m,flashing
a gn i -kunda , n. round hole in the ground
for the sacred fire.‘
i gn i - v e l a, f . fire-hour, time for kindlingthe sacred fire ; afternoon.
a gn i -h o t r a, n. fire-sacrifice (a burnt
ofiering of fresh milk ).a gn i h ot r a -bav ani ,
ladle.
a g n y -adh ey a , n. placing or setting upof the sacred fir e. [acct, 1272 ]
ag r a , n . — 1 . front ; agr e, in front, before,in presence of
,w. gen. — 2. b eginning ;
agre, in the beginning, in the first place,
first ; — 3. tip, end. (perhaps, th at
which goes before, leader ,’
iiaj : cf . b e ,
‘ lead,’" par -mils, army
a g r a tas , adv. in front [1098c3]; before
(one’s self ) ; w. kr, place in front, cause
to lead. [agra, 1098b.]a g r y a,
a . foremost, best. [agra, 1212c.]a g h a,
a . distressful , harmful ; as n. harm,
trouble, evil ; sin ; sorrow. [l ike anh ii ,
narrow,
’and ash“, distress,
’ fromVoa i
‘
igh or s ilk, straiten cf . axes, dis
tress’
; 57x22, Lat. ango, strangle AS.
ange,‘anxious,
’Ger . enge,
‘narrow,
’ Angst,
distress for connection of mgs, cf .Eng.
stra iten, to narrow
’and ‘ to
ii n gh ay a (aghayati ). harm ; plan mis
chief. [agha , 1059b.]A- gh o r a ca k sus , a . not evi l-eyed.
A-gh n y a , m. bul l ( the animal that is
hard to overcome,’or more exactly ,
‘not
to be
ag h n y a, j : cow. [formed as a pendant
to agkuyu.]s f
'
i ka, m. 1 . the bend at the groin made
by taking a sitting position, lap ; - 2. the
bend just above the h ip (where babes, sitting astride, are carried by Hinduwomen— see i r oha ) ; —3. book ; —4 . ( l ike Eng.
pot-hook ) mark, sign. [iiafic : for 1 , cf .
may ,‘ bend in arm or wall or shore
’
; for
f . fire-sacr ifice
3, cf. 57x03, Lat. uncus, AS. angel ,‘ hook
cf.Eng. angle, not a borrowed word.]if a i
'
i k h a y a (ai'
ikhayati [1056,book on
, grapple. [from fi lm , hook,’
despite the aspiration ]pa r i , clasp, embrace.
il a fi g . move, in der iva.
a fi ga, asseverative particle. yad ai'
iga, justwhen ; té aiiga, they only.
i fi g a , n. l imb, member ; by synecdoche,
body , person, form . “Gi g : for mg, cf .afigmi.m ama/mp ,
Aw
a r'
i g a n a , n. court. [orig., perhaps,
‘
gang
way.’h i s-1
a r'
i g a na, j : a (fair ) form, i.s. a woman.
[fi es -1s i
‘
rgar a , m. coal .
ai'
i g i r a s , m. 1 . or ig.,probably, messenger ;
esp.messenger between gods and men ; by
eminence, Agni ; —2. as pl . Angirases, a
nameappliedby theHindus to a certain race
among their forefathers (perhaps becausetheir intercourse with the gods was con
ceived as very intimate ), these forefath ersbeing regarded as hal f divine ; — 3 . as s.
the (myth ical ) ancestor of the Angirases.
afigd l i , f . finger . [il ai'
ig, 1 191 : for mg,
cf. ai ga ]a figdsth a , m. thumb. [for mg, cf . di gs ]4 a c or afic (acati , aficati ; aknL, aficita;4 cya ). bend. ( cf . afika and ybi ah a ]a, bend.
a -ca r a , a . not moving ; m. subst. plant (as
distinguished from anima l s ) .
a -ca l a , a . immovable ; as m.mountain.
a -c i t , a . not knowing ; unwise ; foolish .a- c i tt i , f . unwisdom ; fol ly .
a - c i tv a, grd. without pil ing. [V 1 ci.]a c i n ty a a . incompreh ensible.
Acch a , vbl prefix. to, unto ; h ither ; w.Wi2 nag, ya, vah , vrt ; ofien accha, 248a.
V a j (Ajati , -te) . drive. [orig.‘
put in
motion’: cf . Lat. ago,
‘ lcad, dr ive’
;‘ lead cf . a lso agra, aj ira, s ]+ nd , drive out.
aj s , m. he-goat. [prob.‘ the agile one,
’
V aj : cf . are,a -j ar a , a. not aging ; ageless.
a j a r am a r a v a t , adv. as if ageless and
immortal . [ajara-amara, 1 107,
fl. M G’
m b -r in
h t r i , m. Atri,name of a famous Rish i.
ath a (£th i , 248a ) , adv. expresses a sequence,
temporal or resultant : then ; so ; so then ;
accordingly ; thereupon ; — l . temporal
e.g.an drava, athi upshi , run past, andth en go unto in apodosis af ter
yadi , 845-5 7
,— 2. resultant : e.g. ma
rddbh ih sakhyam to utu, atha jayiisi,make fr iends with the Maruts, and then
( if thou dost) th oushal t conquer, 822m ;
- 3. very fiequent as a simple continua tive
now ; so ; then ; usua lly at beginning of sen
tence (e.g. 201 ) or cloka (e.g. sometimes
within the glolca (e.g. exceptiona lly at
the end, 139; at beginning of section or book,
now,98 16 here beginneth (cf : iti ) , 1
1;
sometimes much attenuated in meaning ; of ten
almost equiva lent to a cap ita l letter , to mark
the beginning of a new clause,e.g. 94 1 8 con
necting pa rts of sentence,— 4 . p leonas
tica lly w. tats-s, 139; mere ver sezfiller ,
—5. atbo, i .e. atha u, and also, — 6.
serving as a point d’appui f or an encl itic
,
which may thus precede its word : e.g. devo,
tha vi yaksas , a god or a Yaksha , instead
viIf of devo, yakso in th is use
,
02>
va zatha vi zzque atque ; cf . 27 21 ; cf.
14v i ; —7 . atha v i , or rather , 26
7 3 . [pron.
root a , 1 101 , 502 ; later form of t i
(wh ich is more common in the Veda ) cf .
Lat. at, then , further ,VI a d (atti ; atsyati ; attun ) . eat ; consume.
[cf. ( as , Lat. edo, AS. etan, Eng. eat : cf .
anna.]6 d , vbl . eating, consuming, in cpds.
ada ,a . eating, in cpds. [V all ]
a -da nstr i n , a . without tasks or large
teeth .
a- da tta ,a . not given.
a -dauta j i ta , a . not having teethed.
[‘not h aving grown teeth ,
’for a-jata
danta.]a d i a pron. yon, yonder , that, th at
there, in opposition to the one here or j ustmentioned : e.g. aai u, 227, that one (thetravel ler — last mentioned at so 31 1°
l
I
asi v amutr a, ayam asmin, that one in
that wor ld, this one in this, 1037; that one
(corr el. ya ) , 70, 37 11 as designation of persons not to be named, ao-and-ao, N. or M.
Y}
usi v aham, I am ao-and-ao, 61 60m
103 5 ; f ollows at a distance the word to
which it ref er s, thus emphasizing it, 231.
[see 501 and 503 ]ad i t i , a . with out bond or limit ; infinite ; as
f . infinity , the endless heaven, influ
ity , per sonified as a goddess, Aditi,
[apparently a d ifi, acct, l 3o4u“z diti,
‘ bond,’would be a reg. deriv. of 913 115,
‘ bind,’but does not occur as such ,
al though there is a word di ti , q.v., of
quite diflerent mg and origin.]a - d i n a ,
a . not depressed.
a d i n atm a n , a . with cheerful spirit, un
daunted. [i tmams dur m a i g a l a , f . -i, a . bringing no had
luck. [for declension , cf . sumafigfla ,
-gal i, and 355b.]a d i sta , a . unseen ,
unnoticed. [44115 ]a drsta k am a , m. love for one not yet
seen.fl;M W [ rah -
21 V
a d ev a, m. non-god,who i sno god.
a dbh i s , see 393.
h db h uta , a . wonderful ; as n. wonder .
[despite anatidbhuta, prob. from at(i)bhiita,
‘ transcending what has existed,’
l 3lOa : cf . ambara.]adbh ut a - rupa , a . having wonderfulbeauty .
a dya,adv. to-day ; adya nigi , in this night
(just past) , 51a; now ; adya yi vat, until
now ; adyavi rabhya, from now on. [per
haps from os -dyavi , on this day ,’l l 22f ,
see dyuz cf. Lat. Ito-die, to
a -d r a v y a , n. non-thing, unworthy object.
ad r i,m. rock ; stone ; esp . Some-stone (for
bruising the Soma ) ; missile stone.
a d r i v a n t , a . having or armed with the
hur l ing-stone.
h d h a (M ini , 248a ) , Vedic adv. expressing a
sequence then, so, so then, 89‘9;
adha yad, just then when, 76l 4; (then,
i .e. besides, i .a.) and, [ 1 104 '
cf . £tha .]a -d h a n y a , a. not rich ; poor .
a dh am a a . lowest ; worst. [cf .adhasand 474 : cf .Lat. infimus ,
adh a r a a . lower. [ci . adhas and
474 : cf .Lat. infirus ,‘ lower
’
; Eng.under .)6 -dh a r m a , m. unrigh teousness.
a dh a h -ei y i n , a . lying low,
i .s . sleeping
on the ground.
a dh as , adv. below ; down.
a dh as t i t , adv. below ; as prep., w. gen.
under . [adhas, l l OOb.]t dh i , adv. over , besides, in addition,
as prep . above, over, on ; w. instr . (of and
only ) , away over , w. abl . from, out
of , w. loc.: over , 907; on, 70
a dh i k a ,a . ( like Eng. over in adj . uses ) ad
ditional ; surpassing the usual measure,
superior , extraordinary ; as n. surplus.
[6dh i , l 222a.]a dh i k a - r ii p a v a n t , a . surpassingly or
most beautiful .a dh i k i nur i
’
i g a , m. superior affection or
most affection. [anur i gat ]a dh i k i r a ,
m. authority ; emee ; duties ofomce. [Vl kr + adh i,
‘
put over or in
adh i j y a , a. h aving th e bow-string up or on,
strung. [zjyta dh i -pa ,
m. lord ; rul er .
l 289s : cf.
adh i -pa t i , m. over-lord ; sovereign.
[ l 289a.]a dh i - p i m. lord. over-keeper ,
’
1289a.]a d h i sth i n a , n. standing-place ; (of th e
soul ) a dwel l ing-place or manifestation.
[V sth i adhi .]a dhun i , adv. now.
a d h o -n i v i ta , a . having the sacred cord
(worn ) low. [adham]a dh y a y a n a ,
n. reading ; study , esp. of the
Veda. [Vi adh l , 1 150. l a.]a dh y i y a , m. reading ; study , esp. of the
Veda ; ( l ike Eng. lesson ) , lectio, ch apter ,
etc. [Vi adhi , 1 148.
a dh v a r a, m. rel igious or liturgical ser
vice ; sacr ifice, esp . Soma-sacr ifice.
91 a dh v a r y a (adhvaryati ). perform sac
rifice . [adhvara , 1059d.]a dh v a r yu,
m. pr iest, who did the actual
work of the sacr ifice, and appears in the
oldest per iod as companion of the hotr a n - i dh r sy a, a . nu-approachable.
see rtvij. [l adhvarym l 178h .]a n ,
bef ore consonants a , negative prefix.
[1 121a ; acct, 1288s , l 304s : cf . a» , d
Lat. in Eng. nu
[aném ayitnu
a n (auiti i nn ; finisus ; anisyati
ani ta; i nitum ; Anya ) . breathe, blow ;
l ive. [cf. anila, firmer, Lat. anima ,
‘cur
rent of air’
; Goth . an-an,
p r a , breathe.
a n i , pron. stem, see idam.
a n - a gh a , a . faul tless.a n a dv ah m. bul l . [
‘cart-drawing,
’
anas vah.]a n - a dh i g a ta , a . un-studied.
a n - a nusth i n a , n. non-observance, neg
lect.
a n - a n ta r a, - 1 . a. having no interval
immediately adjoining ; -am, adv. imme
diately afterwards, afterwards ; thereupon ;—2. as n. non-interval , in sam
nu- a n i v a, a . without sickness or trouble,
well ; as n. weal . [hmi'
vfl l 8o4s .jnu- a r g h y a , a . not to be priced, priceless.
a n a r g h y a tv a , n. pricelessness. [1239 ]a n -a r th a , m. non-advantage ; disadvan
a n a l a , m. fire.
a n - a v ady a,a . not un-praiseworthy
blameless, faul tless.a n a v a dy i i g aJ i -i, a . having a faul tless
body. [afiga ]a n - a v ek sa ,
a . without any looking
around -am,adv.with out looking around.
[aveksi ]a n - a v ek sam fina , a . not looking around.
[l ike ava.]a n - a gru, a . without tears. [term 1304a.]a -n a sta , a. not lost. [H uang]an a sta -p aeu,
a . who loses noth ing fromhis herd. [prop. having a not lost
an a s , n. cart for heavy burden. [cf . Lat.onus,
an - i g a ta , a . not ar rived ; not (yet) come,impending, future. [Vgam i ]
an i g a ta v a n t , a . having to do with the
future. [1233]a n ag a ta - v i dh atr , m. ar ranger for the
futur e ; Forethought, name of a fish .
h n - i g a s , a . without sin. [acct,
[acct,l 285.]
nu-am a y h , a. without disease, heal thy ;
as n. h eal th .
a n - i m a y i tnu, a. not sickening ; heal ing.
8 ‘
anfiyudh a]
a n i y udh A a . weaponless defeneeless.
[ityudha , 1304a.]a n - i r uh y a , grd. without going into
(danger ) . [V ruh i ]a n i l a , m. wind. [V an ,
h - n i v i gam i n a , a . not going to rest.
[acct,a -n i v eea n a,
a . having no resting-
place,
unsettled. [nivégana 1304a.]a n - i sta , a . undesired ; disagreeable ; un
approved, unl awful . [V 1 is.)a n i ata - c i n t a n a , n. the th inking about
something un lawful .a n i stv i grd. without sacrificing. [Vyaj .]an i k a , n. — 1 . face ; — 2.fig. appearance ;
3. of a hatchet (face, sh arp edge ;
4 . front, and so, by synecdoche, troop.
[so Lat. acies has mgs 3 and
a -n i t i j ii a ,a . not knowing discreet con
duct.
i n n prep. after,along, toward ; w. acc.
along or over after , i .e. according to.
a nug a t i , f . a going after . [Vgam anu.]a nuc a r a,
a . going after ; a s m. attendant ;
companion. [V car anu.]a nu-j i v i n ,
a . l iving upon, dependent ; as
m. a dependent. [Vj i'
v anu.]anu-tta , pp l . see Vl d5 + anlL
6. nut ta a . nu-moved, i.s. invincible.
[Vnud.]anuttam a , a . most h ighest ; best, most
excel lent ; supreme. [lit. most best,’
formal super ]. to anuttar a, which is itselflogical ly a super l .]
a n -utta r a , a . not having a super ior , i .v.
best. [for mg, cf . uihgr eyasaJan -ud i ta , a . not arisen. [Vi +ud.]nu-ud y og a ,
m. non-exer tion .
a nun a y a m. concil iation. [Vui'
anu.]a n -up a k i r i n ,
a . not doing or unable to
do a friendly service.
a n n p r v a a . fol lowing th e one preced
ing, one after another ; -um,adv. in regular
order . [1310a.]An nm a t i f . approbation favor (of godsto the pious ) per sonified, Grace. [Vmananu.]
a num an a , n. th e form ing of a conception.
[V 1 mi . anu,
a nur i ga , m. affection. [Vraj anu.]
a nur od h a , m. regard. [Vl rudh + anu.]a nur odh i n , a . having (some ) regard for.
[V 1 rudh anu.]a n -ul b a na, a . not lumpy ; smooth or per
feet (of a weft) . [ 1288aa n uv rt t i , j : sequence, and so
, continu
ance. [V vrt anu.]Anu- v r a ta , a . acting according to the
wi ll or command (of another ) , obedient ;devoted to ,
w. ace. 6 100 [ l 310acf . apavrata .]
a nuga y a ,m. repentance. [perhaps
‘that
which l ies down after one or fol lows oneto his bed
’: Vgi + anu.]
a nusth i n a , n. devotion to, observance.
[Vath i anu.]a nusth ey a , grdv. to be accomplished.
[see V stha anu, and 963a.]a nus a r a na , n. a going after , a searching.
[V sr anu.]a nus ta r a na , a . strewing over , covering
over ; f . anusthr ani (se. go) , a cow,
slaugh tered at the funeral ceremony , andthe pieces of wh ich are used for cover ing
over the corpse, limb by l imb. [Vstranu.]
a nfic i n t , see 807 and 784 .
a n - r ta ,a . untrue ; hurta, n. untruth
wrong. ms, 1288a.]a n - ek a , a . not one, i.e. more than one ;
many-1 {7
a n ek a d h i ,adv. many times. [1104 ]
a n ek a ea s , adv. in large numbers.
a- n ady a ,a . not to be blamed ; blame
less. [acct, 1285a.]a n - en h s ,
a . free from guil t.
l 304a.]a n omk rta , a. not having om uttered, i.e.
unaccompan ied by om. [see orhkrtaj
( 6118 8 .
hut a , m.— 1 . vicinity , proxim ity ;
—2.
border ; l imit ; end. [see anti : cf . Eng.
end.]a n t a h - pur a ,
n. inner stronghold or
citadel ; inner apartment of the royal
citadel , gynaeceum ,harem , [antar ,
1289a.]an t a k a , ender (death ) . [anta ,1222s .)
a n t a -k a r a , a. end-making ; as as. de
stroyer.
an]
h p f . plurale tantum. water ; waters. a - p i r h ,a . boundless.
Goth . ap i , indecl . unto, close upon or on ; — 1 .[un related to Lat. aqua ,water ,
’
ahva,
i p a , prep . away , forth , off ; opp . of tipa ,
see VVi, kr. [cf . Lat. ab,
‘ from ’
;
a p a kar a , m. injury . [V 1 kr spa.)a pa k i r i n ,
a. injur ing. [do .]a pa c i r a , us. going off ; absence.
apa.]a- p a t i g h n i
'
,a . f . not husband-slaying.
[402 : acct, 1288a.]ap a ty a ,
n. offspring ; ch ild ; young (of
animal s ) . [6pm‘ofi,
’1245b.]
a -pad a . footless. [cf . h ob-sr ,
halt’: 1304a.]
a pa bh r a sta , a . fal len ofi ; deviating (from
good grammar ) ; provincial . [Vbhr angapa .]
ap a r t. pron. a . h inder,opp . of piirva ;
fol lowing a former one (pnrva ) , 86"
later ; wester ly , app . to piirva— cf . pr i fic
a fol lowing one,i.e. an oth er ; apararii ca ,
and another th ing, and further , see ca 3 ;— apar i [efi 355b], f . pl . the future
(days ) , the future. [lit.‘remoter ,
’fr . apa ,
474 ]a -p a r aiim nk h a ,
a .not having an averted
face, i .a. not turning the back,a-p a r i j i ta , a . unconquered ; w. dig, the
northeast quarter , 99” N. [VJ1 .]
a p a r adh a , m. sin.
a - p a r i j ata , a . not completely grown (of
an embryo ) , i . .e prematurely born, stil l
born w a s.
a - p a r i ni‘
ya , grd. without any leading
around. [Vni ]a- p a r i m i ta , a . unmeasured, unl imited.
[V 1 mi ]Apa - v r a ta ,
a . disobedient ; stubborn.
away from command,’13l 0s : cf . anu
[Vcar
I‘ d,
a pas ,see ap.
4 p a s n.work. [perh aps from V sap,‘reach ,
take hold of’
see Vi p : cf. Lat. opus,
a p ii y a ,m. a going away ; wh at takes one
from the mark (qf. upaya ) danger
disadvantage dim inution. [Vi apa,
1 148. 1a : for mg, cf. Eng. untoward ]
3”
[parazacct, 1304a.]
prep . to, w. Vgen ; -2. adv. (thereto, be~
sides, i . .e ) further , al so ; connecting clauses
or words connecting sentences ,
api ca, and besides, see ca 3 ; api
api , both and, ca,api ,
and, ca capi , both and
al so, 121;
‘ capi ,°
ca , 31 1 16" capi,
° “a n “ ,
na , na., api neither
m
y nor
na na cap1, 22"
, na
ca, neither nor,nor also
m
v i , V i e api , either or, or even
- 3. also, too, immediately f ollowingthe emphasized word
,
mi n api , me too, — 4 . even, imme
diately f ol lowing the emphasized word, and
qfien marking a circumstance under which a
thing is true where this is not to be expected
e.g. 2 1 3,28 71 ‘3, tath i
vapi, so even, i.s .
nevertheless, 211 1; concessively, al th ough ,
51 w. na ,not even, 19
“ w.
indefinites, kadi cid api , 11a, not ever at
al l,
— 5.M immediately f ollowing a new subj ect af ter change of subj ect]
”;A— 6. at least,
28 ° 1 1 ; —7 . converts an interr . into an indefso km 1 7 1 1 , etc. kath am , 51
[cf . Is l,‘on, upon
’
; perhaps Lat. op ob‘ unto,
af- p i da y a n t , a . non-oppressing. [Vpid.]a - p ii r v a,
a . having no predecessor ; nu
precedented ; incomparable. [piir va z
acct, 1304a.]a p ek sa, f . regard ; expectation. [V iks +spa-l
A-p r a j a , a . having no ofispring, childless.
[pr aja, 367b.]a - p r a j fi ata , a . undistinguished or not
clear ly to be known. [Vj i i ]a - p r a t a r k y a , a . un-imaginable.
a - p r a t im a , a . with out match or equal ;
unequal led. [pratims’
u367b.]a-p r a t i ta ,
a . not gone against ; not wi th
stood ; invincible. [Vi pr ati .]a - p r a t ta ,
a . not given ( in marr iage ).
[V 1 di pra, 1087e.]a- p r a y n cch a n t , a . not heedless ; watch
ful . [V2ya pra, q .v.]
a hat h /a.
[ 1 1 9]
a-p r i y a ,a . not dear ; disliked ; disagree
able.
a paa r fis , j 2 one of a class of semi-divine
beings, wives of th e Gandh arvas an Ap
saras, 6711 N.
a -bn ddh im a n t , a . unwise ; foolish .
fibd a ,m lit. water-giving ; (then, perhaps,
rainy season,and so) year . [up da , but
w . irreg. acct, 1269 : for mg, see varsa .]a -bh a k sy a ,
a . not to be eaten ; as n.
that which ough t not to be eaten.
a-b h a y a ,a . danger less ; as n. safety
feel ing of safety ; super l. greatest safety .
[bhayaz acct, 1304112]
a -bh av a , m. non-existence absence ; lack.
a -bh i v i n , a . not about to be, not destined
to be.
a b h i , adv. to, unto ; against ; f requent as
vbl prefix ; as prep . unto, w. ace. [cf . duel,‘around
’
, Lat. amb1‘
amb on both sides,
around’
; AS. ymbe, Ger . um,
‘around
’
,
'
1
a b h i j fia ,a . knowing, acquainted with .
[V31111 abh i.333 ]abh f t a s , adv. on both sides ; on al l sides,
101 around ; near . [abbi .]a bh i d r oh a,
m. ofiense.
a bh i dh a , f name ; cf}
akhya. [V1 dh i +abh i , q.v. i n s
I,
”ab h i dh a n a , n. name ; designation. [do .]a bh i d h y i n a , n. th e th ink ing upon.
[Vdhyi abhi ]ab h i n i v ega , m. inclination towards.
[Vvie+ abhi -ui.]ab h i bh asi n ,
a . addressing. [Vbh i sabh i,
abh i b h fit i , f . superior ity ; as a . [1 157.superior . [Vbhu abhi .]
ab h i bh n’
ty - oj a s , a . having super ior
migh t.
a bh im i t i , j : hostile plot ; concrete, plot
ter , foe. [Vman abh i, 1 157. 1d : a
M y ]A
a bh i m nk h a , a . having the face towards ;facing ; turned towards.
abh i v i da , m. salutation ; at signifi
cati on.
a bh i v i da n a , n. salutation. [do.]abh i v i di n ,
a . signifying. [do .]a bh i v i dy a , grdv. to be saluted. [do.]
[am imansya
a bh i -ei r a s ,a . having th e head towards,
w. acc. [ 1305 ]a -b h i ta , a . fear less ; -vat fearless ly .
a bh i ps n . a . desirous of obtaining, w. acc.
[V 5p 11t 1 178f , 1038 ]abh y - a d h i k a , a . additional ; more.
a bh y - a n t a r a , a . situated in th e inside
[1310s ]; as n. interior ; interval .
a bb y -atm a , a . directed towards one’
s
self [1310s ] ; -am, adv. towards one’
s
self [l 310d].a bh y i aa , m. study . [V2as + abh i, q .v.]a bh r a, n. rain-cloud. [cf . limepos.
‘rain
’
;
Lat. imber ,‘rain
’: of. s.trit and ambu,
a bh r i v a k i ei k a ,a . (having, i.s.) afiord
ing an opportunity for the rain, exposing
one’s self to the rain. [abhra avaki ea,
V am ( i mi'
ti amé ; i mayati ). press
on violently ; harm ; caus. [104 1 harm ;
be sick. [cf . anu .]am a , pron. this ; be. cf . ami ]a -m a n tu, a . wi thout intention. [manta1304a.]
a -m ar a , a . death less ; immortal ; as m. an
immortal , a god ; -vat adv. l ike a
god. [mar i z 1304a'end.]
am a r o t tam a , a . ch ief of gods. [uttama ]am a r opam a , a . like a god. [npami367b.]
A-m a r ty a , a . immortal .
a -m a r sa , m. non-endurance ; impatience ;
anger .
a -m a h i tm a n , a. not high-minded.
am i ,adv. at home, chez sol ; ami kr, keep
by one. [£ma , 1 1 12a and e.]am isty a , m. inmate of the same house,
relative. [amfli 245h .]a -m i y a , j !no guil e ; sincerity .
am a-v as a ,m. a dwel l ing (of the moon )
at h ome ( i.e. with th e sun ) .
am av i sya, a . of amava'
sa f . 41,w. or
without r i tt i, th e nigh t of ami vi sa, i.s.
nigh t of new moon. [ 1212d
a -m i th un a , a . not forming pairs (of bothsexes ).
a -m i’
m ans y a ,
question.
a . not to be ca l l ed in
am iva]
an i v a , ,n., but generafly -i , _fiplague, dis
tress ; as m. tormenting spir it. [V am .]a n i v a - c i t a n a , j : -i , a . dr iving away
disease.
m i v a - h an a . slayi ng the torment
ing spirits.
a n d , pron. root,see adas. [503
amflta s , adv. from there, opp. of itas ;mm [m ] gm m « c
amnt r a , adv. therei . in the other wor ld,
opp . of iha or aam in ( loke ). [anu.]n a y ai , adv. so. [amn, 1 1 12s , e end.]
a -m f t a , a . immortal ; as subst. an immor
tal ; as n. immortal ity ; th e dr ink of im
mortal ity , bq oa la. not dead,’
mrta,
l 284s : cf . Lp o'ros,
am rta tv a, n. immorta l ity . [amrta ]i m b a r a , n. garment ; sky . [prob.
‘cover
ing, envelope,’VI vr + anu, for an (n )
vara : cf . adbhnta.]am bn , 11 . water . [see abhra.]am bn - j a , a . water-born ; as n. lotus.
am b h a s , n. water. [see abhra ]ay a ,
a . subst. going , a going. [V i , 1 148 . l a h .]dy a n a , n. a going ; place of going, way ;
course ; esp. course (of the sun from one
solstice to the oth er ) , i .s . half-year . [V i ,1 150. l a.]
h y a s , n. metal ; iron. [cf . Ol d Lat. a is,
gen. a is-is, Lat. aes , metal , bronze’
; AS.
fir,
‘ bronze,’ Eng. ore ; perhaps AS. iseru,
iren, Eng. iron,‘ ferrum ,
a y a am ay a , a . iron . [see maya.]a -y ti j , a . not paired ; in uneven numbers.
[cf. 5.va -yuj a,
a . not paired, uneven. [cf .smog,
‘ unpaired’
; also cm 1) (ifs-ya, the gameeven or
6 -yudd h a ,11. no figh t. [1288a.]
a y odd h t m.non-figh ter , coward.
a r a,m. spoke. [Vr, cans .
‘ fit
dr a na , a . distant, strange.
a r 6n1 , j : piece of wood for kindl ing fire
by attrition.
Ar a ny a ,n. wilderness, forest.
land,’f r. arana .]
a r any a - r aj y a ,n. forest-sovereignty .
a r any a - v i s i n ,a . dwel l ing in the forest.
a r any i n i , j ! wilderness. [aranya , cf .
strange
a - r a pas , a . without infirmity ; whole.
[rapas, 1304a.]Ar am , adv. so as to fit or suit, ready , at
hand, enough ; w. kr, make ready , serve,
w. gam , attend upon. [adv. ace. of
ara, Vr, 1 1 1 1d : cf . sl am ]j : non-favor ; mal ignity ; pers
fled, pi., malign hags. [acct, 1288a .]a r f [343d], a . — 1 . eager , esp . in one
’
s r e
lations to the gods , and so, pious ; — 2.
greedy ; — 3. hostile ; as m. enemy . [ Vr,‘
go for cf . i tya .]A- r i sta , a . unharmed. [Vr is zacct, 1284]a r i sth t i t i , f . unh armedness
, heal th .
(M ata.1238
a r nna,a . ruddy ; as m. Aruna
, name of a
teach er , [cf . arusa.]a - r n n dh a t i , f . Arundhati , name of the
faint star Al kor in U rsa Major , conceived
as consort of the Seven Rishis . [d h,
691 : acct, 1283a.]a r usa, f . arus
'
i, a . ruddy . [see 362b’: cf .
m a.)a r e ,
word of address. Ah !
1 135c : cf. re.)a - r og a , a . not having disease, diseaseless.
a r k a,m. the sun . [Vi
-0,
a r g h a, m. worth , pr ice . [V ath .]a r g h y a , a . of price or that may be priced.
[argha, 1212 ]V a r e , see Vrc.
a r c i s ,n. flame.
V a t j , see V211).a r j un a , n. acqui sition. [V2rj ,ar j i9a ,
a . si lver-white . [V3 rj , q.v .]ar th a , m. — 1 . aim , object, purpose, er
rand, sake ; ar tham and arth e [1302c 4],for the sake of , on account of, for , esp.
fiequent at end q/ cpds ;— 2. (object, i.s.)
thing, matter , afiair , cause , business ; — 3.
(object, i.e.) advantage, profit (w.
weal th , proper ty ; - 4 . aim , intent, mean
ing, that which one goes for ,’
Vr,
1 163 ]a r th a - ta ttv a ,
n. true state of the mat
ter or case.
V a r th a y a (arthayate, -ti ). seek for an
object. [artha ,
a bh i , ask, entreat.
p r a , desire, sue for.
[voc. of ar i,
[Vrc, 1 153 ]
s vasth a]
a v a s th fi, f . state , condition.
ava : for mg, cf . Lat. status w. stare ]a -v a h a n t , a. not flowing, standing.
(with.ms 4-1a-v i cy a , a . not to be spoken to.
av i il o [409a], a . directed downwards ; acc.
s. n. avi k, adv. downwards, in depth.
fiv i , m. sheep ; as f . ewe. [cf . 51s. fi r st ,Lat. ovis , sheep Eng. ewe.]
a -v i cch i n d a n t , a . not severing. [Vehid ]a -v i cch i n n a , a . not severed, continuous.
[do.]a -v ij ni y a , grd. withoutdiscerning. [Vjfii ]a -v i j ne y a , a . unknowable. [do.]a -v i das i n ,
a. not drying up, perennial .
[M N -Ja-v i dv i ns , a.unwise ; as m. fool . [acct,1288a.]
a -v i dh a v l‘
t , f : not widow. [vidhavaacct,
a -v i dh an a ta a , adv. not according to
regulation.
a - v i p l uta , a . not dishonored ; unsul l ied.
[Vpln + vi , q.v.]a -v i v ek a , a . without discr imination.
a v i v ek a t i , f . lack of judgment.a -v i qafik a, a . without hesitation, unhesi
tating. [vigafiki 1304a.]a -v i sa y a , m. a non-
province ; something
out of one’s l ine or that one h as no busi
ness to do ; un lawful th ing.
a -v rk a, a . not harmful ; -am , adv. harm
lessly , lovingly . [vtka z acct, 1288sa v ek si , j : a looking around. [Vmava,
a -v y ak ta , a . not manifest ; as m. The
Al l-soul , 6717
. [Vafij .]a -v y a y a ,
a . imperishable ; not subject tochange ; unbroken. [1288a.]V l a g, or ig. anq (aenbti, aqnuté ; i nflates ,
“ 96 fists ; aw» ; wit“ )reach ; attain ; obtain , get. [cf . r ob-nym
hs,‘reaching to the fect
’
flv-q x-a ,‘car
rled’: see also the closely related V2nae.]
11 pa , attain to.
V 20? (semi ; int ; W M ; asi
ta; heitum ; aeitvei ; partake of
taste ; eat. [a special ization of Vl aqcf. h -oltos,
‘ bit’: for mg, cf . bhaka]
+ p r a , partake of ; caus . feed.
a -qa r‘
rk a , a. without hesitation. [eucf. avieafika ]
a qa n a, a. food. [V2ae.]a -quc i , a. impure.
a-gubk a , a . disagreeable.
a-qev a , a. not dear ; hostile. £96"acct, 1288a.]
a -ge sa , a . wi thout remainder , entire ; -tas,adv. entirely , without exception.
Aqm a n , m. — 1 . stone ; — 2. thunderbolt— 3. vault of h eaven, 79
Agv a , m. horse ; tqva, f . mare, steed. [cf .In es, dialectic Intros, Lat. equus, Ol d Saxon
é‘
hu, AS. eh
, eoh ,
a gv a -k ov i da , a . wel l skil led in horses.
a gv a -m ed h a, m. horse-sacr ifice.
s ev i n , a . horsed ; as dual m. th e Aevins, {ingods of the morning ligh t, 85
m11 . [aqua]
i ev y a , a . consisting of horses ; of a horse.
[agn t of. lan es,‘of a
m s [483”Lnum. eigh t. [cf . bee-6, Lat.
octo, AS. eahta , Eng. eight ]a sta n a, a . eighth . [a ti , 487a sta -v i dh a , a . of eigh t sorts ; eigh t-fold.
[vidhi 1302c
a sti r‘
i g a , or. eigh t members.
a sti fig a -p i ta , m. a fal l on eigh t mem
bers, i.s. on hands, knees, feet, breast,and face, i.s. a most profound obeisance.
Asti , f . attainment. [Vl aqx]1 1“ ( 1 1111 as ) . - 1 . be, exist ; be
present or on h and ; take place, happen ;
asti , i sit, th ere is, there was , veryfiequent
at beg. of stor ies ; —2. be, w. predicate pos
sessive gen.,i.s . belong to ; asti mama,
I have ; observe that Skt. has no verb f or
have’
; - 3. mostfi-equent as simple copula ;
further , w. ppls : e.g. pr i pto‘si , art thou
come, didst then come, 91; hantavyo smi ,
occidendus sum, espi no‘sm i , I have
sworn,97 7 ; redundantly [303b
‘end]: e.g.
tathU nnsthit-e sati, it being thus per
formed, so 39W” ; prahrstah
san, being pleased, 48" —4. w. advs
ti epin M t, kept silent ; evam natu, so
be it ; w. pradus , see s .v. ; — 5. become,
[w. 68 -111, S-anfi,
‘ is, are,’cf . ( am ,
‘ fs, exists,’s lat, Doric l vr l, s i n s, are,
’
Lat. es-t, s-unt, AS. is, s is-t, s-ind,‘ is, are,
’
Eng. is ; cognate are a-m, ar
-t,are.]
2a s (asyati, -te ; flea ; asisyati ; asta
i eitam aaitvi -asya ) . th row, cast,
shoot ; throw aside. [cf . asf , the bran
dished’sword ; Lat. ensi ,
s sword ; iilea ,
saslea , die,’l ike Ger. Wurf el , die,
’
fr .
werf en,‘ th row
+ v y - a t i , throw over, cross.
+ a b h i , throw (one’s self ) upon, direct
(one’s attention ) to, study . [for mg, cf .
f poa ixew without r bv r oam]+ui , throw down ; deposit ; commit.
pa r i -ui , throw down over , stretch
over .
+ n i s , throw out ; root out ; destroy .
+ v i , — 1 . cast asunder ; cast or throw
away ;— 2. break in pieces, 70
s am , cast or put together .
a - s amh r ada y a n t , a . not causing to
rattle. [Vhr i d.]a - s a ty a s amdh a , a . unfaithful , trescherous .
h - s a n t , a . non-existing ; as n. non-exist
ence.
a - s a p i nda , a . related more distantly th an
in the sixth generation, see sapinda .
a - s am a r th a ,a . unable.
a - s am pa tt i , f . non-success.
a - aam b a ddh a , a .nu-connected, ln-cohen
ent, w. samefig mg as in Eng. [Vbandh .]a - s am ba n d h a , a . not h aving re lation
sh ip.
a - s am bh i v y a , a . unsupposable, impos
sible.
a - s a h a , a . impatient.
h su,m. vital spir it ; vigorous life. [V l aa ]
a - s n t f'
p , a . insatiable.
a su- t i'
p , a . l ife-robbing. [vbl of V2trp.]Asu-n i t i , f . the leading or continuing of
l ife ( in th e other wor ld) ; spirit-life ; spiri twor ld. [acct, l 274 .]
a - s n n v a, a . not pressing (Soma ) , i.e.
indifierent to the gods, godl ess. [see1 148.3b and
[ah ata
h aur a ,- l . a. spir itual (used of th e gods,
and designating esp. the difierence be
tween celestial and mundane existence ) ;—2. as m. a spir it of l ife, a god ; asnraadeva, spir it that is no god, demon,— 3. later , demon enemy of the
gods, an Asura, a not-god (as if the word
were a-sur a whence, by popular ety
mology , the pendant aur a , god [asut a , 1226 (cf . 1 188f ) , and as-u f r. V l as,1 178b.
a sur ya, a . godl ike ; as n. pl . godhead.
[asnra, 1212d4 .]V a sfiy a (asiiyati ). be impatient.
a s i'
i y a , f . impatience. [V as iiya,i n j n. blood, [cf . Cyprian tap,
a a i n, see 501 and adas.
data ,11 . home ; astan , w. i , garn, ya, go
home ; esp . of the sun [see 1092b], set.
[prob. VI as : for mg, cf . bhavana ]a ct s -m an n a ,
a . h aving thrown aside or
abandoned sil ence. [V2as.]a at i , _fi being. [V l aa ]n ath an n. bone. [cf . bar l ey , Lat.stem ossi costi nom. os
,
a - s th i v a r a , a . not standing.
aeth i , see asthhn.
a - s prga n t , a . not touching. [Vsprgjpron. stem. we, us. [cf .mal t,
Lesbian dupes,a am fid , as stem in cpds our ; as pl .
a sm i k a ,a . of us ; our. [asma,
A- s v a pa n t , a . not sleeping. [V svap.]a - sv a s th a , a . not wel l , il l ; not self-contained, not m ater of one
’s self.
a - s v eda , a . free fr om sweat.
V a h (i ttha, i ha, 511411111 11, -tns , Ch ris
say ; cal l ; i hns , they say . [cf .
Lat. a io,‘say ,
’ad-ag
-ium,
‘saw, proverb,
’
nego, say
+ p r a , declare to be.
1 Ah a , assev. particle. certainly , of course ;namely. [pron. root a : cf . 1 104 ' end.]
2 h h a , f or than in cpds. [1209a, 1315a.]A- h a t a ,
a . — 1 . not beaten ; —2. (sinceHindu washermen wet the clothes and
pound them wi th stones) unwashed, of a
garment, i.s. new. [Vhan.]
[ 124]
t h a n , ahar , Alias [430a], 11. day (as Opp.
to nigh t) , e.g. day .
a h fim pron. I . [cf . £76 , Lat. ego,
AS . ic, Eng. I see 491 and ma etc.]ah a r , see ahan.
a h a r - n i qa , 11 . day and nigh t, w fiuepor ;-a1n, adv. constantly. [niqi z 1253h .]
a h a l y i , j :Ahalya, Gautama’s wife.
Ah a s , see than.
a -h a s ta, a . handl ess. [h i sta, 1304a.]a h a h a , excl . q oy or sor row. [1 135a.]a - h ar y a , a . not liable to be stolen.
a h ar y a tv a , n. non-liabili ty to be stolen.
£h i , m. serpent ; esp. the dragon of the sky ,
ofien identified w. the demon Vritra. [seeunder agha : cf . lx1s, Lat. anguis, ser
pent ( yxeh vs, Lat. anguilla , ee l .’
h - h i ns i , f . non-injuring (any creature ) .ah i -g op i a . having the dragon as
their keeper . [1302a h i v a t , adv. as a dragon.
a h i - h h ty a , n. the slaying of the dragon ;
the (victorious ) figh t with the dragon.
[acct, 1272s , 1213c.]a- h rnan a , a . not being angry. [V2 Inn]5 11 0 , excl . qf astonishment, pleasant or un
pleasant. [1 135a : euphony , 138f .]a h o - r i tr a, n. day and nigh t, rv mspor .
[Alias r i tr i, 1253b : see ratra.]
adv. - l . hith er , unto, as prefix w. verbs
of motion ; — 2. conjunctively, thereto, besides ; ca
' 5, both and, 855; - 3. as
severatively, (up to, i.s.) quite , entire ly ,— 4 . as prep.
,w. abL: hi ther from ,
al l the way from ; and then [293c], al l theway to , unti l , 49 103 105
as far as, 105 [cf .Lat. a,‘ from,
’which
is not akin w. ab,
ak a r a, m. - 1 . accumulation, abundance ;— 2. m ine. [V3kr + i , q . .v ]V i k a r na y a (akarnayati ; akarnita ;
i karnya ) . listen give ear to ; hear .
[denom . fr. the possessive adj . A ltar-11a,
‘ having the ear to , i.s .
ak a t suk a , a . attractive ;
[1222d], Pleasanton, as name of a town .
Mau i ]
ak ar si k i kh y a , a . having the name
ak ar a , 111. make ; shape ; appearance.
[Vl kr -i- a : cf . i kr'ti ]
i k i r a v a n t , a . l ike the Eng. shapely.
i k i ga, in Veda , m. ; later , n. free or open
space ; sky . [prop.‘outlook, clearncss,
’
Vki q+ a.]i kul a , a . - 1 . bestrewn , covered, fil led ;
- 2.fig. confused ; agitated. [V3kr + 5.q .v.]V i kul a y a ( i kul ayati ). confuse ; Sku
l ita, at one’
s wit’
s end. [i kula.]i k fita , n. intention.
i k rt i , f . make ; shape ; appearance .
[Vl kr + 5, 1 157. 1d : cf. Shara ]i k hu, m. mold-warp ; mouse.
t i + i , 1 178a end.]ii k h y a, f . name ; at end of cpds, havingas name.
i k h y i n a , n. tale. [t yi-H
‘
i,
ag a n ta v y a , grdv. see Vgam + i .
i g a n tn , m. arrival ; and so, as in Eng.,
person arriving. [Vgun + 5 ,ag am a n a , n. a com ing hither ; w. punar ,a retum ing.
5g a s , n. sin. [orig., perhaps,
‘a sl ip,
’
Vaiij : cf. 11m ,
‘
guil t’: difierent is h as.
see Vrai -li g h rni , a . glowing, beaming. [V2ghr,
glow,
’i ,
i fig i r a sa, a . descended from Augiras.
M ain s. l 208ai cam a n a , n. the rinsing of the mouth .
[Vcam -t t ]i cam a n i y a , m. dish for use in rinsing
the month. [i camanagac i r a , m.walk and conversation ; conduct ;usage ; observance.
i c i r ya, or. teacher , esp . of the Veda.
[perhaps, the man of obser vances,’fr.
i ci ra, l 2l 2d 4 .]aj a r a sam , adv. to old age.
phrase 3. jad e-m ]aj a r a ai y a , adv. to old age. [dat. ( 1 1 13)formed fr . the preceding, as if that were
[from the
-_fi an m of i jarua ]
aj i , m. race ; contest ; battle. [Vaj , 1 155cf .
apapa]
a fr iend ; — ipsita, whom or what one
desires to obtain, sough t for , desired.
[prob. for a-ap, 108g, see spas : cf . tin-tor,
‘approachable, friendly Lat. ap
-iscar,
‘reach ,
’ap
-ere, seize , fasten’
; dar es (Viupfor
+ a b h i , reach to a th ing, attain ; des id.
str ive to win ; caus. cause to reach the
mark,i .e. carry out ful ly , 96
+ a v a , come upon , fal l in with ; obtain,acquire ; take upon one
’
s self ; incur .
p r a , reach ; arr ive ; come upon ; catch
win, obtain, get ineur ; prapta : reached,
found, caugh t, obta ined ; reached, arrived,having come ; — caus . cause to arrive at,
bring to, prapaniya, to be brough t
to, 53“
v i , reach through , pervade,
i p aua ,m. market. [VpaxH -S J
i p a d , f . misfortune. [l it.‘a getting into
’
( trouble ) , Vpad for specialization of
mg, cf .m i , and ng. ac-eident, lit.
‘a hap
pening’
(of
i p a s, see 6p.
ap i , m. fr iend. [‘one who has reached or
stands near another’
(of. i pta ) , V i p : cf .flaws, s.v. ap.]
i pta -d a k si na , a. having or accompanied
by suitable presents . [daksinii bd i k a , a annual ; é bdika, -ennial ,
lasting years. [abda .]i b h a r ana , n. ornament (jewels,
what is worn,
’
Vbhr + i : for mg, cf .
capes, garment,’w.wipe , andGer . Tracbt,
‘ dress,’w. tragen,
i m d , a . raw. [cf . dads,‘raw
’
; Lat. am
iirus,
i m ay a ,m. injury ; disease. [caus.of Vanu.]
i m a y i tnu, a. sickening. [caus . of Vam ,
1 196b.]i n i sa , n. fiesh . [cf . Ema and 3mm]i m i sagi n , a . flesh-eating. [i cim]i m i s , n. raw fiesh ; fiesh . [cf . i ma.]am bd a , a . gladdening ; as m. fragrance.
[Vmudi y fita n a , n. foot-hold ; resting-place ; esp.
place of the sacred fire, fire-place. [Vyat
a ]i y a ta - l oc a n a , a . having long eyes.
[Vyam
[ 1 26]
ay a s d , a . metal l ic, of iron ; as n. metal ,
iron. [Ayas, 1208a.]i y i m a , m. l ike Eng. extent, i.s. length .
[Vyam a,
ay d ,a . active, lively . [Vi, 1 178a : prob.
akin are Mr, s iu'
d-s, ids,‘active, dough ty ,
migh ty ,’
st» ,
‘strongly ,
’
eb, general ized,‘ wel l
’
: for mg of i yd, cf . the ph rase
ful l ofi yudh a , n . weapon.
i yusm a n t , a . having life or vital ity ;long-l ived ; old. [3m 1235a.]
dyus , n. (activity , l ivel iness , and so ) l ife ;vital ity ; personified as a genius,Ayus, 85m;
period or duration of l ife ; long life ; ( l ikeEng. l ife, i .s.) living creatures. [V i , 1 154,cf. i y-ti : cf . al -dv, Lat. ae-vu-m, AS . 5 10
,
5, l ife-time, time
’
; AS . dwa, 5, Eng. aye,
ever’
; AS. Ef -re, Eng. ev-er .]ar any a k a , a . pertaining to th e wi lder
ness ; as n. forest-treatise ( to be feed inthe so litude of the wilderness Whitney,p . xvi ) . [tr anya 1222e.]
ar adh a n a , n. the gratifying, propitiation,service. [V r i dh i , caus.]
i r og y a , n. lit. diseaseless-ness, i.s . heal th.
[arose-Ji r oh s , m. the swel l ing hips or buttocks of
a woman. [prop. the seat’on which a
chi ld is carried astr ide by its mother ,
Vruh i ,‘
get upon , take one’s seat
upon’: see s fika and cf . th e words of an
ogress, MBh ., i ruha mama cronim, nee
yi mi tvarh vihi yasi , get upon my hip,
I wil l carry th ee through the
dr ta . a . visited, esp. by trouble ; amicted ;stricken ; distressed. [Vr i , q.v . : for
mg, cf .American slang phrase gonef or .]dr t i , j : a visitation (of evil ) , i.e. trouble,m isfortune, see 93 15 11 . [Vt + 5 : for mg,cf. i rta and apad.]
i r d r a,a . wet.
ar d r a- v as a s , a . h aving wet garments.
i t y a , a . belonging to the fai thful , i.s .,as
m., man of one
’
s own tribe, an Aryan, as
designation of a man of th e Vedic Indian
tr ibes ; as adj . Aryan ; noble ; reverend
(used in respectful address ) . [ax-ya, l 2o8f :
cf .Avestan o irya ,‘Aryan
’
; New Persian,irda,
‘ Persia’
; Edt. vii. 62, at t45t lxs
fié c-c
Al on e “but “Aptot Kel tic nom. eriu, acc.
erinn, name of Ireland ; Eng. I r-islt cf.
art aryi -Ji l a sy a ,
n. sloth . [alasa.]i l a sy a -v a ca n s , n. sloth-dictum, as
designation for the ignava ratio or fatalist
’s argument.
El i up a,m. talk ; conversation.
i l ok a n a ,n. the beholding.
a v a, pron. stem,491 .
a v i s ,adv. forth to sigh t, in view ; w. kr,
make visible.
Sea ,111. food. [V2ac,
aqa y d , m. lying-
place ; abode.
5 96 8 , f . wish , h ope. [cans + 11 ]f . hope. [younger form of 5941 ]
395 , f . region ; quarter (of the sky ) . [special ized from ‘
place, objective point, that
which one reaches,’ V 1 ac,
i gi v a n t , a . hopeful .i ci n , a . eating, in cpds. [V2ag,i gi s j !wish or prayer , esp. for good.
[Vci s i , 639, cf . pragim]i ci r
- v i da ,or. expression of a (good)
wish , i .s. a benediction. of .
agi r v i d i bhidh i navant, a . containing a
designation of a benediction. [5911
Lat.
new ]
i qd , a . swift. [cf. dub-r,‘swift ’ ;
a'
o-ior ,
i cca r y a ,n . wonder ; prodigy.
i gr a n a , m.— 1 . (place of self-castigan
tion, i.e.) h ermitage — 2. stadium in a
Brahman’s religious l ife (of which there
are four : that of the student or brahma
ci r in , that of the h ouseholder or grha
stha , that of the hermit or vi naprastha,
and that of the beggar or bhikan ) , see
65 ’ N. [Verani qr a y a , m. that on which anyth ing leans
or rests ; support ; refuge ; protection ;authority . [Vgr i i ]
i gr a y a-b h fita , a . having become a pro
tection,i.s .
, as m., protector. [ l 273 c
.]a s , excl . oq r, or q/
‘
displeasure. ah l
V a s (asts i s'
ina i sdxh oakre ;asista ; asisyate ; aaita; asitum asitva
-aaya ) . I . sit ; seat one’s self , settle
down, —2. abide ; dwel l , stay ;
a s a n a , n. si tting, seat.
( 41
remain ; continue,
continue (doing anyth ing) , keepon, 32
1‘ ‘3. [cf . i s
'-r at,
‘sits ; .Lat anus ,
ads-uw ,
‘seat, buttocks Old Lat. dsa ,
Lat. a'
ra,family-seat, hearth ,
a dh i , take one’s place in, i .e. visit, 49
1°
get into (shoes ) , i.s. put on, 45
+ up a , sit by (in sign of readiness to
serve ) , wait upon (a command) , sit
by (expectantly ) , sit waiting for , 91
pa r y -up a , sit around, surround, 2"
[VSm]as i r a , m. ( like Eng. colloq. a pour , i.s.)
pouring rain . [Var i ,
asur d ,a . demonic ; as m. demon. [asur a,
l 208f .]i s é ca n a , n. cavity (into which one pours ) .
[V sici s eoa n a v a n t , a. having a cavity, hol low.
[asecana ]ah a t i , j 2blow. [Vhan + 5, 1 157
land 1d.)
{t h a n t s , a . swel l ing, fermenting, foaming.i h av a n a , n. oblation.
ah a v a n iy a ,a . of or for the oblation ; w.
agni, oblation-fire as m., without agni,
oblation-fire (the one that receives the
oblation ) , see 102’ N. [i havana ,
ah ar a ,m. the taking to one
’s self (of
food) , eating ; what one takes, i.e. food.
[V 111ah ar a - d t
‘
i n a ,n. giving of food.
i h i r a - pa r i ty i g a , m. rel inquishment
of food.s h i r ad i , 11 . food and so forth . [i di ,1302cL]
i h i r i r th i n ,a . seeking food. [arthin.]
dh i t i g n i , a . having a set or establ ished
fire ; as m. one who is keeping al ive a
sacred fire. [i hita, Vl t -H'
i,‘set
’
1299a.]dh ut i , f . oblation, ofiering (used both of
th e act and of the th ing ofiered) ; cf. the
later word homa. [V hu+ 5 : w. -huti , cf .
xb-a t-r, a
i h v i n a , n. cal l ; invitation.
hy a
[Vh it or
i , pron . root, see idam and 502 ’.
V i (6ti iyaya , iyds esydti ;
ita ; etum ; itvi ; -itya ). — 1 . go ; go
- 3. w pp!Kct/m ?
to or towards ; come ; ente r ;— 2. move
on, pass ; — 3. go to, i.s. attain (a
thing or condition ) ; - iyase goest
hi ther and thither , 9013 — in ah o
( l ike Ger . an-gehen ) we approach with
prayers, beseech . [w. i -mas, cf .Lacy , Lat.
i-mus,
‘ we go Goth . i-ddj a , AS. code,‘ went
’
; radica l ly akin , perhaps, is AS.
gain (stem gif for aga-i, ga being the in
separable prefix), Eng. go, Ger.gehen see
al so i yd, dyna ]a t i , go beyond or past or over ; over
whelm transcend ; leave behind, get rid
of, escape.
a d h i , come upon, notice ; take notice,—middle adhité [612 note], go over
for one’
s self, repeat, learn , read ; ppl .
adhi ta : w. act. mg, learn-cd, w. pass .
mg, learnt, 21 m ; — caus . adhyi pdyati
[1042e], cause to learn, teach .up av
a dh i , in upadhyi ya.
+ a nu, go along or after ; accompany ;ppl . anvi ta, accompani ed by, endowed or
fill ed or connected with .
s am - a nu, the same .
a n ta r , go with in ; retire, withdraw.
a p a , go 03 ; slink away.
a bh i , go unto ; become embodied in.
a v a , approach .
i , come near or unto or hither ; w.
the adv. pnnar , go back.
a bh y - i , approach , go near.
upa vi , come unto.
+ s am -a, come near to together ; as
semble.
ud , go up, rise (of th e sun ) .
+ up a , go unto ; fal l to the lot of ;
ppl . upeta, gone unto, attended by, pro
vided wi th .
s am -up a ,come h ither.
+ ui , go into cr im e/1 nyi ya.
p a r a, go away or forth ; depart.a nu-p a r i , go forth al ong (a path ) .
v i - pa r a, go away separately.
+ p a r i , circumambulate ; walk round
(th e fire ).
+ p r a ,— 1 . go forward or onward,
esp. go forth out of this world, and so (l ike
Eng. depart ) , die ; pretya, after dying, i .s.in the other wor ld (opp . of iha ) ; preta ,
dead ; - 2. come out, stick out, be prom
inent.
+ p r a t i , go against, withstand ; go back
to ; recognize, pratita, recognized,
approved.
v i , go asunder ; separate ; disperse,spread one
’
s sel f over , i .s . pervade, 72°
vita, at beg. of cpds, having departed
i.s. free froms am , come together ; assemble.
i cch i , _fiwish ; desire ; incl ination. [Vl is,‘seek
’: cf. AS. fisce,
‘an
i j , ebl . sacrificing, in rt'
v-ij . [Vyaj , 252 ]i j y i , j 2 sacrifice. [Vyaj , 252 ]i ta r a pron. a . oth er the other ;
another ; other than, i.e. difierent from,
w.abl . [pron. root i, cf .Lat. iteram,
another
i t ‘ s , adv. - 1 . used l ike the abl . qf a pron.
—2. from this (place ) ,from here ; h ere ; from th is (wor ld) ,itas tatas, h ere and there ; 3. from this
(time ) , now, [pron. root i ,
i t i , adv. see 1 10211. — 1 . in th is way , thus ;so iti deva akur van , thus th e gods did,
— 2. used w. all kinds of quotations
made verbis ipsissimis : tathi vity uktvi ,
upon saying Yes,”4 ’ l a pretavi n ki n
yuvam iti , he asked, Who are ye,”45 °
evam astu iti ti n dh i vitau. with th e
words,“So be it,
”the two ran off
,
so RV .,
so MS ity dh arayn,
on hear ing (so, i.e.) the preceding clokas,1 7 cf. — 2a. des ignating someth ingas that which was
,or under the circumstances
might have been sa id or thought or intended
or known, sometimes preceding it, but
usual lyf ollowing it : mar tavyam iti, at th e
though t,“I must die,
”
gardabh o‘
yam iti j iii tva, recognizing ( th e fact ) ,“This is an ass,
— 2b. interr . in
place of the exact quotation kim iti , al l eging or intending what, under what pretext,
with what intention, —2c. used
in giving an author ity : iti dhi rani , so ( is )the rule, ity eke, so some folks
( say ) , —2d. used in citing a Vedic
ver se by its j irst word or words
— 2e. at the end qf a section or book
(qt?atha ) , here endeth , — 2f. 10. verbs
Virasya]
V 1 r a s y a ( irasydti ) . be evil disposed.
[1r as , 1058 ]1 r a s y 1
‘
t , j : i ll -Wi l l , wrath . [Virasya,1 1496 cf . irgya ]
i r i na , n. a run or runlet ; gulch ; gul lied
and so desert land. [V r, 1 1 77b : for mg,cf . Provincial Eng. run,
i v a , encl . pcl . - 1 . as ; l ike ; — 2. used to
mod ify a strong expression, in a manner ;
so to speak, as it were, perhaps ;
almost, —3. sometimes ( l ike ova ) ,
just, quite nacir i d iva, righ t soon .
[pron. root 1 , 1 102b.]l i s ( icchhti iyésa. istia [783b] ;“sit ; W 4“; is“; Mun ;
seek ; desire ; esp. w. 1'
n pass. be
desired ; be approved or recognized, and
so pass for , is“, desired, i .s . desir
able , [radical mg,‘
go, go for ,’ V2 is
being merely a causative of Vl is : cf.
inept », aimsepor,‘ desire w. icch i ,
‘ desire,’
cf . AS. .a'
sce, petition,
’whence a
'
scian,
Ger . (h )eischen, Eng. ask : ioahati for s is
akati ,’
cf. Vv i flch .]a nu, seek after .a bh i , seek for ; ppl. abh ista, desired,
dear,
2 i s ( ishyati a lso isyati [76l o] ;irésa. 1m [783b] ; iuyitnm ;
-isya ). send ; set in swift motion ; im
pe l , 74 [caus. of V 1 is, q.v .]p r a ,
— 1 . preshyati : send forth ; send,e.g. —2. pr ésyati : dr ive forth , impel ;start up (e.g. game ) pr i isam [970a]i icehan , sough t to start up, and so
— 3. présyati : cal l upon or summon (tech
nical term used of the ch iqf pr iest’
s ca ll ing
upon another to begin a text or action ) ,
i s, j : refreshment ; strength ; vigor ; w. iirj,drink and food, l ike o
'
er. Kraft und Saft.i s‘ ,
— 1 . m. is —2. as a . vigorous,fruitful .
i su, m. j : arrow. [V2 is,‘send
’: cf. ids,
s leds,‘arrow.
’
1 i sth , see Vl is,‘ desire.
’
2 i sta,— l . offered ; - 2. as n. offering,
sacrifice, holy work. [Vyaj , 252 ]i sta k i , j : brick used in the sacred fire
pile 12m )
[ 130]
i sta - l i bh a , an. acquisition of a desirable
object. [1 istt ]i sti -p t
‘
i r td ,n. what is offered (to the
gods ) and bestowed (upon them ) , i.s .whata man offers to the gods for his benefit
after death , and so, by metonymy, such fruitof these offerings as can come to him,
83 " 11 . [2 ist£, 247, 12b3b.]i sti , f . sacrifice (simple ofiering of but
ter, fruit, [Vyaj , 252,
1 157. l a.]i lth , adv. here, opp. of atr a and
amutr a hi ther , here on earth ,
0 ici bas, opp. of pretya (Vi ) ,in this book, 10. Ice. [c] : iha
aamaye, in this case, 41 [pron.
root 1, I IOOQ J$0 { IA
-f: 7" W “
4 Zr éJ/e f /WWQ .
0
new A: a t"
V i k s (iksate ; min cakre ; i iksista
M e at-e : meta ; im am ; mews-iksya ; iksyhto) . look ; look at ; see ;
behold. [desid. of V vac, see,’contained in
ak-s‘ n,‘eye,
’etc., 108g : see aks‘m]
a pa , look off to ( l ike Ger . es abseheu
auf ) ; regard ; expect.
a v a , look after ; look after one’s self,i.e. look behind or around.
upa ,w. two mgs, l ike Eng. overlook
- 1 . look over , i.s. inspect ; and - 2. (morecommonly ) look beyond, i.e. neglect.n i s , look out or after ; contemplate.
pa r i , look about one ; investigate
consider .
v i , look ; look on ; viksita, beheld.
s am , look upon ; behold ; perceive.
ik sak a , m. beholder ; spectator. [V ika
i k sana , n. s lock ; glance. [V iks.]V i fik h (ifikhati , -te ; iiikhhyati,
move unsteadily .
p r a , rock or pitch onward.
V i d (its. ilise MO (628. per}?i16 3flit-h ). supplicate cal l upon praise.
[Whitney,idya , grdo. to be praised. [Vid, 963° andd : pronounced ilia, Wh itney,
i dtqa , a . of th is sort ; such . [502 end,
and
-te
[ 131]
i p s i td , a . desired to be obtained ; desired.
[desid. of V 5p, 1030]i m , encl. — 1 . as aw . s. of p ron. root 1, him,
her, it ; him , 797 - 2. indefi, yd im,
quicunque, RV. x.— 3. h i in , who
pray? — 4 . to avoid hiatus : between
atha and enam , [see l l l l a and
502 end.]V i r (ir te irnd ; ir hyati , -te ; ir ith ) .
set one’
s self in motion ; — caus. set in
motion ; cause to go forth , i.s. : 1 . bring
into existence ; —2. utter (a sound) , 14
[near akin w. Vr.]+ ud , rise up ; caus . rouse ; send out ;
utter ; announce,
s am -ud , caus . utter , declare.
p r a , caus. drive or steer onward (ship ) .
s am , caus.bring together , i.s . into shape
or being ; create , samar ite, estab
lished (as an ordinance ) , instituerunt, 885N.
i r syd, f . i l l -wil l ; envy ; jealousy . [con
tracted fr . irasyi , q.v. : cf . cits-an and
sire -1V i g (ice icisydti ) . own , be master
of , w. gen. [cf . AS. rig-an
,
‘
possess,’Eng.
owe,‘
possess (so Shakespere often ) ,‘
possess another’
s property , be in debt’
;
thence the participial adj . a'
gen, Eng. adj .
own, proprius thence the denom . iignian,
Eng. verb own ; further, to izh , preterito
present of dgan, is formed a secondary
past tense, dhte, possessed,’Eng. ought,
‘
possessed (so Spenser ) , was under obli
i ch , m. master ; lord. [Vie]i gv a r d , m. master ; lord ; pri nce ; rich
man, [V is, 1 1 71a.]Vi s (isate ;
”
196 ; isith ) . hasten from , flee
before, w. abl . [if not desid. of Vi ( l 08g°
end) , perhaps akin w. V 1 is, orig.
11 , Vedic encl . copula .— l . and ; also ; fur
[unay ini
soon ; ragrhya [see 1 122s 138c]whencombine with dpa
83 ° and see notes ; — 3. in
classical Skt. only w. (atha, kin , and) 11a ,and not, 21 27
u-k ar a , m. the sound u. [Whitney ,uk ta, see Vvac.uk t i , j : expression declaration ,
[V vac, 1 157. l a.]uk th h ,
n. utterance, esp. of devotion ;
praise hymn of praise invocation.
[Vvac, 1 163a.]a k th a - v h r dh a n a , a . strength ening, i.e.
refreshing or del igh ting one'
s self withhymns of praise. [acct,V uk s
'
[252] or vaks (uksdti , -te ; i dksi'
t ;
nksimti : nksité s 4mm») sprinkle :
besprinkle ; drop, intrans., [secondaryform ( l o8g end) of V suj or ag z cf . try-Mr,‘ wet
’
; Lat. iivens (mgvens ) caelum,
‘th e
dropping sky’
; w. uksu,
‘ besprinkler ,
impregnator , bul l ,’cf . Goth . auhsa ,
‘ bul l ,’
Eng. or , and for mg, Vm ]p r a , sprinkle before one by way of
consecration .
ug r d , a . mighty ; exceedingly strong ; ter
r ible. [Vvaj , 252, 1 188 see djan.]ug r h - gas a n a ,
a . h aving a terrible way
of rul ing ; as m. a strict ruler . [1298a.]V n o (neyati [only w. preps] ; uvoca [783b],ficivins w ith ) . be pleased ; be
wonted ; ucita : — 1 . with which one is
pleased proper sui table ; —2. accus
tomed.
n e e d , a . lofty ; noci fs, adv. h igh ;
of sound, loud. [ir . 11003, adv. instr .
( 1 1 12s ) of udafia ]ucca y a , m. h eap, pile, col lection. [V l eiud, heap
n oo i t h , m. evacuation ; excrement. [Vcarud.]
ucc i v a cd ,a . h igh and low ; var ious ;
diverse. [ud ca w. ava ca ,1314b.]
ther ; used in one (oftenest the latter )'
qf two d cch i sta , ppl . left ; as n . leavings, esp.
clauses or sentences conta ining th ings al ike
or sl ightly contrasted (e.g. 78 79 esp.
‘
in
anaphora (e.g. 795,
—2. now, straigh t
way , w. verbs present and past and w. im
peratives or imperative subjunctives,oflen f ollowed by an, righ t
of a sacrifice or of food. [V sis ud.]uoch ed i n ,
a . destroying.
uj j a y i n i , f . Oujein, name of a city ,
Ptolemy’s h am]. [fem . of ujj ayin, vic
torious,’
Vj i + ud, of l ike mg are
bl ind-t oms and Ca iro.]
Vufich ]
V ui oh (dfichati , unchati ; di chi tum ) .
sweep togeth er , glean. [for .nnsk, evanak,orig.
‘ wipe, or whisk, i.e. sweep cf . AS .
wassan,‘wash ,
’Eng. wash and whisk ]
p r a , wash away ; wipe out,
d i ei sta , same as uochista.
utfi , conj . and ; also ; even ; connecting
words, clauses , and sentences ; repeated
(uta ) , both' °
and °
(and) ;at beg. qf verse, - uta vi : or even,
or, 84“ (ef. atha, apy uta, also.
a th a r ga , m. elevation.
uttam s , a . - 1 . up-most ; h ighest ; best,
esp. at end of cpds ; excellent ; chief ; —2.
(out-most, i.s .) ut-most ; extreme ; last (see
67 ‘ s ] , [dd,‘ up, out,
’473 ]
uttam a g a n dh i dh y a ,a . rich in ex
cel lent odors, [attan a-gandha
uttamadh am amadhyama, 0. highest
and lowest and midmost ; best and worst
and middling. [attan a adhama
madhyama,
dtta r a a .upper ; higher ; - 1 . being
above, (app. adhara ) 70m; h aving the
upper hand, victorious, 81n; - 2. north
ern (on account of the Himalayas, cj i
udafic ) ivuttarasmi t, as far as the
north (side ) , - 3. th e left (becausein prayer the face is turned eastward :
efidaksina ) , -4. ( l ike bar epos) the
latter (opp. pfirva ) later ; following,-am,
as adv. final ly , last, - 5.
as neuter subst. the final element of a
phrase of salutation, —6. answer ,
retort. Did. 473 : cf . bar epos,‘ latter
’
;
Eng. comp.ut-ter ,
utta r a taa , adv. northward ; to the north
of w. gen. 105 [nthutta r a -d i y a k a , a. giving answer ; con
tradicting.
utta r a -p a qc i m a , a . north -wester ly .
ut ta r a - pur a at i t , adv. north-east of ;
w.gen., 1 130.
d tt a r a - l om a n , a . having the hair above,
with the h airy side up.
utta r i , adv. norther ly . [tit-tan , 1 1 12e,
utta r i -pa th a ,n. the northerly way ;
the north country.
[ 132]
ti tta r sna , adv. northerly ; north of , w.
ace. 1025. [uttara, 1 1 12c.]ut ta r otta r a ,
- l . a . higher and h igher
-am, as adv. more and more,- 2. as n. answer to an answer
wordy talk, 249. [uttara uttara ]
utth i ,see 233a.
utpa l a , n. a Nymphaea, i .e. water-l ily er
lotus. [Vpat ud.]utp i da n a , n. procreation. [caus. of
Vpad ud.]utp hul l a ,
a . wide open. [Vphal +ud.
a t eav a, nu. - 1 . an undertaking, begin
ning ; —2. feast-day, festival , 25 49
[V2m +ud,‘set a-go ing
’
; but the devel
Opmeut of 2 from 1 is not clean ]li d , prefix. never used alone ; up, up forth ,out. [cf. AS. i t
, Eng. out : see uttara,attan a.]V ud or and (unatti ; unn‘ , utta ; d idya ) .
- 1 . spring ; boil or bubble up ; flow ; —2.
wet, bathe. [ci . Lat. und-a ,
‘ wave w.
l td-nu, water ,’
cf. 68 Eng. wat-er w.
ud-ra, otte r ,’of . 684m, water-snake}
Eng. otter .]s am , flow together ; wet.
ud a , n. water . [Vud.]ud a ka n. water . [Vud.]ud a -kumbh a, in. wate r-jar ; jar with
water.
a d a g - ay a na, n. north -course (of the
sun ) , or the half-year from the winter to
th e summer solstice. [adah a ]dda gda qa , a . having the seams upward.
[ndah o dagi ,‘ fr inge, border ,
ud afi-muk h a , a . having the face to thenorth . ( ridd le, 124911 ,
ti d a ii c [409b], a . di rected upward ; directed
northward (on account of the Himalayas ),ej : uttara ) , norther ly in cpds, udak,1249s . [ud afic,
ud a ya,an. a going up ; rising (of th e sun ) .
[V i ( 1 148. 1a ) ud.]udar a , n. belly . [orig.
, perhaps,‘rising,
swel l ing,’ V : ud : for mg, of . the relation
of belly to AS. belgan,
ud i r a,a . ( l ike Eng. exalted, i.s .) noble,
excell ent. [Vr ud,ud i r a -oa r i ta , a . of noble behavior .
upékh yana]
upak h y i n a , n. subordinate tale ; episode,
[upa (mg 3 ) akhyanaJa padan a ,
n. the taking to one’s self ;
appropr iation. [V 1 di upa va,
n p i dh y i y a nn. teacher .
up i n i h , f l sandal ; shoe. [‘ under-bond,
’
Vnah +upa for mg, cf . -t
upan ta, n. proximity to the end ; edge ;
immediate neighborhood. [upa (mg 3)anta.]
up i y a , m. approach ; that by wh ich one
reaches an aim ; means ; expedient,
stratagem ; advantage, 39 [Vi upa,
l 148. 1a : for mg, cf . Eng. to-ward, as an
up a y a n a ,m
1 150. 1a.]up i r a, m. transgression.
up ek sa , f . over looking ; neglect. [V iks+upa.]
n p osi t a , ppl. having abstained ( i.s. fromfood) , having fasted ; as n. [1 176s ], fasting. [V3 vas npa, q .v.]
approach . [V i upa,
-dbhya ) . unite ; couple. [cf.ubhfi ]ap a ,
bind, fetter .nbh a, a . both . [cf .W » Lat. amb6, AS.
nom . fem . neut. bi , Goth . nom . neut. ba ,
nom.masc.ba i,w. dental extension, baj obs,
al l meaning‘ both ,
’Eng. bo-th : orig.
, per
haps,‘couple,
’and akin w. Vubh .]
a b h ay a a . of both sorts ; both .
a b h ay a -k am a , a . desirous of both .
ubh a y at a s , adv. from both sides ; in
both cases. [abhaya , acct
ubh a y a ta h - e a s y s , n. having a crop
at both times, i .s. bearing two crops a
ur A-g a ,m. serpent. ura
for ur as : for mg, of . kh aga .]d r a s , n. breast. [perhaps, a cover ,
’ fromV1 vr, cover ,
’l 151 . 1b, w. a special ization
l ike that in Eng. chest,
ur n, f . ur vi, a . (prop. encompassing, and
so, l ike Eng. capacious ) extensive, wide,
great ; as n. ( like Ger . das Weite ) the dis
tance. [V l vr, encompass,’1 178a : cf .
ebpd—s,
V ur usy a (un syati ) .
[ 134]
ur n -v y dca s , a . having wide embrace,wide extending. [acct, 1298b.]
to distance, i.s.
escape ; put another in the distance, i.s.
save. [ax-ti, th e distance,
’1061
ur n-nan “a . having broad snouts . [11rd
(24 7 ) nu, 193, 13 l 5c : acct, 1293s]ul t
‘
i k h a l a ,n. a mortar.
d l ba and dlva, n. enveloping membrane
of an embryo. [for .ur -va, V 1 vr, en
close,’1 190 cf. Lat. vol-cc , covering,
ul bana, a . lumpy, knotty , thick, massy.
[ulba, for surva, hence n,V us (beati ; uvbsa ; i nnit ; usta) . burn.
[for cognates, see the collateral formV l vas , ‘ ligh t up,
’also ness usra, etc. :
of . etc ,
‘singe
’
; a lias,‘ kindle Lat. ai r-o,
‘ burn,’
and ustus ustS—s ; AS. ys-is ,
‘
glowing
usas [4 l 5b], f . morning-red ; dawn ; Personified, Dawn. [V 1 vas, light up, dawn,
’
252 : cf. né s, Aeol ic a liens, Lat. auro'
ra,
ocaso‘
s-a,dawn radical ly cognate also
is Eng. eas-t,the pointwhere day breaks
’:
see us and usra .]detr a , m. camel .
usni , a . hot. [Vus, 1 1 77a.]us r a, a . brigh t ; of or pertaining to the
dawn ; as f ., nsri , dawn. [Vl vas,
‘ l ight
up,’252, 1 188, 181a : w. us-ra
‘
t, cf . Old
GermanicAus-t-ro, a goddess of the (year
dawu, i .e.) spring-l igh t, and AS. Eos-t-ra ,
the name of whosef estival , caster , Easter
day ,’occurring in April , was transferred
to the Chr istian festival that replaced it ;for t between s and r
, see under svasr
see us andm a ]
i t i , j : furtherance, help, blessing ; refreshment, food. [V av ,
i dh a n , fidh ar , fidh as [43Oh ], n. udder.
[cf . cheap, Lat. fiber , AS. fider , Eng.
udder .]fin d , a . lacking. [cf . chm ,
‘ bereft ’ ; AS.
wan,
‘ lacking,’wanian, decrease,
’Eng.
wane.]fir n, m. thigh . [prob.
‘the thick
’of the
leg, from um.]
[135] [tea
drj , f . sap ; strength ; vigor ; nour ishment.
[s arj ,‘swell with be ful l of ’ : cf . dp‘ydsv,
‘swell with , abound Lat. virga,
‘swel l ing
fir na , n. and fi rni ,f .wool . cover ,’ V l vr,
‘cover (cf . cf . slpos, s l -Fp-os, Lat.
vellus, Goth . vul la , Eng. wool .] r
dr na -m r a d s a , a . having the softness ofwool , soft as wool.
d rui - s tuk a , j : braid or plait of wool .
V fir nu,see 712, and Vl vr.
fir dh v d , a . tending upwards ; upright ;
elevated ; -am , as ada , upwards ; over ;
beyond ; after , w. abl . ata firdh
vam, from now on. [cf. Lat. arduas
fir dh v a -dreti , a . having an upward
gaze. [1298 ]i rm i , m. wave. [li t.
‘rol ler, rol l ing bil
low,
’
s r, roll , turn hither and thi ther’
cf . m u, s Ft-FA-w, Lat. volvo,‘rol l
’
; Ger
Wel ls ,
V 1 6 h ( 1‘
1hati ; am t ; 11 11113, 11 11114 ; t‘
1hi
tum ; remove.
2 i’
1 h (ohate 1‘
1h6 ; i nh it, i nhista ;iih itum ; notice.
ap i , grasp ; understand,
V r ( iyarti [643c] rnbti rechati [753end, 608] ara [783a
’] arat ; ar isyati ;
as ; m . a n . arpm fi [w eanmove, as trans. and as intrans. ; — 1 . r ise,
come upon or unto, reach , attain ;- 2. raise (e.g. dust) ; — caus. send ; put ;
fasten ; fit in. [w. r-no-ti, cf. bp-wm , V3 1 j in rj -r i ,‘ruddy,
’arj -una , silver
‘rouses ’
cf . Lat. or-ior ,‘rise,
’ar-tus
,wh ite
’
, see also the root raj and root raj ,‘risen
’
; dp-r o,‘rose,
’n i t -ta, 3d sing. my 2. [cf . dry-Jr ,
‘ brigh t’
; Lat. argue,aor. mid. ; w. r-cchd-ti , cf . ( p-xc-r au,
‘ make clear’
; w. taj ata,‘sil ver ,
’
‘
goes,’also l it-Ot is ,
‘
go’
; w. caus., cf . 15m m , Lat. argentum,
hp-aplomos,‘ fit,
’Lat. ar-tu-s ,
‘ wel l-fitted, rj i sa, a . ou-rushing. [V1 rj , 1 197b.]close, narrow
’
; see also ;a .] rj i si n , a . ou-rush ing. [rj isfi 1230a.]
cf .
+ 3 ,— 1 . get into (trouble) , 93 3 114 —2. rj ti , a . straight, r ight, opp. of vrin t ,
( like the Amer ican go for , treat harsh ly crooked, wrong.’
[V 1 rj , 1 178a ]by word or deed
’
) visit with trouble ; ppl. V rfij , see Vl rj .ss
'ta, vi sited by trouble, distressed. r na, a . (having gone against or trans
+ ud , rise ; raise. greased, and so) guilty ; as n. [1 17611 and+ upa , go against, transgress. [for mg, gui lt ; debt, [Vr z cf . Lat.
cf .md.] reus, gui lty’: for mg, of.apart ]
n i s , (go forth , i.s.) dissolve connectionwith .
s am , come together , meet ; go along
with , 73° — caus. send ; deliver to ; con
sign, entrust.
rk t i , f . praise, in su-v-rkti. [Vse.]rg - v eda, m. the Rigveda (each stanza of
which is cal led an rc in distinction froma yajus and a ai ms-n ) .
V xc (arcati ; i narca, auree arcis
arcayati ) . — 1 . beam ; - 2. praise ; sing
(praise ) ; sing (of th e winds ) ; honor ;— caus. salute. [cf . arka.]to , f . — 1 . hymn of praise ; esp . a stanza
that is spoken, as distinguished from one
that is sung (si man ) or from a sacrificial
formul a (yajus ) ; - 2. stanza or text to
which a certain rite or explanation has
reference, —3. the col lection of rc’s,
the Rigveda, 57 [Vrc.]r ca , f or rc, at end of cpds [1209a,1 or m (anti. -a ; mutt. .a ) .reach out, esp. in a strai gh t direction
(and so, the opp. of Vvrj ,‘ bend, turn,
’
q.v.
and see rjfi) , stretch out, intrans . ; press
on ; with th is root, compa re the root raj ,
mg 1 . [cf . hpéy-a ,‘reach out ’ ; Lat.
reg-ere, direct Eng. r ight, straigh t, not
11 (firiati ; arifiyafi 1104 121: units).
reach , and so, get or obtain . [the same
as V l rj , but w. another conjugation and
w. trans . mg : for mg, cf . Eng. reach , in.
trans., w. reach, trans., and Ger. langen
m ]
rta,a . fit, right ; true ; as n. [1 176s ], — 1 .
establ ished order ; esp. eternal or divine
order ; — 2. order in sacred th ings, sacred
custom , pious work, 6915, 74 , rtasya
yoni or sadana, central place of sacred
work or bel ief : in th is wor ld, the altar ,
in the other wor ld, the holy of holies,- 3. truth , —
rtena, r ightly .
[prop.‘ fitted, made firm ,
’
Vr : for formand mg, of . Lat. ra-tw , settled
’
]rt a -ah p [387a], a . fol lowing after righ t,
righ teous.
rt t‘
tv a n , j : -var i, a . true to established
order (of regul arly recurring natural phe
nomens , e. .g dawn ) , 7 true to sacred
law, pious (Manes ) , 91 holy , sacred
(god) , [rta , 247 : for fem ., 435,
1 171
r ta-v f dh , a. rejoicing in right, holy
(Manes ) .
r td , m. - 1 . a fixed and settled time ; esp.
time for sacr ificing ; —2. time of year ,
i.s . season ; —3. the menses. [Vr, 1 161scf. sp as ,
‘ fit together, prepare’
; Lat.
a rtu-s ,
rte, prep.without ; except. [ 1 128 end, 1 129end.]
r tv - i j , a . ofiering at the appointed time ;
as m. priest ; in the r itua l , pl ., priests, of
whom there are four , hbtr, adhvaryd,
brahmhn, and udgi tf'
. [rtn ij .][Vrdh ,f ddh i , f . wel fare ; blessedness.
V rdh (rdhnbti ; i nfi dha , i nrdhéardhisyhte ; rddha ; rdhyate ) . th rive ;
succeed ; prosper , both as intrans. and as
trans. [cf . VVedh , r i dh : cf . 010011111 ,‘
get
s am , pass. be prospered, i.s. fulfil led.V l rs (hrsati ; i nh sa flow ; gl ide.
[cf . bp-oppos, flowing back,’f a ir -specs,
dar ting
V 2" (reati ; nth ). push ; thrust.
"i , m. - 1 . singer of sacred songs, poet ;
priestly singer ; regarded by later genera
tions as a patriarchal saint or sage of the
olden time and as occupying a position
given in other lands to the heroes and
patr ia rchs ; one of those inspired poets
who “saw
”the Vedas, which were
“re
bkadaea , m m.
[ 136]
vealed to them ; —2. captaJ-sayas
the many Rishis ; later , the seven stars of
the Great Bear ; — 3. a Rish i, i.s . a person
renowned for piety and wisdom , l oon
see note to l
n th f Spear [42rdrev a, a . lofty .
ek a [482a], num. - 1 . one ; only ; alone
(by one’
s self ) ; alone (excluding every
one else ) ; sole ; single ; sol itary ; advly
in cpds, solely ;—2. one of two or more ) ;
the one, f ollowed by anya, dvitiya, para ;eke eke, some oth ers ; eke, some
folks, some ; — 3. later , a certain, guidantor almost as an indefiarticle a or
an, [pron. root e.]ek a -ta tpa r a , a . solely intent on,
ok s t r a , adv. in one place. [eka,ok ada,
adv. at one time, simultaneously ,
at elsewhere, at a cer tain time, i.s.
once upon a time . [eka,ek a -d eea , m. a certain place, and so, a
place or spot or part.
ek a - n ak sa t r a, n. lunar mansion con
sisting of a single star or one whose name
occur s but once, see 104°11 . [M ksatm
1312 ]ek a -pa tn i , j : wife of only one man,
faithful wife. [acct,ek a -pada , f . -i, a . having ( i.s . taking)one step.
ek a -bh ak sa , nu. sole food ; at end ofcpds having as sole food, eating
alone.
sk a -m a t i , a . having onemind,unanimous.
s k a -v a r na , a. having one color , not
brindled.
ekak i n , a . sol itary. [eka.]ekafij a l i , 111 . one handful . [anjali ]
eleven . [éka dies ,
476
ek adaea, a. eleventh . [6ki daca,ek i n ta , m. an end ; a retired or secret
spot. [anu.]ek apay a , m. diminution by one. [api ya ]ek i r th a , 111 . one purpose, i.s. one and
the same purpose. [artha.]ek h h a, in. one day.
ml,
aitihasika] [133]
i i t i h as i k a , m. tel ler of old legends. [itih i sa, 1222e
i i n d r i bar h a sp a ty h , a . belonging to
Indra and Brihaspati. [indrabfhaspam
ok a s , n. wonted place ; home. [Vuc.]om-k rt a , a. having an uttered om , aecom
panied by om. [the natural order woul d
require krti um : order inverted to avoid
such an undeclinable stem .
6jcf
a s , n . strength ; power . [Vvaj or uj , 252,cf ug-rhm bj -as, cf . Lat. augus-tus,‘ migh ty , i .s . august
’
]0j o - dfi. a . strength -giving.
oda n h , m. n . grain boiled with milk ; por
ridge . [Vud z for mg, cf .Eng. broth and
op aea, m. top -knot ; plume. [perhaps forsave-past ”pas-J
6m , a word of solemn asseveration and rev
ercut acknowledgment, somewhat l ike huhr ,‘
a sacred mystic syllable, uttered at the beg.
and end of Veda-reading ; efl pranava.
[or igin uncertain ]bsa dh i , later beadhi, f . herb ; plant ; a
simple.
( upam y a , n. simil itude ; l ikeness. [upami , 121 1 ]
i dp a v eci , m.patronymic of Aruna. [ti pavegi (or of.
Busa dh a, a . consisting of herbs ; as n.
herbs col lectively simples medicine.
toam 120m.)
1 k a pron.— 1 . interrogative. who,
what ; used as subst. or as adj .
607] ea, cans, cid, Spi ; - 2a. w. 1111‘
s : mi
liver us not over to any foe ;— 2b. ka ca,
some, any , adj . or subst. ; kim ca, any
th ing ; w. rela tive, yi g (ca ) ki g ca, (and)what soever ,
—2 c. w. ca us and
cana : ka ca na, al so or even not any ;
esp. afler a negat1 :ve na tam caknnvanti
vyahar tum aph kirh ca na, can not even
speak to him ,not even anyth ing, 1.e. can
not even speak anyth ing to him ,so
and so (the f eel ing f or the negation in
ca n in such collocations becoming lost) , ka
cana means any , anyth ing, ef. cana ; w.
relative, soever ; yat kirhcana,whatsoever,—2d. very of ten ka cid : any body or
th ing ; certain , qflen w. negative : e.g.
24“ (twice with, twice without ) ; kirhcit
kishcid, each a l ittle, w. rela tive, ya
ka cid, whosoever , whatsoever , any soever ,
21 kani kani cid, any soever ,
— 2e. ka api, someth ing, somebody, 1 7"
some, a or an, a certain, na ka api
nothing, no, no one,
— 3. derive af ka, see 505 ; — 4 . exclam
atary, at beg. of cpds : efi, e.g., ki —purusa,
kim -prabhu, ku-dreti, ko-vida , and see
506, 1 121e ; — 5. f or kim as adv., see kim.
[for the stem-forms ka, ki , kn, see 505 :cf . Ionic xo Attic no in x6 3, etc.
,
‘ wh ence, how’
; r l-s, f l, Lat. qui-s, qui
-d,
AS. hwd, hwa -t, Eng. who
,wha-t ; w. ka
tara, which of twain ,
’cf . xd-r epo-s, Lat.
uter , AS. hwas-‘Ber , Eng. whe-ther , which of
twain’
; w. ka as indef., of. 7 14 ,
‘any
2 k a , m.Who, as name of a god, 11 .
k anah , m. metal l ic vessel ; as collective,
metal l ic implements.
k a k sa, f . — 1 . region of the girth ; - 2.
kim w. instr . : eo h imyuddh em . girdle, cincture ; - 3. ( l ikeF rench ceinture)what ( is there) with figh ting, what
’s the
use of figh ting, so so ko‘rth as , 1 7
1° kim w. instr . and gen.: e.g.
nirujah kim i nsadh i is, what has a well
man ( to do ) wi th medicines, so
51 20; ka 10. particles : ko nama, who in
circular wal l ; and so the enclosed court.
[cf . kafikana : cf . Lat. cine-tus ,‘
;gi rded’
for 1 , cf . coxa,‘ h ip ; for 3, cf. cane-sr ,
fence.k ank ana , n. r ing
-sh aped ornament, brace
let. [cf. kaksi ]”til/t i M “W ?deed ; ko nu, who pray ; ko va, who pos k ank i l a m n skeleton.
fV "
sibly , k a cci d ,see h ad.
—2. indefinite, both adj . and subst., ch iefly k a cch a ,m. border ; shore ; marsh-land ;
in negative clauses and w. the pa rticles [see the district Cutch .
[ 139]
k acch a -pa , m. tortoise. keeping, i .s .
inhabiting the marsh ,’vbl 2pa.]
k a ta k a ,m. n. dal e.
k ana ,m. a smal l grain (as of dust or rice ) .
[ci . kan istha ]k anta k a ,
m. thorn.
k anta k i -k ei r i n , 111.pl . them-plants and
mi lk-
plants .
k anta k i n , a . thorny ; as m. thorn-plant.
[m an ]k a th am , Vedic kathfb, interr . adv. how ?
in what way ? katham stat, how’s that ?
kathern nu, how indeed ? katharh cana ,
in any wise soever (emphasizing a preced
ing negation ) ; katham api, somehow. Bra,
Vk a th a y a (kathayati ). tell ; ta lk about ;
pass. be cal led, pass for . [l it. tel l the
how,
’ ‘r b6m : Myew
’: denom . fr .katham ,
1058 ]1 k a th ii , see kathAm.
2 k a th ii , f . — 1 . story, tale, fable ; discussion — 2. personified, Story , [prop.
the how, vb 8w s,’1 kath i .)
k a th i - ch a l a , n. cover or guise of a
fable.k a th i -p
‘
i th a , n. pedestal of Katha, nameof the first book of the Katha-sarit-sagara.
[2 kath i , mgk a th av a t ii r a ,
m. incarnation of Katha.
[2kath i (mg 2) avati raJk a th i - s a r i t - sag a r a , m. Story-stream
ocean, title of Soma-deva’
s col lection.
kad , interr . pcl. nonne, num ; w. cid, nonne,
num ; kaceid dreti , was she seen ? [crystall ized acc. s. n. of ka , l l l l a.]
k ad i , adv. when ? na kadii cana, not at
any time soever , never ; kadii cid, once on
a time, one day ; kada cid api na, never .
[ka ,kad r n ,
a . brown ; kadr ii [355c], f . brownSoma-vessel .
Vk a n or (oaké ; Aki nit). be glad. [cf.
Vkam and team]kan a k a , 11. gold.
k a n ak a - sfit r a , 11. gold cord or chain.
k an ak a - s t am bh a - t a c i t a , a . shining
with gold columns.
kan i sth am. smallest ; youngest. [cf . thefollowing words and kana and kanyfiJ
[2here
k a n i sth ak a , a. smal lest ; j : -ikit [1222d],se. afignl i, the l ittle finger . [kanistha j
k a n i sth a -p r a th a m a , a . having the
youngest as the first.
k an i y ans ,a . smal ler ; younger .
kanistha and 467
k a n da r a ,n. ca
've. [perh aps
‘
great cleft,’
kani (see b ut) -I dara .]k a n d a r p a ,
m . the god of love. [perhaps‘of great wantonness,
’
kam (see ka 4 )dam n]
k a n y a k £ , f . gir l . [kanya, 1222h .]k a n y h , j : gir l ; maiden ; daugh ter .
[cf .
[ci .
k a n y S - r a tn a , n. girl-jewel , excel lent
maiden.
k apa ta ,m. n. fraud.
k apa ta -p r a ba n dh a , m. continued se
ries of frauds ; machination , plot.
k a pa r d a , 111 . smal l shel l used as a coin,
80 1 pana ; -aka, m. the same.
k a p ti l a , n. - 1 . cup or dish,
- 2.
cover or l id, 104 3. cranium . [formg, cf . Lat. testa ,
‘earthen pot,
’
w.Reach
téte,
k a pota ,m. dove.
k am , pcl . 1 . emphasizing the precedingword
, 79" 2. interr . pcl ., [km
1 1 1 1s : cf. kdd, kin ]V k am (cakamé ; kamisyate ; kantaki mayate, -ti wish ; wil l ; do
sire ; love. [ci . Vkan and Vcan.]k am a nda lu, m. water-jar .
Vi k am p (h mpate ; cakampé ; kampita
kampitum tremble or shake.
k am ba l a, m. woolen cloth .
k am bu,m. shell .
k am bu-g r i v a , m. Shell -neck ( i.s. havingfolds in the neck l ike a spiral shel l ), name
of a tortoise. [gr iviu]1 k a r a,
- 1 . a . doing ; making or causing
or producing, at end of many cpds— 2. as
m. the h and ( l it. the busy one ) ; — 3. as m.
nomen actionis, the doing, performance, indaskar a, sukara. [dl kr z cf . Lat. cerus,
2 k a r a ,m. ray, beam. [prob. same as
1 kara 2 : the rays of th e heavenly bodies
are conceived as their hands and feet, of.
karavar i]
k a r a -v i r i , n. water from the hand.
k a runa ,a . mournful , pitiable ; -s, f . pity .
k a runa-p a r a , a . compassionate . [ l 302b.]k a r k a ta , m. crab ; -aka, the same.
kAr na , an. ear .
k a r ts , m. (ear th cut, ditch . [Vkrt see
em ]k a r tt , m. doer ; accompl isher ; omciatingpriest, 101 [V 1 kr.]
k a r ta v y a , grdv. to be done or made, w.
the va rious mgs of VI kr. [Vk a r t a v y a ta, f l the to-be-done-ness ; -ti m
br l'
ihi , tel l me what I must do.
k a r pfir a , m. n. camphor .
k a r pfir a - pa ta , m. Camphor-cloth , name
of a certa in washerman.
k a r pur a - v i l as a , m. Camphor-joy (l it.
having pleasure in camphor ) , name of a
washerman .
k a r m a , f or karman in cpds, 1249a’.
k a r m a - costi , f . deed-per formance ; setion.
k a r m a j a ,a . deed-born, resul ting from
the actions of a l ife.k a r m a -d o sa , m. deed-sin , sinful deed.
k ar m a n , n. deed, work, action ; sacred
work (as sacrifice, ablution ) ; r ite, 59
[V 1 1m]k ar h i , adv. when? karhi cid, at any time.
[ka , l l o3c.]V k a l (kEIAyati ) . drive. [cf .xiAevat,
‘ urges
on’
; Bow-1161103,‘cattle driver
’
; Lat. celer ,
(l ike co ll oq .dr iving, i .s . hurrying swift ’
]a nu- s am , lead along after .
k a l a ,a . dumb ; indistinct ; -am ,
adv. gen
tly , and so pleasantly (of humming ) .
k a l a h a , m. strife , contention.
k a l i , j : a smal l par t, esp . a sixteenth .
kM p a , m. ordinance, precept manner ,
way ; stsna ka lpena, in th is way .
Ak a l m a sa , 11. spot, stain ; f ig.
,as in Eng.
,
sm .
k a l m a sa -dh v ans a -k ar i n , a . sin-de
structionc ausing, preventing the commis
sion of crime.
k a l y a ,a. wel l , heal thy. [cf. nests,
‘ fair ’:
prob. not akin are AS. ha'
l, Eng. hale
,
k a l y i na , 1: .ani [3bbb], a . fair , lovely .
[h a lve ]
[ 140]
k a l y ana -k ata k a , Fair-dale , name
of a place.
k av i , a . wise, possessed of insigh t (of gods,esp. Agni ) ; as m. wise man, seer , sage
poet ; pl . wise men of eld (whose spirits
hover about the sun ) , 91 [prop.‘seer ,
’
Vkfi, ‘see ,
’for sskfi : cf . avocados, o-attoFo-s,
inspecting the sacrifice Lat. cav-e‘
re,
‘ look out, be cautious’
; Ger . schauen, AS.
scedwian,‘ look,
’Eng. show,
‘cause to look
k av i - k r a tu, a . having the power or in
sight (kratu) of a wise one ; intell igent.
[ 1296 ]V k a s (kasati ; kasta ; ki sayati ) . move.
v i , move asunder ; open ; bloom ; caus.
pass. be made to bloom .
k asm i t , adv. why ? wherefore ? [ka,l l l 4a.]
k i ns y a , a . brazen ; as n . brass. [knack ]k i k a ,
m. crow ; —j t ki ki , crow-hen ; cf.v i yasa ,
‘crow.
’
Vk ank s (ki nksati , -te ; cakfifiksa ;ki fiksith ) . desire, long for . [des id. of
Vkam, but redupl icated somewhat like an
intens. a -ka (m )-s.]k s ct , m. glass.
k i ca -m a ni , m. rock-crystal , quartz. [lit.
glass
k anca n a ,a. gold.
k i nh ,a . one-eyed perforated (of the
eye ) , blind.
k i na -bh i t i , in. Kanabhfiti, name of a
Yaksha, see 53 ‘ s . [li t.‘ Bl ind
k i nda , m. n. section ; joint of a stalk
from one knot to another ; arrow.
k i n t i r a , m. n. great or primeval forest.k an t i , f . lovel iness. [Vkam, 1 157, cf .
955a.]ka-pn rusa , m. m iserable man, coward.
[see 1 1a.4, and
k i m a , m. wish , desire, longing ; love ; at
end of possessive cpds having desire
for desirous of ki mam, see s.v.
[Vkam.]k am a -ddh -dhak ,
-dnh am, d hugbhi s,
etc. — 1 . a . yielding wishes, grant
ing every wish ; - 2. as j I, se. dboua, th e
fabulous Wonder-cow. [for 2, cf . the
horn of Amal thea ]
[ 1 42]
p a r i , tel l around, announce.
s am , announce.
k i r t i , f . mention ; esp . good report, fame.
[V2kr.]ku, see and 504 .
kuk k n r a ,m. dog.
the onomatopoe tic knrknra.]
[younger form of k n l a -gi l a , n.
kul a , n.— l . herd or large number or
swarm (of quadrupeds , birds, insects ) ;- 2. race ; fam i ly ; and so
, as in
good fami ly , noble stock. [V3 kr, qcf . i kula.]
fami ly and character .
[ 1253b.]kutnm b a ,
n. household ; family ; -aka , kul al a ,m. potter .
the same.
k n tta n i , f 1 bawd.
ku- l i qa , m. axe. [perhaps cuttingwel l ,
’see and
kunda , n. round vessel ; round hole in kul i’
n a ,a . of good fami ly . [knla , 1223d.]
th e ground ( for water or sacred fire ) .
kunda l a ,n. ring, esp . ear-ring.
kunda and
kut a s , adv. from what place ? whence ?
wherefore ? why ? how? 19 ‘7. or
ku,
kut ii h a l a ,n.
— 1 . interest felt in some
thing extraordinary eagerness ; -i .t, as
adv. [1 1 14b], eager ly ; — 2. interest caused
by someth ing r emarkable , 56
kut r a ,adv. wh ere ? wh ith er ?
kn ,505 ]
k n - d reti , f . a bad or fal se view ; hete
rodox ph i losophy . [see 1 and
kun t i , f . Kunti , one of the two wives of
Pandu.
V k n p (kupyati ; cnkbpa ; kupita) . — 1 .
become moved or agitated ; boil ; and so
— 2.fig.,as in Eng.
, be angry ; boil with
rage.
p r a ,the same.
kum i r a,m. — 1 . new-born ch il d ; boy ;
youth ,— 2. The Youth , epithet of
Skanda, the eternal ly youth ful god of
war — see kar ttikeya ;—f . -ri, gir l . [cf .
snkum ar ajkum i r a - d a tt a , 171. name of a man .
given by th e god
kum b h a,m. jar ; pot ; urn.
kum b h a - k i r a ,m. pot-maker
, potter .
kum b h i k i , f 1 pitch er . [kumbha .]knr u,
m. as pl . th e Kurus, a people of
India ; as sing. Kuru, the ancestor of th at
people.
kur u- gr av ana , m. name of a pr ince.
[ l it.‘
glory of the Kurus,’l ike l
'
l vOo-nA
acct,
[ l ka or
[cf . mi
a ,
k ii p a ,m. cave, hole ; wel l .
kul‘
i r a ,m. crab.
[cf . kuga, m. grass ; esp. the sacred grass , Poa
kuga l a ,— 1 . a . in good condition ; equal
to or fit for a task ; able ; clever ,
— 2. as n. welfare, wel l-being ; 11 11911111111ts , hai l to thee.
kuga l i n ,a . wel l ; prosperous. [kuga la
kuga - h a s ta , a . h aving Kuca in the
h and. [1303 ]V k fi (kuvats ) . f ound only w. i , and per
haps meaning see, look. [prob. for sakfi,
see under kavi.]a, look forward to, i.s. intend. [see
k ii ta ,— 1 . n. born ; - 2. m. 11. peak. [ for
mg 2, cf . the Swiss peak-names, S chreck
horn, Wetter-horn, etc.]
[ci . mit -n,‘cave, hut,
’Lat. capo ,
‘vat,
’ ‘nich e for
the dead,’borrowed Eng. coop, vat,
’
whence cooper .]k ii r m a, m. tortoise.
V l h r ( Vedic, krnoti , mute later ,
kar éti , kurate caki ra , cakré ; V.
altar , am 834a] ; la ter , ak i rsit ;kar isyAti ; h rta; kartun ; krtvit ; -ki
'tya ;
kriyats ; cik i rsati ; karayati , -te ) . do,
make, in the var ious meanings and uses ofthese words thus
,
— 1 . perform , accompl ish ; cause ;
effect ; prepare, 8315; undertake, 52
’
comm it, 29 show : e.g. h onor , famil iar ity ,
compassion ,love,
favor , 5221 ; contempt, 54 attend to
an affair , engage in : trade, a
quarrel , 4219; — 2. do someth ing (good or
[1 43]
bad) for a person — 3.
make or procure for another, grant ;
—middle : get for one’s self ; assume
human voice, 3“ take on : form or shape,
— 4. execute ; follow : advice ,
- 5. work over, prepare : food,- 6. accompl ish ; be good for , 18
5; - 7 .
make : a sound,
utter : the sy l lable
om, 603-9;
- 8. ( like Eng. do in don, dofi) put in
or on ; w. [m ., 81
’set, 105
“ w.
adverbs . see agraas, ami , atria, tir as,
pnras, bahis ;- 9. make a person (acc )
to be someth ing (ace ) , transforminto, 40
'3fi. ; render , w. f actitive predica te
acc., w. the predicate in compos ition
e.g. sai ji -kr, make ready ,- 10. w. adv. in -dh i ,
divide in parts,
- 1 1 . do, go to work, proceed,
pass. impers., 30111 — 12. do, esp. sacred
work ; with karma, without karma
(l ike fii fstv see and facere ) , to sacr ifice,
93 1’ — see also krta.
—desid. desire to perform ; ppl.
cikirsita, thatwh ich is sought to be.done,
intention.
- caus. cause to do or make or be done
or made see to it that a th ing takes
place, pass. tsna na pr anamaxh
karitas , by h im he was caused to make
obeisance, 367; caus. equiv. to simple verb
265.
[cf. abr o-npd-r ap, self-actor , indepen
dent’
; KpJ-vos, an old h arvest-god, Per
ficus, the Completer , Ripener’
; Lat. oer-as,creator
’
; spa lm , accompl ish Lat.
creare, create see kratu: orig. root
form, perhaps, akr, 1087d.]adh i , put over ; put in omce.
a p a , put ofl; injure, opp. of upakg.a r am or alum, see these words.
5 , bring hither , prepare, fashion,make.
v y - h , separate, analyse.
up a , bring someth ing to some one ; do
a service, not as an auxiliary , opp. ofapakr. [w. the use of cf. that of sub
in subvenire,
pa r i , (pose. sur round, deck, and so)make ready ; adorn.
[hrta
p r a ,- I . carry forward, accompli sh ;
effectuate, cause ; — 2. mid. set before ;put before one, i.s. make the subject ofdiscussion or treatment ; w. 11a put
a plan before one’
s self, i.s. decide.
p r a t i , work against, counteract.
s am , 1 . put together ; conficere ,
prepare - 2. treat according to the
sacred usages, administer a sacrament
to, see sarhskara ; consecrate, 106'; — 3.
adorn.
V 2k r (aki r it ; intens. carkarti ). mention
with pra ise .
3 k r (kirati cakii ra, cakré ;m m;karisyati ; kirna [957b] -kirya ) . pour
out or scatter abundantly (e.g. hail -stones )cast for th (missiles ) ; strew ; cover or fil l
wi th . [cf. knla,+ v y - a t i , pass. be scattered in various
directions ; be brough t to confusion . [cf .vyatikara,
a v a , strew ( loose earth ) ; throw in .
a., scatter abundantly ; cover over , fil l ;
i ki'
rna , bestrown , covered. [cf. i kara,‘abundance, mine,
’i kula,
s am - i , bestrew ; cover.
k r c ch r h ,a . distressful ; troublesome ; as
n. trouble.
k r cc h r a -k a r m a n , n. hard work ; drudg
ery .
V k rt (krntati, -ts cakarta ; Akrtat
kartisyAti, kartsyati ; krtta ; -ki'tya
krtyhts ) . cut ; cut off. [ci‘ kata ( forkarta,
‘cut
, depression in th e head,
’
i.e.‘ temple,
’and Wdr -apes,
‘temple
’
; Lat.
curt-us,
‘ docked, short.’
ud , cut out or off ; cut up, butch er .
1 k r t , vbl in cpds. making ; doing ; caus
ing ; as m. maker . [Vl kr, l l 47c.]2 k r t , a time, 1n sa-krt. [perhaps fr .V l ky,
‘a doing, a time
’
: cf. h it s ,‘a
k rta, a . — 1 . made ; done ; — 2. prepared ;
3. attained ,— 4. wel l done, and so
,
good ; — 5. as n. deed ; — 6. (perhapsmade, i.s . won) and so
, the side of the
die marked with four spots, the luckyor winning one ; — 7. the golden age,
name of the first yuga, see 58 ’ N.
[1 1 la .]
krtakgtya]
k r ta -k rty a ,11 . having one
’s duty done
or end attained.
k r ta k r ty a ta, f . condition of h aving
performed one’s duty.
h r ta -buddh i , a . having a made-up
mind, of resolute character.
k r ta -m aun a , 11 . having a kept silence,
silent.
k r ta - s amk s ta , a . h aving an agreement
made, agreed upon as a rendezvous.
k rt i fij a l i , a . h aving 3 made gesture of
reverence, with reverent gesture . [anjal i ]k rt i n n a, n. prepared or cooked food.
[anna.]k r t i v aj ii a , a . having contempt (done,i.s.) shown to one, disdained. [avaj h i ]
k i'ti , f . — 1 . the doing, the production ;—2. a production, li terary work . [VI ki n]
k f tu, a doing, a time ; only in ace. pl .
-krtvas, and that at the end of cpds.
[V1 kr,k r t s , as prep. on account of, for th e sake
of , for , w. gen. [1 130] or in composition.
[loc. of krta, lit.‘ in the matter of
’
(cf .
mg 1 1 1
'
s.]k i
'tt i , f . pel t, hide. [Vkrt z for mg, of .
[cf . krttidip/1 a,
‘ h ide,’and Gr ipes,
k f'tt i k i , j I pl . the Pleiads.
perhaps th e constell ation was conceived
as having the shape of a pe lt ]k r ty a , grdv. to be done ; as n. that which
ough t to be done or is to be done, and so,
duty , purpose, end ;—f . 411, action, deed.
[V 1 kr, 963b end.]k ttv a s , adv. times ; see h im.
k r t s na, a . whole ; entire.
V k rp (ki'
pate mourn, lament.
k rpa, j !pity , compassion. [Vkrp.]k i m i , m. worm .
vm (l iterati [7cul s can -res ; new)grow lean . [cf . coh ort-duos,
‘ long lank
person,’o ooro
'
tis, exciton-j ar,‘colossus
Old Lat. crac-entes,Lat. grac
-iles,
‘ lean ,
k rga, a . lean , haggard. [VkrgV kn (“tes ti s krsfiti ; caktrsa ; “Irksat ; W 11 3 h aksyéti. -te ; krsti ;
+ 6 , dr aw on, attract ; draw from (a
source ) .
n d pul l up, elevate.
p r a , draw forward, place in front.k r sti , f . pl. people, folk. [Vkra mg 2
orig.‘til lages, ti l led lands,
’then ‘
settle
ment,
k rsna, a . black, dark ; w. paksa, th e dark
h alf of the lunar month , from ful l to new
moon ; as m., se. paksa, th e dark lunar
fortnigh t.k tens , m. the black antelope.
k rsna - p a k sa , m. the dark lunar fortnigh t.
k rsna - s a r pa , m. a very poisonous black
Cobra, Coluber Naga.
k r sni j i n h ,n. skin of the black antelope.
[aj ina .]V k r sni yflkm i r mt blacken [h m1059b.]
V k l p (ki lpate ; ci klpé kalpsyfite
klpta ; kalpayati , -ts ) . be in order ; be
suitable or serviceable to ; help ; klptt,in order , fixed, settled ; caus. put in
order ; ordain ; arrange ; dispose ; fix ( inthe manifold applications of this word as
used colloquial ly ). [prob. not akin are
Goth . hilpan, Eng. help .]n pa ,
caus. prepare ; furnish ; provide.s am ,
caus . arrange together ; deter
mine ; wil l ; purpose.
k l p ta -ksganakhagmagrn, a . h aving hair
and nail s and beard in order , i.s . trimmed.
[ksga—nakha-gmagrn, 1252 ]k l pt i n ta , having its and prescr ibed ;
l imi ted. [anta.]k é ta , m. intention ; desire ; wil l . [Vcit.
‘ look, be intent
k etu, m. brigh tness ; pl. beams. [Vcit,‘ look, appear , shine
’cf . Goth . ha ida-s,
appearance, manner ,’i .s .) way ,
’ AS.
hi d,‘ way, manner , condition ,
’Eng. -hood,
-head (as in ma idenhood, godhead ) , Ger.
-heit cf . under maya .]k év a l a , 11 . exclusive ; excluding all else
alone ; -am ,adv. only.
k é qa , m. hair (of the head) ; mane.
ati : tug, draw, pul l ; — 2. m m: draw k s ga -p a k sa , m. da . the twb sides of
fur rows plough . the hair of the head ; the temples.
Vkrid] [ 146]
v k r i d (kr idati , -te ; ski cikr idé ;
play , sport.
k r i di , f . play , sport.
k r i t otp a n n a ,a . bough t or on hand (of
food ) . [utpanna , Vpad.)Vk r udh (krudhyati , -te cnkrbdha ;
akrudhat ; kruddha; kr bddhnm ; krud
dh vd) . be angry .
k rud h , f . anger .
k r ddh m i or krudhmin ,a . wrathful .
[Vkrndh : cf . 1 167 and 1231 : paroxytone.]V k r ug (krbgati ; cnkrbca ; akruksat ;
h rusta ; krbstnm ; -krugya ) . cry out ,
cal l ; h owl . [ci . xpavyfi,‘cry ,
’for expavx-n:
for 7 in place of x, cf . r lryay ov,‘crucible,
’
w. 141m»,‘ mel t.
’
k r ii r a,a . bloody ; raw ; fig. harsh . [see
under kravya.]k r oda,
m.— 1 . breast, bosom ; — 2. in
terior . [for mg 2, cf . garbhak r bdh a ,
m . anger . [VkrudlL]k r 69a , m . cal l ; cal l ing distance ; Anglo
I ndian a Kos. [Vh ug ]k r ogam i t r i vasthita ,
a . stationed at
th e distance of a Kos. [kr oga -mi tra
avasthita .]V k l i g (kl igyats , -ti ; cikléca ; k lista
kléstum ; -kl igya ) . be distressed.
k l s ga , m. pain ; trouble. [Vklig.]k v a,
V. kua, adv. - 1 . wh ere ? wh ither ?
m babhfivus , what has become of ? 2.
kva cid : anywhere ; in any case, ever ,
w.us , never . [ 1 ka, 505 ]k sa ,
as collateral f orm of V 1 ksi in ksa-tra ,
and as vbl of the same, w. the mg abiding,
situate ,’in antar i -ksa.
k sana , m. instant ; moment ; -sna , i t,
as advs [1 1 12b, 1 1 14b], instantly . [prob.
‘ the time of a glance,’a sh ortened form
of iks-ana ,
‘
glance’
: for mg, cf . Eng.
“in the twinkl ing of an eye,”
and Ger.
Augen-bl iclc
,
‘
glance of an eye, i .s. mo
k sani k a , f . -i , a . momentary . [ksana.]k sa ta, ppl . qf
'
Vksan.
k sa t r h , n.— 1 . rule, dominion, power ,
— 2. later , th e tempora l power , im
perium (as di stinguish ed from the spirit
ual power , br éhman ,
‘sacerdotium ’
) th e
second or princely caste or a member of
it. [from ksa = V1 ksi 2 : cf . ksatr a -pa,
governor of a dominion, satrap,’
and the
borrowed tren d-m a ]k sa t r a - ban dh u,
111 . one who belongs to
the ksatt a or second caste.
k sa t r i y a , m. — 1 . ruler , — 2. one
who be longs to the ksatr a or pr incely
caste , a Kshatriya, 5 [ksatra , l 2l 4a.]V k sa n (ksanoti , ksanuté ; aksanista ;ksata) . harm ; hurt ; break. [closelyakin w. V2ksi, q.v.]
k sa n ta v y a , grdo. to be put up wi th or
pardoned. [Vksam,
k as p i , j I nigh t. [cf. exit s , cover ,’
(pipes, darkness’for it, cf. Vksar .]
k sa p i h a , n. a nigh t and day , r vxfihpepor .
[2aha , 1253h .]V k sam (ksamats, -ti ; cakaamé ; ksam
iayate.meme ; w e 1955s ; kmtum ksamyats ). — 1 . be patient en
dure ; put up with ; ksanta, patient ; — 2.
forgive ; pardon.
k eam a,a . patient ; bearing or endur ing
and so, equal to a th ing, able. [Vksam .]k sam i , f . patience ; long-snfiering. [do.]1 k ah y a ,
m. dwel l ing-
place. [V l ksi ]2 k sa y a ,
m. destruction , decay . [V2ksi .]V k sa r (ksar ati, -te ; caksara aksi r
[890] ksar ita). — 1 . fiow ; — 2. l iquefy ;mel t away ; and so, perish . [for sskar :
cf . (telpu (m eipw) wet”, destroy,’
l - «pOdp-n, perished’: for (t, cf . hpapa,
ksiti : for M, cf . 2ksi .]k sa r a , a . perishable. [Vksan ]V k sa (ksi yati [761d 1 ] ; ksi nh ) . burn.
k si r a , a . pungent ; sal ine. [Vksh cf.
{api -s, dry’: for mg, cf. Eng. caustic, lit.
‘ burning,’fig.
l k si , with two meanings,‘ dwel l ,
’and
rule,’attaching themselves to the stems ksi
and ksaya respectively ; thus,— 1 . ksé-ti, 3d pl . ksi -y-anti : abide or
wh ile or dwell , esp . in quiet and safety ,inh abit. [cf . kaiti , l kstya , ksétra,
kséma 1 , dwel l ing-
place’
M aud -owes,
dwel l ing around,’xr l-m -s,
up a , rest on, be dependent on.
— 2. ksdya-ti : pos-sess be-sitzen ; be
master of ; rul e, 71 [cf . keema 2,‘
pos
[ 147]
session’
; xl -m -nai,‘am master of ,
’am i
onm.‘
set’
l[cf . the col lateral form ksa : for con
nection of 1 and 2, cf . the relation of Lat.
sedé'
re, sit,
’and pos
-sidé’
re, be master of ,’
and of Ger . sitzen,‘sit,
’and be-s itzen,
‘ be
master
V 2k 8 i (m i tt later ksinéti ; m eets ;ksité. Insist» ;
yati destroy ; make an end of
exhaust pass. wane ksina , ruined,
lost ; — caus . weaken. [cf . «palm , s pam ,
‘
perish , wane,’
oat-“eyes,‘ dead
’: for M,
of . ksar : w. the secondary ksa-n, cf.
lard-acr es, slain,
’
« r ein s, sur est-j ar, slay.
’
a p a , pa ss. be afflicted, snfier loss.
kni t , vbl . inhabiter or ruler , at end of cpds.
[Vl ksi 1 and 2 : seek ai t i , j : dwel l ing, abode, piece of
ground or land ; th e earth , the ground.
[V l ksi 1 cf . xv i-oa r,
k sf t i , f . destruction. [V2ksi z cf . [pl-ea s
aotm ,decay for 1p, cf . ksar .)
V k si p (ksipéti , -te ciksépa. ciksipé ;
keepsyéti. 4 0 ; h ip“; kséptnm s h iptvfi; -ksipya ; ksepayati ) . dart ; cast ;
throw , caus. cause to fly or burst,
i ,— I . th row at ; — 2. fig. ( l ike Eng.
fling, make flings at) , deride, put to shame,
- 3. draw towards one’
s self , cal l out
(a person to vindicate himself) ,ui , th row down (one
’s self, one
's body ) .
v i -ui , lay down separately or order ly .
s am , dash together in a heap ; de
stroy .
k si pta- l a guda ,
a . having the cudgel
thrown.
k si p r b ,a . darting ; quick ; -am, adv.
quickly. [Vksip.]ksi r h ,
n. mi lk . [prob. Vksan ]k si r i n ,
a . milky ; as m. mil k-plant.
k si r od a k a ,n. mil k and water . [ndaka
125sh .]V k en d (ksbdati , -te ; cuksbda ; ksnnna;
-kstidya ) . shatter stamp upon , grind
smal l .
k sud r a,a . smal l . [Vksud.]
k sud r a - budd h i , m. Small -wit, name of
a jackal .
[kh a la
k en d - v y ii d h i , m. hunger and di sease .
[ksudh z 1253a.]V k an dh (ksddhyati ; ksndhita) . be
hungry ; ksndhité.hungrrk sudh , f . hunger . [Vksudh , 383a.)k an d h i , f . hunger . [Vksudh .)k sud h ar ta , a . distressed with hunger .
-ksiya ; ksi'
yate ; ksapA k sét r a , n. dwel l ing-
place, 87‘7; piece of
ground ; field. [V l ksi 1 .]k as t r a - p a t i , m. master of a field ;
farmer .k sém a ,
m. - l . abode ; place of rest ;
secur ity ; wel l -being, — 2. possession ;
kssme yogs , in possession in acquisi
tion, i.s . in the enjoyment of what we
have got and in th e getting of more.
[Vl ksi l and 2 : for sake-ma, 1 166 : cf .
Goth . ha im-s,
‘vil lage
’
; A.S. hdm,Eng.
home, and Jam: in place names ; perhaps
also 11 1611 1) ( if for
k h a, n.— 1 . hole ; hol low ; — 2. opening ;
— 3. hole in th e hub of a wheel ;— 4 . void
space ; the sky . [Vkhan, cf.k h a - g a ,
— 1 . a . moving in th e sky , flying ;—2. as m. bird. [for mg 2, cf . antar iksa
ga and kha-gama , bird,’ur a-ga and
bhujam-gama, snake,’and tur am-ga,
k h a -g am a ,the same.
k h anda , a . broken ; as m. a break, sec
tion, piece ; khandaka, m. lump-sugar .
[hence, prob., th rough th e Persian ,Arabic,
Ital ian,and French , th e Eng. candy.)
V k h a nda y a (khandayati ) . break ;
khandita, broken (of a command) .
[khandaV k h a n or kha (khanati , -te ; oakhana,
cakhmi s ; akhan [890] khanisyati
kh i ta ; khani tnm ; khani tva, khatva
khany'ats , kh i yhts ; khanAyati )
dig ; caus. cause to be dug. [if for eskan,
cf . Lat. can-dl is,‘ ditch ,
5 , dig, bur row,in i khu.
k h ar a , a . harsh ; as m. ass (so cal led fromh is harsh bray ) , 67
19.
k h al a , m. 1 . th reshing-floor — 2. a
mean , low-l ived fel low. [the tertium
kh alu] [ l 4e]
comparatiouis for 1 and 2 is perhaps k h y ii t i , f . the being wel l known ; fame ;
k h alu, pcl .— 1 . now (continuative ) ; atha
kh alu, now ; — 2. indeed (emphasizing the
khyatimgam, become famous. [Vkhyi .)
preceding word) , - 3. to be sure (con g a , vbl . going, in many cpds ; situate, e.g.
cess ive ) , 98
V k h i , see kh an.
V k h i d (khfidati ; cakh itda ; kh i disyats ;kh i dita ; kh idi tum ; kh i ditvi ; kh i d
yats ; kh i dhyati ) . chew ; bite ; eat, esp.
of animals ; feed on, devour ,
kh i dita , eaten , etc. [if for eskand
or sknd, cf . xvlfo , Vtm b, bite, sting,’
” ten, nettl e,’but not Eng. nettle.)
in madhyaga ; as m. nomen actionis , the
going, in durga , suga . [Vgam , cf .
g a g ana , n. sky .
gafig i , f . the Ganges. [fr. Vgam -s gi ,
w. intens. reduplication, 1002b.)
g a j a ,m. elephant.
g a j a -y fith a ,m. herd of elephants .
g a j e n d r a , m. a great el ephant. [see
indr a.]k h i d i ta v y a , grdv. edendus . [t i d ] g ana, m. — 1 . troop, (of Maruts )V k h i d (kh idati ; khinna ; -kh idya ) . de crowd, (of friends ) host (of stars )
press, but onlyfig. flock, (of birds ) — 2. pl . troop-dei ties,
ud pul l out. inferior deities which regular ly appear not
k h i l b , 1 . m. piece of waste land between singly , but in troops, 6713; esp . those that
cul tivated fields ; a bare spot ; — 2. a compose the retinuc of i a ; then, as s ing.,
gap. a single one of i a’
s attendants, a Gana,
k h u, a Prakr itf orm f or khalu.— 3. a number .
k h s - oa r a ,a . moving in the sky. [kha, g ana n i , f . a numbering, calculation, tak
l 25oc.) ing into account. [Vganaya .]k h s c a r a tv a , n. power of flying (by V g a na y a (ganayati ) . number , cal culate.
magic ) . [gana ,
k h ed a , m. depression, sorrow. [Vkh id.) g ani ta , ppl . calculated ; as n. [1 176s ],k h ed a -v a ga , a . having depression as calcul ation, arithmetic. [Vgm ya .)one
’
s control l ing influence, under th e do g a ta, ppl .— 1 . gone, departed ; w. in] :
minion of sorrow. an i tnm gata, gone to bathe, so
k h y i (khydti ; cakhyiu; Akhyatkhyi syati khyi th ; khyiitnm ; -khy5ya
simple verb only in pass. and caus. pass .
be wel l known be talked of — caus .
make known. [orig. mg, perhaps,‘sbine,
appear or look see
a b h i , look at ; behold, 78
+ 3 ,— 1 . show,
tel l ; narrate, — 2.
— 2. often at beg. of cpds, see these ; - 3.
gone to : w. acc. w. prati and
acc.,23 1° — 4 . (having arr ived at, i.s .)
situated in : w. acc.,
w. loc.,
in
cpd, e.g. svahasta-gata, situated on my
own hand ; — 5. gone to a condition ,see
n 4 ; attained to , ( fame ) -con
ditionsd, in durgata, sugata. [Vgam,
954d.)designate , name ; — caus. : act. tel l ; mid. g a t a - p r i na , a . whose breath is gone,
have to ld to one’
s self, 105 7. dead.
+ pr a ty - a , ( l it. show back,i .s.) turn g a ta - s amk a l p a ,
a . whose purpose or
away , repulse, reject, refuse. [theGer . zuriiclc-weisen has just the same
men-J+ v y - 5 , show to discrim inately, i .s. ex
plain.
s am , tel l together , i .s. reckon up.
p a r i - s am , reckon up completely ,
g a tdsu,a . whose l ife is gone.
wi l l for th e moment is gone, purposeless.
g a tanug a t i , f . the going after h im who
has gone (before ) , the fol lowing in the
old ruts. [anugati ]g a t i n n g a t i k a , a . addicted to fol lowingin th e old ruts. [gati nngati
[N ]
garbh avant) [1 50]
padmagarbha ; - 3. conceptum , frui t of g i r h a pa ty a ,— 1 . a . pertaining to the
the womb ; garbham dadh i ni s, conceiv househol der ; as m.,se. agni , the house
ing frui t, embryo, scion ; holder’
s fire, 102°x. ;
- 2. as n. th e being
and so — 4. a new-born ch il d. [Vgr it-bh , h ead of the h ouse,
the housekeeping,‘concipere
’with garbha in mg 1
, cf . [grh épath8¢A¢6s and 80A¢ds,
‘ womb,’lt-Bswds and g i r j i - 1 . invocation, praise,
5-8eA¢e-td-s ah-garbh -
ya-s ) , of the — 2. sing. and p l . speech , words , 87
same womb, i .s . broth er’
; in mg 3, cf . - 3. voice, [Vl gr, 2421.
Bpicpos,‘embryo,
’and Eng. ca lf in moon g i r l , m. mountain ,
calf : in mg 4 , cf . Goth . kalbo,Eng. ca lf.) V gu ( intens . j éguve [1007 cause to
g a r b h a v a n t , a .,in f em. only, pregnant. sound, proclaim . [ci . 7603 , M ,
‘cry
’
;
[garbha 3 z see Lat. bovdre,
g a r bh a - s t h a ,a . being in the womb, un gunh ,
m.— 1 . a single thread of a cord ,
born . a str ing ; esp . bow-string ;— 2. Qua li ty ;
V g a r h (ghrhate j agarhé garh ita adscititious qual ity , as distinguished from
garh itum ; blame, reproach ; th e real nature (svabh i va ,‘ ingenium
garhita , despised.— 3. as philosophica l technica l term,
V g a l (galati ; gal i ta) . — 1 . drip ; —2. fal l ; one of the th ree pervading quali ties of al l
gal i ta, fal len out, gone (claws, teeth , nature, to wit, sattva , goodness ,
’
r ajas,eyes) . [hence j ala,
‘ water’: cf . VBait in ‘
passion,’and tamas,
‘ darkness,’66 ° ff. ;
intrans. mg, e.g. t y rants sis i n: ” M y ,— 4. as specia l ization qf mg 2, a good qual
‘river flowing in to the sea
’
; Ger . quellen, ity , vir tue, l‘o"
, ctc. ; excel lence. [for‘ fiow, spr ing,
’
Quelle, play on mgs 1 and 4,
g a v a , equiv. ,qf go,‘ bul l , cow
, beeve,’in [ J o - 31 .
cpds. [see 1209s .) guna - dev a , in. Gunadeva, a pupil of
g dv y ii t i , f . pasture-land ; general ized, ter Gunadhya. [l it.‘ having virtue as his
ritory , abiding-
place. [l it.‘ having food god,
’
for cattle,’
g6 + iiti , see go4 : the y is guna v a n t , a . virtuous, excel lent,
enphonic, cf. [1233 ]V g i (j igati Agat) . go ; come. [coll at guna gi l i n , a. possessing virtues, excel
eral form of gam, q.v. : w. j igati , cf . La lent. [see ci lia.)conic BiBi n ,
‘str ides
’
; w. Agat, cf . gunadh y a , m. Gunadhya, see 53°sr. [lit.
‘r ich in virtue,
’
i dhya.)a bh i , go unto ; w. gramam, become gunan v i ta , a . endowed with excell ence ;
weary . (of an asterism ) lucky . [anvita , Vi.)g i tu, m.
— 1 . motion, movement, course ; g nni n , a . vir tuous , excel lent. [gnna.)— 2. progress ; equiv. to the Eng.
-fare in V gup (jug6pa ; gopsydti ; gupita, guptawel -fare f or mg, of : verb fare, get on, gépitum, g6ptum ; gupyate ; j tignpsate,
go’
) — see sugatuy i ; - 3. (place of re -ti ). keep ; guard ; desid. seek to keep
course, i .s .) refuge, abiding-place, one
’
s self from,i .s . shun, detest ; ppl.
[Vgi ,‘
go,’
jngnpsita , detested, inspir ing aversion,
g i t t a , n.— 1 . (means of moving, i .e.) a [prob. a secondary root, or iginating
l imb of th e body ; — 2. by synecdoche, the in the denom. verb-stem gopaya : see this
body . [Vgi ,‘ move,
’
1 185s.) and go-pa.]
g i m i n ,a . going, going upon, going to. guru, a .
— 1 . h eavy ; and so — 2. f ig. ( l ike
[Vgam , 1 183 Eng. weigh ty ) , important ; - 3. worthy of
g i r bh a ,a . relating to the embryo or to honor , - 4. as m. the one to be
pregnancy (of sacr ifices ) . [garbha l 2o8f .] h onored xa'r tgoxfiv, the teacher or Guru,
g i r bh i k a ,a . re lating to the womb, pre 60‘ ff. ; loc. garaa z in the house of the
natal . [garbha, 1222e Guru, in case of a Guru, 104 [ci .
[ 151 ]
the comp. gdr iyi its : cf .Baptis, Lat.gravis,
egaru-i-s
, Goth . kaurus, heavy .
V guh (gabati [745c] ; juguha [793i ],
insnh é ;giih itum ; -gtihya ) .
hidden ,76 15.
a p a ,h ide (trans .) away from ,
w. abl.,
85“ put away , get r id of , 77
g ti h , j : h iding-place ; instr . guh ii : used as
adv. gdh i [1 1 12e], in secret. [Vgab.)guh i , j : h iding-
place cavern. [do.]
g ti h y a , grdo. célandus ; secret, h idden .
[do.]guh y a k a , m. one of a class of demigods,
who,like the Yakshas , wait on Kubera,
god of weal th , and, dwel ling in mountain
caverns (gah it) , keep h is treasures. [so
named from their l iving in caverns or
hidden places :
V 1 8 : (m i tt gm'
i té ; j asi ra ; sarisyéti ;
girna [957b] ; -girya ). — 1 . invoke, cal l ;
- 2. sa lute, praise ; — 3. speak out, say .
[cf . gir ,‘speech , voice
’
; fi pvs, speech ,
voice’
; Dor ic ydpéev,‘speak
’
; Lat. garr ia,‘talk
’
; Eng. ca ll.)s am , ch ime in with , agree.
4 2 s r (siréti ; j asi ra ; flsi r it : sired
[957b] -
girya ). swal low. [cf . Bopd,‘ food,
’
Bt-Bpa'v-anw, eat,
’8mm-d -o-s,
‘ folk-devour ing’
; Lat. carni-vo‘raus
,
‘ flesh
eating,’ de-vor iire
, swal low down ,de
n i , swal low down ; devour (the sun in
an ecl ipse ) , — see Vgras .V 3g ; (aor . Aj igar intens. jagarti
caus. jagarbyati ) . — 1 . intens. be
awake ; wake, intrans. ; j i grh i be
thouwatch ful , have a care for , w. dat.,
89 wake up, intrans., — 2. cans.
wake, trans ., [for the hi story of the
word, see 1020: for 1 , cf . é-yph-yoa a ,‘am
awake,
’I-yp-svo,
‘awoke
’for
2, cf . ty cipw,‘ wake
’
gtt s a ,a . clever ; wise.
V g rdh (gfdhyati ; jagttrdha ; agrdh at ;gardh isyati grddha grddhva ). 1 .
take long str ides ; — 2. be eager or greedy
for . [fo'
r sghrdh : cf . Eng. greedy.)gtdh r a ,
- 1 . a . greedy ; —2. m. vul ture.
[Vgrdh , 1 188a : the Ger . oiIers an exact
hi de ; gfil hfi.
[sopa
paral lel : Geier ,‘vul ture ,
’is prop.
‘the
greedy from Gier,
g rd h r a -k fita ,m. Vul ture peak, a moun
aghukaat gfidha tain in Magadha.
g r h fi, in V.,m. ; later , m. in pi. ; otherwise
,
n. h ouse, 287,
w. mrnmaya, h ouse
of earth , the grave ; grhamgam , go home,
52 so 68" as p l . the house as con
sisting of various rooms and bui ldings,
89 mansions, 877. that which re
ceives one,’Vgrah : cf . geha.)
g rh a- pa t i , m. master of the house. [acct,1267s .)
g r h a-p a t n i , f . mistress of the house.
[do.]g rh a - s th a ,
a . abiding in a h ouse ; as m.
householder or Brahman in the second
stage of his rel igious l ife, sec agr ama.
g rh i gr am a ,m. h ouse-stage, second stage
in a Brahman’
s life, see i gran a.
g e h fi, n. house. [ident. w. grhh : cf . the
ident.VVrdh and edh .)g 6 [361 c], m.f . — 1 . a beef in its old sense
of bul l or cow ; pl. beeves, kine, cattle ;
the Vedic type or symbol of al l welf are
and blessing and riches (e.g. like
m il k and honey”wi th the Hebrews ; —2.M
mJ Abeef in the der ived and now usua l sense offlesh ; pl . pieces of flesh , — 3. (the
mi lch cow of kings, i .e.) the ear th,63 7 ;
— 4. observe that gav'
yiiti , gotra, gopa,
gopati , gomaya, and many other cpds of
go lose their special ref erence to cattle and
take a more general mg. [cf. Bails, stem
BoF,‘a beef, ox, cow
’
; Lat. bos, stem bav,
‘ox, cow
’
; AS. cfi,Eng. cow.)
g o - gb a a,a . kins-kil ling ; as m. cow
slayer.
g btam a , m. Gotama, a Vedic seer of the
tr ibe of Augiras.
g ot t a, n.— 1 . cow-stal l , cattle-pen ; — 2.
perhaps, pen of cattle, and so — 3. group
in genera l (see go 4 ) ; - 4 . esp . fam i ly ,— 5. fami ly name, 103
m,
see ni man 2.
[from go : mgs 2 and 3 are not authenti
os ted by the l iterature.)g ot r a -j a ,
a . born in th e fami ly ; as m. a
relative.
g o - p é , m. - 1 . cow-keeper , cow-herd - 2.
keeper in general (sea go [2px ]
sopati]
g b- p a t i , m. — 1 . lord of kine ; — 2. lord
in genera l (see go 4 ) . [acct, 1267a.)V g Op a y a (gapayati , -te ). be keeper ,
keep. [gopa ,
g o- p i m. 1 . cow-keeper - 2.
keeper in genera l (see go4 ) , protec
tor , 69 [21111 ]V g op i y a (gopayati , -te) .keep, 91 [gopi ,
g om ay a ,— l . a . bovine ; as n. — 2. cow
dung, 103 2° 3. dung in genera l (see
go 4 ) w. anaduha , dung of a steer ,
[see maya .)go -yuk ta , a . yoked with cattle ; w. cakr a,
wagon drawn by cattle. [V yuj .)g o - r a k sa k a ,
m. cattle-keeper , cow-herd.
g b- sa k h i a . having cattle as com
panions, rich in cattle. [sAkhL
g o - sth a, m. cow-stall , byre. [stha,
gauni k a , f . -i , a . standing in relation to
the three guna’
s, see guna 3. [gnna ,1222e
g i n tam a, m. patronymic f rom Gatama ;
Gautama, name of various men . [gbtama ,
l 2o8f .]V g r a th or granth (grathni ti ; granthi
syhti ; grathitA; -gr6thya ) . — 1 . str ing
together , connect ; —2. put togeth er , i .e.
com-
pose (a l iterary work ) . [for mgs, cf .Lat. com-
pancre, put together , compose
also serere, connect, entwine,
’w. sermo
,
g r a n th a ,m. — 1 . (a stri ng of words, i.s .)
4 05“ verse or couplet, etc ; — 2. a com-
posi
tion,book, work, [Vgranth : for mgs,see under gr ath , and for 1 , cf . Lat. serere
w. ser ies,
‘row,
g r a n t h i n , a . subst. having books, bookish ,
book-reader . [grantha.)V g r a bh , in Rigveda ; la ter , grab.
be keeper
j agri bha , jagrbhé ; Lgrabhi'
t, agras ta
sm ut.« gram » cranium.-e.;
— 1 . grasp ; seize with the hand ; hold
take ; w. h i stam or pi nim, take the h and
(of th e bride at the wedding) , take
[ 152]
hold on grh ita t egean , seized
by the hair ; used of a rabbit taking, i.s.
leading with h im a l ion, — 2. take
possession of , take, get, — 3.
receive, accept, — 4. of fluids,take in the ladle, - 5. of names, take
upon the l ips, mention, - 6.
fig.,as in Eng.
, grasp, i .s. perceive, know ;— 7. get, learn ; — caus. cause to learn.
[see under garbha : connection w. Eng.
gr ipe, Ger . greifin, exceedingly doubtful .)+ p a r i , — 1 . h old on both sides ; and so
- 2. become mas ter of master, overcome,
surpass.
p r a t i , take hol d of , accept.
v i , 1 . ho ld asunder ; separate ; make
a division ; and so — 2. quarrel ; figh t.
s am , hold together , clasp.
up s - s am , clasp wi th the hands.
V s t “ (m usiasm sé ; i sm s“
its stu
iayfite ; gu sts ; sr anitvi ; sw arm ;
gr i séyati ) . — 1 . swal low ; devour ,
2. of the demon Rahu, who swal lows,
i .s. ecl ipses sun and moon , [perhapsakin w. V2gr,g r a h , see grabh .
g r ah a , m. seizure (with a claw, bite.
[Vstalk ]g r ah ana , n. the grasping, i.s. acquisition.
[Vgrah 6,g r abh é , a . subst. grasping,
[Vgr abh .)g r fim a ,
m. - l . inhabited place, hamlet,
vil lage, see 98 — 2. the inhabitants,
community.
g r i m a -k am a , a . having desire for the
vil lage, fond of abiding in the v il lage.
g r i v a n , m. stone ; esp . stone for pressing
the Soma.
g r ah a, a . subst. grasping, grasper, in cpds.
Hersh-Jg r ah y h , grdo. to be grasped ; perceivable.
[do.]r i v i , j : nape of the neck ; neck. [forsga
°rvi t cf . Aeolic um , d epute, Epic
aetpfi,‘ th roat,
gr i sm h , m. summer .
grasper.
g h a ,f orm q han, i.s.han, in cpds. [1 143c,
caflcala)
ca ii c a l a , a . moving to and fro ; trembling.
[VcaL w. intens . redupl ication, cf .
1002b : cf. ni‘r-xaA-os, wag-tail Lat.
quer-
quer-as
, shaking with feverca ficu, f . beak, bil l .
c ana k a , m. ch ick-
pea.
c h nda , a . impetuous ; wrathful .c andi da , m. a Chandala or man of the
most despised class of society (born of
Gudra father and Brahman mother ) . [cf .
[ 154]
or at al l,
see esp. l k62c, a lso h at-ham,
kadi , and ki l n. [cf .Lat. -quam and « run
in quisq‘uam, quicunque,
‘any one
’
; Goth.-hun in ai hvas-hun,
‘not any
ca n d r i , a . shining, shimmering ; as m. the
moon ; the moon-
god. [for gcandra, q.v.]ca n d r hm a s , m. the moon ; the moon-god.
[orig. a descriptive cpd, stem candr a-mas
(383d6) , nom . candrapm i s, and so with
long 5 throughout, but transferred to thei s-declension (cf .
V ca t (ottant ; catth ; caus. ci thyati ) . get ca n dr a-v a r na , a . of sh ining hue.
ofi ; hide ; caus. dr ive away.
c a t a s r , f em. ta catur.ca tur [482d], num. four . [w. catvi ras, cf .
v in -apes, Lat. qua ttuor , Goth . fidvor , AS.
f edwer , Eng.four .)ca tur - a k sa, a . four-eyed. [see 1300b.)ca tur th a, f . -i, a . four th ; -am ,
adv. the
fourth time. [catur ,ca tur - yug a , n. the four ages.ca tur - v a r g a , m. group of four .catur - v i d h a , a . of four kinds ; four -fold.
[vidh i , 13020
cfitusta y a ,a. of four ; as n. a col lection
of four , 9. quaternion. [cattir , 1 78 :ca tus- pa th a, m. n. place where fourways meet, quadrivium. [catdr ,
ct tus-p a d ,a . quadruped ; as n. s. collec
tively, the four-footed beasts. [catur , 178
oa tus- pada , j Z-f, a. having (taken ) foursteps.
ca tv a r a , m. n. quadri vium. [sati n ]c a tv i r ,
strongf orm of catur , q.v.V ca n be glad in ; gladden. [collateral form of Vkan : cf. Vkan, ki ma,earn.)
;U .W “,p.ifLoa n fi , adv., immediately f ollowing the em
phasized word. - 1 . not even ; w hpnagcanh , not even sleep, 79 - 2. w. pre
ceding negation, even nfi devi ni m i ti
vr athm, cati tma cans, j ivati , not beyondthe decree of the gods, (not) even if hun
dred-l ived, does one l ive, hence, the
f eel ing f or the negation in cana in such col
locations becoming f a int, - 3. even , at al l ,
w. inter rogatives, emphasizing their indefinite
sense ; na kim cana, not any thing even
V cam , sip, only with 3 .
+ 5 ( i ci mati [74se] ; i caci ma ; toastsi ci mya ; i camayati ) . sip (water),
i.e. rinse the mouth .
cam a s h , m. beaker ; cup, made of wood,
square, and with handle. [Voam, cf
c am pa k a , m. Michelia Champaka , a tree
with strong-smel ling yel low blossom.
cam p a k a v a n t , a . abounding in Cham
palm trees ; as f . Champakavati , name ofa forest. [1283 ]ca r (chrati , -te ; caci ta , cards, ceré
tofu-it, hearista ; car isyhti ; carita; ctritum ; car itvi ; -carya ; caryate ; cara
yati , -te ). — 1 . move, 77 go ; wander ;
wander about ; used of men, beasts ,waters,heavenly bodies ; - 2. ( like Eng. proceed
—qf.Lat. pro-cédene,
‘
go on act ; w.ppl.
[1075b], go on, is!keep on (doing a thing) ,- 3. (l ike Eng. go about, i.s .) under
take, set about ; bh i iksam car. go beg
ging, beg ; undergo ( troubles) , per
form (a vow,duty ) ; observe (silence) ;
comm it (ofiense or injustice ) ,sal yam car , feed on corn, carita,
see s.v. [cf. t epc-r sA-Aop im v lmaw iiv, as
year s go round,’and wept-wA-op t
'
vwv ( mav M'fl H'
7 6st,‘ us years went round,
’
with 7 beforea palatal and s before a non-palatal ; also
min-as, Milton’s turning sphere see
also oar ad, and the younger col lateral
form cal , and under cahoala : akin is also
Vkal .)a nu move along after, fol low.
a pa , go off, be absent.
a bh i , go against, trespass against ; esp.
be unfaithful (of a wife) .
71 .
[ 155]
i , 1 . move unto, approach , - 2.
go to (an undertaking) , set about ; and so,
do, practice (virtue ) ; perform (vow)
° fol low (rule ) ; - 3. proceed,
conduct one s self , cf. i cara , conduct !
ud - i ,rise up out of 77 of the
moon.
cam -a, proceed ; do ; perpetrate.
4» ud , go up, r ise, of th e sun ; caus . cause
to go out, evacuate, cf. nocara ,
‘evacua
tion.
’
[cf . sin-
yam uc-chrantam w. two:
hra-r iM ow a, the r ising sun .
’
+ up a ,— 1 . come to ; — 2. come to
,esp.
in order to serve, and so, attend,wai tupon
pol itely ; — 3. proceed with , under take.
pa r a,move away from ,
v i , move in different di rections, spread
over ; of waters, overwhelm ; wander about;
caus. cause to go h ither and thither in
thought, balance, ponder .
s a m , go, walk ,wander .
ea r n , a . moving ; as subst. animal (as distingui sh ed from plant) . [V car .)
car ana ,- 1 . m. n. foot ; — 2. as n. a wan
dering. [V car : for 1 , cf. nayana .)oa r i ta, 1 . ppl . done ; 2. as n. sing.
[1 176a], ( l ike Ger .Wandel and Eng. walk )behavior ; proceedings ; deeds. [Vcar .)
c a r i ta - v r a ta ,a . having his (marital )
duty performed.
ca r ca, f . a going over , repetition (of a
word in a school-boy’s Veda-recitation )
a troubl ing one’
s self about. [perhaps fr.
Vcar .)e h r m a n , n . skin ; pel t.
ca r y a , yrda. to be accomplished ; f . -5 ,
(like Eng. walk ) way of life ; a performing, busying one
’s self with . [V car .)
V ca r v (carvith, cur-uh ; car vitum ) . chew,
crush with the teeth .
ca r sani , a . active, busy ; as f . pl . busy,morta ls, men , folk. [
'l car , 1 159b end.)V ca l (chlati ; cacéla, colds ; cal isyhti ;
cal ita chl i tum ). move star t off.
[younger form of V car , q .v. : cf. xiA-saOos,
Lat. cal-l is,
ca l a , a .moving. [Vcal .)oi ndi l h , m. a Chandala. [see sandalsand 1208f .]
ot ta n a ,a . driving away. [Vcat, caus.]
s atur m asy h , n. a sacrifice to be made
every four months, i.e. at the beginningof each of the three seasons. [caturmi ca, 121 1 ]
can d r ay ana , n. with or without vrata ,the Chandrayana observance or lunar
[lit.‘connected or ac
,fi# Wcording with the moon
’s course,
’
candr aV , a . ad v
-Q fla k
p i l l /M “,
penance, 65°n .
ayana.)c i r ana , m. wanderer ; esp .
player or singer . [carana ]car i n a .moving observing ; busying one
’
s
self wi th . [V car .)cai r n ,
a . gladsome ; dear ; pleasant ; fair .
[Vcan , q .v., 1 192 : cf . Lat. cii-rus,
ear n -bas i n ,a . sweetly laughing.
l c i (cinbti, cinuté ; cikyé float
cesyAti , -te ; cita; cétum ; ci tvi ; -citys
ci'
yate ) . — 1 . arrange in order ; pile up ;
bui ld ; construct, esp. the sacr ificial al tar ;
active,if the pr iest buildsf or others ; middle,
if the sacr ificer builds f or himself ; 2.
gather together, col lect ; get possession
of .
ud , heap up, col lect.
s am , gather together , col lect ; accumu
late.
2c i (chysti, — I . hate ; - 2. avenge,
take vengeance on, punish . [cf .Arcadianhaw-r eins, Attic duo-r im ,
‘
pay ofi,
’ham -ivo
pau,‘
get paid to myself, take vengeance,
punish ,’f owl) ,
3 c i (cikéti ; cikftya, cikyus beet ;
ocsyati ; ebtun ; -citya ; ci'
yhte ) . - 1 .
notice, observe ; - 2. look, investigate.
[cf . Vcit.)+ n i s , (search out, i.s .) ascertain ; determine ; consider as certain or settled.
+ v i - n i s , ( look out th is way and th at,
i .e.) ponder , consider , 13
p a r i , investigate thorough ly , find out.
o i k i td prob. f understanding. [Vcit,1 178c.)
c i k i tv i t adv. with understanding. [cikitu,V c i t (cétati , -te ; ciketa, cikité ; aci it ;
citta ; cetéyati, -te). 1 . look at, notice ;
observe ; consider ; — 2. be intent upon,
intend ; —3. understand, know ; perfect,cikéta, has understood, knows ; cikitvina.
wandering
cs
[1 56]
wise caus. make to know , instruct.
[extension of V3 ei t the V ei l. shows an
intrans. aspect,‘ be noticeable or brigh t,
’
in ketu: cf . V cint.)p r a , know.
c i t , vbl . knowing. [V cit, 383a.)c i t i ,f . pile. [V1 ci.)c i tt h ,
n. notice th ough t ; mind. [l it.
noticed,’ V cit, see 1 1 76s .)
c i t t a - p r am i th i n , a . disturbing the
m ind.
c i t-t i , j ?understanding ; wisdom . [V cit.)c i t r a, a .
- 1 . noticeable, excel lent ; - 2.
clear ; br igh t ; brigh t-colored ; of sounds,
clear , i.e. loudI
3. variegated,
varied ; —4. as n. a brigh tecolored thing,
a picture. [V cit,c i t r h - qr a v a s , a . whose praise is loud or
whose fame is excel lent.c i tr a - s th a ,
a . being in a picture
painted.
c i tr ai g a , m. Dapple-coat, name of a deer .having a variegated or mottled body
’:
c i d , encl . pcl. — l . emphasizes, sometimes
very gently, the preceding word even,
just, ya? cid, what
very ones, at least, —2. gen
era lizes a pron. : yé cid ti ng cid, what
soever unto al l those, 91 so f ar
Vedic ; - 3. in classica l Skt., very common
w. an inter r ., render ing it indefi: kag cid,
a certain ; na kii cid, not any ; see ka ,
pron. root ka , ki w. palatal ization
1 1 1 1 s .)V c i n t (cintdyati , -te ; cintayim asa ;
cintayisyhti ; cintith ; cintayi tvit ; -cint
ya ) . - 1 . think, reflect, have a certain
though t ; — 2. set one’s though ts upon,
think upon or of , consider , turn one’s at
tention to ; - 3. cal l attention to make
an observation , [younger form of
V eit z cf . 255 and
+ v i , reflect.s am , think to one
’s self .
c i n ta n a ,n. a th inking upon. [Veinh ]
c i n t i , f — I . though t ; —2. esp. ( like
p ipaur a ) , anxious or sad though t ; sorrow ;— 3. plans, [Vch i t.)
c i n t i -p a r a , a . having sad though t as
one’s chief thing, sunk in sad though t.
[1302b.)c i n tav i sa - g h n a , a . destroying the poi
son of sorrow .
c i n t i top a s th i ta , a . wh ich approached
as soon as thought of . [l it.‘though t of
and ( immediately ) at hand,’cintita
upasthita ,
c i n ty a , yrda. to be though t of , compre
hensible. [Voint.)c i r fi,
a . long, of time ; -am, i t, as adverbs
[1 1 1 1c, 1 1 14c], long, for a long time.c i r a -m i t r a , n. an old fri end.c i t - kar a , m. the sound cit, i .s. th e bray
ing of an ass. [cit, onomatopoetic.)c i r a , n. str ip of bark or cl oth ; rag.
V cud (codati , -te ; hoodit ; codayati ,-te ). dr ive on ; speed ; excite ; caus . the
+ p r a , caus. drive on ; further ; inspire.V cur (corayati ) . steal .
cur a , j . theft. [c r .]odda, f . tuft of hair left on the crown
of a chil d’s head afte r the ceremony of
tonsure.
o i di -k a rm a n , n. ceremony of tom ,
cfir na , m. n. meal , powder . [Vcarv t for
me.cf pitta-JV c ii r na y a (ciirnayati ) . powder , crush
fine ; crush ; smash . [cfirngV cr t (crti ti ; w i t h ; crttfi ; emu).fasten together . to.
p r a , loosen, untie.
cete n a , a . noticing ; cabana/Zconscious
ness mind. [Vcit.)cet a s , n. consciousness ; mind ; heart.
[Vcit.]ebd , adv. never at beg. of sentence, clause,
or half -verse. if ; apodosis, if it f ollows,ma rked by tad tatas or not
marked or marked byana , if
negative na cod, if not, no cod,
f orms a shor tened but complete clause, and if
not, 27 [ca + id, see ca 7.)V c e rt (oéstati. 4 6 ; cicésta ; certifi
céstitum costitvi ). move the limbs
bestir one’s sel f ; be active ; act.
cesta , f . activity ; performance. [Vcost.)
[ 153]
a, caus. cause to be born for some one, V j a s (j éayati ; jaj i sa ; j i shyati ) . be ex
w. dat. hansted or tired to death ; caus. exhaust ;up a , mid. be born , arise. quench.
+ p r a , mid. be born ; caus. procreate. j a s r a , a. dying out. [Vjaa ]s am ,
mid. be produced ; satiriata, h av j i vbl . born, at end af cpds. [Vjan or
jaz cf . j h , later form of j ib.)j t n a ,
m. creature ; man ; person ; in pl. V j ag r , same as V3 gr, see 1020.
(e.g. and col lectively in sing. (e.g. j i ta, pl. born ; grown ; come into being,
folks ; a people or race or tr ibe ; present ; at beg. qf cpds : arisen, existing,
di ivya jana, heavenly race, the gods. manifest ; produced, aroused ; as n . a l iv
[Vjan z cf. 76 m ,Lat. genus, Eng. kin, ing being ; birth . [Vjan, 955b.)
j i ta 1: a r m a n n. birth -ceremony.
j a n a - p a dh , m. (tr ibe-place, i .s .) distr ict ; j Et a - r i pa ,a . having native beauty
community . splendid ; -pé., n. gold.
j an i [343c], f . woman ; wife. [Vjan z cf . j i ta -v i qvas a ,a . hav ing ar isen confl
wvfi, Eng. quean,‘ woman
’: for mg, cf . dence, inspired with confidence.
jayi .) j ata- v eda a , m. Jstavedas , epith et of
j a n i tr a , n. origin. [Vjan, 1 1 85d.) Agni . [perhaps,‘ h aving knowl edge of
j a n i tv a,n. wifehood. [jani .) al l beings, i .s. of gods and men ,
’or , better, fi
”.
j h n i m a n , n. production, creation. [Vjan ,
‘ having al l beings or things as his pos
1 168.2a.)j an i , f . same as jani . j i ta - s amk a l p a , a. h aving a purpose or
j a nus n. origin ; ingenium, nature ; crea desire arisen, feeling a passion for another.tion. [Vj an, j i tam a r sa , a . having anger aroused,
j a n t ti , m. creature ; man. [Vjan .) vexed. [amarsa .]j anm a n , n. birth ; production ; creature, j atav am an a , a . having ar isen contempt,
[Vjan.) fil led with self-contempt. [avami na ]V j a p (j hpati ; jaj i pa ; éjapit ; japisyhti ; j i ti , j : birth ; position or rank. [Vjan,58 13114 , j aptA; j hpitum ; japitvi , j aptvfi) . 1 157
say in under-tone ; mutter . j i t i -m i tr a , n. mere rank. [see mi tr 52,
j am dd - a gn i , m. Jamadagni, a Rish i,
and 1302c
friend of Vicvamitra, and fee of Vasieh j fitu, adv. at al l , ever ; na j i tu, not at al l .th e . [j amaat, unclear : see 1309 [Vjan , 1 1 1 1d : developmentof mgunclear .)
j am buk a , m. jackal . j i te r sy a , a. having jealousy aroused,
j a r a ,a . growing old, aging. [e .) jealous. [irayi ]
j a r ad - a sti , a . long-lived. (j au nt, see j i n n , n. knee. [cf . 1 61m, Lat. genu, Eng.
1 299b end.] knee, whence kneel .)
j a r a d - g a v a , m. Old-bul l , name of a vul j am a da gn y a , a . of Jamadagni ; as subst.
ture . [j ar ant ] descendant of J. [jamhdagnh
j a r a d -das a , m. old slave or servant. wife. [Vj an z for mg, cf . jani .)j ar h , m. paramour .
j h r a n t , ppl . aging ; old. [e zcf .7&pow -a, j i l a , n. net.
‘old V l j i (j i yati , -te ; j igi ya, Jigyé [787]
j a r h a , j : the growing old ; old age. [e hj i isit, tij esta ; jayisyhti, -te ; j esyati , -te ,
cf .fi pas,‘old j ita; j étum ; j itvi ; -j itya ) . overpower ;
j a r i tt , m. invoker ; singer. conquer ; win (battles ) ; win by conquest.
j a l a,n. water . [see Vgal.) [cf . Bic,
‘ force,’
Baton, to force ’
; Lat. vi'
s,
j a l a -dh a r a , m. rain-cloud. [li t.‘water sgvis,
‘ force ’: cf. i i .)
ud , conquer ; be victorious.
j a l aqa y a , m.water-abode ; lake. [aqaya n] pa r t , pass. be conquered.
v i , mid. be victor conquer (con
quests ) ; subdue.
V 2j i (j inbti ) . enl iven quicken hence
Vj inv. [for sgvi : cf . Bios,‘ life
’
see also Vj iv .)j i j fiasa, j : investigation. effort to find
out,’fr . desid. of Vjfii , 1 149
j i t i p s a r a s ,a . having the Apsarases
conquered, surpassing the Apsarases.
[apsaraa ]j i t en d r i y a , a . having the senses con
quered, having the passions subdued.
[indriya.]V j i n v (j invati ; j ij inva ; J1nvisyati ; Jmvita) . be lively , hasten ; trans . quicken ;
speed onwar d. [secondary root fr . V2j i,see
j i v r i , a . old. [for j irvi, e ,
j i h v 5 , f . tongue.
j i h v ag r a , n. tip of the tongue. [agra ]j im ii ta , m. thunder-cloud.
j i r fi, a . quick. [V2j i, 1 188 : of . i i .)j i r h -danu, a . having swift drops, swiftdripping, i.s. wel l watered.
V j i v (j ivati, -te ; j ij iva, j ij ivé ; sj i’
v‘
it ;
j ivisyati, -te ; j ivita j ivitum ; j ivitv i ;-j ivya ; j ivhyati ) . live ; be al ive ; caus .
make alive. [see V2J1 : cf . Lat. viw re,
l ive’
; AS. cwicu, al ive,’Eng. quick,
alive,
a nu, l ive after , be dependent on, liveupon.
j i v h , a . living ; as m. the principle of life,
the individua l soul , [Vj iv z cf . Lat.virus ,
j i v a n a ,n. existence. [Vj iv.]
j i v a n a - h e tu, m. cause of existence, i.s.
means of subsistence.
j i v a - p a t i or -patni , a . f . having one’
s
husband yet al ive.
j i v a - p r a j a , 0 . having one’
s children yet
al ive. [praj i ]j i v a - l oka, m. the wor ld of the l iving (asdistinguished from that of the Manes ) ,86 18, 23
u_
j i v i ta, ppl . al ive ; as n. [1 1 76s ], life. [Vj i v.)j i v i ta v y a , grdv. vivendum ; as n. imper s.,
see 999. [Vj iv.)
j i v i taqa, f . the wish for life, hope to save
one’s l ife. [api ]
j i v i n , a . l iving. [VJ1v .]V h e (insists -ti ; iuj éea, 505096 ; fljoeista
junta) . taste , esp. with pleasure ; relish ;
take pleasure in or accept gracious ly . [cf .
y ebopat,‘ taste
’
; Lat. gas-tus, taste
’
; AS.
ce6san,Eng. choose.)
justa , a . acceptable. [ppl . of Vjus, w.
accent altered as in dh iuta .)j uh ii f . sacr ificial ladl e for pour ing
the melted butter into the fire, cf . sruc.
[V ha ,V j fi (junta jfijsva jfita) .speed, intrans. and trans. ; incite, inspire ;
furth er, assist to. [ci . V2j i.)V j r ( V. j hr ati ; later , j iryati , -te ; jaj iira ;fij i r i
’
t ; j irnfi decay ; grow frai lor worn out or old. [cf . jarant, old,
’and
7 ipoy-r-a,
‘old man j arhs and fi pas,
loudly singing ; praising.
Vgu, 1 147b°, 1002a.)
j bsa a , a. pleasure. [a a]j i a , vbl . knowing, at end of cpds.
j as Gi nsu, j i nité jajnati , jajnéajfii sit Ajfli sta ; j iii syéti , -te
junta ; jfii tum ; jfii tvii ; -jfiii.ya jfii
r i te ; jflfipfiyati. -te. j i apflyati. -te
jfiapta). know ; have knowl
edge of a person or th ing ; recognize ; be
come aware of learn ; notice. [cf . Lyn n,Lat. cc-gné
'
vit,‘ knew
’
; AS. cann,
‘ have
learned, i.e. know, am able,’Eng. can ;
AS.ge-cniiwan, Eng. know.)
+ s am - a n u, whol ly acquiesce in ; ap
prove ; give leave dismiss.
a bh i , recognize ; know.
p r a ty - a b h i , recognize.
a v a , look down upon ; despise.
i , attend to, notice ; caus. command.
p a r i , careful ly observe ; find out.
+ p r a , know ; esp. know one’
s way or
bear ings or how to go to work ; prajfiata ,clear ly to be known, wel l known .
+ p r a t i , recognize, al low ; promi se ;
[Vj iifh
v i , distinguish ; understand ; know ;
recognize ; consider as ; observe ; find out ;
pass. vijfii yate, in sta ting a dogma , is
wel l known or recognized (by good auth or
”4 ,w
jh'
a'
ti] [160]
ities ) ; - caus. make any one know or nu j h a l l a , m. a cudgel-figh ting ath lete (dederstand ; make a representation to, with scended from outcas t Kshatriyas ) .a request or question or proposal ; memo
r ia lize ; interrogate.
j s s t i , m. kinsman ; relative. [Vjan z of .“thi“
xaa l-w os, brother
j fi i n a ,n. knowledge ; wisdom ; esp . knowl 4 dh i uk (dhiukate ; dudhi uké ; dh i uk
edge oi the higher truths of religion and its ; dh i uki yati ) . approach ; caus. bringphil osophy. [Vjfii , near .
j fi i n i n ,a . wise ; possessing jfii na ; under upa , bring to ; provide.
standing (what one reads ) , 68‘5
. [j fii nan ]j fioy a , grdv. to be known or considered as
vm i i or 1 1 0mm ; mmAjyi sit ; jyi syfiti ; j ita). BG“; over
power. [cf . 1 jyi ,‘
power,’
and V l j i,
l j y i , j i superior power ; Bla ; force. [ i i
cf . Bla,
2 j y i , f . bow-str ing. [cf . Buds,
j y i y i ns ,a . stronger or super ior ; older .
[comp. of jyi ,‘ being strong or superior ,
’
th e vbl of i i ,
V j yut (jyotati -jy6tya ) . ligh t. [i r .
Vdynt.]j y ésth a , later jyestha, a . best ; principal ;
first ; oldest. [super l of jyi , the vbl of
i i , 470 see jyi yi na ]j y e sth a -p r a th a m a , a . having the old
est as the first.
j y o t i s-k tt , a . l igh t-making. [jyotis
j y ot i sm a n t , a . ful l of ligh t ; ligh t.
[jyotis z 184b.]j yot i s , a. l igh t (of sun, dawn , as pl .
the heavenly bodies ; stars. [i ut.]j y ot s n i , f . moonligh t. [jyotis zcf .
j r ay a s , n. stretch ; expanse. [e i.]V j r i (j rayati ) . perhaps, go, stride ; used
only an. apa , stretch out to.
V j v a l (j vélati , 4 6 ; j ajvfila ; Ajvi li t ;jva l isyAti ; jval itA; -jvalya ; jv i lfiyati ,
jvalayati , -te ). burn brigh t ; flame ; causkindle, make to flame.
p r a ,caus. kindle.
j h a t- i t i , adv.with a jhat, as quick as one
could say“boo.
”
Uhat, onomatopoeticsee 1 102a ’ mid.]
ta pron. he , she, it, th ey ; that, those ;both subst. and adj .
, I“,
— 1 . corr el .
of ya, which usual ly precedes
but sa
ya, otiose,—2. in connection is . a pron. of the 1st or 2d
pers. : e.g. tam tvi imah e, thee, who
ar t such a one (as aforesaid) , we beseech .i .e. therefore we beseech thee , cf .
tébhyo nas h i m, to us , who are
these (unsuccessful ones j ust descr ibed ) ,tel l thou, i .s. do thou tel l us then,
similar ly, to. a verb in the 1 st or 2d pers.,
whose subj ect is not expressed, 6917,
83 1, — 3. as. other
pronouns : tasya etasya, of th is,
yat tad tad, what (was ) that that,
57 7 ; ya ta, whoever , anybody, ya
ya' ta ta, whoever that, cf .
simple a rticle : to devi s, the gods ,
as bh imas, Bh ima, l“? sa, si , M flflfi
i
fifi
wcf. 4, a, 7 6, Goth . sat” , }ata , AS . so, sad, SM
.»
‘Baet,
s he, she, it; Eng. that ; cf . also Lat.
is-tud,PL
i n ; (tim e ; tataksa , tataksé ; ataka I"
it ; w ; hew ; work (wood) ;make (of wood or oth er material ) fashion.
[cf . ti lts-an and r im -w ,
‘carpenter
’
;
b r at-ow,‘
produced’
; Lat. tignum,
‘ log’
cf.Vtvaks and toku]taj -j i v a n a , n. his subsistence. [tad.]V tad (tSdAyati ; ti dayim i sa ; ti ditfi
beat.
+ p a r i , strike ; pel t.
t a ta, m. father . [cf . r l-n a, Lat. tata,
‘
papa’: Eng. dad, though of sim i lar
make, has of course no direct connection.]
tadvat] [ 162]
tad -v a t , adv. in this way, so ; l ikewise. tan tu, m. thread, 891; metaphor ical ly, of
[tad zta d - v i d , a . knowing that ; as m. connois
seur or judge .
tad - vr k sa ,m. that tree.
tad - v rdd h i , j . the interest of them.
V 1 ta n (tanbti, tanuté ; tati na , tené
[794e] ; ati ni t ; tansyflte ; tata; tantum ;tatvt
‘
t ; -tatya ; tayato— 1 .
stretch , trans. and intrans. extend, reach ;
spread over ; —2. continue, endure,- 3. stretch (a weft or a l ine ) ; continue
the l ine of a fam ilYl ; — 4. metaphor ical ly,of sacrifice and suppl ication (which are
compared wi th a weft) , perform,make.
[cf. r dwuat,‘stretch
’
; Lat. tene'
re,hold,
’
tendere,‘stretch
’
; AS. benian, Ger . dehnen,
stretch see also tanu.]+ 6 , spread over ; overspread (esp . with
l ight) , besh ine stretch (a bow) .
+ p a r i , stretch around ; surround ; en
ve10pe.
v i , stretch out ; spread out, cover ;
vitata, stretched, hung, dependent,
sam , hold together, intrans. ; bind to
geth er ; make continuous ; sarhtata , (j ustl ike La t. con-tineas) uninterrupted.
2ta n (tanyati ) . resound. [cf . r dvos,‘ tone
’
; Lat. tona re,‘ thunder
’
; AS. noun
bunor , thunder,’whence denom. verb
bunr ian, Eng. thunder ; AS. bunres dceg,
Eng. Thurs-day,‘ day sacred to the Old
Germanic god of the thunder-sto rm , bonar
or Thor see tanyatd,
ta nn, 1: [3442] tanu, tuna, tanvi
'
,a . th in,
tennis, slender ; — tanuor tanh [decl .as subst. f . body, 56 89 person ; one
’
s
own person, self, used like i tman [514] asreflexive pron., 73
‘3, 78 outward form
or manifestation, [prop.‘stretch ed
out, thin,’Vl tan : cf . r aw
‘extended,
long,’in cpds Lat. tenuis, Eng. thin
,Ger .
dunn,t a n n - tr i na ,
n. body-cover ,
t anu-m a dh y a , a . having a slender m id
dle, i .e. slender-waisted.
ta nfi- ty aj a . abandoning the body, risk
ing l ife, brave.ta n t i , f . cord ; esp. a long line to wh ich
cal ves are tethered by means of short
ropes ; tanti'
,the same. [V 1 tan.]
th e th read, i.s. course, of a sacr ifice.
[V 1 tan .]th n t r a ,
n. th read ; warp of a web ; j ig.
fundamental doctr ine ; division of a work.
[V1 tan.]V ta nd (Mndate ) . relax, grow weary .
ta n d r i , j 2 fatigue. [Vtand, 1 188c.]t a n d r i ta , a . wearied, only w. a [tandr i , 1 1 76b.]
ta n n im i ttam ,-ena , see nimitta. [tad ]
ta ny a tu, m. thunder . [V2tan.]V ta p (Mpati, -te tatitpa, tepé [794e] ;sti psit ; tapsydti ; tapta; taptum ; taptvi ; -tapya ; tapyate, tepyate- 1 . be warm ; bur n, intrans . ; — 2. h eat ;
make glowing ; burn, trans. ; — 3.fig. ( likeVguc) , distress, pain ; — 4. pass. snfier ;
suffer voluntar ily , castigate one’s self, do
penance. [cf . Lat. tepEre, AS. befian,‘ be
upa heat ; become sick ; sicken, used
impers., w. acc. of the person,s am , heat ; pain.
ta pa h -p r a b h av a , m. emcacy of devo
tion.
tap a s , n. - 1 . heat, fire ; - 2. voluntarysufiering (see tap 3, self -castigation,
self-torture mortification, asceti
cism , devotion. [Vtap.]tapa sv a n t , a . ful l of devotion ; pious.
[ l 233a.]ta pa s v i n , a. the same.
ta p o -j a, a . asceticism-bom , whose ele
ment is asceticism . [tapaa ]V tam (timyati , -te tatima ; stam
at ; ti nts become darkened, of
the eye ; become power less, deadened,
stupefied, numb, or inactive. [orig. mg,
prob.,
‘ be dark,’see tamas : cf.“min-i .
darkness,’Lat. tenebrae, stemsrae,
‘ dark
ness,’ Old High Ger. dinsta r ,
‘ dark’
; Old
High Ger. de‘
mar,
‘ dusk,’Ger . ddmmern,
become twil igh t,’but not Eng. dim.]
t i m a s , n. — l . darkness ; — 2. spiritual
darkness, infatuation ; 3. darkness as
one of the three pervading quali ties of al l
existence, see gnna 3. [V tam ]tam o -n i sth a ,
a . resting or founded on
darkness.
tam o -nn da ,a . darkness-dispel ling.
t am o - b h fit a ,a . dark, enveloped in dark
ness. [ lit.‘ become darkness,
’
tamas :
1273c.]tar a ,
m. crossing, passage. [V143]t a r am- g a ,
m. wave ; wave as subdivision
of a work entitled ocean,”
of. 451 N.
[l it.‘ wh ich goes crossing the water
’:
taram , grd of Vtr, 995, cf . 1250a.]t a r ani , a . pressing onward. [V tr, 1 159b.]t a ru, m. tree. [prob. a modern form of
di m , q.v.]t a r u- k ota r a , n. tree-hol low.
taruna , a . young ; tender ; -ka, n. sprout.
[cf . r e'
pnv,‘tender ,
t a r u- ta l e , under the tree , see tala.
V ta r k (tarkfiyati tarkayim
ass ; tarkayisyfl i ; tarkita; tarkhyi tum ;tarkayitvd ; 1 . think over ,
reflect, — 2. form an idea of .
[orig. mg, turn,
’and so ( l ike Lat. volvere
animo) , turn over or revolve in one’
s
mind’: cf . tarku,
‘spindl e
’
; rpt’
tr -m, Lat.
torqueo,‘ tum Old High Ger . drdhsil,
turner ,’
Ger . drechseln,
p r a , form a conception of .
th r h i , adv. at th at time ; th en ; yadi
tarhi , if then. [pron . root ta, 497,
t a l a , m. n.- 1 . surface ; -tal e, at end of
cpd, equiv. s imply to on, 46" —2. the
surface or place under an object, e.g. a
tree ; -tal e, at end of cpd, equiv. s imply to
under , — 3. sometimes otiose in
cpds, e.g. nabhas-tala, sky-surface, i .s.sky .
t i l p a , m. couch ; bed. [for sstar -pa , V str,1201 i end : for mg, see under str.]
ta l pa -
giv a n , f . -var i'
, a . lying on beds .
[ 1 169.ta v i sh , a . powerful . [Via], 1 197b.]t i sk a r a , m. robber .
th em at , adv. from this (cause ) , hence ;therefore ; yad tam i t, since there
fore. [pron. root ta , 1 1 14a.]t i t a , m. used in voc. s., to a f a ther , but genera lly to a j unior or an inf er ior , my dear
[cf . tata.)tad i tn i ,
adv. then. [perhaps instr . ( l 1 12d )'
of staditna , and this fr . stadi -tua,‘of that
time,’and this fr . stadi ( l 245e ), correl . of
M ]
{£ 8 1}n 7 fil t h -“ f
!fl ~ c
[tiryaktva
tad f g, a . such . [see 518 : for declension,see dtq.]
tad i'
ca , a . such . [seetap a sA, m. ascetic. [tépaa ]tam a s a ,
a . dark ; per taining to darkness
or the guns.cal led tamas . [thmam]tay ri , m. thief. [cf. sté yu.]t i r i , f . star. [form of transition to the
a-declension (399 ) from tr, see under
Btt-Jt i v a c - ch a ta , f . -i , a . h aving or embrue
ing so many hundreds. [tavant ( 1249a )
caus.]t i v a t - k r tv a s , adv. so many times .
[tavant, l 249a.]tdv a n t - 1 . adj . so great ; so muchso many , extending so far , 101
°
lasting so long, correl . to. yi vant,— 2. ti vat, as adv. so much ;
so far ; to such an extent, so long ;
for a whil e, yavat ti vat : as long
as so long, 32 3, when th en,
just as then, 227; ti vat yi vat,
so long as,- 3. at once ; now,
24 53" - 3a. w. l st per s.pres. ind.,
first, before doing any thing el se, at once ,
38" 3b. to. imperative : at
once, ti vat tatas or paccat, first
th en or afterwards, 38 ‘ - 4 . con
cessively, iha samaye, ti vat, in th is case,
one must admit, 4 1lo; - 5. emphasizing,
l ike ova , what precedes , 25 7. [pron.
root ta,
t i g n a, a . sharp. [Vtij ,V t i j (tojéyati ; tejaydm i sa ; tents ) . be
sharp. [orig. s atig : cf . or lfw, prick,’
M ‘7 -pa, prick Lat. iv-stigii re, prick on
Eng. stick,‘to
t i th i , m.f . a lunar day (of wh ich there are
15 in a half-lunation ) .t i r ds ,
— 1 . prep. th rough ; across ; —2. as
adv. crossways, sideways ; aside ; w. hr
[171 put aside, treat disrespect
ful ly , sco ld. [V tr,‘cross
’: cf . Lat. trans,
ti r a s -k i r a ,m. a scolding. [Vkr + tir as
171
t i r y a k tv a , n. condition of a beast.
[tiryak, middle stem of tiryafic, 1249a
1 l
ti ryaiic]
t i r y afic [409d], - 1 . a. directed across ;
horizontal ; —2. as subst.m.n. beast (goinghorizonta l ly , as opposed to man ,
who walks
uprigh t— firdhva ) ; - 3. acc. s . n. tiryak,
as adv. across. [tir as or tir , w.afic, 409d :
tir , like tir as, is akin w. Vtr.]t i l a,
m. — l . the sesame plant, Sesamum
indicum ; —2. its seed, wh ich is eaten,
and furnishes good oil .t i er , f em. to tr i, see 4820.
t i r a , n. shore or bank. [prop.‘
place of
crossing or going into the water ,’Vtr.)
V tu (tavi'
ti tfiti va have
power ; be strong. [orig.‘swel l
, grow’:
cf . fi lo-An,‘swel l ing, lump,
’Corcyraean
r t‘
i-po-s,‘ mound
’
; AS. bitma , the big
Eng. thumb ; further , trim-r s,
‘ fat, strong’
; Lat. tum-ulus, mound,
’
tum-or ,
ts , pcl . never at beg. of sentence. - 1 . so.
imperative, pray ;— 2. in sooth , 78 - 3.
but, 8 26 34 etc. ; on the other hand,
tu ° ° tu, on the one hand ° °
on the
other, so tn,° tu, na tv
eva tn, but by no means, ki
kirh tu,
nevertheless, — 4 . used loosely as
equiv. to ca, gnen as a mere expletive
[1 122a e.g.
tn , pron. root qf 2nd pers , see tvad.
tuc , f . progeny . [cf . toka.)Vtud (tudhti ; tutbda ; tunna) . str ike ;
push . [ci . r oasts,‘The Hammer , Martel
’
;
Lat. tundo, tu-tud-i ,‘str ike, struck
’
; Goth .
stautan, Ger . stossen,
i , strike at, pick at.
V tur (tur hti, -te ) . press onward swiftly[subsidiary form of Vt; (242) and al l ied
w. V tvar .]l tur d , a . - l . swift, esp . of horses ; -am,
as adv. swiftly , in tur amga ; - 2. quick,
ready , wil l ing, 78 [Vtan ]2 tur d ,
a . strong, migh ty, [V tu,
tn r amg a , m. horse. swiftly going,’
tnr arn ga, see 1 tura : for mg, cf .
tur i y a , a. fourth . [for sh tar -ia : eater ,
V tul (tol i yati tolayfim i sa tolayisyati
tol itt ; -tolya ) . - I . raise up ; - 2. esp.
raise up a thing so as to find its weigh t
weigh - 3. counterpoise — 4 . equal .
[orig. mg, bear , i.s . hold up in the cog
nates, the rug‘ bear , i.s. endure appears
cf. Lat. tul-i, endured Goth . bid-an,Eng. thole
,
‘endure
’
; Ger. Ge-dul-d,‘en
durance’
also l -r An-v,‘ bore,
’” All-TAILS ,
much enduring’
Lat. la'
tus, add-tits ,
tul i , f . balance ; weigh t ; equal ity . [Vtulcf. Anglo-Indian tola
, about 180 grains
troy : cf. r dl tar r ov,‘ balance, weight
’
]tul ya , a . keeping the balance wi th ; equal
to ; like. [tum 1212d 4 end.]tul y i k rt i , a . having like appearance ;
al ike ( th e )tuv i , a . in cpds. mighty ; much ; many.
[Vtu,tuv i -b i d h a, a . distressing many (onemics ) or besetting ( them ) sore.
tdv i sm a n t , a . mighty . [tuvis.]tuv i a , n. in der ivs. migh t. [Vtm 1 153 ]V tut (“t 4 0 : tntésa ; tutti ; tbs
tum ; -tusya ; tosdyati ). become quiet ;
be satisfied or pleased ; caus. satisfy ;gratify .
s am , caus. satisfy .
tusti , f . satisfaction. [Vtua]t i sai n , adv. si lently , in silence. [prob.fr. an obsolete otuapa , si lent,
’Vtus,
1 1 1 1d.]tr (tarati , -te ; tirati , -to ; tati ra, tea
-us[794e]; i tar i
'
t ; tar isydtd, -te ; tirna ; ti r
turn ; ti'
r tvd; -tirya ; tarayati ) . - 1 . cross
over (a water , the sky ) ; - 2. get across or
to the end ; get through , escape ; survive.
[ci . r ipp er , Lat. termtnus , boundary’
see Vtr i and tiras : for treatment of root
vowel , see 242 ]a v a , descend, esp. from heaven to
earth ; come down, esp . of divine beings
who become incarnate as men ; aligh t ; be
take one’
s self to ; caus . take down or 06 .
ud come up out of the water.
abby -ud , come out of the water unto,
cross the water unto, 89
+ p r a , take to the water ; start on.
v i , cross th rough ; traverse.
t i"
, m. star , see str.
tr ikal aj iia]
t r i k al a -j na , a . knowing present, past,
and future ; omniscient.
t r i - d a ga [decl ined l ike ki ma, m. pl .
the th ree times ten, the th ir ty , a name in
tv a d so-called stem [494] of 2d pers.
pron. thou; see tvat. [w. the real root tn,
cf . Doric r é, Lat. til, AS . 5172,Eng. thou,
Ger . du,
round numbers for the 33 deities ( 12Adi t V tv a r (tvarate ; tatvaré ti'
irna [cf.957b],
yas, 8 Vasus , 1 1 Rudras, 2Acvins ) , i.s . the tvaritb ; tvardyati ). hasten tvar ita,
gods. [tr i daga , 4770 : cf . tr inqatJ having hastened, in haste. [see VVtur , tr.]t r i da ge qv a r a ,
m. pl. lords of the gods, tv a r i , j 3 has te. [Vtvar .]i .s . the four chief gods , Indra, Agni , Vap tv é str , m.
— l . wr igh t, workman, 75° £1 444
2"
runa, and Yama. [iqvara.] - 2. Twash tar , the artificer of the gods” 1 4 9W.
t r i - d i v a, n. the triple or th ird i.s . h ighest former of fruit of the womb, giverheaven . [div, 13150 : 1312 of growth and long l ife fath er of 17/ °
t r i - dh i tu,a . having th ree parts, tr i
-par Sarany t
‘
i [V tvaks,tite, th reefold. [acct, l 300c.] tv i v a n t , a. l ike thee. [tva,
t r i -p ad a , f . -i, a . having ( taken ) three tv i str a, m. descendant of Twash tar.
steps .
t r i - r i t r i ,n. space of th ree nigh ts , tri
noctium . [t i ttL 1315b, cf. the
Eng. usage in sen-night,f ort-night]t r i - v i dy a,f . the three sciences, i .s.Vedas .
[ 1312t r i - v i d h a ,
a . of th ree sorts, threefold.
[vidh i , 1302c5 : acct, 1300c.]t r i - v rt , a . threefold, tri-par ti te . [
‘turn
ing thr ice, with th ree
t r i - v ed a , in cpds and der ivs.
Vedas. [ 1312
t r i - sa v a na ,a . pertaining to the th ree
Soma-pressings ; -am , adv. at morning,
noon , and evening. [savana.]t r i s , adv. th rice. [see tri : cf . r pls, Lat. ter ,d ers
,
‘ th rice Eng. thr ice is a gen. form ,
cognate in root only.)t r i i v i dy a , n. study of the th ree Vedas.
the three
t r i i v ed i k a ,a . relating to the three
Vedas . [tr iveda , 1222et r y -a d h i sth ii n a ,
a . having three mani
festations.
bv i », pron. stem of 2d per s., see tvad.
V tv a k s, work, principa l ly in der ive., andident. w. tal ; .
tvac , f . skin .
tv aj -j Er a ,m. thy paramour . [tvad, 494 ]
tv h t , abl . qf tv‘
a, and used in place of tva
in cpds by H indus written tvad, q.v.
tv a t -k r te , for the sake of thee. [ 1314f ,1 130: tvat represents the stem tva, and
in gen. relation.]
dd , vbl . giving, in cpds.
V da ng or dag (dagati dadanga ;
dak si na , a .
[tvastp ]
[V 1 di , 333,
M iam i ; dam ; daflstvi :bite. [cf. bdrm ,
‘ bite’
; Goth . tchj an,‘rend,
da nqa , m.-fly. [Vdanc.]
danstr a , m. large tooth ; tusk ; fang.
[Vdafig, 1 185b.]da nstr i n , a . having tusks or large teeth .
[damn ]Vda k s (m ate ,
-ts ; sm i te; sm it
yate ). act. sui t ; mid. be able or dexterous
or strong. [ci . daksa and daksina ]dakaa , a . able, dexterous, strong ; as m.
abi l ity, facul ty , strength , power ; esp . spir
itual power , wil l ; daksa and kr atu, wil l
and understanding (as faculties of the
manas, [Vdaks: cf . Steals, clever ,
righ t,’and daksina.)
l . clever , able ; and so
- 2. (as opp. to awkward, gauche ) , right,of the hand, hasta , e.g. so pi ni,
foot, pi da, side, parqva,- 3. southern (because in prayer th e faceis turned eastward : cf . uttara 3 ) ,se. agni , southern fire, 102
°rt. ; — 4. as j ,
dakaini , se. go, the able, i .s . fruit cow,
milch cow ; milch cow as the customaryreward for conducting a sacrifice ; then,— 5. in general , any reward or present for
the sacr ificing priest, see so
— see also adv. daksini . [Vdaks z cf .
Steals, Lat. dexter , clever, righ t Goth .
[ 167]
taihsva ,‘right hand from daksina in d i n t m. tooth . [c
'
f . bal m-a, Lat.
mg 3, comes Deccan, name of the country dentem, Goth . tunhua, AS. to'
ii, Eng . tooth ,
south of Hindustan, l it. the Old High Ger . sand, Ger . Zahn,
da k si na -p a qc im a ,
a . southwester ly. dan ta , m. tooth . [dant,d ak si na -
pfir v a a . southeaster ly . V d a bh or dambh (dAbhati dadi bha ,
da k si nd,adv. souther ly toward the daddmbha , debhus ; adabhat dabdha
south . [dAksina z acct, 1 1 12e.] dabdhum ) . harm with guile ; hurt ; deceive.
da k si nag n i , m. the southern fire, dab h a , m. deception . [Vdabh ]cf . 102° x. V d am (di myati di n“ [955a]
d a k si ni p a r a a . southwester ly . dami tvi ; -dan ya ; damayati ) . - 1 . be
[M m apara .) tame ; - 2. tame ; conquer ; become mas
dak si na- p r a v ana ,a . sloping to the ter ; control . [cf. sands , Lat. domiire,
south . [daksinL adv .) tame’
; Eng. tame, Ger . zahm,
da k si ni bh imuk h am . facing south erly . dam , n. house. [cf . 86 ,‘ house
’: see
[daksini (adv .) abhimukha .] under dama ]da k si ni y a n a ,
n. south -course (of the dam s ,m. n. house, home. [cf . 86mg, Lat.
sun ) , or the half -year from the summer to domus, house, home’: it is not certain
the winter solstice. [daksina ayana .) whether dams. comes from Vdam and so
da k si ni r any a , n. the southern forest means l it. ‘ the place where one is mas
(a forest in the Deccan ) . [daksina ter , one’
s Gebiet,’or whether it is to be
connected w. Slaw,‘ build ’
: in th e latter
dAk si nav a n t , a . abounding in gifts to case, it would mean l it., l ike Ger . Bau,‘a
the priests, i.s. (from the point of view of buil ding,’and should be connected w.AS.
the pr iests ) pious. [di ksini t see dak timber , d eme a ,
‘ building-material , a build
ing,’Eng. timber
,
‘ bui lding-material ,’Ger .
da gdh a,a . - I . burned ; — 2. pained, tor Z immer ,
‘ building-material , a building, a
tared 3. wretched, good-for-nothing,
cursed, damned. [ppl . of Vdah : for mg 2, d am a,— l . a . conquering, at end qf cpds ;
cf .Vgue.) as m.— 2. Dams , i .s. Victor , name of a
da gd h od a r a ,n. one
’s cursed bel ly. son of Bh ima ; — 3. self-contro l . [Vdam :
[dagdha udara.] cf . fin d-M c, Horse-tamer ,’etc.)
danda,m stick ; staff (of Brahman ) , d am a n a ,
— 1 . a . conquering, at end ofmace , rod as symbol of dominion cpds
— 2.as m.Damana, i .e.Vincent, name
and punishment. [cf . strap ”, of a priestly sage, and of a son of Bh ima.
danda -b h a y a , m. fear of the rod. [Vdam : cf . Lat. dominus,
dandi n ,a . bearing a staff ; as m. warder. d am a y a n t i , f . Damayant
‘
i , i.s . Victoria,
[danda .) name of Bh ima’s daugh ter . conquering
da t td ,a . given ; as m. (a son ) given (by fr . Vdam,
his parents to others for adoption ) ; com dhm - p a t i , m. master of the house ; as
man at end of proper names, esp. of Va iqyas. dual,master and mistress, man and wife ;
[ppl . of V l di , 955c.) pair . [acct, l 267a.)dadr h , a . firm ; dadh f
'k, acc. s. n.,as adv. dam bh a ,
m. deception. [Vdabh .]firmly . [Vdrh ] V da y (dayate ; dayim i sa ; dayita) .
dadh dn n. sour milk ; curds. [orig.,
- 1 . part ; al lot ; — 2. take part i n; sym
perhaps,‘ milk,
’fr . V2dh i .) pathize with ; have tender feeling for ;
d hdh i , supplementary stem to dadhan. love ; — dayita, loved, dear ; as f ., -ti ,
d adh i -k a r na , m. Curd-ear , name of a wife. [for 1, cf . xpéa bale're,
‘
parted,
cat. [‘ having curd-ears, i.s. ears as whi te carved the meat
’
; for 2, cf . Bal t r at dr op,as
‘ heart is divided or takes part in i.s .
d adh fk , see dadrh .
daya] [ 168]
d a y i , j . sympathy ; compassion. dagdhvd ; -dahya ; dahyate ). - I . burn
da y al ti , a . compassionate. with fire ; ham ; — 2. pass. : be burned ;
d a y i v a n t , a. compassionate. [day i ] be pained or tortured ; -3. dagdha, see
d a y i ta , see Vday.
d a r a ,m. cleft, hole. [V1 dr.)
d a r i d r a , a . wander ing about ; mendicant ;
poor ; as m. poor man. [fr. intens . of
Vl dr i ,‘run about,
’1 147b ° : for mg, cf .
Eng. tramp , in its Ameri can sense of
vagrant beggar -3d a r p a , m. wil dness ; wantonness ; impu
dence pride. [Vdrp.]d a r bh a, m. grass
-tuf t ; grass used at sacr i
ficial ceremon ies, esp. Kuea-grass, Poacynosuroides. [Vdrbh .]
d a r ga ,m. sigh t ; the moon when just be
coming visible ; the new moon ; the day
or festival of new moon. [V tire.)d a r qa k a ,
a . - I . seeing ; —2. (fi .
showing, making clear . [drg ]d a r qa ta, a . to be seen ; vis ible.
1 176c.]dar ga n a , a . seeing ; as n. the beholding,
sigh t ; the becoming visible, ap
pearance, [Vdun]d a r qa -p t
’
i r na -m as d , dua l m. new and
ful l moon ; the days and the festivals ofnew and ful l moon .
d 698. num. ten. [cf . Gina, Lat. decem,
Goth . ta ihua, Eng. ten, Ger . zehn, ten
Eng.-teen in sir -teen, etc.)
d a qam fl, f . -i, a . ten th ; dagami, se. tithi ,tenth day of a lunar half-month . [daea ,
d a qa- qa ta , n. ten hundred ; a thousand.
daqa q i k h a , a . having ten branches, i.s .
fingers. [déqa qakh i z acct,d a qa, f . th e th reads projecting at the end
of a weft, fringe ; lamp-wick ; j ig. wick of
l ife, course of l ife ; time of life.
[di vad a qi h b , m. space of ten days.
2aha , 1312
V d a s (dasyati ; dadi sa ; adasat ; dasta ;dasayati ) . sufler lack. [cf . Vdi s, dasya :also bl oc,
v i , become exhausted.
[Vdrs.
dd, vbl. giving, in cpds.
d i ta v y a , grdv. dandus . [Vl di ]
s.v. [for sdhagh : cf .Goth dags, AS. dag,
Eng. day, Old High Ger . talc,
i , in i dahana.
v i , injure by burning,s am , consume.
I da (dhdi ti , dadati dadi d, M
“at, i di ta di syati , -te ; dattb
[955c], -tta [ 1087e] datum ; dattva ;-di ya ; diyate [77oh ] dftsati [1030]di payati ) . give ; bestow ; grant ; impart ;
to. ace. qf thing and dat. or gen., later also
loc., qf person, 1 varam d’g
grant a wish ; qi pam (13 , (give, i .s .) pro
nounce a curse ; si ubh i gyarii di , (give,i .e.) wish conjugal fel icity ; di , (give, i.s.)sel l , to. instr . of pr ice, uttararh dimake answer ; qr i ddh arh din perform a
qr i ddh a , punar dd, give back ;- destd. desire or be ready to give. [cf.
Lat. da-re,
a nu, ( l ike Ger . nach o
geben,‘
yield,’and
so) grant, admit ; ppl . anutta [1087e], adm itted.
i , take (opp. of give ) , grasp, 70°
i dt'
tya ,having taken , equiv. to with .
up ava, receive, appropriate.
p a r i , del iver over ; commit ; enu'ust.
+ p r a , give ; grant ; impart (sciences ) ;
p .pl f . pratta [1087e], given in marriage,married.
2di . (dyati [761d 3] ; dadé ; seat, flditadint [957a], -tts [1087e] d i ya ;
diyhte) . cut. [cf .Vday , days .)+ a v
,
a , cut ofi, esp . a part of the sacrio
ficial cake ; ppl . avatta [1087e], as subst.
th at which is cut off .
+ s am - a v a , cut in pieces and col lect
th em ; ppl . samavatta, as subst. gathered
pieces.
ed s (dyati [761d3] cuts [954c] d ays ;diyAte ) . bind. [cf . 86m,
[Vl di'
u]
das y a , m. demon, foe of gods and men. dfitr , m. giver ; as a . generous,
[cf .Vdas , asst ] 4s t. [V1 da.]Vs t ami n a -m assing.doh6 ; ‘dh i k d i n t , n. giving, imparting ; gift. m as,
si t ; dhaksyhti ; dagdhd ; dhgdhum ; 1 150: cf .Lat. donum,
I .
w a p a , sh ow to, teach , instruct ; give ad
dis]
gui lty ) , accused Ger . zeigen, sh ow’
;
also AS. tdh-te,wh-te, Eng. taught, showed,
instructed’
; AS. tcicn,Eng. token .)
a p a , sh ow ; make a fal se show of .
v y- a p a , make a fal se sh ow of .
5 , point out to, give a direction to ,
direct.
sum - 5 , point out to, direct ; com
mand.
ud , point out ; aim towards ; uddiqya,
w. acc.,with an aiming towards, equiv. to
the prep . at, 26
vice to, advise.
p r a , point out, designate ; direct.
d i g, f . j ust l ike Eng. point, i.e. cardinal
point, quarter of the h eaven (N., E.
, S.,
sati n digas, eigh t regions (N.,E.
,
S .,W.
, and NE , SE., SW.
, 57
[Vdig,‘to
d i h (dégdh i ; didih é ; digdhA; -dikya ) .— 1 . stroke, touch l igh tly ;
— 2. smear ;
— 3. besmear , pol lute. [for adh igh : cf.
( an on,‘ touch ed
’
; Lat. fingo,‘ form , fash
ion ,esp . with the hand in soft material
’
;
Goth . do igs,‘ moulded mass of clay or
bread-paste Old Eng. dtig, Eng. dough.)s am , pass. (be plastered together , he
indistinct, and so) be uncertain , doubtful .d i (dideti [676] didi ya di
'
di
v isits ). shine, glance, gl eam .
d i k e (dikasts ; didiksa, didiksé ; hdikeista ; W r i te ; dfkaité ; dfkaitvi ;-dikaya ) . consecrate one
’
s self, esp. for
perform ing the Somasacrifice. [perhapsdesid. of Vdaks,
‘make one’
s self suitable
or ready’: 108g.)
d i t i , f . glance, flame, actual ly occurring onlyin su-diti . [Vdi , 1 157. 1a.)
d i d i v i , a . sh ining. [Vdi ,d i n h ,
a . scanty ; cast down , sad ; wretched.
d i n h t i , f . scantiness ; smal lness. [dina.)d i n ar a ,
m. denarius, name of a certain
gold coin. [borrowed fr . Lat. dé'
ndrius, a
silver coin worth ten asses.)V d i p (dipyate ; didipé ; dip“; 4 15mm ;
dédipti ; dipayati, -te) . blaze flame ;caus.kindle ; intens.blaze brigh tly ; j ig.be
radiant. [cf.Vdi .]ud , blaze up ; caus . cause to blaze up.
[ 1 70]
d i r g h a, a . long, in space and in time ;-am, as adv. — cofnp. drdgh iy i na, super l.
drdgh istha. [Vdr i gh : cf . toatxds,d i r g h a -k a r na , m. Long
-ear , name of a
cat.
d i r g h a - r av a , m. Long-yel l or Far-howl ,name of a jackal . (Their howl ing is bothlong
-continued and faro reaching.)d i r g h a - v a r na , m. a long vowel .
d i r g h a v a r nan ta , a . having a long
vowel as final . [anta .)V l d i v (divyati ; didéva adevit
devisyati dyiita dévitum -divya )dice ; play . [prop. di d, see 765 1 and
or ig., perhaps, throw,
’
cf. didyu.)i , in adevana .
V 2d i v (dévati dyiina [957a]dév itum devayati, -te) . lament. [prop.
di ii , see 7651and
p a r i , moan, bemoan ; caus. the same.
duhk h b ,a . miserable ; as n. misery , pain ,
sorrow. [ci . sukha.)duhk h i ta , a . pained. [dnhkha , 1 1 76b.]ducchun ii , j : calamity ; h arm. [dus
quna,‘ mis-fortune, il l-luck,
’
V ducc h un i y a (ducchuni yate) . seek to
harm. [ducchunt'
a
dur the f orm taken by dus bef ore sonants.dur - a t i k r am a , a . hard to overcome.
having a hard conquest,’
cf . 1304b.)dur - i tm a n , a . evil -minded ; bad.
dur -ga, a . whose going is hard, hard to
go through or to, impassable ; as n. dime
cul t place ; danger.
a r -j a n a , m. evil person ; scoundrel .
dur -dan ta , a . overcome with M obas m. Hard-to-tame (Avoslsnr os) , name of
a lion.
dur -n i v i r a , a .whose warding-OEis hard ;hard to get rid of .
dur -b a l a , a . of (poor , i .s .) l ittle strength ;feeble.
dur buddh i , a . of (bad, i.e.) smal l wit ;fool ish .
dur -b h dg a , a . il l-portioned, il l-favored ;4 , f . ugly woman. [acct, 1304b.)
dur -bh i k sa , a . ( time ) having its aims
getting hard, i.e. in which alms-getting is
hard ; as n. famine. [bhikst ]
dur -m afig a l a , a. of bad luck, bringingbad luck.
dur -m a t i , j 2 il l-wil l .
dur -m ad a ,a .badly intoxicated ; drunken .
[acct, 1304b.)dur - v i j ii ey a , a . hard to distinguish .
dur - v i pak a , m. evi l issue (of one’
s des
dur -v rtta , a . of evi l life, wicked.V dul (doldyati ; dol ith ) . heave upwards ;
swing. [cf . Vtul .)duv a s , n. gif t
[V 1 dr‘
i .)da v h s , n. perhaps same as duvas, but see74 10n.
V duv a s y a (duvasyati ) . reward with a
gift ; honor or worship (a god) with an
oflering. [duvaa ]i , perhaps bring or entice hither by
worsh ip, but see 74W N.
V dn s (“Wat-i ; M oat ; dusté ; dfiséyatl
[1042s spoil . [see titl e.)dug-k a r a ,
a . whose performance is hard,hard to be performed. [dus .)
dus-k r td , n. evil deed ; sin . [dus.)dusta , a . spoil ed ; bad, morally ; cross.
[ppl . of Vdus.)dus inseparable pref ix, characteri zing a thing
as evi l , bad, hard ; f orming an. action-nouns
cpds w. the same mg as if compounded w. a
fixture pass . ppl ., e.g. dus-kara , having its
doing hard, i .e. diflicul t to be done.
’
[cf .
Vdus : also 81m ,
‘ mis see 225
dus -ta r a , a . having its crossing hard,
hard to cross.
V duh (dbgdh i , dugdh é ; dudbha , duduhé ;hdhuksat, -ata dh oksy‘ te ; dug
oblation worship.
- 1 . m ilk ; then, general ized — 2. get the
good outof a thing ; — 3. extract ; - 4 . give
milk ; — 5. in general , give or yield any
[Vdre
V l d t'
i , subsidiary f orm q l di , in di vas,
duvasya. [cf. VVsthi and git w. their
equiv. col lateral forms athuand gii .)V 2d r
'
i , go to a distance, in diita and dfir h.
[cf. hcdenas,‘am at a distance from some
thing, fal l shortd i ddb h a , a . h ard to deceive. [
‘ whose
deceiving is hard’: for duzdabha , l .o.
dus dabha ,19911
dfita, m. messenger ; ambassador , envoy .
[V2dii, l l 76a.)d i r a, a . far ; as n. the distance ; — case
forms as adverbs : -am , to a distance , far
away ; -e, in the distance , afar ; at or froma distance ; i t, from afar . [V2dii ,
d ii r i -k r (diirikaroti ) . put far away ;
send off. [dfira,dfir v i , j : mi l let-grass, Panicum Dacty lon.
d t'
i l abh a , same as dudabha , Whitney 54.V l dr (drnati ; dada r a, dadre ; M i rsi
'
t ;
di rna ; -dirya ; diryi te ; dhrdar ti [l oo2b] ;darayati , di rdyati ). burst, trans. and
intrans . ; — caus . and intens . : spl it ; tear ,
w. gen. [cf . bipu, beipa ,‘flay
’
; AS. teran,
Eng. tear, Ger . zerren,
‘ tear , rend.
V 2dr (dr iyflte ; adrta ; drta ;used only to. a , see 773 [cf . V belt in so»SIAM ,
‘
glance at’
; AS. til ian,‘ be intent
upon , attend to, esp. the earth , i .s . ti l l ( theEng. till ; Ger . zielen,
‘aim at
’
; AS.
eor'B-tilia
,
‘earth til ler .
+ a , ( look at, 1 .e.) regard ; pass. be te
garded, i.s . respected.
drdh a, see Vdrh and 224a.
d i't i , m. bag of leather ; bel lows. [Vl drfor mg, cf . 84pm , skin bag or
V d t p (dtpyati ; M rpat ; darpisyéti.drapsyati drpth darpdyati ) . be crazed,
wi ld, proud, insolent, or arrogant.
V drb h (drbhati ; drbdhd) . make into
tufts.
good— caus .
,l ike si ,
mple milk , V d r q (daddrga, dadrqé ; ddr i kai’
h ddrsta ;extract. [for mg 2, cf . dp l k yeo
'aal v iva,
‘ milk a person
n i r , mi lk out of extract from .
duh , ubl . yielding, in ki ma-duh . [Vduh .)dub i t i' j . daugh ter . [derivationuncertain , 1 182d : cf . Ou-ydrnp, Goth . dauh
tar, Eng. daughter , Ger . Tochter , daugh
dr aksyati , -tc ; drsth ; dréstum ; drstva
4 41m .dram didrksate.durum )see ; behold ; pass. be seen ; be or become
visible ; appear ;- caus . cause (a person ,
acc., to see (a thing, acc., 35 7,
show (w. gen. w. i tmi nam ,
show one’s self, appear , pretend to be (e.g.
frigh tened, [present forms suppl ied
‘
7
ti re]
by l ac, q.v. : w. dadc a , cf. “Bop“ ,
‘saw
’: cf .Goth . ga
-ta rh-j an,‘ make a show
+ p r a t i , pass. appear over against one
or before one’s eyes .
+ v i , pass. be seen far and wide.
s am , behold ; caus . show ; 10. i tm i nam,
show one’
s self , appear , pretend to be (e.g.
dead ).
d i g [218 drk, dream, drgbhyi m ], 1 . vbl .
seeing, looking 2. as f . the seeing
drcé, as in] : for beholding ; - 3. in
cpds look, appearance. [Vdre]drqa , m. the seeing ; in cpds look,
appearance. [do.]the seeing ; W ye. as inf [97W],
for beholding. [do.]d tgy a , grdv. to be seen ; worthy to be
seen, splendid. [Vdrg, 9d3d.]d r sAd , j : stone ; esp . nether mi l l-stone.
draa d -up a l i , dual ] . th e nether and the
upper m il l-stone. [1253a, 1258 ]d rawn.ppl Od rt.q~v~
dr sta -pfir v a , a . seen previously . [equiv.
to purvamda ta, seed f sti , f . - 1 . seeing ; - 2. sense of sigh t ;
- 3. glance, look ;— 4 . view. [Vdrcz cf .
bipets,‘sense of
Vdrh (dtnhati , -te [mg 1 , cf . df'hyati,
-te [mg2, see Adrnh i'
t ;m am a] ;drnhayati ). - 1 . act. make firm or steady
or enduring establ ish mid. be firm
drdha [l l 76a], firm ; - 2. be firm ; - 3.
caus. make stable. [cf . Old Lat.f orc-tis,Lat.f ortis,
dr lh i , same as (ltd-h i , t h.Wh itney 54.d éy a , grdo. to be given or granted. [Vdi ,983m]
d ev i l , f . devi, — 1 . a . heavenly , 74“
927 ; as subst. 2. god, goddess ; - 2a.pl.
th e gods ( in later times reckoned as 33, cf .h 'idaca ) ; - 2b. vigve devi ls, al l the gods ;also al l-gods (a term comprehending into
a class al l the separate gods, cf :Al l-saints,and see vigvadeva ) ; 2c. devi, The God
dess , i.s . i a’
s wife, Durgi ; - 2d. -dova,
at end of Brahman-names, having as god,
so, e.g., gunadeva ; 3.m. manusya-deva ,
god among men, i .s . a Brahman , see
similar ly, - 4 . m. king, Bl fl o“;
[ 1 72]
so used of a l ion (32 15) or even of a jackal
j : queen. [perhaps fr . the noun
div ( l 2o9i ) z cf . Lat. dens ,‘
god’: the al
leged root div,‘shine,
’has no existence ]
d ev i -k i m a , a. having love for the gods.
[acct, 1293dav at i , f . got or divin ity , both as
abstract and as concrete devati , instr .,
with divinity (collective ) , i .e. among deities,73”
d ev a t ,n. divinity , abstract only.
dev a -d i ta, m.messenger of the gods.
dev a -d i i v a ty a , a . having the gods as
divinity , (of hymns ) addressed to the
d ev a -pa t i , m. lord of the gods , i.s . Indra.
dev a -p t‘
tn a , a . serving the gods for
drinking. [lit. god-drench ing, i.e. gott
tr iinkend acct, 1271 , 1251c.]dev a -y i n a , wr path
'of th e gods, on wh ich
the intercourse between gods and men
takes place. [acct, 1271 , 1251c.]dev a r a , m. husband
’
s brother .
1209a.]dev a - r i j s , m. king of the gods, i.e. Indra.
[r i jan, 131 5s .)dov a - l i ti g a , n. god
-characteristic, mark
by which a god may be distinguish ed froma man.
dev a -ga r m a n , m.Devacarrnan or God's
joy , name of a certain Brahman. [of l ikemg is Oed-xaptsJ
dev a - s amn i dh i , m. presence of the gods.
dov t -h ii t i , f . invocation of the gods.
[acct,d ev i , see deva.
dev i - k r ta , a . made by Durga.dov i -k otta , m. Goddess-fort, name of a
town.
dev i -v i n i r m i ta , a . laid out by Durgi .
[V1 m i .]dev t in. husband
’s brother .
M p, Lat. le'
vir , husband’s
ds ga, m. 1 . (point, i.e.) place , 4 1 ‘3
- 2. country , see 98“ — 3 . place,
pregnantly, as in Eng., i .s. proper place,
225 ; — 4. as in Eng., place or region of
the body , see musk» , skandha [Vdig,‘
point’
ldeea -bh asa, j : dialect of the country.
[devt
[cf.
[ 1'
d r ut a , ppl . having hastened-am,
a s adv. hasti ly , rapidly ; quickly ; imme
diately . [Vdru.]dr um a , m. tree. [druzcf . 8p6p l s, ‘ aV d r um i y a hk nmi yate) . pass for a tree.
[drun a, 1058 , 1059b.]V d r uh (drdhyati ; dndrbha ; i druh at ;dhroksydti ; drugdha; drbgdhum ;
-drdh
ya ) . hur t (by deceit, wile,magic ) ; strive
to h arm ; ppl . drugdha as m. one who
has striven to harm , hurtful foe ; as n.
m isdeed. [if for odhrugh , cf . Old High
Ger . tr iaban, Ger . be-tr iigen, deceive so as
to
a b h i , offend against.
dv a [482b], num. two. [cf. 860, Lat. duo,Eng. two.)
dv amdv A,n. pair ; quarrel. [dvam-dvam
is th e repeated nom . s.n. of dva cf .
1252
dv a y a, a . twofold ; of two sorts ; as n.
couple, pair . [dva : cf . 8016s,d v i d a qa [483 cardina l . twel ve. [dva
daqa , 4763: cf . 81:68am , Lat. duddecim,
d v i da ca, f . -i, ordina l. twelfth ; dv idagi (se. tithi ) , twelfth day of a lunar
h a lf month , 59 [dv i,daQa , 487
d v i da qa- r i tr a ,
n . space of twel ve
nigh ts. [dvtdaga ratr i, 1315s, 13128 a]
dv ada qa- s a h a s r a , cardinal , n. twelve
thousand.
dv ada ga s ah a s r am . consisting of twelve
th ousand. [dvadaca-sabaat a , 1204c.]d v dr f . door . [perhaps
‘the clos
ure,’fr . Vdvr,
‘close,
’for sdhvr : cf .
‘ door’
; Lat. f or is, nom . a., door’
; Eng.
door .]dv i r a ,
n . door . [dv£r , q.v
d v ar a - p a k sa , m. side of th e door .
dv i , f orm of dva in composition and der iva
tion . [475
dv i j s , a . twice-born ; as m. member of
one of the th ree upper castes, re-born by
virtue of investiture (see Vui upa ) ,59 in a narr ower sense
,a Brah
man , 21 43
dv i -j anm a n , a . having double birth ; as
n . same as dvija ; man of one of the three
upper castes, 591. [acct,
4]
dv i -j i t i , a . and as m. same as
man ; man of one of the three upper
castes, 59‘9
d v i j ot t am a ,m. the highest of the twice
born , i.s . a Brahman. [dv ij a uttama.]dv i td , a . second. [dvi .]dv i t i , adv. just so ; so also ; equal ly .
dv i t i y a , a . second. [am 487 1215d.]dv i dh i ,
adv. in two parts , in twain.
d v i - pad a . having two feet ; as m.
the two-footed one, man, as n . sing.
that wh ich is two-footed, collectively, men ,
[cf . 8lt o8a, Lat. bipedem,
‘ bi
dv i -p a da , f . -i, a. having (taken ) twosteps.
dv i -p r a v r aj i n , f . oni , a . in f . goingafter two (men ) , unchaste, 98“
V dv i s (dvesti, dvisté ; didvésa ; ddviksat,-ata ; em s ; dvéstum ). hate show
h atred ; be hosti le. [cf . b-8ba -an o, be
came wroth ,’w. proth etic e.]
dv i s , vbl . hating, in cpds ; as f . hate ; as an.concrete, hater , foe. [Vdvis.]
dv i s , adv. twice. [see dvi, dva : cf . 81s,
Lat. bis , sdvis,‘ twice
’: the radical ly cog
nate Eng. twice is a gen. form ]dv i pa, m. island.
dv i p i - ca r m a n , n. tiger-skin. [dvipin.]dv i p fn ,
a . having is lands or is land-l ike
spots ; as m. leopard ; tiger . [dv ipa.]V d v r , cover , close, in derms. [see dvi r .]dv edh i ,
adv. in two, in two kinds. [forsdvayadh i , fr . dvaya, 1 104
dv é sa ,m. hatred. [Vdvia]
dv é sa s , n. hatred ; concrete, hater , foe.
[Vdvifl-J
dh a , vbl . bestowing, granting, in vasu-dha.
[V l dhi , 333 ]V d h a n (dadhdnti ) . set in motion. [cf.
dh an a , n. - 1 . the prize of the contest
not only the reward put up for th e v ictor ,
but a lso the booty taken from the foe
Vedic ; so w. Vj i, win booty by conquest,then
,- 2. in genera l , wealth , riches,
property , money . [t i ,‘
put’: cf . Gina,
th ing put up as a prize,’
and for the mg
also Ger.Ein-sats ,
[ 1 75]
dh a n n , m. bow. [fr . dhanus, a transfer
dh a nus- k anda , n.
to th e u-declension.]bow and arrow.
[dhanus z see l 253b.jdh dnus , a. how. [t an,
dh an y a ,a . weal thy ; fortunate. [dh an ]
V d h a n v (dhAnvati ; dadhanvé ; adhan dh a r m a - v i d a . knowing the law
vit) . set in motion ; run. [secondaryform of Vdhan.)
d h an v a n , n. bow. [t an , 1 169. 1a.]d h a n v i n , a . subst. having a bow, bow
Vman . [dh anvan , 1230b.]dh am or dhma (dhamati [750] dadhmi d ;
ts ; -dhmi ya ). blow , breath e out ; blow
(pipe, shel l , bag-pipe, bel lows ) . [see 108gand
a, blow up ; i dhmi ta, fig. puffed up.
dh a r a , a . hol ding ; bearing ; keeping ;
f '
weari ng. [t r.]h ar m a , m. — 1 . custom , usage,
righ t ; duty , virtue, 217,
(virtue, i .e.) good works,
correct course of conduct, 1 13;
dharme, in a question of righ t,
— 1a. dharmena , adv. : as was r igh t,
dutiful ly ,16 5 ; — 2. law ; prescription ,
rule ; the law (as a system ) , 285,
—3. personified, Virtue, 67l",48
[a post-Vedic word, taking the place of
V . dhérman : dh arma is f r . t r ( 1 166b ) ,
perhaps in mg 6, and thus designating
ancien t custom or righ t as‘that wh ich
holds its own , wh ich persists or endures
but it may come fr. Vdhr in mg 1 , so thatdharma is ‘
that wh ich is establ ished or
settled’
; in the latter case , cf ., for the
mg, aims ,‘th at wh ich is establ ished as
custom or law,
’w.
‘set, establish ,
’
and Ger . Cc-setz,‘ law,
’w. setzen
,
dh a r m a -j i i a a . knowing the law or one’
s
duty or what is righ t.
dh a r m a -j i l i a n , n. knowledge of the
law.
dh a r m a t a s , adv. in a way wh ich starts
from dh arma, i.s. in accordance Wi th good
usage , 59m; by righ ts, 61 [dharma ,
1098c K]dh ar m a n , n. establ ished ordinance ; stead
fast decree (e.g. of a god) , (mar
dh a v a l a , a . dazzlingly white.
[4 1 dh a
mani , according to the established order
of th ings, in a way that accords with
nature, [Vdhr, 1 168. 1c : see under
dharma.]dh a r m a -m l
‘
i l a ,n. th e root or foundation
of the law.
or one’
s duty , 1u‘; acquainted with good
usage, 61
dh a r m a -gi s tr a , n . author ita tive or os
nonica l compend of dharmw ; law
book ; laws haster .
d h a rm i tm a n , a . having virtue or righ t
as one’s nature ; just. [atmam]
V dh a v (dhavate) . run. [see under“11 11 ,and cf. Ol a , VOeF,
[V2dh i v ,
‘r inse,
’1 189,
l d h i (dadhi ti , dh atté dadh i d,
-te ; V. -dh ita, later bita[954o]; dh i tum ;dhitvi -dh i ya dh iyAte dfdh isati ,
dhftsati ;- 1 . put, set ; lay ,
- 2. put
in a place, bring to, w. tatra, w. loc.,
w. dat., - 3. put upon, di
rect towards ; dharme dh i manna, set the
heart on virtue, 667; - 4 . put someth ing
for a person i.s . bestow upon h im ,
grant him , RV.x. - 5 . put in
a position , i .e. appoint, constitute, w. double
acc.,- 6. make, cause, produce ;
- 7 . hold, keep, - 8 . mid. take to
one’s se lf, receive, obtain, win ; esp. gar
bham dh i , conceive fruit in the womb,- 9. mid. assume, 19 7 ; maintain ;
— 10. bita , sse s.e. , — 1 1 . desid. act. desire
to grant ; mid. desire to win .
[The original meaning of the root is‘
put’
; but, from the proethnic period, a
secondary development in th e line set,’
‘establ ish ,
’and so )
‘ make,’do,
’is clear .
The secondary mg has even won the more
prominent place in Germanic and S lavic.
For the primary mg, cf . put
( the paral lelism of its mgs is remarkable
— 0( o'
as Maw ,
‘they set a stone
’
; steam
y ids ,‘conceive a son ,
’etc.
, Lat. ab
de-re,‘
put off or away ,’and con-de-re
,
‘
put
together , construct, establish’
; Eng. do,
Vl dh i ]
‘
put,’in the contract forms dofi
'
,don, dup ;
Ger . weg-thun
,do away or put away .
’
For the secondary mg, cf . can !r wa Ba
s til l e,‘ make one a king
’
; AS . do'
n hine
t6 cyninge,‘ make h im a king
’
; Lat. f io,‘am made
’
; Eng. do, deed ; Ger . than,
do’
; Slavic dé-Io,‘ deed observe that
f t-er i,‘ become,
’is to fl-c-ere
,
‘ make,’as
iare (Vj a ) ,‘
go,’
is to j d-c-ere,‘ make to
go,
+ a n t a r ,- 1 . put into the interior of
a thing ; and so — 2. h ide, conceal .
a p i , put close upon ; cover (a jar with
its l id) ; apihita, closed up. [cf . ( in f low ,
‘
put
ab h i , put on ; put a name upon,desig
nate ; address ; speak to, say ,
abhih itam, ( it was ) said,a v a , put down in ; esp . duck (trans .)
into the water ; dvahita , fa l len into the
water ; caus . cause to be laid in .
i ,— 1 . put or lay or set in or on ,
w. loc.,
77 1 , 905,
— 2. put on
(wood on the fire ) , - 3 . mid. set for
one’
s self on ( the hear th a sacred fire ) ,- 4 . mid. put on one
’s self, take on,
— 5. take, i .e. take away , 87
+ v y- a, pass . be separated ; be uncom
fortable or sick .
+ s a m - a put upon ,w. manas, concen
trate the m ind upon one thing samahita ,
intent, eager , 1u
.
up a - s am - a , set together (wood ) unto
(an already burning fire ) , put (fuel ) on,
105
up a , put on (esp . a brick or stone
on the sacred fire-al tar or enclosure ) ,96 ° 6 .
+ n i , lay down , set down ( sacredfire ) , w. kr iyi m, put labor upon
take pains with , a lbi ta , put
down , lying low, 70
s am- n i , lay down together ; put to
gether pass. be near together ; san’
mi
hita , near , impending, 25‘5
.
+ p a r i , put around ; esp. put (part of a
sacrificial fence ) around (an al tar ) , 10513;
put around one’s self, put on, (garments )
(shoes ) clothe.
pur a s , see s .v.
[ 1'
6]
p r a , set forward. [cf.pradhana, pr adhana.]
v i , - 1 . part, mete out, distr ibute ;— 2. spread abroad,RV.x. 125.3 ; 3. ( likeLat. dispp6nere ) arrange, determine ; prescribe, 59
"vihita, orda ined, - 4 . lay
out, make, build , prepare, — 5. ac
complish , make, do ( in a gr eat
va r iety of appl ications ) , vadh am vidh i ,
do slaughter , slay , 32 iijam vidhi , do
or show honor , 2813; pr avrttim vidh i ,
make an advance into, as . loc., expose one
’
s
self to, npayam vidhi , employ an
expedient, 393; kim vidh eyam, what
’
s to
be done, tath i vidhi'
yati m , so let
it be done, yatha , tan may i vi
dh eyam,I must take such a cour se, that
cf.
gr a d , see gr ad.
s am , put together , unite ; embroil in,
w. loc., 73
dadban; i dh i t
dhasy‘ ti ; dh ita; dhatum ; -dhiya ; dh i
tva ) . suck ; drink , [cf.dadh i , dh snn
also Ohaar o, sucked yuan-onsets, mil k
sucking’
; Opp-M) ,‘ breast
’
; Lat. fi -lare,‘suck
’
; Goth . dadd-j an,‘
give
1 d h i ,in cpds. as vbl . bestowing, grant
ing ; a s subst. place. [V1 d.h i ,‘
place ,
sm nt’
]2 d h i , in cpds. as subst. drink. [V2dh i ,
dh atn , m. layer , as part of a composite
whole.‘
put,
dh i t f , m. establ isher ; creator ; Dhatar , as
name of a deity , 9o’s . [Vl dh i ]
dh an a ,a . holding, containing. [Vl dh i
dh an 5 , f .pl . corns, i.s. grain.
d h an ya,a . cereal as a. cereal
(noun ) , grain . [dh i ni ]dh ar ana , a . holding ; as n. a holding,
keeping ; wearing, 4 , f . establ ished
ordinance ; rule, [Vdhr.]d h fir i , f . stream , jet. [V1 dh i v ,
‘run ,
dh ar i s i r a ,111 . pl. stream-
pour ings, vio
lent pour ings. [i nfirm ]dk ar i n ,
a . holding ; possessing, re
tain ing, 68“. [t r.]
i dh rsl {1 783
‘ held or supported by (hence w. V dh v ans or dhvaa (dhvhnaati , -te ; da
rely ing on,’
fie-num,
‘ holder ,
+ a v a , caus. - 1 . set down , fix ; - 2. ( like
Eng. hold) assume as certain ,
dh r s (dhrsnéti ; dadhfim ; fidhm t ;
dhssiti . dhrsté z d htsya ; dh s rsdyati lbe bold or courageous ; dare ; venture ,
74 9 ; — caus . ventur e on some one or
something ; offend ; overpower ; dharsita,
overcome. [cf . Opes -61 ,‘ bold
’
; Lat.f a s
tus,
‘
pride’
; Goth . ga-dars
,AS. dea rr
,
Eng. he dare (al l 3d persons sing. of a
preterito-
present) AS. dors-te, Eng.
dare-L]i ,
venture against.
p r a t i , hold out against, withstand,
dh r snd , a . daring ; courageous , dough ty ,
78 7 ; bold, [Vdhra, 1 162 ]dh on d , f . milch cow ; cow. [V2dh i ,
‘suck,
’1 162 ]
,
dh ey a , n. the giving. [V1 dh i , mg 4,
‘ bestow, give’: 1213c.]
dh i i r y a ,n. firmness ; ear nest or resolute
bear ing. [2dhi'
r a,
V d h m i , see Vdham .
V dh y a (dhyi ti, dhyi yati [761d 1 ] ; dadhyi d adhy i si
'
t [91 1 ] dh yi syati
dhy i ta; dhyatvh ; d hyi ya ) think upon ;
meditate . [see t i'
and 108g.]+ a bh i , set th e mind on someth ing ;
sink one’s self in th ought, 57
dh y i n a , n. meditation. [t yi ,
dh y ii n a- p a r a ,
a . having meditation as
h ighest object, absorbed in contempla
tion. [l 3o2b.]V dh r a j (dh rdjati ; i dh r i j it) . dr aw on
ward, advance, intrans . [see Vdr i gh , ofwh ich this is pose. a col lateral form .]V db r n , collateral f orm of t vr.
dh rut i , f . a deceiving ; infatuation.
[Vdh ru.]dh r uva,
a . — 1 . holding or continuing,
i .s. remaining fixed in place ; as m.
th e pole-star , — 2. of abodes,‘
certain, safe, 79 ‘3. [t r in mg 6 : see
dh r uv i , f . sacrificial ladle, see
sr tic. [l it.‘ holder ,
’ Vdhr in mg 1 : see
dh vansa, dadhvasé ; adhvasat ; dh vasti ;— 1 . fal l to dust, per ish ;
dhvasta, exhausted, hurt, impaired ; — 2.
vanish , be ad ; - 3. only tn ppl . dh vaata,
bestrewn, covered over , esp . wi th dust.
[ci . Eng. dus-t ; prob. also AS. dwfis and
dysig,‘ fool ish ,
’Eng. dizzy, Old High Ger .
tasic,
dh v a f ua, m. the perishing ; destruction.
[Vd t .]V 1 d h v a n ( i dhvanit ; dhvi nth ; dh vanayati ) . — 1 . cover one
’
s self ; dh v i nta,dark ; - 2. become extinguish ed ; — ca 11s.
— 1 . envelope, cover over ; - 2. blacken.
[perhaps akin w. Vdhvafia : see dhfima :
cf . AS. dunn, Eng. dun,
‘ dark, brownish
V 2dh v a n (dh vanati ; dadh v i na ; dhvanthsound, resound. [cf . Old Eng.
dune, Eng. din.]dh v a n i , m. sound. [V2dhvan.]V dh v r (dhvdrati ) . bend or make crooked ;
cause to fal l ; harm by deceit. [seedh i rta and dh ruti : cf . AS . dwel lan
,
‘ lead astray , cause to delay ,’ Eng. dwell
,
intrans .,delay , l inger , abide Eng.dwaal ,
‘ wander , rave,’dwa le, stupefying potion
Dutch dwaal -l icht,
‘ ignis fatuus’
; Goth.
deals,‘ foolish ’
; Eng. dul l, dol-t ; Ger.
toll,
n a end . pron . root of 1 st person, see
aham. [w. nas,‘us,
’cf . mt,
‘ we two,’
Lat. no'
s,
n i ,adv. - 1 . not [1 122b], 3
’ - 1 a. in
connected sentences or clauses repea ted
simply 97 octies ; quinquies :
63“1 1, 71 ter ; bis ;
with ca : na"
, na"
ca , na ca"
,
na“
, na with api : see
api 2 ; with u, 21 — 1b. not repea ted,
but replaced by api ea or vivapi (see these) ,
- l c. combina tions : na ca ,
m t ca ,ni iva , saunasm
na vi i, na vi , na tn ,
na tv eva tn , see tn ; na ha , naJ va,
not exactly ,- 1d. tantamount to a
ia negative cpds as nacira, ni
tidi'
u'a, ni dhita, etc.
adversative clause : with adversa tive conj .,without, — 1 f. in em
phatic l itotes,— l g. substantive verb to
be suppl ied, 32°(anti ) ; — 1h . na pr ecedes
cod, tf it belongs to the protas is , tf it
immediatelyf ol lows cod, it must be j oined to
the apodos is,- 1 i. f or pr ohibttive nega
tive, see ma ,— 1j . na,
‘not,
’coalesces met
r ical ly in Veda w. f ollowmg mitic i vowel,
e.g. 83 9 ;— 2. like [see 1 122d and in this sense
Vedic only, 70 ctc. ; né,‘ like,
’
does not coa lesce metr ica l ly in Veda w.f ol
lowing initial vowel .
[cf . n r , Lat. net, negative prefix in
m gain’
-less, néEfas,‘not r igh t,
wrong’
; AS. and Old Eng. no,
‘not
’
; AS.
nii (ne ii ) ,‘not ever , never , no,
’
Eng. no ;
Eng. na in na thless,AS. 116 be
“
lass,
‘not
the less’
; Eng. n in n-ever , n-aught, etc.]
n h k i s , indecl . subst.pron .— 1 . no one, 78
—2. nothing, — 3. even as
adv. [see never , [uh kis ,
see 504 ° end.]n akul h , m. Viverra ichneumon, an animal
like the polecat, often domesticated, and
a bitter foe of serpents and mice.
nak ta , 11 . nigh t ; -am [l l l l b], by nigh t.
[ci . 1165, stem w ar , Lat. nor,stem nool i
,
Eng. night.]V n a k s (nhksati, -te ; nanhksa , nanaksb) .attain unto ; w. dyi m , mount up to
heaven. [col lateral form of V2naq,
nak sa t r a, n. — 1 . sidus, heavenly body ,
in Veda , of sun as wel l as of stars ; star ,
71 12 ; sing. collectively, conste l
lation ; —2. aster ism of the lunar zodiac,
[perhaps the stars are th ey that‘mount up
’to heaven, cf . V aska w.
dyam.]n a k h é ,
m. n. nail (on fingers or toes ) ;claw ; talon. [cf . drug, stem b-wx, Lat.
unguis,‘nai l , claw
’
; AS. nazgel, Eng. na il .]n ak h l a , a . having claws ; as m. beast with
claws. [nakha.]n h ga r a , n.
,and -r i , f . town , city .
n a g a r o pan ta , n. neighborhood of th e
town. [upi ntaJ
[Vm m
- 1 6. at beg. of n a - c i r a ,a . not long ; adv. [1 1 14c],
soon. [1 122b
n a ta , m. dancer , m ime, actor (these forma very despised caste ) . [Vurt.]
n ada or nul ls, m. reed. [Wh itney 54 : cf .2nadh and nala .]V n a d (nadati ; anni da , nods ; nudita;
-nhdya ) . sound roar bellow. [seeI uadh and nadi.]
1 n a da,m. the bel lower , i .s. bull . [Vnad ]
2 n a d i , m. reed, rush . [cf . nada ]n a d i , f . roar ing stream ; river . [Vnad : cf .Nita, Nibaw, names of streams ]
n an an dr f . husband’
s sister .
V n a n d (nandat1 , -te ; nananda ; nandis
yhte ; nandi ta; be glad.
a bh i , be glad in ; greet joyful ly .
nuuda n a ,a . gladdening ; causing joy ; as
m. son, as n. Nandana, or Elysium ,
the pleasure ground of the gods , esp . of
Indra, 49 [caus . of Vnand.]n a n d i , m. Th e Gladsome One, euphemia
tic epithet of the dreadful god, i a
Rudra. [Vnand : cf . giva.]n a n d i - d e v a , m. Nandideva, name of a
Brahman. h aving i a as his
h ap i t , napa m.— l . in Veda , de
scendant in genera l ; son ; grandson,
- 2. in Sht., grandson, [declension
in Veda, napi t, napatam , naptra, naptr
bhin, ctc. ; in Skt., napti , naptaram , nap
tr i , naptrbhis , etC. : see 1 182d : cf . r i t obsr,‘
young ones’
; Lat. nepo'
tem, grandson’
;
AS. nefa ,‘son
’
s son or broth er’s son
’
supplanted by Old French neveu (Eng.
nephew ) , which in Old Eng. meant ‘son
’
s
son’as wel l as ‘ brother
’s
n a p t i j : daughter, grand
daugh ter . [j l to népi t : acct, 35bb.]V n a b h (nabhate) . bur st ; tear .
n ab h a s , n. — 1 . mist, clouds ; —2. atmos
ph ere, sky. [cf. wipes, ”than,‘clond,
m ist’
; Lat. ni bes ,‘cloud,
’nebula ,
‘ mi st’
;
AS. nifal ,‘ mi sty , gloomy
’
; Ger . Nebel,
‘mist’: for mg 2, cf . Ger . Wolken and AS.
wolcnu,
‘clouds,
’w. Eng. welkin
,
n a bb a s - ta l a ,n. sky
-surface, i.s. sky ,
nam es]
yati ). bow bend one’s self ; aim
at a person (gen.) with nata ,
bowed down, bending over, 681’1L ; caus .
cause to bow, subdue ; namyate, is sub
dued, 31
a v a , bow down, 34"
it , bow down to.
ud , raise one’s self up, arise.
s am -ud , rise.
n i s , bend out ; contort one’s self.
p r a ,make obeisance before
n am e s , n. bow, obeisance ; adoration (by
gesture or word) ; reverence ; used al so
l ike the Lat. gloria in the Glor ia patr i
[Vnam.]n am a s - k i r i , m. a making of namas ;
adoration .
n am a s -k r (see do homage,
[1713, 1092a.]
V n am a‘
s y a (namasyati ) . pay reverence
[namas, 1063,nam n oi , m. Namuch i, name of a demon ,
foe of Indra, 81 97
n a y a n a , n. eye. leader, organ of sense
that leads ,’
Vui, 1 150. 1a for mg, cf .
i nana , gi tt a, carana, netra.]n ar a , m. man, ctc. ; at 57
5, the primal
man or spir it. [transition-stem fr . nr,
l 2o9s .jn a r a - n i r i , man and woman. [ 1253a.]n a r a -p a t i , m. lord of men ; king
n a r a - v i h a n a ,a . subst. having men as
his team ,drawn by men ; epithet and
name of Kuvera, god of weal th ; name
of a king, successor of Cal ivah ana.
n a r a v i h a n a -datta, m. Naravahanadat
ta, name of a son of king Udayana.
n a r a v i h a n a da tta - car ita, n. adven
tures of N.
n a r a v i h a n a d a tta car itamaya, f . -i‘
, a .
containing the adventures of N. [1225see maya.]
n a r a - v y i g h r a , m. man-tiger , i .e. brave
andnoble man . [cf .naragi rdiil a : 1280b.]n a r a - gi r dfi l a , m. man-tiger , i .e. best
among m en. [cf. naravy i ghr a : 1280b.]n a r a -
gr e sth a , a . subst. best of men .
n a r a - s ii nu, j : daugh ter of the primal
man or spir it.
n a r i dh i p a , m. lord of men , i.s. king,
prince. [adhipa ]n a r eqv a r a , m. lord of men, i.e. king,
prince. [igvarm]n a r o t tam a , a . subst. best of men. [uttama.)
n a r m a d a , a. granting or causing fun ;making gladness ; j : -di , Narmada (calledal so Reva) , the modern Nerbudda r iver.
[narman da .
n a r m a n , n. fun. L nah
],
n a l a , m. reed ; Nal a, name of a prince of
Nishadha. [cf .m s, Vedic nali ]n a l op i k h y i n a ,
n. Kala-episode,
[npi khyi na.]1 nav a , a . new ; of an earthen dish , (fresh ,i .s.) unburned. [prob. fr . nu, ‘
now,
’
q .v. :
cf. vi es, Lat. novus, Ger . neu, Eng. new.]2 nav a nuns. nine. [cf . b r ie, Lat.
novem, Ger . neun, Eng. nine.]n a v a t i f . ninety . [2nave. )nav a -n i ta ,
n. fresh butter . [perhapsfresh -brough t,
’as we say
‘ br ing the but
ter, i .e. make it come,’in churning.)
nav ed a s , a. perhaps wel l-knowing, cogui
zant of (gem ) . [apparently fr. auaflrmative par ticle na and vedas : see 1296 8
end.]1 n a q (n£qyati ; nanaga, needs ; enagatm fiksyati m tfi; M ys t». be
missing get lost vanish perish, be
ruined. [cf . vex-p63, dead’
; Lat. near,
‘ death’
; noc’
e'
re,
v i , ge t lost ; perish ; caus. cause to dis
appear ; br ing to nough t,
V 2n a g (nagati, -te ; nanaga ; anatattain ; reach , come up to, 74
1; w. accha ,
draw hither , 7 [see Vl ag,‘reach
’: cf.
Lat. nac-tus sum,
‘am h aving reach ed
’
;
AS. nedh, comp. neiir , super]. nea'
hst, Eng.
nigh, near (as comp., Macbeth ii.3.
next, AS. ge-neah ,
‘ it reaches, es reich t, it
suflces ge-no
'
h,Eng. e-nough.]
p r a , reach to, h it ; fal l upon,n as j : nose. [nom . dual
, ni si : cf.
Lat.nas-turcium,nose-teaser , nasturtium
na'
r-es,‘nostrils
’
; AS . nosu, Eng. nose ;
nos-tr il, nose-thri l l , nose
n a s encl . pron . f orm of 1 st pers. [ci .ml»,
‘ we two Lat. no'
s,
n indaka]
n i n d a k a , a . subst. scofier . [Vnid.nind.]n i b a n dh a n a , n. a binding, l igation,
th at on which a thing is fastened or
rests or depends, condition, means, 467.
[Vbandh ui .]n i bh rt a , a . (hom e down, lowered, i.e.)hidden ; -um ,
adv. secretly . [Vbhp ni.jn i m aj j a n a , n. bathing. [Vmajj + ni.jn i m i t t a ,
n. mark (for shooting at) ; sign,token ; occasion or cause ; -am ,
-ena, ad
verbia lly, because of tann imittam,-ena,
because of th is, on account of this.
h im osa, m. closing or winking of the eyes.
[Vmis ni .jni y og a , m. a fastening on injunction ,
and so, commission ; business, [V yuj
+ ni z for mg, cf . a l icui inj ungere laborem,
fasten or impose a task on a
n i r , f or ni s bef ore sonants see ni s.
n i r - a n t a r a ,a . without interval or free
space ; completely fil led, continuous ;
uninterrupted,
n i r - a p i y a ,a . without failure or danger ;
infal lible or safe.
n i r - a p ek sa , a . without regard or expec
tation regardless, not expecting
anything from another , independent, 31
tapers-s, aw .)n i r -am i sagi n ,
a . not meat-eating. [seenis
[182]
n i r - l a k sy a , a. not to be perceived,
avoiding notice. [see ni s 3.]n i r - v anga , a . without family ; alone inth e wor ld.
n i r - v i ta , a . windless ; shel tered.
n i r - v i cosa , a. without distinction ; undis
tinguished a like ; l ike.
n i r v i ce si k rt i , a . having like appear
ance, looking just al ike. [akrti ]n i v i r a , m. the warding OE.
cover ,’
ni .jul v i ta , ppl. hung, i.e. draped, with h ang
ings , esp . with the sacred cord as n.
[1 1 76s ], th e wearing th e sacred cord about
the neck ; the sacred cord itself . [Vvy ini l
n i v rtta , ppl .— 1 . turned away ; esp. of
an action which is turned away ,i.e. not
di rected (to any ul terior purpose or ob
jcet) , free from h0pe of reward in th is
wor ld or th e next, disinterested, opp. of
pravrtta ,—2. having turned away
from , and so abstaining from,29 3. [e t
ni.jn i v é ga n a , n. a going in and settl ing down
to rest ; resting-
place ; sleeping-
place, bed,
dwell ing, [Vv ig ni : for mg,
cf . bhavm ]n i g f . night. [cf .m .ln i gi , f . nigh t. [cf . nfg, nakta.]
[Vl vn
n i r ah ar a a . without food, abstaining n i eca y a m. (ascertainment, determina
from food.
n i r -uk ta , a . spoken out ; loud ; clear ;
as n. explanation ; etymological interpre
tation of a word ; esp.Nirukta, title of a
commentary to the nighantavas or Vedic
Glossary . [Vvac ni s.]n i r - rt i , f . dissolution ; destructi on. [Vt -1
nis, l 157. 1d.]n i r - guna , a . without a string, void
of good qualities, 18° worth less, bad.
n i r -ni m a,m. contortion,
[Vnam nis.]n i r - dh a n a ,
a . wi thout money .
n i r -buddh i , a . without wit, stupid.
n i r -bh a r a ,a . 1 . without measure ,
tion , i.s .) a fixed opin ion or a firm resol ve.
[poss. fr . V Sci,‘notice, but
better , perhaps, fr . V 1 ci h is. and so,
an un-pil ing, i.e. discrimination, determi
n i cca l a ,a . notmoving. [nis + cala : see
nis
n i gc i t a , ppl . determined, decided ; -am,
adv. decidedly, surely . [see under nig
sinuosity . n i hgr ey a s a a. without a superior , t.e.
best ; as n. final beatitude.
asa : acct,
[nis tr ey
n i hgv as a , m. breath ing out, expiration ;
sigh . [Vwas nis .]much ; -um , adv. very ; -am prasupta ,
n i h gv as a - parama , a . having sighs as
fast asleep ; —2. ful l of.n i r -m a l a , a . without impur ity ; pure ;clear.
chief thing, much addicted to sighing.
[ 1302b.]n i sa dh a , m.pl . the Nishadhans, name of
[1 83]
a people ; Nishadha, name of a country ,
1 1
n i sa dh i dh i p a ,m. ruler or king of the
Nishadhans. [adh ipa.]n i sfid a n a ,
m. finisher ( in its col loquial
sense) , one who makes an end of , de
stroyer . [V sfid ui .]n i es k a , m. an injecting, esp. of semen,
impregnation ; the ceremony per formedupon impregnation. [V sic ni.]
n i se v i n , a . devoting one’s self to ; co
h abiting with , 67 [V sev ni .]n i sk r am ana , n. the stepping out ; esp.
th e first going out with a child. [Vkr amni s.]
n i eth a , a. resting upon. [Vsth i + ni ,
n i sph a l a , a . fruitless, vain,
[nis pha la .]n i s , adv. prep .
— 1 . out, forth ; - 2. in
cpds [13052end], h aving away , with
out e.g. nirantara ; —3. in cpds, not,
e.g. nigcala.
V ni (nhyati , -te ; nini ya [800b], ninyb ;ani is
‘
it, anesta nesyati ,-te ; ni ts ;
nétum ; ni tvi ; -niya ; niyate ; ni yi yati
lead, guide ; conduct,carry , ctc. ; carry off,
vy i ghr att‘
uii ui , br ing to tiger-ness,change into a tiger ; vagamui , bring intoone
’
s power.
+ a nu, (dr aw along toward one, i .s.)try to win or concil iate by friendly words.a bh i , bring hi ther to.
+ 5 , bring to, bring, bring
(one l iquid) into (anoth er , mix, 101
caus . cause to be fetched,+ ud , bring up ; rescue (as a drowningman from the water ) , 90
1°
+ up a , take unto one’
s sel f, of th e
teacher who re ceives a youth of one of
the th ree free castes as pupi l , and at th e
same time invests him with the sacra
mental cord, thus conferring spir itual re
birth , and making h im a ful l member of
his caste see upani yana apanita, in
vested with the sacramental cord.
+ p a r i , lead around (a cow, steer ) , 91esp. lead a bride around the fire
(as wedding ceremony ), page 99.
[nil avarna
+ p r a ,- 1 . bring forward ; - 2. as l itur
gica l terminus technicus, convey the sacri
ficial fire and water to their places on and
near the altar ; pr aniti s (se. i pas ) , holywater ; - 3. bring forward (one
’s feelings ) ,
i.s. come out with or manifest one’s affection,
v i , lead ; guide ; train ; discipl ine.
n i vbl. bringing, in vagani . [Vni .]n i ca,
a . low, not h igh moral ly and
social ly low. [inorganic transfer-form
( 1209s ) fr. ni ts-s, q.v.]n i c t
‘
t , adv. down, low. [adverbial ly ac
cented instr .— instead of nic-i , 1 1 12e
fr . ny-afia ]n i c i -v a y a s a . whose strength is
low ; exhausted. [1306 ]n i d‘ ,
Vedic nfla, m. n. — 1 . (place for
settl ing down , i .s.) resting-place — 2. esp.
bird’s nest. [for ui-zd-a, i.e. ui-s(a)d-a
198b V and m cf. Lat. nidus,
Ger . Nest, Eng. nest : for 1, see Whi tney
n i da - g a r b h a , m. nest-interior .
n i t i , j : — 1 . conduct, esp. righ t and saga
cious conduct ; th e knowledge of al l thatWOT
[I {m il/“wgoverns virtuous and discreet and states
man-l ike behavior ; pol itical and social
ethics ; —2. leading. [Vui ,n i t i -j ii a,
a . knowing how to conduct
one’
s self discreetly .
n i t i - v i dy i , f . knowledge of ni'
ti or
pol itical and social eth ics, esp . as it con
cem s pri nces.
n i t i -cas t r a , n . doctrine or science of
pol itical and social eth ics.
n i tk a , m. a leading ; ni tha, n. (way , and
so, l ike the German Weiss ) a musical air ,song. [Vui
’
, 1 163a.]n i r a,
n. water.
n i r a s a ,a. sapless, dr ied up ; tasteless ;
insipid, [nis rasa, 174 ,
a f r a j , a. without disease ; heal thy ,
[ni s +n ij.1 74,n i l a , a . dark-colored, esp. dark blue ; as n.
indigo ; nil i'
, f . indigo. [hence, th rough
th e Arabic ou-nfl , for al-ntl , the indigo
plant,’come Eng. anil and anil ine.)
n i l a - p a ta , no. dark garment.
n i l a -v a r na , a. blue-colored.
n i l asar’
ndhfinabh anda] [184]
n i l a s amd h an a -bh i nda, n. vat for the n rmnh ,n. virtus , manl iness, courage ,
mixing, i.s . preparing of indigo. strength. [fr . n; ( l 224c ) , as virtus f r .
n i l i b h anda - sv i min, m. indigo-vat pro vin ]prietor. n r -
eans a , a. man-cursing ; mal icious.
n i v é r a ,m. wild rice ; sing. the plant ; pl . n e t a v y a , grdo. to be carr ied. [Vni ]
the grains. n e t r a , n. eye. leader ,’ V ni , 1 185s : for
n i l a,see nidfi. mg, cf . nayana.)
V nu (navate ; nuni va ; h aste ; nuth ;-ntitya ) . cry aloud ; shout ; exult ; praise .
+ p r a , murmur ; hum ; esp . utter th e
sacred sy l lable om.
m i , adv. — l a. now,at once, tempora l ;
— 1b.
now,continuative ; adh i nu, so now,
— 1 0. now, intr oductory,— 1d. so
then , in encouraging or summoning ;- l o.
now, pray , in questions, 51
— 2. asseverative : nakir nu, surely
no one or noth ing, m5.mi , i ts—order
«that surelyAnot,
— 3. w. rela tives :
ya nu, whatsoever , 74’yi n nu, i .e. yi t
nu, as long soever as, 79‘3
. [in V . oftennil : cf . mi, 7 1711, Lat. nun-c
,Ger . nu
, nun,
n ed ,adv. lest, in order th at not, w. accented
verb (595d) in the subj unctive (581c ) ,
[na + 111,n s dy a , grdv. to be blamed.
n em i , f . fel ly , rim . [nam,
n i i r uk t a , a . perta in ing to the Nirukta ;as m. an etymologist. [niruktg 1208f.]
n i i sa dh a ,a . pertaining to Nishadha ; as
m. prince of the Nishadhans, i.e. Nala.
[nisadhg 1208f .]n o,
adv. and not, no cod, and if not,
see cod. [at u.]n i u,
see 491 .
use [361a], f . boat ; sh ip. [cf . m ay, Lat. raw "!
ndvis,‘ship
’
; perhaps AS. naca ,‘skifi
’
5 fiv /AS. nu, nit
,Eng. now : see al so nava, perhaps
‘ the ” Incl-”Qua, cf , V ani t ] ( M
nii tana, mi ni m ] n y a g - r odh a , m. Ficus lndica, banyan em”
nud (nudati, -te ; nnnéda. nunudé tree. [‘ downwards -growing
’: 11c
h “m
w i th nob yéti. 4 6 ; nut“. nnn ( 1249a ) (1.M y : mm
ui ; -ntidya ) . push ; th rust.
+ p a r i , thrust away ; move from its
p lace.
p r a , push forward ; set in motion.
v i , drive asunder or away ; turn away ,
esp . from cares, l ike the Eng. di-vert ;
amuse. [for mg, cf . also dis-port and
s-port.]n n d a , a . dispel ling, in cpds. [Vnud.]nfita n a ,
a . of now ; recent ; young. [ati ,l 245e.)
n ii nam ,adv. now. [nti ,
n t [370, m. man ; h ero ; used
also of gods : of the Maruts,
[cf.M p, stem damp,‘ man
’
; Old Lat. nero,
stem nerdn, man ly , strong’
; Lat.New ]n r - cak sa s ,
a . men-beholding.
V urt (urtyati , -te ; annhrta ; i nartit ;
nil
itvi ). dance.
n rt i , f . dance. [Vnrt,n r -pa m. protector of men, i .s.prince,king.
n r -pati , m. lord of men, i .s. prince, king.
[acct, 1267s .]
n yane [4o9h ], a . directeddownwards. [uis ite,
n y i y a, m. — 1 . (that to which a thing
goes back , i .s .) rule, norm ; - 2. (that in
wh ich a th ing goes, i.s .) way ; — 3. esp.
the righ t way, propriety. [Vi ui ,
n y i y y a , a . regul ar , normal , righ t ; -am,
adv. righ tly ; proper ly. [nyi yfln y i s a ,
m. a putting down , commitment.
[V2” ni,‘th row
1 p i , vbl . drinking, in cpds. [VI pl ,2 p t , vbl . keeping, keeper , in cpds. [V2pi ,
p ak sa,m. — 1 . wing, —2. side, of a
door or of the hair of the head ; — 3. half,esp. of a lunar month , 27
1, 57 qf.kranap ,
gun» ; - 4. side, i.s. party , 87“
pak sa -h a l a , a. strength of wing.
p ak si n ,a. winged, as 111. bird,
tl1o.k
patigh ni ] [ 1 86]
master of’
; Goth .f ats in brat-j abs ,‘ br lde existence ; be produced ; utpannam s.n
nam, food (not cooked for the occasion,
pa t i g h ui , a . f . husband-s laying. [for but) al ready on hand, 104 ,l utpanne
mal ly a fem . to pati-han, ki rye, when the emergency has arisen,
p a t i tv a, n. condition of spouse ; wedlock. — caus. engender, produce ;
get, 42‘7
.
p a t i - l ok é , m. husband’s place, abode of + p r a ty -ud , in ppl . pratyutpanna,
the husband in the future life. ready or on hand to meet an emergency.
p a t i - s th an a , n. husband’
s place. + up a , fal l upon ; happen, take place,p a t i s t h i n i y a , a . belonging to or in 10010; come to, get at, reach ; upapanna ,th e husband
’
s place ; as m. husband’
s (having gotten at [952 i.s .) in posses
representative. [patisth i na , sion of , endowed with , 1 2
patt r a , n. - 1 . feather ; wing ; — 2. + p r a t i ,— 1 . step to ; enter upon, 66
1°;
(plumage of a tree, i .s.) leaf f or mg, of — 2. get into (a condi tion ) , get at,
parna ; — 3. a leaf for wr iting on ; a acquire, attain, 981°; get back again , 60
17;
written leaf, DIP“: Of : - 3. go to meet, and so ( l ike the Lat.‘ wing
’
; Lat. Penna and old Lat. 1m m! ac-cédere ) , accede, yield ; say yes to ; con
(for spetna ) ,‘ wing
’
; Ger. Fed-sr , Eng. sent
f ea th-sr .) V I , fal l asunder , come to nough t,
p a tt r a -gak a , n. leaf-vegetable, a vegs~
get into trouble.
table consisting ch iefly of leaves. 4. s am ,turn out wel l , succeed,
p é ta i , f “ 1 m istress, lady 3 " 2 thenprosper ;
—2. become, 45 47 — 3. fal l( l ikeEns lady ).wife [fem o to pi ti.inst together , be united with ; sampanna, cuas c h ina,
‘ lady ,
’is to r ims.) flowed with , 2 10.
p a tw t ah -ei a . lying at the feet pad m. foot. [Vpadzcfi Lat.
p a t sut i s ,adv. at the feet. [i r. patn i, ”214 m,
Eng.f oot.)loc pl of paid.1098b-J p ads ,
11. - 1 . step, 1721,
- 2. footp a th same as panthan. step ; — 3. foot, —4. standing-
place,
p a th a , f or path in cpds {13150} stead, place ; home, 56° station , position,
Pa th f same “8 Panthan 4 1 1 . [Vpl d t cf . n'bou, ground
’
; Lat.
p a th i - r é k si , 0 guarding the path s. op-
pedum, op-
pidum,
‘ town , (on or over the
[113 1 11113 11 1 12493 !“Ct, 1276 peda ,‘ footprint
’
; AS. f a t,‘step
p a th y a , a . (per taining to the way , course, going, journey,’whencef etian,
‘
go for ,or progress of a thing, and so) suitable, Eng f etch ]“711019 80109 ; pathyh f pathway . [path , p a dm a , m. n. lotus,Nelumbium speciosum121“1 1 (not the plant, but the flower, which closesV p a d (PM Y‘ t'O i papi da, P9“ at evening) .din t“ Patflyfi e i 4 1 ; panna p a dm a - g a r bh a , a . containing lotuses ;
[957d] ; pi ttum ; s tair s ; pi d‘ yati t Lotus-filled, name of a lake. [see garbha— 1 . go, step, tread, only w. prepositions 2.
and in der ivatives , —2. fal l , sink down p a m a - r i g a , a . having the color of a
(from fatigue ) , perish . [connection be lotus ; as m. ruby. [1296 ]tween 1 and 2 not clear : uncompounded p h n th a n m. road, path , way . [cf .
verb very rare see under pad and wdr os,‘
path’
; Lat.pant-em,
‘
path , bridge’
pada.) Eng. path and Ger . Pfixd, if they belong5 , come unto ; get into (a condition ) ; here at al l ,must be regarded as very ear ly
esp. get in trouble. borrowings, fr. the Greek w ir es, or poss.
v y - i ,fal l away, perish ; caus. destroy ; from the Scythian.)
p huth i same as panthan.
+ ud , go forth or out of ; come into pay a s, a. mi lk. [VpL]
[ 187]
pa y o -mukh a , a . having mi lk on the
face or surface. [payas ,
p t r a a . — 1 . far , distant, more dis
tant, further off, 86 4 ; 2. fol lowing,later , future ; — 3. being beyond, surpassing, summus ; ch ief, 68 7 ; best, 36 10 ut
most, greatest, highest,
at end of cpds [1302b], having as ch iefthing, given over to devoted to
—4. a . and subst. other , ska par a,
the one the other , 531" another ,
strange, hostile ; stranger, fee,
37 19. [V2pr,‘ bring across cf . wipd
beyond Lat. peren-die
,
‘the day after ,
i.e. ‘ day af ter to-morrow’
; Eng . f ar and
f ore-Jp a r a
- d i r a ,111 . pl. another
’
s wife.
pa r a - d r a v y a , n.pl . another’
s property.
p a r a - p a k sa , m. par ty of the foe.
pa r a - p a tn i , f . wife of a stranger.
pa r am , adv. beyond ; w. abl . [1 128 ] after ,6023. [phra, 1 1 1 1c.)
pa r am é a . 1 . farthest, extreme,last ; of h eaven,
high est, 8313; so
— 2. chiefest, 29 1 ; supreme ; most excel
lent, 1517; at end of cpds [1302b], having
as supreme object, devoted to — 3.
advlg in cpds , bef ore an adj . high ly ,
exceedingly . [para,
p a r am a -gobh a n a , a . exceedingly beau
pa r am afig a n a, f . most excel lentwoman.
[aw ]pa r am egv a r a , m. supreme lord.
vars .)pa r am e - sth i n , a . standing in the h igh
est place ; supreme, as epithet of i a
pati . [parame ( 1250c ) sthin,
pa r a - l ok a,m.
wor ld.
pa r as , adv. far ; in the distance ; beyond ; p a r i ty ag a ,m. rel inquishment.
10. adult] used instr . [1 127] end, beyond
here, i.e. beyond, RV .x. 125. 8.
Pi n -J
[pa r idh i
syntactical forms sometimes correspond tothe logica l relation of the two parts — so,
e.g., in par asparamnindanti ,
‘ th ey scold,
the one the oth er’
but have come to
be stereotyped and used often where thelogica l relation would requi re other case»
forms : cf . anyonya.)p a r a s p a r ad i n , a . devour ing one another .
par a,adv. to a distance, away , forth . [cf.
u pd, w. gen .,
‘away from ,
from beside’
;
Lat.per in per-ire andGer . ver in ver-gehen,‘
pass away , perish’
; Eng.f or in f or-bea r ,hold ofi
p a r ak r am a , m. s. and pl . bold advance ;
courage ; strength . [Vkram par i .)p a r ax
‘
i -m nk h a , a . having the faceaverted ; turning the back upon, avoiding.
[par i ng 1249s , 217,
p h r anc [409a], j : pdr i ci , a . directed away ;
averted ; turning th e back. [para afic,
pa r i r th a , m. the sake of others ; -um,
-e, adv. for oth ers. [ar tha , 1302c
p a r sv st , j : the distance. [pat i . 383d 1 ,1245f .)
par i , adv. around ; prep. w. abl. : fromaround
, from , [cf . wept,
p a r i g h a , m. iron bar for locking a gate.
[Vhan par i, 1 1430, 333 : for mg, cf . Ger .
Schlag,‘coach -door ,
’and schiagen , strike
force of prep. unclear .)
[ig p a r i g h op am a , a . l ike iron bars. [apama,334
pa r i -j a n a , m. the sur rounding folk,“plum retinue. [1289a.]
p a r i - j i t s , a . completely grown . [1289a.]the other or future p a r i ney a , grdv. to be led around. [Vui
pat i.]
[Vtyajpatr i .)
[sec pa r i d ev i ta , n. lament. [V2div ,
‘ lament,’
pat i. 1 176s .)pa r d s t i t , adv. beyond ; afterwards, at p a r i dh f , m. (a put-around, i .s.) enclosure,the end. [par tis, 1 100s.)
pa r a s -p a r a , one anoth er ; parasparam
and parasparatas, adv.wi th one another ;
mutual ly . [an agglomeration ( 1314c ) of
paras (nom . s.m. of para ) and para : the
fence, protection ,in the language y
the sacr ifice, the three green sticks laid
about the al tar fire and supposed to hold
it togeth er , 105 130 [Vl dha,‘
put,’
pari, 1 155.2c.)
par ipanth in ) [ 188]
p a r i p a n t h i n ,a . besetting the path ; as par v a n , a. knot, joint. l r,
m. waylayer . [par i panthan , 13 10s
and c end.)
fil l ,’1 109. 1a : cf . perm .)
par gu, j i rib ; sickle.
p a r i b h fi a . being around, eneom V p a l i y (pi l i yate ; pa li yimcakr e ; apa
passing. [Vbh ii par i ,
p a r i -v a t s a r a, m. a fuil year .
p a r i v a r t i n , a . turning round,circ l ing ,
constantly return ing into itse lf. [Vvrt 4
part ]
Krista ; pa l i yisyéti.-te ; M i sf its ;
pali yi tum ; pa l i yya ). flee ; depar t, cease,
[quas i-root fr. Vi,‘
go,’
pat i .‘away ,
’see 10870 and o
ez quite different
is Vpalaya,
p a r i v i r a , m. th at wh ich sur rounds, i .e. p a l ay a n a ,a . fligh t. [Vpa l iiy .)
retinue. [V 1 vr, cover ,’
par i .)p a r i gr l t , f . (encloser , i .e.) one of the
l ittle stones by wh ich the sacrificial a l tar is
surrounded. [Vgr i par i ,‘enclose
’
: 383b.)
p a r i s amk h y i , j i complete ta lc or enu
meration ; sum. [Vkh y i par i-sam .)
p a r a sa,a . knotty , rough , harsh . [parus ,
l 2o9b.)
pAr us , a . knot ; join t, of a plant or of the
body . [perhaps a ful l ness,’ V 1 pr,
‘ fil l’:
cf. par van .)
p a r ok sa ,a . beyond the eye, out of sigh t,
inv isible -e, adv. beh ind one’
s
back. [for par e’ksa, i .a. paras aksA,
‘eye
’: 1310a .)
p a r ok sar th a ,m.
invisible. [artha .]
pa t k a ti , j : waved-leaved fig-tree, Ficus
infector ia.
p a r na,n.
— 1 . wing plume, feath er- 2. leaf f or mg, cf . pattra. [ Jespr
( 1 1 77s ) , see under Vsphur : cf. Lithuan ianspdrna ,
‘ w ing’
; Ger . Fa ra Eng. f ern , so
ca l led ( l ike w‘rcpls,
‘ fern ,— Cf . ” 695V,
from its feath ery fronds.)p a r y i l o c a n a ,
n . del iberation ; -a, j i plan ,
consi l ium . [Vl oc pary-i , 1 150.
par v a t a ,— 1 . a . consisting of knots or
ragged masses, used of a mounta in, g ir i ;
as m.— 2. m ountain , 27
6,02 1° h il l ;
— 3 . cloud-mountain , 702 — 4 . rock or
bowlder , 80n; — 5. Parvata, name of a
Rish i, companion of Narada [fr.
parvan , cf . 12450 : cf .Hafifiao'la
sc. 1 6m ,i .e . Hi l
p a r v a t a -k a n d a r a ,n . mounta in-cave.
p a r v a t a - gi k h a r a , m. n. h il l-top.
p a r v a topa ty a k i , j 2moun tain-lowland,
lowland by a mountain range. [apat
N i ]
invisible th ing, the
pav a n a ,a. instrument for pur ifying ;
winnowing-fan. [t
’
Ll p a c, or ig. spa ; (pagyati , -te ; in Veda
pu paeé ; “pasta Span-4 ; later
dadfirga,— 1 . sec ; — 2. perceive ;
behold ; —3. look ; —4 . look on , 307;
gaze, 137; - 5. (see, i.e.) experience , 2015,
36 1 ; — 6. look upon ,21 254015 ; consider
as ; - 7 . see with the spir itua l eye (as
seers and poets ) , [for th e initial 8 ,see the perfect and vi -spasta : cf . a in
'
t
'r -op,a4,‘ look about Lat. specie ,
‘ behold
Ger . spa/1m ,
‘spy ,
’Old High Ger. spefién,
whence, th rough Old French esp ier , the
Eng. espy, and shortened spy.)+ a nu, look a long or spy out (e.g. a
path for some one,
disclose or show,
83 7.
v i , see in places apart, distinguish , see
clear ly ; v ispasta, clear .
2p a g, fasten, bind, in der iva, see pagti ,
pica . [cf. wdaaah os, s t ax-j aAos, peg’
;
Lat. pac-z
'
scor,
‘ bind myse lf, agree’
; pa:
agreement, peace’
; pang-er e,
‘ make fast,
poo-tum ,
‘agreed upon Goth .f all -cu, AS.
fi n,efi h-an,
‘ fasten on, take ho ld of’
;
Eng. verbf ang, seize,’noun f ang, se izing
tooth’
; connection of f lag-sr (‘
grasper ,
doubtful : cf . also Goth . f agrs,fitting ,
’AS.fwgr , Eng.
’
f a ir AS . gef égan,Eng.f ag, Ger .fiigen, fit togeth er ,
’
trans.
and Eng. fudge,‘ fit together
.
or agree,
intrans .)p a ge, m. cattle, 90
9— a single h ead or a
h erd ; domestic animal (opp . to mrga,1!
wild 07 2 ; esp. beast for sacr ifice,
101 0. [prop.‘tethered V2pag,
‘ fasten cf . Lat.pee-u
, Ger . Vick,‘eattl e,
’
AS. f eoh,‘cattle, property ,
’ Eng. f ee,orig.
‘
property,’then
pi niya)
p i ui y a , grdv. to be drunk, for drinking ;
as n. drink ; water . [l i ,‘ drink ,
’905
pr0p. fr . pi na, 1215b.)
p i n i y a- v a r sa , m. water-rain ,
down
pour of water .
pi n th a ,m. wayfarer ; vii tor . [pi ntham
1208s “end.)p i p i ,
a . bad ; evil ; as m. h ad
as n. trouble ; h arm , 203; evi l (deed) ,
27 2
p i p a- k a r m a n ,
a . of ev i l deeds ; as m.
vi l lain.
p i p a gi l a ,a . h aving evi l as one
’s nature,
prone to evil .
p i p i y i ns ,a . worse ; very bad. [pi pa ,
p i pm an ,m. evil ; sin ,
93 1 1 . [cf . pi pa.)
p i r i ,n. the further bank or bound. [V2pr,
br ing
p i r am egv a r a ,a . of the supreme lord
(Civa ) . [paramegv ar aJ
p i r n sy a , n. harshness , esp. of speech .
[parusi j ( f l'
p i r t h i v a ,a f of or baloaging to the earth ;
as m. king.
pi r t h i v a - sut i , f . king’
s daugh ter .
p i r t h i v en d r a ,m. most excel lent of
kings. [indr a .)
p i r gv i ,n. — 1 . side ; and so — 2. as in
Eng.,immediate neighborhood. [pi rgm
‘r ib,
’1208c : so French cafe
,
‘side or
r ibbed part,’ Medieval Lat. costatum
, fr .
Lat. costa ,
p i l a ,m. protector .
V p i l a y a (pi l i yati ) . be protector ; pro
teet ; keep. [pi la , l o42f acct, 1007 :
quite different is Vpal i y , go
p a r i , protect around.
p i v ak a,a . pure ; clear ; br igh t.
1 18 1b and a : cf . ev i pada .)
p i v a n a ,a . pur ify ing ; freeing from s in.
[Vpii , 1 15Gb.)
[V 2 pi , protect,’
[Vpfi.
p i gs ,m. bond ; snare ; trap. [V2pag,
Vp i , same as pi.
p i ii g a ,a . reddish brown .
p i i g a l a,a . reddish brown. (pings ,
p iflj t‘
i l a , n. tuft of sta lks ; grass.
[190]
p i nda , m. 1 . lump ; bal l ; lump (of
earth ) , — 2. esp . lump or cake of
meal offered to the Manes ;— 3 . mouth
ful,05 5 ; pindi
'
, f . meal-cake.
p i t i m a h i ,m. father ’s father , grand
father ; great father. [piti (nom . s. of
pitr) maha , 1314c and d.)p i t i
' m.— 1 . father ; - 2. pl . father
and h is brothers (cf:F rench parent,‘re la
- 3. pl . the fathers , spirits
of the forefathers, the Manes , 07
etc. [or igin unknown , see 1 1 8‘2d cf.
narf p, Lat. pa ter , Eng.f ather .)p i trt a s ,
adv. on the father ’s side.
1098b.)
p i tr-m i t r a , n. father ’s fr iend.
p i tr -y a j ii a,m. sacrifice to the Manes.
(yajfifiulp i t r v y a , m. fath er ’s broth er , patruus.
(pity, 12280 : cf . t drpws, Lat. pa truus , AS.
fwdera , father’s
p i t r y a , a . of one’s fath er of (our )
fathers , of or belonging to or sacred
to the Manes. [pith 1212b : cf . mfr pcos,
Lat. pa tr ias, of one’
s
V p i n v pinvati pipinva pinvita). cause
to swe l l or stream . [Vpi or pi : 749, 749b,
p i p i s i , f . desire to drink ,th irst. [fr .
desid. ( 1020) of VI pi , drink’:
p i p i l a, m. ant. [perhaps for epipida,‘
pressed in or constricted in the middle ,’
(pita
V p i e (Pfiefi. 4 0 pipésa» pipieé ;
pigti ). adorn . [cf . t ouch es, AS. fi ll,
many-colored Lat. pic
-tor,
p i gas g a a . reddish brown. [V pig.)p i gi c i m. one of a class of demons (per haps
person iflcations of the ignis fatuus ) ; gob l in.
p i gun a , a . backbiting, slanderous. [cf .r cxpds,
‘ bitter .’
p i e (pinfls'ti ; pipésa. pipisé s i pisat ;
vel lum : vista; péstum ; pistvi ; -pis
ya ) . crush ; gr ind, 475; m il l . [cf . Lat.
p insere, pi sere,‘crush
’: of doubtful k in
sh ip is r r la rm , pound,
s am , crush together or to pieces.
p i sti , ppl. m il led ; as n. meal . [Vpis: forthe mgs, cf . pis, pista , and molere, mola ,
with mill , meal .)
[191 ]
p i sta -pa gu, m. eflgy of a sacrificial
beast made of meal .
V p i or py i (pyi yate [701d 1 ] ; pipi ya
pipyfls ; épyi ait ; pitfi. ph i )swel l ; overflow. [hence pi-van, art-a v,
p i th a , n. - 1 . seat ; —2. pedestal (of an
image of a god) .
p i th a - ca k r a , n. seat-wagon ; wagon with
s eest.
V p ie (pidfiyati pidayim i n ;
press ; Oppress, pain. [for epizd,
198b3 : cf. Vpis.] f .
+ 11 , press out,'e,
‘ f:
”
a
p idi , f . pain, ache. [Vpid, 1 149
p i n i , a . th ick, brawny. ppl .
of Vpi , 957a.)p iv a s , 11. fat. [Vpi z cf. c lap, i .e. r i-Fap,
pul h a , same as pfim i il s.
puta , m. n. fold ; cavity ; nose (of a has
ket). [for spits : cf . « l l amas, ot hrj os, indc-r admos or Gl-r aM -
os, Eng. two-f old.)puny a , a . prosperous ; happy ; lucky ,
faustus, auspicious, righ t,
good ; as n. good work ; sing. collectively,
good works, 28 17 mer it (from good
works ) . [perhaps fr . V pus.)puny a - g a n dh a , a . of good or pleasant
smel l .
puny a -p i p a , n.pl . good and bad deeds.
[1253a.]puny a -gl ok a , a . of good fame ; as m.
Punyacloka, epithet of Nala.
putt i k i , j : wh ite ant. the dol l-l ike
insect’: for putr ik i .)
pa tr i , m.— 1 . son ; chi ld, — 2.
whelp ; — 3 . shortened form for Putraka
as proper name.
pa t r i k a ,m. — 1 . l ittle son (as term of
endearment) , boy ; — 2. Putraka, other
wise Putra, name of the founder of Pi tal i
pu 45 9 ; —putr iki , f . [1222d],
daughter ; dol l (of wood or lac) . [putra.]putr a -d i r a , n. son and wife. [1253b.]pun a r , adv. — 1 . back ; home ; w. i -gam,
go back , so ivi , w. vac,
reply, 1919; - 2. again, anew ;
penal} punar , again and again, 2 17
punar , equiv. to punah punar , — 3.
continuative, again, further, 29 1 1 more
over , 57 21 ; besides or in turn ,
kim punas tu, but what besides, how
much more, a fortiori, longer ,— 4 . but, 40
3 19; on the other hand, 20
1 7.
[cf . the simi lar ly connected notions of
iteration and opposition shown by t v,
Eng. aga in and aga inst, Ger . wieder and
wider .)pun a r - g a r bh a v a t i , again preg
nant.
pun a r - j a nm a n , n. re-birth .
pun a h - s a r i , a . coming back (as a ghost
from the other wor ld— exactly l ike the
French revenan t) , and so ghostly , uncanny .
[punar ,
pum i ns m. man ; a male, 597; opp .
qf str i, e.g. 1049; pumi nsah putt i s , ma le
ch ildren,
1 pd r , f . ful lness. [V1 pr,2 par j : stronghold ; castle ; fortifled town . [cf . 1 61 m,
pur a , n. stronghold ; fortified town ; city .
[2pdr ,
pur amdh i , 1 . a . courageous , h igh
spir ited, exa lted ; - 2. as m. perhaps as
name qf a god, Purandh i ; — 3. as ] exal
tation.
pur i s , adv. in front, forward, before ; atfirst, 54
1 3; compounded [1078 5] esp. w. k;
and dh i : w. kr, put in front, appoint ; w.
dh i , put in front or in charge, esp . of the
pr iestly duties. [see pra : cf. 1 dpos,
pur a s - k i r y a , grdv. to be appointed or
commi ssioned, praeflciendus. [see puraskr : a lso 903b and
pur i s t i t , adv. — 1 . before ; in the front,— 2. previously , afore, 101 1 1-13 ;
— 3. before, i .s . (see pr i fic) eastward ;—4 . prep. w. gen. before, in the
presence of , 201. [pur as, 1 100b.)
pur a h - s a r a,a . going before ; as m . fore
runner ; at end qf cpds [13020 h aving
as forerunner , i .e. accompanied by-purahsaram, adv. with or after
pur i , adv. former ly , once upon
a time, 48 23 ; p. w. abl .
before, 95 17, [see pr i .)
pur i ne)
pur i ns ,a .
of old times, A61 0: and p 60” . [pur i ,l 245d.)
p ti r i sa , n. crumbling earth , as opp . to
fluids ; rubble loose earth .
heaps,’fr . l r, in the sense
‘ fil l , i .e.
h eap 1 197b.)
pfisp a , n. bloom ;
[ 192]
former , belonging to old pusti ii g a ,a . fat-limbed. [fi gm]
times ; as n. things of the past ; tale pusti , f . th r ifty growth prosperity.
[Vpus ]flower . [poss. for
epuska, q .v . : cf . 1 201 9 end.)fil l ings or pusp a - d a n t a , m. Pushpadanta or Flower
tooth , name of an attendant of Civa , see
53 N.
pur d ,a . much , many . q.v . : pusp i m od a ,
m. fragrance of flowers.
cf . m s, AS.f elo ,much ,
pur ut r i , adv. in many places.
pd rusa , m.— 1 . man ; —2. (as in Eng.
,
man,i .s.) servant ; —3. th e personal and
life-giving principle in man and oth er
beings, soul , spirit ; then - 4 . personified
as The Supreme Spir it, Soul of the U ni
verse, 57
pur usa - k i r a , m. deed of a man ,human
effort, as opp. to di iva ,
‘ fate.
’
pur usa s inh a m. man-l ion , stout-hearted
man.
pur fi e i , a .j 1 many , abundant ; long. [for
ma l ly fem . to a stem spam -ac,‘ directed
or reach ing in many ways, abundant’: cf .
pur e - g am a , a . going before ; as m .
l eader ; at end of cpds having
as leader , accompanied by [pur as .)
p n r o- g a v i , m . fore-bul l , and so
, genera l
ized (see go leader pur ogavi,f . leader .
[pur eed
pur o- h i ta , ppl . set before or in charge
(esp. of priestly service ) as m. priest,
h ouse-priest of a pr ince . [see par as wi th
pul k a s a , 111 . one of a despised m ixed
caste
V pus (pi n ata. -te ; pupésa ; 41mmpusti ). - 1 . th r ive ; bloom ; — 2. trans.
cause to th r ive ; develop ; unfold, di splay ,78 4.
p n sk a , bloom , a word assumed a s probable
on account of puspa , ‘ bloom ,
’
pash at a ,‘ lotus blossom ,
’and puskala. [Vpus,
pusk a l a,a . abundant. [prob. bloom ing,
’
f r . epuska ,
pusti , pl. h aving th rived ; strong ; fat.
(Vpus.9553]
[amoda.]
[puru, pus t a k a ,m. n. manuscript ; book.
V P13 (puni ti. pnn‘
i té : pi n to : Pepi“ ;
api vi t ; pi ta;— 1 . make clear
or br ight ; pur ify ; a alpeer ; pfiti , pure ;— 2. mid. clear itself, flow clear . [cf . xii-p,Eng. firs ( r b r ip m eal a ) w. puti , cf .
Lat. pa'
tus, clear ,’
paras , MRI
s am , purify , clean .
p i ,vbl . purifying, in cpds.
pfig a ,m. betel-palm, Areca Catechu; as
n . betel nut.
V p fp’
(pfij éyati.-te ; pajam a“: vi i i“-
pujya ) . honor .
a b h i , do honor to.
p ii j a n i y a , grdo. to be honored. [Vpfii,
puj i , j l honor .
pfij y a , grdv. to be honored. [Vpfij ,903d.)
pfir ni , ppl. fll led ;_
ful l . [V1 pr,‘ fil l,
’
cf . Goth .f al ls , Eng.fi ll .)p ii r na-m i s a , m. ful l moon and the fullmoon sacr ifice.
p i r t i , ppl . fil led ; bestowed, fulfil l ed ; as
n. [1 1 70s ], fulfilment ; reward ; merit.
[V 1 pr,‘ fll l ,
’
pfir v a a . being before in place or
time : — 1 . east (of pr i iie ) ; — 2. prior ;
preceding, purva uttara, formerlatter , ancient, of old time,
09 8, first spoken,002 ; w. past pass.
ppl . drsta-pfir va, seen before ;purvan , adv. before ; beforehand,previous ly ,
al ready , 25 17 ; in formertimes. 48 1 ; long ago, first,
pii rvam uttaram , first las t,— 3. at end of cpds , (having as preced
ing thing, i .e.) accompanied by or
simply with [connected w. paras
and pra.)
xii“!o f t-J ‘ J fi n“
p é sa ,m. th r iving, development ; welfare.
[Vpus-J
p i dms y a ,n. man liness ;
[pums ,p i ur usi ,
n . man l iness ;
[purnea , 1 208f .]vpy i (pyi yate [761d apy i sit
py i ta) . swel l ; overflow. [a col lateral
form of Vpi, q .v .)i ,
becom e ful l of or rich in.
p r a, prep . forward,onward, forth , fore.
[cf . wpd, before ’Lat. pro, later pro,
‘ before ’
; Eng. f ore : see al so the fol lowing articles, and pur i s, pur i , and piirva.)
p r a k a r a na ,n . tr eatm ent ; discussion ;
subject of discussion,what
’
s being ta lked
about. [V l kr, do, put,’
pr a .)
p r a k a r sa , (preference, advantage,
i .e.) super iority . [Vkrs,‘ draw,
’
pr a :
for mg, cf . Eng. pref erence al so Ger .
Var -rug, preference, advantage,’with
var -ziehcn, draw forward,
p r a k i ga,a . shining out, clear ; open ;
-a.m ,adv. openly , a loud. [Vki g pr a .)
p r a k r t i , j : th at wh ich one pre-supposes
(voraus-setzt) , i .v. th e origina l or natural
form or condition ; nature. [V1 kr,‘ do,
set,’
pr a.)
p r i k op a ,m. a boi l ing with rage ; anger .
[Vkup pr a .)
p r a g e ,adv. ear ly in th e morn ing.
p r a c r t t a-
gi k h a ,a . with
braids or flowing h air . [gikh i u]
p r ac e t a s ,a . knowing,
wise.
pr a , cf . 1 1 51 . 2b.)V p r a ch (preehati , -te ; papraccha
apr i ksi t ; praksyéti ; meta; presen t :
prstv i ; ask ask after, in
quire about ; ask somc one (acc.) about
someth ing 01 7. [true roob form
prag (sec 220, 24 1 , and e cc ) , or ig.
eprk : cf . Oeo-npdw-os,‘asking the gods
’
;
Lat. prev-es
,
‘
prayers ,’
prov-as
,
‘suitor
’
;
Old High Ger .f rdh-én , Ger .fiag-en
,
‘ask
prcch dti is a sk-formation (eprk-sketi ) ,cf . Lat. poscit, spore
-soft, Old High Ger .
f or slco'
t,ef or h-sledt,
‘asks for
,
’Ger . f orscht,
‘ inqui res
p a r i , ask .
v i , find out by inquiry .
manly deed.
man ly deed.
loosened
[V eit
s am ,mid. consult with , converse or
talk with .
p r a j i , f .— 1 . procreation ;
— 2. ofispr ing,
ch ildren, descendants 3 . crea tures,
57 1 ; esp .— 4 . folk , subjects, of a prince,
16 5. [Vjan or j i pra ,
p r a j i - k i m a, m . desire for offspring.
[praj i kima, 1204 : acct,
p r a j i - k i m a ,a . possessing pr aj i ki mi ,
i .e. desirous of ofispring, 1 12. [ 1296,
p r a j i - p a t i , m.— 1 . lord of creatures ;
2. genius presiding over procreation,
— 3. lord of creatures, i .e. creator
or Prajapati, see note. [acct,1267s .)
p r a j i r th e , adv. for the sake of offspring.
[artha ,1 1 10, ( U : f
p r a j fi i , f l understanding.
p r a j fi i ta , ppl . well -known . [Vjfii
pra-Jp r a na y a ,
m. manifestation of one’s af
fection . [Vni + pra : for u, see 192a .)p r a na y a n a ,
n .— 1 . a fetching ; — 2.
means for fetch ing, vessel . [do .]
p r ana v a , m . the sacred sy l lable om.
[Vnu pr a , q .v.)
p r ani m a , m. bow, reverent salutation.
[Vnam pr a .)
13 PLp r i ni’
ta , ppl.
holy water .
p r a ni t i - p r a ni y a n a , n. th e fetchingof the holy water . [ 1250e.)
p r a t a r am , adv. further , longer .473 2, 1 1 1 10 : cf . npd
‘r epov,
p r i t i , prep. in reversed direction , back to,
back against, against, in return ; - 1 . to,
towards, w. acc., 23 14 2. with
reference to, in respect to, w. acc.,4 7-17
,
— 3. over against, i.s . l ike ; — 4 . in
cpds [1313s ] : before ; on ,w. idea of con
stant repetition ; at ; (back i .e.) reflected ;see the f ollowing words. [cf . apar t,
‘to
’
;
Lat. por ( sport) in por—r igere,‘reach out
promise.
p r a t i - d i n a m ,adv. on (each ) day , dai ly.
[1313a, 1310s and (1 : cf . pratyah am.)
p r a ti p a tt i , j ! the acquiring. [Vpad +
pr ati .)
see Vni + pra ;
(an .
[195]
p r a t i -b i m ba , n. reflected disk (of sun
or moon in the water ) ; image.
pr a t i m i , j : match ; image ; l ikeness.
[Vl m i + prati,‘ make (so as to be a
match ) against’: for mg, cf . Eng. counter
f eit, im itated,’fr. French contref a it,
whose elements go back to Lat. contra
and f aeere.)p r a ti m i n a , n. that wh ich is made or
put over against, a match , equal . [V 1 mi
prati.)
pr a t i sth i , j 2 stead ; standing-place ; then
( l ikeEng. standing ) , position,i.s . celebrity .
[V sth i prati .)p r a t i sth i n a , n. stead ; then ( like Ger .
Stadt,‘
place, town The Town , name of
a town on the Godi var i , the nawava of
the Greeks. [V sthi pr ati , 1 150 cf .
Hamp—stead.)
pr a t i h a s t a k a , m. proxy . person at
one’
s h and,’
prati hasta , 1310a,
pr a t i k i r a , m. counter-action, remedy .
[V 1 h r, do, act,
’
pr ati , against
1087b.]p r a t i c i n a ,
a . backward ; being beh ind ;
fol lowing, i .e. future. [pratyafic, 1223d.)p r a t i t a , ppl . see Vi prati .
p r a t i pa,0 . (against the stream, i.s.) con
trary ; 4 m , adv. contrar i ly, frowardly.
[prati ap, 1310a, 13150,cf . samipa
for mgs, cf.Eng. contra ry.)pr i tta ,
see 10870.
p r a ty ak sa , a . before the eyes, plainly
visible ; -e, adv. before one’
s face. [pratiaksa, 1 310s .)
pr a ty a k sa - da r ga n a , n. a seeing be
fore one’s eyes ; the abi l ity to see any
one (e.g. a god) bodily ,
p r a ty a g - da k sini ,adv. (west-souther ly ,
i .s .) southwester ly . [pratyaiic, 1249s .)pr a ty a fi-muk h a , 0. having the facewestward, turned to th e west. [pratyaiic,1249s , 101 :
pr a ty i fi c j : [4 10] pratici, a . — 1 .
(directed back, i.e.) turned backwards ;
moving in reverse direction or away, 87n;
- 2. turned westward (see pr i fic) , westf
er ly— 3. (being to-ward
,i.e.) with the
face towards, w. acc.
, 71 [pr ati ai o,
407 : see afic.)
[pradh i na
p r a ty - a bh i v i da n a ,n. return-sa luta
tion,Gegen-
gruss. [ 1289b.)p r a ty - a h am , adv. on (each ) day , daily .
[ 13 13a, 1310s and (1 : 1315s : cf. pra
p r a ty i k h y i n a ,‘
n. refusal . [t yi +
p r a tyut th i n a ,n. r ising up to meet (a
person ) , respectful reception . [V athi
pr aty-ud, 233a.)p r a tyutp a n n a -m a t i , a . having wi ts
ready to meet an emergency as m. Readywit, name of a fish . [Vpad praty-ud.]
p r a ty r c am , adv. at or with each stanza.
[prati rc, 1313s , 1310s and d :
V p r a th (pr i thate , -ti ; paprath é ; i praxprath iti ; pr athayati ; apapr*
7’
th at) . broaden, intrans. caus. broaden ,
trans . ; spread out, 78 1 1 . [see under
prthu.)v i , caus. spread out wide,
p r a th am i , a . first ; pr imal ; -am , adv.
at first. [l it. fore-most,’for spr a-tama ,
super l . of pra, 4873,473
p r a th am a -j i a . first-born.
p r a da ,a . giving ; furnish ing. [Vl di
pr a ,
p r a - d a k si na ,-1 . a . moving to the
righ t ; —2. 4 m, adv. to the righ t, so th at
the righ t side is towards an object (a sign
of respect), 601 , 99 1 ; w. kr, put (an
object) to the righ t— 3. adj . standing
on the r igh t, 0219
. [perhaps the use as
adv. (mg 2) is the primary one, lit.‘ for
ward to the
p r a d i n a , n. a giving. [VI di pra.)p r a d i g, f . intermediate region (between
the cardinal points see dig). [pr adig, fore
p r a d e ga , 171. di rection ; and so, place.
[Vdis pra o]p r a d o sa , m. evening, nigh tfal l .dark,
’
pra dopa.)
p r a d h an a ,n. prize of the contest ; the
contest therefor ; battle. [V 1 dh i pr a :
cf . dhana.)p r a dh i n a ,
n. (that which is put forward )the important or chief th ing ; at end ofcpds having as ch ief thing, devoted to [V 1 dh i pm .)
1 3'
fore
flI
prapath a)
p r a- p a th a , m. (forth-path , i.e.) onward p r am i th i n , a .
way , journey in the distance or
distant journey ,802.
p r a b a n dh a ,m . uninterrupted connec
[ 196]
stir r ing
[Vmath pra, 1 183
agitating.
p r am r sta - m a ni , m. po lished or brigh t
gem . [Vmrj pr a .)tion ; continued ser ies. p r a m r stam a ni - kunda l a ,
a . possess
p r a bh a v i , m . or igin ; at end of cpd
having as origin, originating with
[Vbh ii pra .)
p r a b h i , j : splendor ; radiant beauty .
[Vbh i pra .)
p r a bh i ta , ppl . begun to be l igh t ; as n.
[1 170a], day -break. [Vbh i pra .)
p r a bh i v a , m. super ior migh t, of gods,
of ascetics, of asceticism . [V bhfi
pra-l
p r a bhu, a . being before or super ior to
oth ers ; as m. ruler ; master ; lord ; hus
band, 5214
. [later form (354 ) for Vedic
prabh ii : Vbhfi pra .)
p r a b h utv a , n . lordsh ip, power .
p r i bh r t i , j l — I . l it. a carry ing forwardor on ,
i .e. continuance ; used esp. a t end
of cpds hav ing continuance fromi.e. continuing from — 2. the n in
such cpds used in ace. s . n . adverbiul ly
continui ng from beginning
with from - 3 . then as an adv.
uncompounded, pr abhrti , w. abl .,from
on ; tatah prabhrti , from then on .
[Vbhr pra, l 1 57. 1d.)
p r am a d a ,m. pleasure.
p r i m a da - v a n a ,n. pleasure-grove (of a
prince ) .
p r am a d i - v a n a , n. pleasure grove (of
the wives of a pr ince ) . [a quasi feminineto the preceding.)
p r i m i na , n. measure , extent
scale , standard ; someth ing by wh ich to
judge, norm, rule of action, 21
21 :
auth or ity , [V1 m i ,‘ measure,
+ pr a ,192a : hence , th rough the Persian
f a rmdn, the borrowed Eng. firman,
‘an
authority or decree,’esp. of the Subl ime
Forte .)V p r am i na y a (pr ami nayati ) . regard
as an auth ori ty ; take a person (acc.) asauth ority in a matter [prami na ,
p r am i ni bh i v a , m. lack of anything to
judge by . [abh i va.]
ing br igh t-gem ear-r ings .
p r a y a t n a ,m. effort, pains ; -ena ,
-i i..
adv. careful ly . [Vyat pr a , 1 1 77a.)
p r a y i na ,n. a going forth ( from h ome) ,
journey . [Vyi + pra, 1 150,
p r a y ot f , m. remover . [V2ya,‘ keep off,
’
pr a.)
p r a l a y a , m. dissolution ; esp. dissolution
of the universe . [V 11'
pra .)
p r a l i pa,m. unintel ligible or ch i ldish
or lamenting talk chatter . [V lappm ]
p r a v ani , a . prone ; sloping. [pra , 1 170
(cf . 383d 1 ) : cf . wpnv-iys, Doric wpi yds, L'
at.
prénus , incl ined
p r a v i t , j : slope, of a mountain ; height,
83 7. [pr a, 383d
p r a- v a y a s , 0 . having (forward, i .e.) advanced age ; aged. [ 1 305
2]
p r a v a r t a k a ,a . causing to rol l onward
(as a whee l ) , setting in motion , promoting ;
as m. promoter , prompter . [caus. of e t
pr a .)
p r a v i da , m. a saying or an on di t. [Vvad
+ pra.)
p r a v i b h i g a , m. division. [Vbhajpra-v i .)
p r a v i na , a . clever .
p r a v i na t i , f . cleverness. [pr avina ]p r a v r t ta , ppl .
— 1 . having turned for
ward ; di rected forward ( to a specific
object) , esp. of an act performed with a
view to th e attainment of some advantage,
i .e. interested, opp . of nivi'tta , q.v. ,
— 2.
engaged in. [e t pra.)p r a v r t t i , f . a moving forward or taking
an active step, advance into or ex
posure of one’s self to (danger , 2033.
p r a v gddh a , ppl . grown up, great.
p r a v e ga , m. entrance.
p r a v r i j i n ,a . going forth or after , in cpd
dvi [Vvraj pra ,for mg, cf.
(yuan) wepfdpopos,‘ lewd
praptavya)
p r i p ta v y a , grdo. to be obtained, about
to be got. [Vi p + pra,
p r i p t i , f l a reaching, arriving at. [Vi p
pra .)
p r i y a, m. — 1 . a going forth or out ;
— 2. th at wh ich sticks out or is prominent ;
the pr incipal par t of a th ing ; the most
part ; at end of cpds hav ing for
th e most part, having for its predomi
nant ch aracteristic, like [Vi
pra , 1 148 . 1 a.)
p r i y a ga s , ada
[pr i ya,
p r i y a s ,adv. for the m ost part, a lmost,
5022. [pr0p. sec. 3 . n . ( l l l l d) of a neuter
noun spr i yas ,‘ that wh ich is predom i
nant’
(see pr i ya ) , Vi pra, 1 151 . l .)
p r i v i , a . attentive, h eedful , zealous.
[V av pra, 1 1563, 355b end.)
p r i ga n a , n.— 1 . the eating; — 2. the
giving of food, feeding. [in mg 1 , f r .
V 2ac,‘eat,
’
+ pra ; in mg 2, fr . cans. of
the same.)
p r i gi t f , m. eater.
1 1 82s .)
p r i gi t r i , n. th e portion of ghee to be
eaten by a Brahman at a sacrifice .
that which belongs to the pr i gitr,’
1208b.)p r i ci t r a
- h i r a na , n. vessel for hold
ing the pr i gitr a. pr i gitr a-holding,
’
p r i s i da ,m. lofty seat ; bui lding on h igh
foundations, palace, 201 . [V aad pra ,
perhaps in the sense‘sit forward or in a
conspicuous place see 1087b.]
p r i y i ,a .
— 1 a . dear , be loved of ,
w. gen. (296b ) , — 1b. pr iy i , f : the
beloved, the wife , — 2a. desired,
pleasant ; agreeable , pr iyam kr ,
do a favor , — 2b. a s n that wh ich is
desired, one’s wish , 89
1'
— 3. ( l ike Ho
mer ic plu s) to wh ich one is attached or
wonted, own ,wonted ;
— 4a . lov ing, devoted to ; — 4b. a s m.
friend. [Vpr i , q .v. cf . wpiios,‘
gentle’
; Goth .fleas,ace. s. m . f r zj ana ,
AS.f r i , Ger .fiei,Eng.f ree a lthough the
modern mg‘ free is common al so to the
Goth . and AS. words, yet the or ig. mg
for the most part.
[V2ag, eat,’
pra ,
[ 198]
must have been ‘ loving or loved, kindly
treated, spared’
(and so as is
shown by the Goth. abstract f r zj a-bva ,
AS. f redd,‘ love
’: for mg 1h , cf . AS.
f i-eo
’
,
‘ woman’
: cf . also Old High Ger .
F r ia ,
‘ The Loving One,’in f rid tag, Eng.
F r i-dag, dies
p r i y a - v i d f n ,a . say ing pleasant things.
p r i y i p r i ya, n. comfort and discomfort.
[apr iya : 1253b.]V p r i (pfivi ti.pr ism ; private ; pipr i ya»
pipr iyé ; i pr i isit ; pr i'
ti ; pr itvi ) 1a.
pr ini ti , gladden, show favor to, prepi
tlate ; — 1 b. pr ini ti, have pleasure in ;- 1 0. pr ini
'
té, be glad or content ; - 2.
priyate, be glad or content ; have pleasure
in ; love, be favorably incl ined to ; — 3.
pr i'
ti : glad, pleased, satisfied loved,
dear . [cf . Goth . f rzj on,‘ love
’
; f r ij onds,AS. f reo
'
nd,
‘ loving, i .e. friend,’
Eng.
f r iend a lso AS. f ree-ba,‘a spar ing or
indulgence, favor , grace, peace,’Ger .
F r iede,‘
peace’
; Goth . Fr iba-reiks,Eng.
Freder ick, grace-ruler, gracious prince
see also under pr iya.)p r i t i , f i - 1 . pleasure ; prityi , with pleasure , gladly ; - 2. friendsh ip. [Vpr i .)
p r i‘
t i - v a e a s , n. fr iendsh ip-ta lk, fr iendlywords.
p r s fik h i , a . rocking, pitch ing ; as m. n.
unsteady boat, skid . [V ifikh pra .)
p r eta , ppl . gone onward, i .e. departed,
dead ; as m. — 1 . dead man ; — 2. ghost.
[V i + pra.)p r éty a , grd. after dying, i.e. in the oth er
wor ld (opp. to iha ) . [Vi pr a ,
p r é sth a ,a . very pleasant. [Vpr i
'
,
serves as super l . to priya .)p r e sy a , grdv. to be sent ; as m. servant.
[V2 is, send,
’
pra .)p r i i sy i , n. servitude . [presya, l 2o8f .]p r osth a , m. bench or couch .
p r o sth e -
ga y i ,a . ly ing on a couch .
[ 12500,
p l a v i ,a . swimming ; as m. swimmer ,
name of a kind of duck. [Vpluz cf .
wil der, w h ores, a sail ing.
’
V p l u (pl i vate, -ti ; pupl i va, pupluvé ;
éploeta : plosyéti. -te ; plnté ; whim-plf1ya ) . float th rough water or air :
[199] [bandh a
— 1 . swim ; — 2. baths ; - 3. sail ; — 4. ph i l a v a n t , a . fruitful ; yielding good
hover ; fly ; - 5. fly ofl ; hasten away ;
- 6. spring ; — pluta , floating, and so (see
Whi tney protracted, of a vowel .
[cf . f luids, “ M m , float, sai l’
; Lat.
pluere,‘rain
’
: for mg of p luer e, cf. th e
Eng. intrans.float‘swim ,
’w. trans.floa t,
‘cover with water , and th e intrans. ba the
w. trans. bathe
close ly connected w. Vplu is the ex
tended form plud as seen in Lithuanian
plud-iti
,
‘swim , float
’
: w. this , cf . AS.
fleo'
t-cu,
‘swim or float about,
’
Eng. verb
fleet,‘ float, sail
,hasten ,
’
Ger . fliessen,sometimes ‘
swim ,
’
vb a nh or bah (been [223 8]
resul ts. tphfiut l zaaulp h ul l a ,
a . burst open , expanded, bloom
ing. [see Vphal and
p h ul l o tp a l a , a . h aving blooming lo
tuses ; as n. Blooming-lotus , name of a
lake. [utpala .]ph eun , m. foam.
caus.
banhayate ) . be th ick, firm , strong ; caus.
make strong. [perhaps for ebhagh : see
bahuand bi h ti .)but usual ly
‘ flow’
; b a k a , m. heron , Arden nivea.
further , AS.fleo’
t,
‘raft, sh ip, fleet,
’
Eng. ba k a -m fir k h a , m. heron-fool , fool of a
fleet,‘ships
’
; a lso AS.flota ,
‘ship,
’
Eng.
float,‘a th ing that swims on the surface b a dd h a -m a nda l a , a .
of a fluid, e.g. a raft ’ (verb float is a
denom . of th is ) , Ger . Floss ,‘raft ’ ; final ly
Eng.fleet, stream let or bay ,’whence The
F leet, as name of a smal l aflluent of the
Thames at London and of a famous prisonthereon ,
and Fleet S treet, wh ich crossed
The Fleet ]i , bathe, intrans.
cam - a ,l . bathe, intrans. ; — 2.
bathe, trans. ; inundate ; suffuse, 1019
.
ud,spr ing up.
up a ,hover unto.
+ v i , float asunder ; drift in diflerent
directions be dispersed be lost be
ruined or dishonored.
ph a l (phflafi ; paphala ; phaliti ;
phul la burst, spl it, intrans . [prob.
for uspal , of wh ich V sphat ( i.s . espha lt) ,‘split, break,
’is an extension : cf . Ger .
spa lten, Eng. spl it.]ud , bur st out or open ; utphul la
expanded, wide open.
V ph a l a (phalati ) . bear fruit ; fruit
phalitém, imper sona lly, it is fruited, fruitis borne (by a thing, 24 [denom .
of phala ,
ph i l a , n.— 1 . fruit ; — 2. then ( l ike Eng,
h eron. [ 1280b.]h aving eon
structed-circles, t.e. ranged in circles.
[Vbandh .]b a n dh (badhnati , badhnité
syéti ; baddha ; bhndh itum , banddhum ,
baddhum ; baddh va; -badhya ). 1 .
bind ; fasten ; catch ; esp . bind (a victim
for the gods, sacr ifice ; — baddh a :
bound ; caugh t ; fastened ; — 2. bind to
gether , join ; and then (w. a specia l iza tion
of mg l ike that seen in the Eng. joiner ) ,construct, e.g. a bridge ; compose (verses ,
qf. La t. serere ) . [for ebhandh : cf. n ew
epri s,
‘connection (by weicyc ,
n ew“,
‘rope
’
; Lat. qf-f end-ir ,‘ knot
’
;
fld—es ,‘string
’
; f oed-as ,‘ lcaguo
’Eng.
bind,ba nd : for mgs , cf . Eng. connection
and league w. Lat. c
,’-neetere and l iga
'
r e,
bind togeth er .’
ui,— 1 . bind ; fasten ; - 2. (bind down
together , put down connectedly , i.e.) put
into wr itten form ,wr ite down ,
p r a ,bind on ; connect onward
, form
an advancing connection, form a continued
ser ies.
s am , bind together , con-neet ; sam
baddh a , con-nected, co
-herent (w. the same
fig. my as in
fruit) , the good or evil consequences of b a n dh a,m.— l . a binding ; esp. a binding
human deeds ; result ; reward or punish
[perhaps‘the ripe and burstingment.
truit,’fr . Vphal ]
to the sacrificial post (see bandh sac
rifice ; - 2. band, string. [Vbandh z cf.
Eng. band ]
bandh ana]
b i n dh a n a ,a . binding ; as n. bond or if so, cf .
, for the mg, cpdpos,‘ tr ibute ,
’w .
bonds. [Vbandh ] ¢épcs,‘ bear ,
b é n dh u, m.— 1 . connection or relation b a l i n , a. m igh ty , 1
3. [balm 1230a.]
sh ip ;— 2. (concrete, a s in Eng.) a connec bal i eth a ,
a . most migh ty ; very strong.
tion, re lative ; friend ; one who be longs [bahu, 468 2 ]to (a certain caste,f or example ) . [Vbandh , b a l on m a tta , a . frenzied or crazed with
power . [unmatta, Vmad +ud, ]b a r b a r a ,
a . stammer ing, balbutiens ; as V b a h ,see banh .
m. — 1 . p l . foreigners, oi d Bapox, name b a h i s- k ar y a , grdv. to be put outside,
appl ied by Aryans to non-Aryan fo lks to be banished. [ha-h is and kr , do,
(as Welsh and Wa l sch by Engl ish and put,’
Germans to f olks tha t speak a strange b a h i a- h r ta , ppl. put out, expel led.
tongue ) ; - 2. sing. a man of lowest or igin ; [bah is and kr,‘ do, put,
’1078
a wretched wigh t, wretch , [ci . b a h i h - pa r i dh i , adv. outside th e en
d flapos,‘ foreign , outlandish
’
; Lat. ba l closure (see par idhi ) . [ l 310a .]bus
,
‘stammer ing,
’whence Spanish bobo
, b a h i s ,adv. [l l l l d], outside ; as prep . out
blockhead,’Eng. boobg.] side of , w. abl .
b a r h a , m. n. tai l -feather . [prop. pluck b a hu,a . much , many ; bahuman , consider
ings ,’Vl brh ,
‘
pluck’: cf . the no less as much
, think muchl
of , esteem . [Vbanharbitrary special ization of mg in Eng. or bah : cf. waxhs,
pluck,‘ that wh ich is plucked out after b a h udh a,
adv. many times. [bahu,ki l l ing a beast, its l iver , l igh ts, heart,
’
and, fig., b a kun i n s , m. esteem , respect. [Vman
b a r b i na , m. peacock,68 2. [transition bahu.]
stem f r . barhin ,1223f , 1200c.] ba h um an a - purahsaram, adv. with re
b a r h i n , m. (h av ing tail -feathers, i .e. the spect. [1302c2,tai l-feathered bird nar
’
taxing) the pea b a h ul a, a . — 1 . th ick — 2. abundant ;
cock. [barh a .] much . [in mg l, perh aps directly fr .
b a r h i s ,n. grass or straw of Kuca-grass, Vbah , 1 189, and in mg 2, f r . bahu,
spread over the sacr ificia l ground to serve b a h ul i usa d h i k a ,a . having abundant
as a place for th e oblations and as a seat herbs. [t i ,
for gods and ol'
ferers. [prop.‘that wh ich V badh (bi dhate ; babadh é ; Abi dh ista
is torn up, vulsum , pluckings,’ V l hrh ,
‘ tear , pluck for mg, cf . Eng. hag,
cuttings ,’ from hew
,
bal a ,n.— 1 . migh t, power , strength , force ;
ha l i t, forcibly ; — 2. then,as in Eng.
,force
( for making war ) forces, tr oops , [forovala : cf. Lat. valére, be strong,
b a l a - d i a . strength-
giving. [ 1269 ]b al a v a n t , a. powerful . [ 1233a.]b a l i d h i k a ,
a . superior in strength .
[adh ika z l 265.]b a l i n v i ta ,
a . connected w ith power ;
suggestive of power . [auv -ita , Vi .]b a l i , m. - 1 . of-fer ing, tribute ; — 2. esp .
portion of a daily meal or sacrifice offered
as tr ibute to gods, sem i-divine beings,
men, animals, esp. birds, and even inani
mate objects, [perhaps fr . Vbhr :
press hard ; distress ; beset.
[see Vvadh : cf . Lat. def end-ere,‘
press
or ward off’
; of f end-er e,‘
press h ard
upon,
ui , press down heavi ly .
b i dh a, a . di stressing ; as m. distress.
[Vbi tban dh a v a , m. (h aving connection or
relationship, t.e.) a relative ; friend.
[bandhu, 1208c.]b i l a , a . young, not grown ; as subst. m.
and f . — 1 . ch ild (distinguished f rom
yuvan ,
‘
young man,’
boy ; gi r l ;— 2. appl ied to a grown person (cf Eng.
chi ldish , puer ile ) , ch ild or booby , w. double
mg, 6121
.
bal ak a ,a. young ; as m. chil d. [balsa ]
brh atkath é ]
b rk a t- k a t h i , j : Great-Story ,
title of a
col lection of stories ascr ibed to Gunadh
ya (guni dh ya ) , and abr idged by Soma
deva under the name Kathasar itsagara .
[brhant, 1249s , 1279 ]b r h ad a gv a ,
a . possess ing great or
powerful h orses ; a s m . Brihadacva , name
of the sage who narr ates the story of Nala
to Yudh ish th ira. [brhént ( 1249a ) Agva ,
1298 : cf . eMe‘
ydA-tn os, wh ich is s im i lar ly
compounded and of l ike meaning ]b rh An t [450a], a . great ; m igh ty ; lofty .
[present ppl . of V2brh ,be
b f h a a - pat i , m. Brih aspati, name of a
divinity in wh ich the activ ity of the pious
in their re lations towards th e gods is per
sonified, the mediator between gods and
men , and the type of the priest and of
the priestly dign ity ; la ter , god of wisdom
and e loquence. lord of prayer ,’bfh
as + p6ti z for cpd, see 1250 and d, and
1267d ; for acct, Wh itney 94b ; for eu
phony ,1 71 1 ]
bai j i k a ,a . pertaining to the semen ; of
gui lt, inherited from one’
s father . [bus h
1222e and e 2.]b r a h m a - car y a ,
n. l ife of h ol iness
(brdhman ) , wa lk and conversation of a
Brahman student (brahman ) , esp. chas
tity ; rel igious studentsh ip, the first of
the four periods of a Brahman’
s l ife, see
i grama. [brahman ( 1249a2) or brahman
(probably both ) carya , equi v. of cal-yi t
acct, 1272, 12l 3e.]b r a h m a - car i n ,
a . (busy ing one’s self
with , i.s .) study ing sacred knowledge
as m. Brahman student, as adj . esp .
observing chastity , 6414, 100
91. [br i b
man , 1249s
b r a h m a ny a,a . pertaining or attached
to th e holy l ife and study (brahman ) , i .s .
pious ; attached or friendly to Brahmans
(brahman ) . [ 1212d 1 .]b r a h m a - day a ,
m. sacredoword h eritage ,
her itage consisting of the sacred word.
[brahmam l 249a
b r a h m a day a - har a , a .
sacred word as a her itage.
b r a h m a -dv i s, a . devotion-h ating, god
less. [brahmun 1249113 : acct,
receiving the
[202]
b r ah m a n , n. — l . devotion (conceived as
a swel l ing and fil l ing of the soul with
adoration for the gods ) , worship, in genera l
, any pious expression in the worsh ip
of the gods ; hymn of praise, praise , 73°
74 44 1; prayer , 76
16 - 2. sacred word,
word of God (opp. to the profane ) , 609 ;- 3. divine science, sacred learning,
theology , theosophy— 4. ho ly l ife, i .s .
chastity 5. the ( impersona l ) spir it
that pervades the universe. [V2brh,brhhman (n ) i s to brahmén (m .)
as pr ayer suppl ication is to pr ay-sr
(‘ w pplicant
b r a h m an , m.- l . pray-er , 76
13; wor
sh ipper ; priest, RV.x. 125.5 ; pray-er
by profession , Brahman ; — 2. the imper
sonal universe-pervading spir it (br éh man
personified as a god, i .s . Brahman, the
Supreme Al l -soul , in the theological
system, the Creator of the wor ld, 67
17
[V 2brh, see bréhman .]b r a h m a r si , m. pr iest
-sage , priestly sage,
see 1 “n. [brahman ( 1249a 2) 1» (pi , 127,1280b.]
b r a h m a v a r ca s a, n. pre em inence in
sacred learn ing or ho liness . [for brahmavar cas , wh ich occurs on ly in deriva .
brAhman vareas , 1315c.]b r a h m a v a r ca s v i n , a . eminent in
divine knowledge. possessing brahma
varcasa,’
q.v. :
b r a h m a - v ed i n , a . knowing divine
knowledge. [brAhmam 1249a 9.]b r a h m a - h an a . Brahman-slaying ;
a s m. murderer of a Brahman. [brahmtn, 1249a
2.]
b r ah m a, j 2-i , a . — l . pertain ing to brah
man , divine ; bo ly ,59 6 ; spir itual ,
— 2. pertaining to brahmfln , in both its
senses, i.s . : —2a. of Brahmans ; — 2b. of
Brahman or (angl icized ) Brahma,
the
Creator , 5723
, [brdhman and brah
man , 1208s? end.]
b r ah m ana,m . (having to do with br i b
man ar prayer and praise and divine
science, i . .s pr iest, 84 15 theologian,
Brahman , 5716; - f br i hmani , woman
of the priestly caste, Brahmanee. [br i bman, w.usual shift of acct, 12080.]
[203]
b r ah m ana , n. (of a brahmhn,of a priest b h a k sy a , grdv.
or Brahman ,i. .a ) the dictum of a priest
to be eaten, ea tablo ;
as n. proper food. [Vbhaka, 063 ]on matters of faith and cul tus ; esp. a bh ag a , m.
— 1 . (h e wh o deal s out, i. .e )Brahmana, as designation of one of a
class of Vedic writings which conta in
these dicta . [brahmim w. usual shiftof acct, 1208a .]
b r ah m a na - v ada , m. a statement of
the Brahmanas . [br i hmana ]b r fi (bréwi
'
ti brfité : the second
clause of 632 should read “before the
initial consonant of an ending 1 . act.
say ; w. dat. of per son and ace. qf thing,w. ace. of per son and either
ora tio recta ( 125,6074 3, 98
1 1 ) or else ace.
of th ing speak to, w. ace. of per son ,speak of , w. ace. q er son
,
say , i.s . announce, tel l ; w. vacas, ( t o:
ch ain, w. punar , answer , 83; - 2.
middle,brfité (used esp. to introduce oratio
recta and without des igna tion of the person
addressed ), says, inquit, 2013, 28 1 , 305° 1 3° 13,35 19.
ap a , remove ( the though t or recol lec
tion of a thing or person, acc., from a
person, abl .) by speak ing, i .s. try to con
sole a person (abl .) for the loss of a thingor person [this location is
apparently l ike the Eng. col loq. phrase
I’
l l ta lk it ( his opin ion ) out of+ p r a ,
te l l forth , proclaim , 7513; an
nounce, 887; then ( l ike the Eng. tel l of,
bad and colloquia l tell on ) , inform against,
betray , 931 7
.
p r a t i , speak back to answer.
V bh a k a (bhAksati , -te ; bhaksita; bhhk
situm ;-bhAksya ; bhaksAyati
(partake, enjoy , i.s.) eat consume ; de
vour . [old desid. of Vbhaj , 108g end : cf .bhiks, and for mg, V2ac,
bh a k aa, m. the enjoy ing, eating or drink
ing ; food ; at end of adj . cpds, havingas food, l iving on [Vbhaka]
bh a k sak a ,m. eater. [Vbhakszsee 1 181 s
end.]bh ak si ta v y a ,
[Vbhakgbh ak si n , a . eating. [Vbhakm
grdv. to be eaten.
dispenser ; r ich or kind master ; lord, f re
quent ep ithet of Savi tar — so - 2.
esp . Bhaga, name of an Adi tya, fromwhom welfare is expected and who brings
about love and institutes marr iage,— 3. portion ; lot (w. dur eu fortune ;esp . (as in good for tune , happy lot ;— 4 . lovel iness. [V bhaj , — 1 . cf .
Old Persian baga ,
‘ God’
; Bay ai‘
os' Zeb:
tbpi'ryios ; Slavonic bogii ,
‘ God’
; for mg,
cf . Eng. lord, AS. hla'
f -ord‘ loaf-ward, loaf -keeper
’
; — 3. for mg, cf .
the re lation of pdpos,‘ lot, fate,
’
to (“p op-e,‘
gat a
bh ag a v a n t , a .— 1 . fortunate, possessing
a happy lot, blessed ; then — 2. ( l ike Eng.
blessed) heaven ly , august, lordly , appl ied
to Indr a, Brahma , The Self-existent, theWood-deity , Sun , Moon ,
Earth , etc . used,
esp . in voc.,as a f orm of address
, so
26 4. [bhhgtn ]bh a g i n , a . fortunate ; happy ; splendid— bh agini
'
, j . sister ( the happy one
so f ar f orth as she has a brother ) .
[bhfigau]b h a g i r a th a ,
m. Bhagi rath a, name of an
ancient king, who brough t the Ganges
down from heaven. [perhaps f r . bhaginratha , having a splendid ch ariot
’
]bh a g n a ,
see 957e.
bh a g n a - bh i nda ,a . having broken pots
or [1308]who broke th e pots.bh a g n aqa ,
a . having broken hopes, dis
appointed. [59a 334 1 ]bh a nga, m. a breaking. [Vbhafij , 216.V b h aj (bhnjati , -teAbhaksit, ébhakta [883J bh aj isyétLAte
bhaktva -bhajya ;caus. bh i j hyati ). 1 . deal out ; appor
tion ; divide ; then (as Eng. share means
both ‘
give a part of’and ‘ have a part of
’
)— 2. middle, have as one
’s part, receive ;
have or take part in ; — 3. give one’
s se lfup to ; - 4. (ch as one
’s part, i .s. ) de
clare one’s self or , prefer , 15 3 ; — 5. be
take one’s self to ; turn to ; go to,
— 6. belong to, be attached to ; revere ;
Vbh afij] [204]
love, - caus. cause to have a share, bh a ttar a k a - v ar a , m. lord’s day , Sun
w ace. of person and gen. of th ing, day.
[cf . oa r-sir ,‘
get one’
s portion , eat,’bh a d r a, a . - 1 . praiseworthy , pleasing ;
w. a special iza tion of mg l ike those seen gladsome, — 2. good, happy ,
in Eng pa rtake and take as used with the cos. j i, good lady , bhadran ,
impl ied object f ood or dr ink, in bhakta , adv ,w. kr or a-car , do wel l , 22
17,
‘th ing divided, portion, food,
’and in —3. favorable, auspicious , — as n.
,
bhaka: akin are the names of th e two sing. and pl., welfare, prosperity , 2016 ;food-trees y ielding eatable nuts (acorns, w. kr, grant welfare to a person
buck-mast).oayds,m i c, oak ,
’
Lat figus , bless, 691 1
. [Vbhand, 1 188a.]‘ beech ,
’ AS b6c, Eng buck ‘ beech in bh ad r a - k f't , a . granting welfare ; blessbuck-mast, beech -nuts,
’
and buck-whea t ( so ing.
cal led from the l ikeness of th e kerne ls to V bh a n d (bhandate) . receive jubilantbeech -nuts ) ,AS . béce, Eng. beech : with Me, praise.
‘ beech ,’
is ident. bee,‘ book,
’
orig.
‘runes b h an d i sth a , a . most loudly or best
scratched on branches of a frui t-bearing praising.
tree ,’
see Tacitus, Germania , x. ; such a bh a y a, n. -1 . fear , anxiety ; in composi
branch was cal led by a name wh ich became tion w. the th ing fla red,
in Ol d High Ger . puaho stap or buoh-stab, fear of a th ing bhay i t, from
and meant or ig.‘ beech -staff
’
, but the fear , 36 4, 4 1
17; then, as conversely
word came to be used for the sign ificant in Eng., fear (or ig. danger ,’
so Job
th ing on the branch , the rune or letter ,’
has come to mean ‘anxiety ,
’ — 2. danger ,
AS bee-surf}Ger . Bach-sta le ) peril , 2519, [Vbh i
'
,l 148. 1a : for
5 ,act., sometimes mid.
,deal out to, give mg 2, cf . saxhdehaJ
a person (acc.) a share in a thing bh a y ar ta ,a . stricken with fear. [i rta ]
+ v i , par t asunder ; divide. bh é r a ,m. — 1 . a bear ing, carrying ; — 2.
+ p r a - v i , di vide. burden ; weigh t, 501; — 3. mass , quan
+ s am- v i , — 1 . di vide a thing (acc.) tity ; — 4 . (w. specia l iza tion as in La t.
w ith a person give a share pondus,‘ weigh t,
’then a lso ‘
pound a
- 2. present a person (acc.) with a th ing particular quanti ty or measure, in nir
[V bhr t cf . ¢v cr-¢6po-s, Lat. lucif eduas ) ,V b h aflj (bhanakti ; babhé iija ; abh i fik l igh t-bringing
’
; AS. horn-bora, hom
sit ; bhanksyati ; bhagna [957c]; bhank bearing, trumpeter’: for mgs 2- 4, cf.
tva; -bhajya ) . break. [opinions are Eng. weigh, orig.‘ bear up, l ift,
’
as in
divided as to wheth er VVbhafij , 2bhuj , weigh anchor , AS. wegan,‘carry , bear ,
’
and bham (see these ) or ig. began w. bhr and weight,‘ burden ,
’
then ‘ mass,’
then
cf gir i-bhr aj ,‘ breaking forth from the ‘ definite
mountains’
if bhaflj does stand for bh a r a t h , a . to be supported or main
sbhr ai ij , th en Lat. f ranger e, break,’
tained ; esp. to be kept al ive by the care
nau-f rag-a , sh ip-breaking (tempestas ) , of men, as epithet of the god Agni ; as m.
and Ger brechen ,Eng. break are akin.) Bharata , name of a patr iarchal hero.
bh a ttar a ,m. lord. [a transition-stem [Vbhiu1 176c.]
(399 ) fr . bhartr : corresponding to the bh ar g a s , n. radiant l igh t ; glory . [Vbhrjstrong ace. s. form bharti r -am, taken as or bhraj , q.v., 216. cf. «pur se, n.
,
if it were bh ar ti ra-m , is made the nom .‘ flame ’
; Lat. fulgur ,s. bhartar a-s , ctc. ; both transition to bh a r tr , m. - 1 . bearer ; — 2. supporter,
th e a-declension, and assimi lation of rt maintainer ; lord ; husband, 10? [Vbhr,to tt are regular in Prakrit.] 1 182b : cf. Lat.f ertor ,
bh a ttar ak a , m. lord, appl ied to gods bh a v é ,m. the coming into existence.
and learned men. [bhatti ra, 1222e
bh év in]
dition ; - 3. (way of being, i.e.) nature ;— 4 . natura l disposition ; fee l ing ; - 5.
fee lings ; heart, — 6. the existent ;
existen t thing, [V bh i'
i , 1 148 .
bh av i n , a . becoming, com ing into exist
ence ; about to be, destined to be,
future, -ini , j : a beautiful woman.
[Vbh tl 1 133 s end.]V bh as (bh i sats ; babhasé ; abh i sista ;bh i sita; bh i situm ; bh i sitva; -bh i sya )speak ; ta lk ; say. [perhaps for .bh i sk,
a sk-formation fr . Vbh i : 182m]+ a bh i , speak unto, address, w. acc. ,
speak, without obj ect.
p r a t i , speak‘
back, answer .
b h asa, f . speech , language. [Vbh i a]bh asi t a , ppl . spoken ; as n. [1 176a], whatis spoken , the words. [Vbhas.]V bh as (bh ii sati, -te ; babhi sé ; bh i sith ) .
shine. [cf.Vbh i ]+ p r a t i , sh ine over against, make a
show, appear wel l .
bh i n, n. l igh t. [Vbh i az but cf . 1 151 .1c 9.]bh i s -k a r h ,
m . the sun.
v bh i k s (bh iksate ; bibh iksé ; bum”;bh iksitum ; bhiksitva) . desire to h ave
a share for one’s self, wish for ; then ( l ike
the Eng .desire,‘express a wish re
quest ; beg ; esp . go begging for food.
[old desid. of Vbhaj , 108g l end : cf .
bunks ]bh i k s$ , f . - 1 . the act of begging, beg
ging ; — 2. that wh ich is got by begging,
alms. [Vbh iks, w. the re lation of
1 to 2, cf . that of Eng. getting,‘act of
getting,’to getting, that wh ich is
bh i d (bhinhtti, bhintté ; bibhéda , bi
bhidé ‘ bh et [832] bh stsyéti , -te
bhianh [957d] bh éttum bhittvii.-bhidya ) . cleave, cut asunder ; break in
twain , 102 sm ite sore ( in battle ) , 81 5 ;pound, bruise, crush (as a reed) , 70
15;
pierce. [orig.‘spl it, crush
’: cf . Lat.
flndo,‘cleave,
’
perfectfldi ; Ger . beissen,Eng. bite ; al so bit,
‘ morsel ,’and bit
,
‘
par t
of a bridle’
; bitter , used of a sword, w. a
trace of the orig. mg, Beowulf, 2705 ;caus. ba it, in ba it a bea r,
‘ make dogs bite
h im ,
’and ba it a hor se
,
‘ let him
[206]
p r a , split for th or open.
+ v i , spl it asunder ; break to pieces.
destroy .
bh i y as , as. fear . [Vbh i, 1 151 .2c.]V b h i sa j (bhishkti ) . heal .
bh i sé j a . heal ing ; as m. healer . [Vbh isaj ,
V bh i ( V. bhhyate ; V. and later , bibhéti
bhétum ; caus . bh i'
ahyate fear ;be afraid of bhi ta, having feared.frigh tened ; caus. sfir igh t. [w. bi-bhé-ti,
cf .Old High Ger . bi-bé-t, trembles,’whose
bi is sy l lable of reduplication, Ger . bebt,
AS. beof a'li, trembles the connection of
th ese words with aéB-opsu,‘am afeard,
flee in frigh t,’and games, fear ,
’is stil l a
moot-point ]b h i 1: fear . (th is,bh i ta, ppl. feared ; as n. [1 176a], fear .bh i
’
m a, a . fearful , terrible ; as m. Bh ima,
name of a Vidarbhan king. [V bh i,1 166b.]
b h i m a -p a r ak r am h , m. terrible
strength or courage. [1264,bh i m a-pa r ak r am a , a . possessing
bh ima-par i kramfl, 111
, 23. [ 1293 ]
bh i m a -
gas a n a , n. command or sum
mons of Bh ima. [1264 ,b h i ru, a . timid. [Vbh i , 1 192 ]V 1 b h uj (bhujati ; bhugna ; -bhdjya ).bend ; turn ; make crooked. [so far as
the meaning goes, the fol lowing words
may wel l be taken as cognate : ¢Ir7
Lat.j ug-ere,‘turn about, flee
’
; AS. big-cu,
‘ bend, turn about’
sometimes
also ‘ flee,’Eng.verb bow (as in bow down ) ,
‘ bend’
; AS. boga , Eng. bow,
‘arcus ,
’el-bow,
ra in-bow ; Ger . bieg-sam
,
‘
pliable,’Old Eng.
bi l l -sum,
‘
pliable, y ielding,’ Eng. buxom,
‘ li the, l ively ,vigorous
’: but the Ger
manic g raises phonetic difficul ties which
are not yet satisfactori ly cleared up.]2b h uj (bhunhkti , bhufikté ; bubhbja,bubhujé abhujat bhoksyi ti , -te
bhuktd ; bhbktum ; bhuktvfi). 1 . en
joy ; in Veda , (have use with , i .s .) havethe use of a th ing (and so w.
- 2. in later Sht. ( l ike Ger . genicssen ,cj i
also bhoga and bh ojana ), enjoy esp . food,
[207]
w. acc.; - 3. without obj ect, take one’s
meal ; then - 4 . enjoy (things that are
not food) , w. acc.,
- 5. reap the frui t
(of sin ) at the hands of a person
79 ‘7 ; — 6. caus. cause to take food, feed.
[ if for ebhruj (but th is is doubtful — see
Vbhaflj ), then cf . Lat. f rui, gfrugvi,‘ have
use with’
(a th ing, hence instr .
‘enjoy
’
; f rug-es ,‘ fruit ’ ; AS. brfican
,
enjoy’
(food or dr ink ) ,‘ use,
’Eng. brook,
orig. use ,’now
‘
put up
+ a nu, reap the fruit (of good or evil
deeds ) .
+ upa ,- I . enjoy , esp. (enjoy food, i .s .)
eat ; - 2. reap the fruit (of good or evil
deeds ).
bh uj a i ii - g am a , m. serpent. [‘
going
with bending or with crooking’bhajan ,
grd of V 1 bhuj , 995 : for mg, cf . khaga .]V bhur (bharati ) . make short and quick
motions, twitch , jerk, kick, struggle, stir .
[ci . ¢6pw, stir around, mingle’
; paw,
‘ bubble’
; Lat.fitr-ere‘ be agitated, rage
’
;
defiu-tum,
‘ boiled ofi Eng. brew,
‘ boil
bro-th,
bhur a na , a . ( like the Eng. stir ring, i.s.)both 1 . moving quickly and - 2. active,
busy . [Vbhur , l 150.2c.]V bh ur any a (bhuranyati ).busy . [bharana, 1059d.]
bhuv a n a ,n. - 1 . being, existence ; — 2.
wor ld ; — 3. with viqva : sing., tout le
monde ; pl ., al l beings. [Vbh t'
i , 1 150.
2c.]bh a v a n s -t r a y s , n. wor ld-tr iad, i.e.
heaven and atmosphere and earth .
bh flv a s , the second q/'
the so-ca lled “utter
ances”
(see vy i hrti ) , bhuvas i, interpreted
as air or atmosphere, on account of its
pos ition between bh iir and svar . [prob.
nothing more than th e voc. pl. of bh t‘
i,
‘ 0 yo
V bh i'
i (bhavati , -to ; babh iiva [789a] ;Abhfit bhavisyéti , -te bh iith bhh
vitum ; bhfitvi ; caus . bhava
yati, -te ) . become, 67 21,
come into being, 9217; ar ise, h appen,
take place ; exist ; very often to be ren
dered simply by be, 7 1 ;—pfirvam abh i
'
i d r i ja, once there was a
be stirring,
king, 481; tath i bhavatu, so be it,
so pr i fljal ir bh t'
itva, (having become pr i fljal i , i .s.) assuming suppl iant
posture , - w. possessive gen., become
(the property ) of a person ; i dhipatyamtasya babh t
'
iva, lordsh ip became h is , he
attained lordship, 371; seldom w. da t.,
— imperative, bhavatu: (be it, i.e.)good ; enough ; what
’
s th e use of talking,
the th ing is clear , 237,
tad bhavatu, never mind that,— bhfita , see e.u. in self-expla iningper iphrases w. ppls, 52 ‘7,- des id. bubh iisati desire to be
,
[w. ‘ bh iit cf . ( cps,‘ became, grew
’
;
cf . Lat.fiH'
t,was
’Old Lat. f it-cl ,
‘maybe
’
; AS. beo'
m,
‘am Eng. be.]
a rm ,— 1 . (perhaps be along after ,
and so) come up with , attain ; - 2. ex
perience ; enjoy , — 3. (experience,i.e.) make practica l acquaintance with ,
come to understand ; perceive ; hear , 431
.
a bh i , be against [1077 oppress,
and so overpower .
ud , arise up, make itself perceptible.
+ p a r i , - 1 . be around, surround, en
compass ; - 2. (l ike the Eng. colloq. get
around, i.e.) get the better of, prove
superior to ; be super ior to, and so - 3 .
treat with contempt, 37
+ p r a ,- 1 . come forth into being ;
arise ; - 2. be before (others ) , have‘
the
power ; have power, be strong.
+ v i , (become asunder , i.s.) expand, develop pervade ; — eaus . cause to expand
or open ; discover ; vibhavita , discovered,found out.
+ s am ,— 1 . (unite [intrans.] togeth er ,
and so take form , i.s .) be shapen in its
old sense, he created ; be born, come
into being ; become ; originate ; sam
bh t‘
ita, sprung from , 19 13 ; - 2. exist,
be, sambabh iiva, am, RV .
x.- 3. happen, occur ; pass
cur rent, 527; - caus. — 1 . (cause to be
together, bring into form , i .s .) make,accomplish ; —2. honor , 30
13; — 3. (bring
together , and so,l ike Eng. con-jecture )
suppose. [development of cans. mg 2
unclean ]
bh fi] [208]
ab h i - s am , ( l it. become unto, i .e.)attain (e.g. a condition ) by a process of
change, enter into (e.g. wifehood) , 86 19:
be born unto ( immortal ity ) , 973.
b h t‘
l [351 0. at end of cpds, becom ing,
being, existent ; as f .— 1 . a becom ing,
being ;— 2. the place f or mg, cf. bha
vana ) of being, the wor ld, space p l .
wor lds, spaces (of . bhuvas ) 3. the
earth , as distinguished from heaven and b hur i - k i l a , m. long time.
atmosphere ; bh avi, on earth ; — 4. the bh fir i - s th i t r a , a . having many sta
land, lands . [Vbhfi, tions, being in many places.
b huta, ppl .— 1 . become, been, i.s . past ; b h fir nim. stirring, and so v igi lant, jealous
real ; - 2. having become, being, used in (of a god) . [Vbhur , 245b.]composition as . its predicate as a grommati V b h i e (bh l
‘
laati bhfiafiyati [IO-flan}cal device to give the predicate an adj . f orm 1 . bhfiaati , be busy for ; — 2. bh iiaayati,
w. number and gender 6 7, 19 29 (make ready for , i .s .) adorn .
— 3 . as n. ( that wh ich has become, bh fisa na , n. ornament. [Vbh iia mg 2
i .s .) a being, divine or human or
other ; creature in genera l , 2113:
created th ing, wor ld,— 4 . as m. n . uncanny being, ghost, gob
l in ,— 5. as n. element ; pafica
bhutani , five elements (ear th water , fire ,
air , ether , of wh ich the body 18 composed
and into which it is dissol ved) , 68 9 ;
so 66 1-3. [V bhfi : cf. cps-7 6 4 ,‘
plant,
b h r (bibharti bharati , -te V.
j abh i ra, jabhr é [789b] ; later , babhi ra ;abharsit ; bhar isyati ; bhrth ; bhattan ;o bhttya ) . bear (cf . the var ious senses ofbear m Eng.) thus , — 1 . hold, and so pos
seas ; - 2. bear ( in the womb ) ; abbat st,she bare, — 3. endure ; - 4 . carry ,
convey ; — 5. (bear , i.e., as in Latimer )win ; — 6. bring (as an offer ing, cf. of-fer ) ,
w fidhar , ofier th e breast,
suck le, 78° — 7 . (bear , i .s.) support
and so ( l ike Eng. support) , furnish sus
tenance to, 229; maintain, RV.x. 125. 1 ;
so al so, keep (on hire ) ; — 8 . wear (as Ger .
tragen means ‘ bear’and ‘ wear w.
nakh i ni, wear th e nail s, keep th em un
trimmed, 6419
. [ci . «pipes, Lat. f ero, Eng.
bea r,
‘ bear’in its various mgs, Ger . gs
b h i t a - g r am a , m. sing. and pl. commu
ni ty of creatures .
bhut a -b h i si , f . language of the gob
l ins or Pieachas.
b hu- t a l a , n. earth-surface, ground, ear th .
[cf . tala.)bh i t i , f . being, esp. wel l-being. [V bh ii :cf . onions, a being,
bh fi - p a , m. protector of the earth or land,
king, prince. bat-en, br ing forth AS. bear -n,Eng.
b h fi-p a t i , m. lord of the land, king, ba irn
,
‘ch i ld,
’is an old ppl ., l it.
‘that
prince. wh ich is hom e or born cf . a lsoMp, Lat.b h ii -bh i g a , m. spot of the earth , place.
b h fim a n , n. earth ; wor ld. [Vbh i 1 168.
1d : for mg, cf . bh ir.]b h fim i , _fi - l . ear th ,
57 1 1 ; ground, 43“;
— 2. land ; - 3. place , esp. fit place,
proper vessel (cfZ sthana , pi tt a ) ,
[Vbh ii, 1 167 : for mg, cf. bh ii .]bh i n i - p a t i , m. lord of the land, k ing,
prince.
bhum i -b h i g a , m. spot of ground.
f i r , carr ier off, th ief’: see also under
the derivs, bhara , bhartr, and bh rti ; cf .
bhara and the fol lowing ]a p a , carry ofi, take away ,
a v a , bear down (an assailing weapon ),ward off .
i , hear unto, bring to.
upa ,bring unto.
n i , only in ppl., nibhrta , (borne down,lowered, i.s.) h idden .
b hum i - sth a , a . standing on the ground.
[emb h fiy i ns , a . more ; greater. [
‘ becoming in
a h igher degree, increasing,’
Vbh ii, 4702]
bh l‘
l r , thefirst of the three“utterances
”
(seevy i hrti ) , bhfir l, O earth . [crystal l izedvoc. sing. of blui ]
bh ii r i , a . abundant ; much . [Vbh i , 1 191
bh r i trsth ana]
so,‘clansman
’
; Lat. fi é-ter ,‘ brother
’
;
Eng. brothen ]bh r i tr - s th an a , a . (having, i .e.) takingthe brother
’s place ; as m. representative
of a brother.
bh r uv a , f or bir d at end of cpds, 13150.
b h r il f . brow. [cf . b-¢p6-s,‘eye
brow’
; AS. br ii,
‘eye
-l id Eng. brow.]
m a pron. root, see ahhm. [cf. p s
'
,
Lat. me, AS. me”
, Eng. me.]V m a nh (manhate ) . make great or abnudant a th ing (acc.) for a person
grant abundantly to. [for omagh , cf .
magha orig. be great,’
and trans.
‘ make great or h igh ,’and essential ly
ident. w. Vmah : see under Vmah : formg, cf . Lat. la rgas,
‘ large, liberal ,’w .
la rgi r i,‘
give l iberal ly ,’and Eng. la rge
with largess .]manh i sth a , a . granting most abundantly ,
most generous. [Vmanh ,m a - k i r a , m. the letter m. [Whi tneym a k h a, a . jocund. [cf. Vmah .]m a g h dh a , m. pl . Magadhans, name of a
people ; Magadha, name of their country,
Southern Behar .
m a g a dh a - dega , m. the land of Magadha.
V m a g h , see manh .
m a g h a, n. l iberal gif t ; boun ty . [Vmagh ,i .s . m ilk ]
m a g h é v a n a . — 1 . abounding in
liberal gifts , generous ; esp.,as m.
, gener
ous (patron ) , designation of the rich lord
who institutes a sacr ifice and pays the
priests, 881 — cf . siir i appl ied in pa rticula r
to Indra, as Rewarder (of pr iests and
singers ) , — 2. in the
Epos , Th e Generous One, standing epithet
of Indra, 511
. [magha,m a fig a l a, n .
— 1 . wel fare, luck ; — 2. any
th ing lucky , auspicious , ar of good omen ;— 3. old or traditional usage,
m a ii g a l y a , a . lucky , suspicious, of good
omen. [mafigala, 1212d
m a c - ch i sy a ,m. pupil of me, my pupil .
[mad gisya , 159,
V m a j j (mdjjati , -te ; mamajj a ; Amajj i t ;mai ksyhti,
-te majj isyMi magna
maul tum ; omajya ). sink under ;
dip one’
s self ; dive ; duck or sub-merge,
intrans. [perhaps or ig. smaagh, get
into’: cf . madga ,
‘ duck’
; Lat. ma g-ere
,
‘ duck’
; merg-as
,
‘ diver’bird : for the
ph onetic relations, cf . majj an , Avestan
mazga , Church S lavonic mozga, AS.
mearg, Eng. ma r row, Ger . Ma rk, al l mean
ing‘ marrow
,
’and, as meaning or igina l ly
the inmost part or pith ,’
prob. from this
root : see rajju.]ud , e
-merge.
ui , sink down ; dip one’
s self, bathe.m a j j i o , Pralcr it f or marj i ra-s
and f or maj -jara-s (‘ my
m a th a r a , a . perhaps pers istent ; as n .
Mathara, name of a man .
m ani , m. - 1 . pear l ; jewel ; - 2. water
jar .
m ani k a , as. large water-jar . [maul ]m a nda p a ,
m. n. open hal l or pavil ion.
m anda p i k i , f . sma l l shed or shop.
[mandapa, 1222 and d.]m i nda l a ,
n. disk, circle, ring.
m andfik a ,m. frog ; f . mandfiki [355b],
female frog.
m a tf , f . - 1 . (thinking upon, i.s., like the
Ger .An-dach t, see dh i 2) devotion ; pioushymn or song of praise , — 2.
though t ; though ts , purpose,
mind ; intention ; - 3. opinion ; — 4. nu
derstanding, intel l igence. [Vman ,
q.v. : cf . Lat. mens , stem men-ti,‘ mind
’
;
AS. ge-myn
-d,
‘ mind,’Eng. mind.]
m a t i - p r a k a r sa , m. wi t-superiority, i.s.
a fine dodge.
m i t s y a , as. fish . the l ively one,’
Vmad ]V
_m a th or manth (mathni ti , mathnite ;manthati ; mathati mami tha , ma
mathus, mamanthds, methus ; an ath
it ; mathisyati. -to, manthisyati ; math
— 1 . stir or wh ir l ; w. aguim, produce fire
by wh ir ling the stick of attrition in a dry
piece of wood ; - 2. shake, agitate, dis
tress.
p r a , agitate.
V m a d (mfldati ; mfidyati ; man i da
ayati , -ts ) .
water , and as a type of joyousness ;spam iirmir madann iva stomas , praise
(joyous ) as a bubbling water-wave,
boil. be agitated ;- 2.fig. be (pleasantly
[m anna
- 1 . bubble, undul ate, of m a dh y am h ,- 1 . midmost, situated be
tween ; - 2. of middling qua lity , size, etc.
— 3. as m. n. the m iddle (of th e body ) ,waist ; - 4 . as n. the middle (of anything ) .
[madhya, 474 : cf . 525excited, i .s .) glad ; rejoice ; w. instr .
, V m a n (manyate ; mené [794e] ; 4mmbe exhi larated or intoxicated with joy ;— 3. esp .
, as describing the life of the
gods and the blessed, be in bl iss ; w. cog
nate acc.,— 4. trans . gladden ,
rejoice ,intoxicate ; matta, drunk ; — caus .
— 1 . act. gladden ;- 2. mid. take deligh t,
[the rather rare physical mg ( 1 ) is
prob. the orig. one, w. a transfer to fig.
use, as in Eng. bubble over with j oy or
mirth cf.nab-du, be moist Lat. mad-Ere,
be soaked, ful l , drunk’
; mat-ta-s (mg 4 )and Lat. ma t-tu-s,
‘ drunk’: see the col la
teral form Vl mand, and Vn ud.]+ud , be out (of one
’s senses ) with ex
citement ; be frantic.
p r a , take pleasure.
m a d ,so-cal led stem of 1st pers. pron.
,494.
mAd a , m. excitement, inspiration, intoxi
cation, pl . intoxicating drinks,esp .
Soma-draugh ts, NM ]m a d i y a ,
a . mine. [mad, 1215d.]m a dg d , m. a water-fowl . diver ,
’ Vn aj j ,
q .v.]m adh u,
a . sweet ; as n . sweet food and
dr ink : esp. Soma ; m ilk and its products ;
qflenest honey , [cf. p ies,‘ wine
’
;
AS medu,Eng. mead.]
m a dh ur a ,a . sweet ; of speeches, h oneyed.
[mhdhu, 1226a.]madh y a ,
— 1 . as n. middle ; w. nabhasas
middle of h eaven , m id-heaven ; madhye
in the m iddle, w. gen. [1 130] or at
end of cpd, in the m idst of in 1 8 7,
- 2. m. n. ( the middle, i.s.) the waist ;
mansyate, -ti ; math ; maatam ; matvfi;-ms.nya, -m£tya ; desid. mimansate ) . ,be
minded : 1 . th ink, bel ieve, imagine, 34
conjectur e ; yadi nanyath i man
yase, if thouart not otherwise m inded, if
thou art agreed, manye, inserted
pa renthetica lly, methinks, 51 13 ; expect.
52u —2. consider someth ing (acc.) assomething 37 7
,
praptaki lam amanyata, considered (sc.
it) an arr ived time, though t that the time
had come, bahuman , consider as
much , esteem , h onor ; — 3. th ink fit or
righ t, 101° — 4 . th ink upon, set the heart
on , 34; — 5. have in mind or view,
— caus ., see mi naya ;
— desid. consider ,
examine, cal l in question . [cf . p i -pov-a,‘ mind i.s. fix the though ts on, wish ,
str ive (see man 4 ) ; Lat. me-min-i,‘ keep
in m ind’
; AS. preterito-present man,
‘am
mindful,
’and the indirectly connected
mti'nan, Eng. mean,
‘ have in mind, ln
+ a nu, (be minded after anoth er,i .e.)
fol low another in opinion, assent, ap
prove ; consent ; give leave, w. ace. of
person ,49 4 ; permit,
+ a b h i , — 1 . put one’s mind upon, de
sire ; abbin ata , desired, agreeable ; - 2.
have intentions against [1077 plot
against.
a v a , (mind, i .e. regard downwards, i.s .)re garder de haut en has, look down upon ,
l ike the La t. de-spicere, despise, treat wi th
contempt.
- 3. as adj .,used l ike La t. medius : samu m an a s ,
n. mind, in its widest sense as
dr am madhyam , in medium mare. [cf .
p iaoos, sp ed-j o-s, Lat. medias, Goth .midj is,AS. mtd
,Eng. mid
m adh y a- g a ,
a . situated in th e middle
of , tarry ing among.
m adh y a - car i n , a . moving in the m id
dle of (w. gen.,
i .s. moving
among.
appl ied to the powers of conception,wi ll ,
and emotion : thus,— 1 . th e intel lect ; the
though ts, 66 7 ; understanding,
mind, — 2. re
fiection ; excogitation ; perhaps the thing
excogitated, praise, or ( l ike dh i 2) devotion, 73
7; — 3. wish , inclination towards ;
— 4 . desire ; — 5. feel ings ; disposition ;14 ‘
manisa'
]
heart, 787. [Vman cf. p ivot,
‘ mind,
spirit’
; Lat.M iner -cc , the goddess‘
giftedwith
m a n i sfi, f .— 1 . though t ; understanding ;
instr . mani si , adv. wisely ;- 2. expression
of though t and wisdom in saw, prayer ,
and hymn (cf. dhi 2) . [Vman ,1 197b.]
m a n i s i n , a . 1 . having understanding,
wise ; — 2. prayerful , devout. [manisfl1230a.]
m h nu, m. — 1 . man ; collectively (as in
Eng.,and l ike Hebrew adam ) , man , man
kind, 731 9; — 2. ( like Hebrew Adam ) The
Man xar’
l foxfiv, Mann, father of man
kind ; Mann, as originator of prayer ,
praise, and sacr ifice, Mann, as type
of piety and majesty, Mann, sup
posititious author of the law-book of the
Manavas. [cf. Goth . manna , Ger . Mann,
AS. man,Eng. man : the noun is genera l
ized to a quasi pronoun in AS. man, Ger .
man,l ike Lat. home in French on
, but
reta ins a distinct form as noun in Ger .
Mann (as homo does in French homme) :
cf . al so Mannus, myth ical ancestor of the
West-Germans (Tacitus, Germ ania,
perhaps related are Miyu-s and M im s,
myth ica l Greek forefathers : the der iva
tion of m an fr . Vman, think,’is unobjec
tionable so far as the form goes ( 1 1 78b ) ,but the usual explanation of m an as
‘ the th inker’defies common sense ]
m a nu-j a ,m. man. [prop. adj .,
‘ Manu
born, sprung from Mann,’
m a nuj en dr a , m. (prince of men, i .s .)
pr ince, king, 15. [manoja + indra ,
m a n n ay a,— 1 . a. human ; — 2. as m. man.
[manus, l 212d 1 : cf . manusa : for mg 2,see manava .]
ma nusy a tv h , n. condition of being man .
[mannaya, 1239 ]m a n n ay a -d ev h , m. human god [1280
1 ]or man-
god [1280b] or god among men
i.s.Brahman, 951.
ma n n ay a - l ok h , m. world of men.
mAnus , m. man. [cf.mhnuand 1 154 ]
gua n o - r a th a , m. wish . [l it.‘ h eart
’
s
joy,’manas + 2 ratha.]
[212]
m an ta , m. counsel , i .s. del iberation ; then
( l ike Eng. counsel ) , resul t of deliberation,
plan, intent. [Vman , 1 161a.]m i n t r a , m.
— 1 . though t ; esp. though t as
uttered in formal address, in prayer or
song of praise (see dh i 2) , or in pious text ;- 2. usua l des igna tion of the hymns and
texts of th e Vedas ; — 3. la ter (when
these Vedic texts came to be used as
magic formulas ) , spel l , charm ; — 4 . l ike
mi ntu, deliberation, plan. [Vman, 1 185b :
for mg 3, cf. Lat. ca rmen,‘solemn utter
ance’
(see Vga ins ) , th en ‘ magic spel l ,’
whence Eng. cha rm ]m a n tr a -da ,
a . giving, i .e. impar ting the
sacred texts, t.e.,as m.
,Veda-teacher .
V m a n t r a y a (mantrayate - 1 .
speak with solemn or forma l utterance ;— 2. deliberate. [denom . of mantra
see its various mgs.]a nu, fol low with a mantra, accompany
with a sacred text, l ike La t. prosequi
vocibus.
+ abh i , address a spell unto ; charm or
cdnjure.
+ 5 , speak unto ; esp. bid farewel l to,
ui , invite. [for mg, of. (under Vbudh )Eng. bid,
‘ make formal announcement
of,’and then
s am-ui, invite togeth er ,
m a n t r a v a n t , a . accompanied by sacred
texts. [mantr a, 1233 ]m a n tr a -v a r a , m. the wording of a
sacred text.
V l m a n d (mandati ; man anda ; amandit) . gladden, 74
4. [col lateral form of
Vmad.)V 2m a n d or mad (mamétti ; madati ).tarry, loiter. [ampl ification of aman,‘remain,
’the congener of p in-em, Lat.
man-Ere,
m a n da ,a . — 1 . tarry ing, slow ; —2.
(sluggish , and so) weak ; insignificant ;
l ittle ; — 3. ( like Eng. col loq. slow) stupid.
[V2mand,m a n da -bh i gy a ,
a . having li ttle luck,
unlucky .
m a n o - h a r a ,a. (heart-taking, i.s.) cap m a n da r a , m. Mandara, a sacred moun
tivating.
m asyabh a'
iva]
m a sy - s h kav a , m. lack of ink.
V m a h (mdhate ; n amabe mahita;
mahitvfi; caus . mahhyati , -te ) . or ig. he
great or high , and so — 1 . mid. be glad,
rejoice ; then (trans. make great or h igh ,
and so) - 2. act. elate ; gladden ; exal t
(mid ) , —3. esteem high ly , honor.
[for omagh, cf . magha, also Vmanh
for orig. mg, cf. participial adj . mahant,‘
great’: for mgs 1 and 2, cf . American
coll oq . use of high as‘ h igh in spirit,
elated, esp. intoxicated
— with orig. Vsmagh in the mgs‘ be
great, migh ty, i .s . powerful or able,’trans.
‘make able, help,’cf . pox
-Ads,‘ h elping
bar , lever’
; mix-ad )‘means
’
; Goth . mag,
AS. 11mg,‘am able, Eng. may
— with the col lateral form smag, whose
deaspiration is prob. Indo-European, cf .
picky-as, Lat. mag
-nus, AS. mic-cl , Eng .
mickle, great’
]mAh , f . mah i, a . great ; migh ty ,
strong ; —mahi, as subst. the great, i .s. the
earth ; f or mg, cf pr th iVi'
. [cf. Vmah :see 400
m a h d ,a . great. [Vmah ]
m a h h n t [45oh ], f . mahati, — 1 . a . great
( in space, time, quantity , or qual i ty , and
so) , large, long, migh ty , important ; sig
nificant, as m. great or noble man ,— 2. m. (se. i tman ), the inte l
lect, 67 17. [orig. ppl . of Vmah , q.v.]m a h a r si , m. great Rishi.
m ah a s , n. greatness ; migh t ; glory ; glad
ness ; mahobhis , adv.: with power ,
joyful ly , [Vmah, see its var ious mgs.]m a l l a, used as pr ior member of a cpd, instead
of mahant, 1249h , 355a. [Vmalt ]m a h a- k a th i , j : great tale.
m a h a- k a v i , m. great poet.
m a h a- kul a , n. (great, i.e.) noble family.
m a h a guru, a . exceedingly reverend
as m. per son worthy of unusual
h onor .
m a h a- t a p a s , a . (having, i .s.) practising
m a h a- dh a n a , 0. having great weal th ,very r ich .
m a h a-p a i k a , m. n. (great, i.s.) deep
m a h i - p andi ta ,a . exceedingly learned
[1279]m a h i p a r i dh a , m. great crime.
m a h a-p r aj na , a . very wise
m a h i - h i h u, a. great armed i.s.
stout-armed.
m a h i -bh ii ta , n. grosser element, i.s.
earth , air , fire, water , or eth er (as distinguished from a subtile element or rudi
mentary atoms ) .
m a h i -m a n a s , a . great-minded.
m a h i -mun i , m. great sage.
m a h i -y a j iia, as. great sacrifice, 59° rt.
m a h a- y a ga s , a. having great glory ,
[maha
m a h a- r i j a, as. great prince.
1315a.]m a h i - r i v a , or. great howl .
m a h i - v i k r am a , a . having great m ight
or courage ; as m. Great-migh t, name of a
[r i isa
m a h i -v i r a, as. great hero.
m a h i -v r a tfi, n. great vow.
m a h i - v r a ta , a . having a mahavratt ,having undertaken a great vow.
m a h i - s i nh a , m. great lion.
m ah i , a . great. [Vmah .]m a h i tv a, n. greatness, migh t.
m a h im dn , m. migh t ; instr . mahi nii,425e. [Vmah , 1 168.2b.]
m a h i sa, a . mighty ; mahieo mrgas, the
powerful beast, i.s. bufial o, RV . ; as m
without mpgn, hufialo, - mh.h isi, f .
[acct, cj 1362h th e powerful one, as designation : of a woman of high rank ; of the
first wi fe of a king, I“; sometimes of any
queen of a king, 501. [Vmal l , 1 197h .]
m a h i , see under mi ll .
m a h i - k ei t , m. earth -rul er , king.
m a h i - p a t i , m. earth -lord, king.
great austerity ; as m.Great-penance, name m a h i p 5 1a m. earth -protector, king.
of a sage.
m a h atm a n , a . having s (great, i .s.) noblenature, noble ; magu-animus. [mah ii h naa ]
V m a h i y a (mahiyate ). be glad, happy,
blessed. [prep.‘ be great, high ,
’denom.
of mah i with the modification of
mg mentioned under Vmah , q.v.]
[215]
m a h e n d r h , m.
great chief, 10“ (w. mg 1 a lso) . [mal lsindra ]
m a h en d r a tv a , n. the name or dignity
of Great-Indr a.
m a h egv a r a , m. great lord ; esp.,as pl .,
designation of the four l okapal i s , Indra,Yama, Agni , and Varuna. [maha
igvara Jm a h i uj a s , a . h aving great strength ,
migh ty . [mah i ojas.]V 1 m i (mimi
'
te [660 mamad, mamé ;
dmi sta ; mi td mistum ; mitvi ;-mi ya ) . — 1 . measur e ; — 2. measure
with , compare ;— 3. mete out ; — 4 . ar
range, form ; build ; make, [for 1 ,cf . pt-r pcr ,
‘ measure ’
; Lat. ni-mi-as ,‘not
to be measured, excessive’
; for 4 , cf.
p it-pa and Lat. md-nu-s,
‘ former , i .s. hand’
;
sit-M s,‘ handy , easy
’: see al so the col
later al form Vl mi,‘ buil d, set up,
’and
under mi tt and miss.]a nu, (form after , i .s.) re-create in
imagination, conceive .
up a , measure with , compare.
n i s ,fash ion or make out of con
struct.
+ v i -n i s , lay out (garden ) .
p a r i , measure around, l imit.
p r a , m easure .
+ p r a t i , m ake (so as to he a match )against, cf . pr atima.
+ v i , measure out ; then ( l ike Eng. meas
ure ) , pass over , traverse ( the sky ) .
2m i . or mi (m lm i ti [660h mimdya ) .bel low.
v i , bel low or cry aloud.
m i , adv. and conj . not, mostly in prohibitions
[1 122b] : — I . regular ly w. subj unctive, i .s.
augmentless f orm of a past tense [579etc. ; in order that not, 53
7; — 2. w.
imperative,— 3. ra rely w.
optative, 7917; — 4 . w. evan , not so, 38
°
— 5. w. u, me, see u. [cf . pi), Elian pd,‘not, th at
m i s s and means n. meat, flesh ; usedalso in pl . [cf. Church Slavonic mesa,Pruss ian mensa ,
‘ flesh ’: cf. 64 7m]
m i ns a tv a , n. the being meat, the styme
logical meaning of mi nes .
[mfida
— 1 . Great-Indra ; - 2. m i fis a - r uc i , a . having pleasure in meat,
greedy for meat.
m anna - l uh dh a , a. desirous of meat.
[V lubb ]m aI
"
) g a l y a a. bringing happiness, pleas
ant. [mangala]m i c i r am , adv. (not long, i .s.) shortly ,
straigh tway . [m i ciran ,1 122h
m i th a r a ,m. Mathara, name of a man.
[mathara, 1208f .]m i na v a , m. boy , youngster . [not akin
w. manu,‘ man
’: perhaps for smalnava :fi/
cf . Prussian malnyz,
m i na v a k a , m. manikin ,dwarf. [mi n
ava , 1222h .]m i ta r i gv a n , m. Matar icvan, mystic
name of Agni.
m i tul a m. mother’
s broth er . [mi try1227 2 : cf. pin
-
pans, Doric pd‘rpms,
‘ mother’
s
m i tt j : moth er ; applied also to th e
earth , the Dawn, th e sticks of attr ition
[perhaps‘ the one who metes
out’ food to the h ousehold, or e lse ‘ the
former’
of the chi ld in th e womb,
V l mi , ‘ measure or mete ,
’ ‘ form ,
’1 1 82d
cf . pfimp, Doric pdr‘
np, Lat. mi ter,
AS. mo'
der,Eng. mother also pa
'
ia,
m atrta s , adv. from the mother , on the
m oth er’s side. [mam 1098b.]
m i trv a t , adv. as one’s moth er .
mat r i , f — 1 . measure ; at end of adj .
cpds [see 13020 having as its measure,
so and so long or h igh or large, etc
j i nn-matr a, knee-deep vyiima-m i tra , a
fathom bread ; — 2. the ful l measure,i.s . l im it ; at end of adj . cpds , having as
its l im it, not more th an and then , these
adj . cpds being used substantively ( 1247
merely , only , mere
such a cpd as first member of an
other cpd, hence - 3 . f rom
this fiequent use qf mi tr i at end ofcpds in the f orm mi tra the quas i
stem,mi tra, n. measure, i.s. h eight,
depth , length , breadth , distance
[Vl ms'
u ‘ measure,’1 1850 : cf . p i-r pov,
m i da , m. revelry. [Vmai ]
6
1 mans ]
1 m i n a , m. n. — 1 . Opinion ; —2. ( l ike the
Eng. opinion ) estimation, esp. good esteem ;
- 3. honor . [Vmam2 man s ,
m. l ike the Eng. building, and
so structure, castle. [V1 mi , make,
bui ld,’1 150. l a.]
3 m inus , m.— 1 . l ike the obs. Eng. maker ,
r oam-433, poet ;- 2. as name of Agas
tya’s father , Mi na. [do.]
m i n a - da , a . (giving, i .s.) showing honor
(to others ) ; as m. honor-giver , address qfa woman to her lover .
V m i n a y a (m i nhyati ) .of l mi na : cf .
m i n a v h ,— 1 . a . human ; descended from
m an or Manu (see m an ) —2. as m. one
of the sons of men, a man ; — 3. m.
Manava, name of a school of the Yajurveda. [mitnu, 12080 : for mgs 1 and 2
,
observe that Old High Ger . mennisch,
th ough prop. an adj . fr. man,‘ homo
,
’
and
meaning‘ humenne,
’is used al so as a
subst.meaning‘ man,
’and used 1n its Ger .
form Mensch,‘man,
’as subst. only : cf .
also nara , mannaya, mi nusaJm an a v a - dh a r m a gastra, n. law-book of
the Manavas or Manava—school .
m an n ed ,a . sprung from the mind ; of the
mind. [m6nas, 1208a.]m isnusa , f .
-i , a . perta ining to man , hu
man ; as m. man (cf. mi nava ). [mi nus ,1208s end : cf.manusyaJ
m i n usa - dai v i k a , a . of men and of
gods.
m i n d i r y a,a . descended from Mandara ;
a s m. descendant of M. [mandara ,m an y h , a . descended from a poet or fromMans as m. the poet
’
s son or Mana’
s son.
[3miina,m i m a ,
a . l it. of mine ; voc. s. m., as word
of address of a dog to an ass,uncle.
[mama l 2o8f.]m i y i , f . — 1 . (a working, and so) a
power ; esp.,in Veda , supernatural or
wonderful power ; wile ; —2. later , tr ick ;il lusion. [V1 m§,
‘ make, i.s. have efiect,
work,’1 140, cf . 258 ]
m i y i -k a p ot a , m. il lusion-pigeon.
m ay ak a p o ta -vapas a . having
the form of a phantom-
pigeon.
honor. [denom .
[21 s]
m i y fn , a. wily. [may i ]m i y oh h a v y a , n. gladness, happiness.
[mayobh in 121 1 , cf . 1208c.]m i r a , m. a kil l ing, murder.
m ar a k a ta , f . -i, a . smaragdine, emerald
[mar akata , 1208f .]m i r ana ,
n. a kil ling ; w. pravi p, incur
kil ling, get kill ed. [caus. of V 1 mp, die,’
1 150. l h .]m i r i tm a k a , a . having murder as one
’s
nature, murderous. [mar s i tmaka,
m i r ga , a. of or pertaining to game or
deer ; as m. track of wild animals, slot ;
then, in general , track, way , path . [mrga,
1208f.]m i r j a ,
adj . subst. cleaning, a cleaner , in
cpds.
m i r j i r a , m. cat. th e cleaner ,’
so
cal led from its habit of cleaning itselfoften : fr. marja : formed l ike karmara,1 .226h
m i l a v a ,m. Malwa, name of a country in
westrcentral India.
m i l a v a -v i sa y a , m. th e land of Malwa.
m i l i , f . crown , wreath , gar land.
m i l i n , a . crowned, wreathed. [mi l l ]m al y a , n. crown, wreath . [mala,m ite m. — 1 . moon
,see candr a-mi s ;
then (as in a moon , i.e. month .
the measurer ,’Vl mi , 1 151 . cf.
may", moon Lat.M'
Ena, menstruationis
dea’
; Goth . mena, AS. mo'
na,Eng. moon ;
AS. monan deg,‘ dies Lunae,
’Eng. Mon
day ; also pigs , stem p en , Lat. menso i-s,‘ month
’
; AS. mo‘
na‘
S, prop.
‘a lunation,
’
Eng. month.]m i s s , m.— 1 . moon, see puma-mi ss ; —2.
month . [transition-stem fr . mas ,
M m .
m as s - tr a y s , n. month-tr iad, th ree
month s.
111 i s a sat.k a month -hexade, six
months.
111 dh i n a a . glad, bl ithe. [Vmah , 1 177b.]V 1 m i (min6ti, minuté ; mimi ya ; mi ta ;
-mitya ) . bui ld ; establ ish ; set up (a post,
pil lar ). [col latera l form (250a ) of Vl ma,‘ make, build,
’
q.v. : cf . m it and Lat.mE-ta,
post md-rus,
m ih ] [21 8]
m i h , j : m ist. [Vmih : cf . 6-p lx-An,‘ mist
’
; V mud (modats ; mnmudé ; modisyAte
AS. mist, swig
-st,Eng. mist.) mnditA) . be glad, rejoice ; mndita, glad,
m idh v i ns , a . bestowing r ich ly , bountiful . happy. [cf . Vmad and V 1 mand.][said to be perfect ppl . of Vmih , 2223, i
,in i moda.
790b, m dn i , m. — 1 . pressure, th e pressing on J
im i ns y a , grdv. to be cal led in question. ward, impetus , 787 — 2. a man driven on
[fr . desid. of Vman , 1028e, by inward pressure or impulse, person in
Mm i
’
l huse , see midhvans and Wh itney 54. a (religious ) ecstasy , enthus iast ; later
muk ta - gi p a , a . h aving a laid aside — 3. any distingui sh ed sage or seer or
curse, leaving h is cur se behind h im . ascetic, esp . one who has taken a vow of
[Vmuc.] silence (of:manna ) ; hermit, 409, etc.
muk h a ,n.— 1 . mouth , 89
3,
51 12 ; mum fir su,a . wishing to die, about to die,
jaws, 18 23 ; — 2. visage, countenance, moribund. [i r. desid. of VI mr, l o28b,
face, 13 3 ; snout or face of an animal , l 178f .]44 12 ; at end of cpds, esp. w. an adj . a s (mnani ti ; mnmosa ; amosit ; mus
[1298a], or adj ectively used prep . ita; musitvfi; -m 1isya ) . rob ; stea l . [cf.
or adv. [1306] denoting direction : ndaii m il s, th e th ief, i.e. mouse’
; p63,‘ mouse,
’
mukh a , h aving a northward face, turning and from the shape,‘ muscle
’
; Lat. mils,
northward ; abhi -mukha , having th e face ‘ mouse,’whence dim inutive mus-culvs
towards ; — 3. ( l ike Eng. face ) surface, ‘ muscle’
; AS. mil s,
‘ mouse’and ‘ muscle
,
2521 ; — 4 . ( like Eng. h ead,and l ike ch ief Eng. mouse ; Ger .Ma ns,
‘ mouse’
(whence
fiom caput) the h ead, i .e. ch ief, best, denom . mausen,‘steal ,
’in wh ich we are
most excel lent, brough t back again to the orig. mg of
m ti k h y a , a . (at th e mouth or front, and the primitive ) , and a lso ‘ muscle of the
so) ch ief, m ost excel lent. [mdkhm cf . thumb’
; fur ther , pv‘
a‘
a , enema, Lat. mus-cc ,
mg 4 : 1212a.]‘ fiy
’: see a lso muskaJ
muc (mancati , -te mumoca , ma musk i , m. — 1 . testicle ; - 2. pudenda
mucé ; Amucat ; moksyi ti , -te ; makta; muliebria. [from noun mus, i .e. (383a‘
moh tam ; muktvai ; -n doya ; mocayati , miss,‘ mouse
’: for mgs, see under Vmus
4 0 release ; free ; let go ; let cf . [d c -xen" vbd pe'
iov teal ‘
yvvatxeiov pdptov
loose, lay aside ; release esp . from w. masks , cf. al so Persian mus/dc, Eng.
the bonds of sin (93 13 ) or existence ; ( let musk,‘
perfume got from a bag behind
go, i.s. em it or ) utter , e.g. sounds ; shed the navel of the musk
( tears ) ; discharge (phl egm , urine, ordure, musk a -d ega , m. region of the testes,
smel ls ) . [orig. mg,‘to free or clear
’
groin .
special ized in Greek and Latin ‘ to clear musti , m.f . fist.the nose, to snot
’: cf . dwe-pdo
’
aw, o-pvx-j a , mus a l a ,
m. n. pestle.
Lat. e-mung-o,
«snot
’
; pun-Mp,«snout, Vm n h (muhyati , -te ; mumoha, 111
anose’
; Lat. mi c-as,‘snot
’: for mg, cf . mngdha, nu
,
relation of snout to th e cognate verbs snot be confused ; err ; lose one’s senses ;
and snite.] mi dha, fool ish , and as subst., fool , simplen i s , l et out ; release. ton. [cf . Lat. mily-sr ,
‘ fal se+ p r a , let go forth from , release from, m dh us , adv. suddenly ; in a moment ;
10. abl . mnhur mnhns, at one moment— at
v i , loosen, e.g. a bond (acc.) from another , i.e. repeatedly. [‘ in a bewilder
untie ; free ; pass. be freed or sep ing way,’
a h , l l l l d.]arated from , be deprived of, w. abl.
,but muh fir th , m. n. - 1 . moment ; —2. thir
a lso w. instr . [for last mg, cf . tieth of a day , an hour (of 48 minutes ) ,Eng. loose with lose.] [muhus.] 4
mufij a , m. sedge ; esp. Saccharum Munja. mfidh a , see V inny2 ' L
'
) " 'w
mfit r a , n. urine.
m ii r k h a, a. stupid, foolish ; as m. fool .
[Vmfir ch , mgm fir k h a - ga ta ,
n. fool-hundred.
Vm ii r ch (mfirchati ; mumfircha ; mfir
chi tA, m i rth become rigid :
— 1 . coagulate, acqui re consistency ; and
so — 2. take shape, be formed ; — 3 . (be
come stiff, numb, torpid, and so) become
stupid, senseless. [for mg 3, cf . Eng.
torp id,‘numb,
’and then dul l , stupid
see mur ti and mfirkha.]m ii r t i , f . firm body ,
defin ite shape, em
bodiment. [Vmfirch , 220m t
'
i r t i m a n t , a . having bodily form , in
carnate. [murthm t
'
i r d h an ,m. forehead, skul l ; head ;
oflenest figuratively, highest par t ; miir
dh ni , at th e head.
mfil a ,n. root ; fig. ( like Eng. root) , that
from wh ich a th ing grows or proceeds,
root, bas is ; capital .
m i l y a ,11 . price, 47 3-1 1 ; capital ,
[proper ly , perh aps, adj .‘
pertaining to
the root, radica l , basal ,’
and then, as
subst.,‘ basis
’of a transaction : fr . m ii la,
q.v.]m il e, 171 . f . mouse. [
‘ th e th ief,’
Vmus,
q .v . : see 383a 3.]musa k a , m. thief ; mouse, Mousey ,
as name of a man ,47 21 . [Vmus, q.v.]
m i sa k ak h y i , f . the name Mousey .
[i khy i z 1280b.]m ii si k a , m. mouse, rat. [a s, q .v.]m ii si k a - n i r v i gesa , a . undistinguished
from a mouse.
V 1 111 ; (mr iyate mamara ; Ami-ta ;
mar isyati ; mrta ; mattam ; m rtva ) .die ; m s, dead. [w. mrta, cf . Bpor ds,
”spor es,‘ mor tal
’
, cf . ¢Ah£ l -pap-dv-Ou,‘ fiame died away
’
; Lat. mar -i,‘ die
’
;
mars, stem mor-ti ‘ death’
; Goth . maur
h r , AS. mor‘
lior, Eng. murther , murder .
see amrta.]+ a bh i , ( lit. die against, i.s .) affect nu
pleasantly by dying ; gnruni vabhimrta,
(afiected by a teach er by dying, i.s.)bereaved by the death of a teacher .
used of “bruisers, Odyssey min-n,‘ mi l l
’
; Lat. mol-a ,
‘ m i l l’
; Eng. mea l (formg, cf. piste ) ; AS. mol-de
,Eng. mol-d,
‘ fine earth’
( for mg, cf . mid) : of . al so
e d.]V 3 m r , exists perhaps in marut. [cf . pappa lpw, spap
-
pap—j w,
‘ fiss h’
; Lat. mar-mar ,
m rg a, m.— 1 . ( l ike AS . deor ) wild animal ,
beast of the forest, as opp . to pacu,‘cattle,
’07 2 ; then — 2. (w. the same spe
cia l ization of my as in Eng. deer ) animalof the genus Cervus, deer , gazel le. [perhaps
‘ the ranger , rover ,’
e j , q.v. : for
2, observe the use of deer in th e more
general sense in King Lear, iii . 4 . 128,
“rats and such smal l
V m rj (m i rati mamérja ; amarj it,fimfirksi t ; mi rkayéte meats ; m i r stnm ;
mrstvi a lso marj itum , mar
j itvzi , rub off ; wipe away ;
clean ; po l ish .
[original meaning‘ move h ith er and
th ith er over’
: then,on the one hand,
1 .
‘range, rove, streifen ,
’
as in Avestan
mér égh , and Skt. mrga ; and, on th e
oth er , —2.‘
go over with the hand, i .s .
rub, wipe, str ip (a tree , a cow ) , m ilk’
for 2, cf . d-
pdpy-yunt,
‘ Wipe off’
; d-
p tfp
‘
y- (o,
‘str ip off, pluck
’
; h-p e’
Ay- em, Lat. mulg
Ere,
‘ to mi lk’
; AS. noun meolc,Eng.
mil/e.]a p a , wipe away ; a lso j ig.
, of guil t.
[cf . dr opdpyvvp t, wipe away .
’
p r a ,wipe oil , pol ish .
V m rd (mrlati , mrlayati be
gracious ; forgive. [for 1, see Wh itney
m r l i ka,n. grace, mercy . [e d,
Whi tneym r ta, ppl. ,
dead ; as 11 . [1 1 76s ], death .
[V l mr,‘ die.
m r ta v a t ,adv. as if dead. [mg
-ta.
m r tyu,m. death . [V1 mr,
‘ die,’1 16511
see 05
V m rd (mrdnfiti ; mArdati , -te ; mamfirda ;mardisyate ; mrditi ; mArditum ;
mrditvi ; -mtdya ) . press or rub hard,
squeeze, crush , smash , destroy.
[220]
[extension of V2mr,‘crush cf . d -
paM
liven, destroy e.g. a wal l : w. mpdu, soft,weak ,
’
cf. Lat. moll ts , smo/vis, smoldv-iq s,‘soft, weak,
’and Bpahv
'
s, mpabv- s,
‘slow
’
(for mg, cf . Ger . weich ,‘soft,
’w. Eng.
weak, and Lat. li n-is,‘soft,
’w. len-tus
,
‘slow
’
)with Vmrd in hima -mardana,
‘ melting
of th e snow,
’we m igh t compare p e
’
aaw,‘ mel t,
’
Eng. melt , but the s of the col
lateral for m smelt makes this doubtfulsee also m adam]v i , destroy .
m td , j : ear th ; loam ; clay ; mound of
earth ,62 1 3. [prop.
‘crumbled ear th ,
’
e d : sim ilar specia l izations of mg are
frequent : thus AS. mol-de,
‘crumbl ing
earth , dust,’Eng. mol-d
, come f r . a Vma l ,
the cognate of V 2mr,‘crush , crumble
’
;
Ger . Grand,‘sand,
’is f r. the same root
as Eng. gr ind ; Ger . Scholle,‘clod,
’and
ser-schel len,
‘ break to pieces,’
go back to
th e same root ; logs. and loath ,‘clod,
’
are derivs of V ruj ,m rdu, a . soft ; weak . [e d, q.v.]m rnm é y a , a . made of ear th ; w. grha,
h ouse of clay , the grave. [mi-d +maya :
see maya .]V m t g (mrgati , -te ; mamérgau mamrgé ;
m ks“; mmfi ; mflrstnm ; -mt§ya )5— 1 . touch
,mulcere
, stroke ; grasp, take
hold of ; — 2. take hold of menta l ly ,
consider . [ci . the Hesychi an flpaxeiv,
V supine,‘
grasp, understand’
; Lat. mulc
Ere,
+ a bh i , touch .
Vmu ( inmate. -ti ; m i tes . man teé ;
Amarsista ; -mtsya caus. marséyati ) .— 1 . forget, 92 15 ; — 2. ( l ike Eng. not
victim ; animal sacrifice.
under médas.][cf . Vmid
m edh a s ,w isdom , in su-medh as. [equiv.
of medh i ]m edh i , f . w isdom.
m e l a k a , m. assembly ; 10. kg, assemble.
[VmiLm od e k a ,
m. smal l round comfit, sweet
meat. [prop.‘
gladdener ,’
Vmud, 1 181 :
so Eng. cheer and ref reshment are appl ied
esp. to eatables.]m i ufij i , a. made of Munja-
grass ;—j Z
-i, sc. n ekhal i , girdle of Munja-grass.
[manjat l 208f .]m i a nj i - n i b a n d h a n a , n. ligation of
the Munjapgirdle.
m i un a,n. si lence. [m int l 208d.]
m n a , uncerta in verbal . m inded ; assumed
on account of alumni . [Vmui .]V m n i (mi nati ; amni sit ; mn i ta). col
latera l f orm of Vman ,
‘ be m inded,’108g.
[see V man cf. m-M -anu,
‘ keep in
V n y a k a (myi ksati ; mimyi ksaamyak ) . be fixed in or on ; be present.
s am , keep together ,
m r a da s , n . softness [e ad, col lateral
form of e d.q .v.]V m l a (mli yati ; maml i ii ; Aml i si
'
t ;
mlana) . wither . [col lateral form of
Vl mr,‘ die,
’and so
‘
perish , decay ,
fadef ]n l i n a - s r a j , a . having a withered gar~
land.
V m l uc (mlocati ;
go.
+ a p a , go ofi,retire ; apamlukta, re
tired, h idden.
m l e cch h , m. barbar ian.
man loca mlukta) .
[l ech .]m ind ) disregard treat as of no conse V m l e ch (mléochati ). speak unintel l igibly
quence, bear patiently . or barbarously . [root .mlék : mlécchati
m ek a , a setting up, in su-méka. [V 1 mi, is for .ml ék-sketi , l ike prcchati , q .v., for
(l ' [41 1W
sprkaketi : cf . d -siv, Vp h at , ‘err ’ l
fi .
"781
n ek h a l i , j : girdle, see 59 8 1s. m iss’
; Bade, Bun-61 ,
m ag h a, m. cloud. [Vm igh , see mih .]m éd a s , 11 . fat. [Vmi d or med (761a ) ,médyati,
‘ be
m edh a , m.— l . juice of meat
, broth ;- 2. sap and strength , essentia l par t, esp.
of the sacrificial victim ; — 3. sacrificial
y i relative pron .— 1 . wh o, which ;
sometimes f ollowing 1ts correlative :
29 5, 3015
, 527, 79 7 ;
yajurveda]
y a j ur -v edh , m. the Veda of sacrificia l
texts , Yajurveda. [see yaj ns .]
yaj usm a n t , a . (possessing, i .s .) accompa
nied by sacrificial texts ; —j 2 -mati (se.
istaki ) , Yajushmati , name applied to
certain bricks used in building the sacred 1 yat i pron. as many , quot.
fire-pil e, and so cal l ed because each was
[222]
proverbs motivating a preceding sta tement
or action,e.g. 19 7 ; yatas tena , since
therefore,
so yatas atas , 362;
yatas tad, qt: tats-s. [pron . root
ya, 510,
[pron.
root ya, 510,
laid with the recitation of a special text 2 yat i m. ascetic, man wh o h as restrained
of its own. [yajus , 1235 ]
y h j us , n. — 1 . sacred awe ; worsh ip ; —2.
sacrificial text, as di stinguished fromstanza (re) and ch ant (si man ) ; — 3. the
col lection of such texts, th e Yajur-veda.
[Vyaj ,
y a j na,m. worsh ip, devotion (so in Veda ) ,
h is passions and abandoned t he wor ld ;
see i gr an a and 65 3 1s. striver , one who
takes pains, one who castigates h im se lf ,’
Vyat, 1 155 : its mg was perhaps shaded
towards that of restrainer’by a popular
connection of the word with V yam,
1 157 1 , of. 954d.]later , esp. act of worsh ip, sacrifice, offering y a tn a , m. a str iving after ; effort ; pains ;(these the preva il ing mgs ) . [Vyaj , 1 177a,201 ]
y a j i i a k r a 1511 m. sacrifice-ceremony ,
i .s. rite. [1280b.]
y a j ii a - cch ag a ,m . sacr ifice-goat. [ch i y at r a ,
adv. where, e.g.
ga ,
y aj i a - p i t t fi, n. sacr ificial utensil .
y a j fi ii r th am , adv. for a sacrifice.
than , 1302c4 .][ar
w. kr : take pains ; bestow effort upon
have‘
a th ing (loc.) at h eart,
yatne krte , pa ins having been taken.
[V yat,whi ther ;
— correl. w. tatra , 85 19 ; w. 01 13 ,
yatra yatra, wh ere soever ; catuspathe,
yatra vi , at a quadr ivium , or somewhere
(else ) , 10421
. [pron. root ya , 510,
y a j fi i y a ,a . — 1 . worthy of worsh ip or y dth i , rel . adv. and conj . — 1 . in wh ich
sacr ifice, reverend, h oly , divine 2.
active or ski l l ful in sacr ifice, pious ; as m.
ofierer . [yajfia,
y aj fiop a v i ta,a . the sacrifice-cord, sacred
cord worn over the left shoulder . [upa
y h j v a n ,m. worshipper , sacr ificer . [V yaj ,
1 160. l a.]V y a t (yatati, -te ; yeté ; ayatista ;
yatisyéti, -te ; yatita, yatta; yatitum ;
— 1 . act. join ,trans .
— 2.
mid. join , intrans. ; rangef
og e’s self in
order , proceed in rows,
$ Q — 3 . mid.
try to join , str ive after ; ta e pains ; — 4 .
cans . (cause to attain,i .s .) requite wi th
reward or pun ishm ent. [perhaps orig.
‘reach out after ’
and akin w. V yam ]a , reach to, atta in , get a foot-hold.
p r a , (reach out, i.s .) make effort, take
y h ta s ,adv. from what (time or place or
reason ) : — 1 . where, —2. because ,
for , 2823
, 386
esp. common as introducing
a pr ovcrb or the f rst (only ) qf a ser ies of
way , as ; sometimes f ol lowing its correlative :
tatha yathfi 43 23,44 23 ; evam
yathi ,— 2. but much oflener pr e
ceding its cor relative : tesim sam hanm0
of them we close the eyes, as (we cl ose)th is house, so , so 27 14,
etc. ; yath i evam, 1813, yath ii
eva ( Vedic ) , 86 13 1 3 ;— 3 . cor relative omitted : buddh im pra
kurnava , yath iLicchas i , decide ( so ) , as
thou wish est, etc. ; so with verbs
of saying, ctc. ; tad br iih i, yath i
upadadh i ma, th is tel l us (viz. th e way )in wh ich we are to put ou '
so
88 5 7 ;— 4 . without finite verb, as mere par ticle
of compar ison, as, l ike, e.g. so enclitic
at end qf a pads , 71 15, 87 1 1 , 1
5, 31 1
,
43 4 ; in solemn declarations : yath i
tens satyena , as surely as so, 12”fi.
— 5. combinations ( if ya 5 ) yath i
yath i tatha tathfi, according as so ,
the more the more, 4813; yath i tath i ,
[223]
in some way or other (of : ya b end) , atany rate, 62
°
6. in order that, so that, at, (so )that : in Veda, w. subjunctive,89mm“, 9019 ; later , to. opt., w.f ut.
so. pres. ind., yath i svi mi ja
gar ti, tath i mayi kartavyam, I must
act so, that the master wakes, 301° so
39 1 ; — 7 . that, w. verbs ofsaying, knowing, etc., 30
7; - f or influence
on accent of verb, see 595. [pron. root ya,
510, 1 101 : cf . article ya.]y a th i -k a r ta v y a ,
a. requiring to be
done under given circumstances ; as n.
the proper course of action, 4 11 1
.
y a th ak i mam , adv. according to wish ,
agreeably , 162 in an easy-going way ,
slowly , 4914
. [yAth i +kima, 1313b.]y a th i k i r y a ,
= -yath i kartavya.
y a th a k r am a m , adv. according to order ,
in regular series. [yatha krama,
1313b.]y a th i g a ta ,
a . on which one came ;-am , adv. by th e way by wh ich one came.
[yath i agata , V gam, 1313b.]y a th i i g hm , adv. l imb after l imb or
l imb on l imb ; membratim. [yath iai ga, 1313b.]
y a th i ta th am , adv. as it real ly is, ac
curately . [yath i tath l , 1313b, 1314a.]y a th abh im a ta , a . as desired, that one
likes. [yatha abbin ata, Vmam]y a th i bh im a ta - dega, m. desired place,
place th at one l ikes.
y a th ay og y am , adv. as is fit, accordingto propriety. [yath i yogya, 1313b.]
y a th i r th a ,a . according to the thing or
fact, true ; as n. the pure truth . [yath i+ artha.]
y a th ar h a , a . according to that which is
fit ; -am, adv. suitably , according to one’
s
dignity. [yath i arha, 1313b.]y a th i v a t , adv. according to Is comment,
comme il f aut, duly . [yathfl
y a th i v i dh i , adv. according to prescrip
tion or rul e. [yath i vidh i, l 313b.]y ath i -v rtta , a . as happened ; -a.m, w.
verb qf tell ing either the actua l occurrence
or circumstances (as nom. or ace. s.
or as it real ly happened (as adv., 1313b).
— 4 . temporal as , tad yad,
then when, 719; yad tatas , when
then, 9212; so yad ti dttna, 70
7;
sorr el . oflen lacking : yad when
(se. then ) , 75 13 ; so 803, 81
17; whi le, 71
5;
— hence, the temporal use pass ing insensibly
(cf . yad vaqi ma, when or if we wil l ,
and Eng. when w. Ger . wenn ) into the
conditiona l , — 5. if , 8o°1 l °o
; — yad placed
with in the dependent clause, 78 8 (quoted
under f or influence on acct
qf verb, see 595. [pron. root ya, 510,
l l l l a.]y a d i ,
adv. when ; yadi tadi or tatas.
when then ; yadi atha ,Vedic,
84 5 5-7 yada yada, quandocunque, see
tada. [pron. root ya, 1 103a.]
y ad i , adv. if ;- 1 . w.pres. ind. in protasis
apodosis has pres. ind., 37 13,
43 7,
has fut., 44 4 ; has ln
y a th i qr a ddh hm , adv. according to ln
clination, as youwill . [yatha eraddhi ,1313b,
y a th ep s i ta , a. as desired ; -am , adv.
according to one’s wi sh . [yatha ipsita,
Vap.]y a th ok ta , a. as (afore-)said ; -am, adv.
as aforesaid. [yath i -t-ukta.)y ad ,
— 1 . as nom. ace. s. n. to ya , see ya ;used in cpds and derive, see 510; — 2. as
conj unctive adv. that ; tan na bhadramkrtam, yad viqvi sah krtas, th ereforeit was not wel l done (herein ) , that trustwas reposed, 22
17; ninyi ciketa, prgnir
yad iidh o jabbara , he knoweth the
secret, that P. ofiered h er udder , 78 8
introducing oratio recta , 381; yad tad,
as for th e fact that therein, 361; so
yad v i i tad abravan, as for the
fact that they said that, indeed, 96m
— 3. in causal connections : l ike Eng. that
( i.s . on account of wh ich ) , yad
tad, since th erefore, yad
taemi t, inasmuch as therefore,since ( i.s. considering that) , 79 pur
pose : in order th at, 78 72 13 “ result
that, eti drgi dharmaj iia, yanmi m hantum udyati s, so understandingth e law, as to undertake to slay me,
28 "
yadbh avisya]
perotins, has nofinite verb, 18 17, 25 3,401 ; —2. w. fut. in protasis and apo
dos is, 993
, 1 13; — 3. w. pres . opt. in protas is
and apodosis ,—4 . to. no finite
verb in protas is : apodosis has imperative,
has no finite verb, 2713
,
— al ternative conditions v i ,
yadi v i v i , whether or
— apodos is introduced by tadi
(e.g. tad tarhi or
without adv. (e.g. [pron. root ya ,
l 103d.]
y a db h a v i sy a ,a . who says yad bhavis
yeti, (tad) bhav isyati or“What wil l be ,
wi ll be”; as m. fatal ist ; Yadbhavishya or
Whatwil lb’
, name of a fish . [ 13 14b.]y a m (yacchati , yayima,
yemé z flyi fi s‘
i t. draw n ; yafinsvfiti ;
yaté. yamitvs‘
i -yamya )hold hol d up, susta in, support hold
back,restrain hold out, ofier, grant,
furnish show (the teeth ) , 77 [cf .
(gala ,‘restraint, i .s .
i , ho ld out, i .s . extend, and so ( l ike
Eng. extend) , lengthen ; i yata, extended,long.
a d ,— 1 . raise ( th e arms, weapons ) ,
— 2. ( l ike Eng. take up, i .s.) under
take or set about (a thing ) ; udyata ,
having undertaken, w. inf ., 28 6.
s am -ud ,l ike ud-
yam [1077b] :raise ; - 2. set about ; samudyata, hav
ing set about, w. infi, 40
11 p a , hol d on to, take hold of esp .,
middle, take to wife, marry , 98
3.
+ n i , ho ld, restrain ; niyata , having re
stricted one’
s self ( to a certain thing ) , al lintent upon one defini te object.
p r a , ho ld or reach out, offer , give ; give
in marriage (as a fath er his daughter ) ,98 7.
p r a t i - p r a , ofier in turn , pass (food) ,w. gen.
, 100
v i , hold asunder , stretch out.
s am , ho ld together , co-hibére, hold in
check ; samyata , resténed.y am a ,
—2. m.
(holder , i.s . bridle. [Vyam.]y ama,
- 1 . a . paired, twin , geminus ; as m.
a twin ; —2. The Twin, Yama, who, with
[224]
his sister Yam i , constituted the first
human pair , selection lxii i. ; honored as
father of mankind (qflflzl
aoj nanu) and
king of the spirits of t e eparted fathers
(pitaras ) , see 83 3m in later times,
garded as th e ‘ Restrainer’
Punisher ,’and ruler of death and of the
l
dead in the under-wor ld, -yami. f ” 47
syl”
f
Yam i , twin sister of Yams. [so Thomas,,11 /Hebrew t‘ om, means
y am h- r fij a n ,
a . h aving Yama as th eir
king ; as m. subject of Yama. [ l 302a.]y a y i t i , m. Yayati, a patriarch of the
olden time, son of Nahusha. [perhaps‘ Th e Striver ,
’
Vyat, cf. or fromVyi , 1 157.
y h v a ,m. or ig. prob. any grain or corn,
y ie lding fiour la ter , bar ley-com , bar ley.
[cf . ( std, s (aF-td,
y a v a-m a dh y am a ,
a . having a bar ley
corn middl e, i.s. big in the middle and
smal l at the ends, l ike a crescendo-dim in
uendo sign ; as n. the Yavamadhyama,
name of a ci ndr i yana or lunar penance.
[ 1297, 1280b.]
y h v i sth a ,a . youngest ; esp. of a fire just
born of th e sticks of attrition or just set
on the al tar . [super l . to yuvan , q.v., but
from the simpler syn ,
yav i sth y a , a . yavistha, but always at
the end qf a pads.and as diiambus .
y h v i y i ns , a . younger . [comp. to
yuvan, q.v.,but from the simpler syn,
y h ga s , n. fame, honor.
y a gas , a . honored, splendid.
y a sti , j : staff . [perhaps‘a support,
’fr.
yucch , quasi-t of the present system
of yam : cf . 220,
V y a h , stir ,move quickly , inf erredfi . yaks,
q .v., and yahva,‘continual ly moving,
restless.’
4 y a (yiiti ; yayi d ; eyelet m en
yi ta; yfitum ; yi tvi -
ytiya ). 1 . go ,
39 1 ; yi tas, avasitasya, of h im that
journeys (and ) of h im that rests, 10.
astam,62 see astam ; — 2. go to, w. acc.
,
w. dat. — 3. go to,i.s .
attain to (a condi tion ) : e.g. devatvamyi ,
attain to godhead, i.s . become divine ,
Wi] [2263
united with i.s . become possessed
of , 6015; yukta : possessed of
1 19 ; having at end qf cpd, 65 1 3 ;
— 5.pass . be joined or made ready , and so
be fitted,
suited ; yukta ,fit, suitable ,
r igh t, proper , yuktam ,adv. fitly ,
r igh tly , etc.,
- 6. yojayatiapply ; lay on
, [cf . ( eh -yum,Lat.
j ung-o,‘
yoke, harness , join’
; w. yuga,‘
yoke,’cf. ( 117 615 Lat. j ugum, Ger. Joch,
Eng. yoke for euph ony , sec 219 ]n d ,
mid. make one'
s self ready , set towork, exert one
'
s se lf.11 p a ,
mid. harness, put té , apply ,
+ n i , mid.— 1 . fasten to ; — 2. put (a
task ) upon, comm ission ; — caus.
set, lay , e.g. snares,24 17. [for mg 2,
cf . niyoga ; a lso Eng. en-j oin w. its Lat
predecessor in-j ungers.]
+ p r a ,apply , use ; w. namaski ram,
employ , i .e. do adoration .
s am , join togeth er , uni te ; sarhyukta ,
at end of cpd : joined with , i.s. endowed
with , connected with , i .s. having
reference to, 59 12
y dj [389, 219, 38Gb], — 1 . a . yoked to
gether ; as m. yoke-fel low,
and so com rade,
— 2. a . paired, even . [Vynj z see
y ti j y a ,a . un ited, combined. [V yuj ,
1213e.]
y udd h h , ppl . fough t ; as n . [l l 76a], figh t,battle, contest. [Vyudh , 1 176,
yuddh a- v a r na , m. a sort of battle ; a
battl e, so to speak .
V yudh (yudhyate ; yuyudh é ; ayuddha ;yotsydte yuddha ; y6ddhum ; -
yudhya ) .figh t. [ci . bank/n,8 ,
figh t against.
y fidh f . figh t. [Vyndh ]yudh l - ath i r a ,
m. Yudh ish thira,son of
Pandu and Kunti , to whom Brihadaeva
tel ls the story of Kal a ; see 1“N. firm
in battle,’
yudh-i ( 1250c ) athi r a.]
V yup (yuybpa ; yupita; yophyati [104 1 2D.
set up an obstacle , block or bar the way ;
h inder , thwar t, obstruct or clog, see
yuv d , pron. stem,2d pers. dual , 491 .
yuv a t f , serving as a f eminine to ydvan.
young woman ; mai den . end :
perhaps pres. ppl . of V 1 ya ,attract
’
]yuv a n a . young ; a s subst. young
man (distinguished f rom bi ds ,
‘child
,
’
youth (used even of youth ful
gods ) . [perhaps f r. V l yu,‘attract,
’
sufi‘lx an, not van, 1 160: see yaviyi fis ,
yavistha, ynvati : cf . Lat. j avea-ias,‘
young’
; w. j avea-cu-s,‘
young,’
cf. Ger
manic syuvunga , yunga ,Eng. young ; also
Old Eng. yung-be, Spenser
’s youngth, Eng.
youth ]yusm h ,
see 491 .
y fith h , m. n. herd. [prop.‘a union ,
’
Vl yu,‘ unite, for mg, cf . al so Ger .
Bands,‘
gang or set of men ,
’and Eng.
band,
‘company,
’
both indirectly fr . the
root of bh id.]
y fit h a - n i th a , m. protector or leader of
the herd.
y fith a - p a , m. keeper or protector of the
herd ; esp . the elephant that leads the
herd.
y t'
i th a -pa t i , m. lord of th e herd ; esp.
the elephant that leads the herd.
yfin a s ,see 427.
y fiy h m ,see 491 .
y e n a ,adv. - 1 . wherefore, 6 ° ; — 2. yana
tens , because therefore , — 3.
that, ut, introducing a result and cor re
spending to a‘such
’or
‘so
’exp ressed
or implied [pron . root ya,
1 1 12a.]y ésth a , pronounced ya
'
istha , a . (best
going, i .e.) swif test. [Vyi , 468 ]y bg a ,
m.— 1 . a setting to work ; use ;
appl iance (act of applying ) ; — 2. appli
ance ( th ing appl ied ) , and so means ; esp.
supernatural means, magic, — 3. (the
apply ing one’
s self to a thing, and so)
pursuit or acquis ition (of a th ing ) , ifksema ; — 4 . connection ,
relation ; -yogat,
at end of epd, from connection with i.s.
in consequence of [Vyu] ,
y bg y a , a . of use , suited for use, fit, fit
y oddh r , m. figh ter . [Vyudh , 1 1 82,
y o d h i n ,a . at end qf cpds, fighting.
[Vyudlx
y 6n i , m.j : — 1 . lap ; womb or birth -place ;
- 2. place of origin ; origin,- 3 .
bir th-place, i.s . home ; place of abiding ;
place, RV . x. — 4. (l ike
Eng. origin or birth ) family, race ; formof existence (as man, Brahman, beast,
etc., in the system of transmigrations ) as
this form is determined by birth , 67
the ho lder’of the born or unborn babe,
V l yn, ‘ hol d,’
cf. the analogous
metaphors in Lat. con-cipere, take, hold
conceive’
and in volva , cover , envelope,
and so‘ womb,
’fr . 9. root cognate with
l vr,
y on i ta s ,adv. from bir th , by blood. [yoni,
1098b.]y osi t , j Z young woman , maiden. [per
haps the attractive one,’f r. V l yu,
‘attrac t,
’l 2oos , 383. 3 ( through the inter
mediate form yo-sa, 1 197, of the same
mg ) : cf . yuvati .]
y i uv a na, n. youth , period between ch ild
hood and maturity , adolescence (of man
or maid) . [yavam 1208a.]
y i uv a n a - d a gi , f . time of youth .
V r anh (ranh ati , — 1 . make to run ;
has ten, trans . ; — 2. mid. run ; hasten, in
trans. [for d angh : cf . the form s lafigh
and ragh ti , and see under lagh i ]r a k ta, pl . colored ; esp . red ; as n. blood.
[V raiij , 054a.jV l r a k s (raksati , -te ; raraksa ; araksit ;
rah eita ; raksitum de-fend
protect ; keep, i.e. both retain and main
tain ; take care of (as a sovereign ) , i.e.
govern ; guard, ward ; save. [a desid.
extension of V orak or ark : cf . w as ,‘ ward ofi
,
’wh ich bears a simi lar relation
to Vm or épn in wx-a -e,‘ warded off,
’
ape-l a ,
‘ ward off , protect’
; cf. also Lat.
arc-co,
‘ ward ofi,
’a rr
,
‘stronghold of de
fence, citadel’
; AS. eaihsstede, defencestead, strong
-hold’
ea lgianf‘
protect’
for the two chief mgs of V rake, cf. Lat.de-fendere,
‘ ward ofi'
,
+ p a r i , protect around ; save.
2r a k s, harm ; in r aksas. [perhaps onlyanother aspect of 1 rake,
‘ ward ofi,’i.s.
‘ bcat
r a k sa k a , m. keeper ; warder ; protector.
[V l r aks,r ak sana , n. protection preservation.
[V 1 rake,r ak sa s , n. - l . harm — 2. concrete,
harmer , name of nocturnal demons whodisturb sacrifices and harm the pious .
[V2raks, l 151 .2a.]r a k si , f . protection ; watch . [V1 raks,
r a k si , a . guarding, at end of cpds.
[V 1 rake,r a ll si t t m. protector ; watcher . [V 1 rai n,l 182a.]
r a g h d ,— 1 . a . running, darting, swift ;
as m. runner ; - 2. m. Raghu (The Run
ner , Apop eés ) , name of an ancient king.
[V ranh , q.v.: older form of laghd, q.v.]r ang a ,
m. 1 . color ; — 2. th eatre, amphi
theatre. [V raj or ranj , 216. 1 : connection
of mg 2 unclean ]r aj or rafij (r i jyati. 4 0 ; rakta ; -rajya ;caus . ra i j éyati ). 1 . be co lored ; esp.
be red ; rakta : red ; dyed ; as n. blood ;— 2.fig. be affected with a strong feel ing(of. r aj vi ) ; esp. be del igh ted with ,
have pleasure in, be in love with ; — caus.
- 1 . color ; redden ; —2. del igh t, please,make happy.
[orig.‘ be brigh t or wh ite
’
(whencerajaka ) ; then ‘
glow, be red’
: see the
ident. V3 ri and its cognates W pos, etc.
and cf . Vpey in aor . pleat,‘ dye,
’and
fie‘yeds,‘ dyer
’: w. thi s root may be con
nected the root r i j in its mgs given
under
+ a nu,— 1 . be colored after , take the
tinge of ; 2. feel afl'
ection towards.
+ v i , - I . lose color ; — 2. be cold or
indi fferent towards 45 3. [for mg
2, cf . the senses of the simple verb : the
metaphor may be either ‘not glowing,
’
and so, as in Eng., cold,
’or else color
less,’and so,
r a j a k a ,m. washerman
,who is al so a dyer
of clothes. [‘ whitener
’or else ‘ dyer ,
’
Vraj ,r aj a s , n.
- 1 . atmosphere, air, region of
clouds, vapors, and gloom , clear ly dis
tinguished from heaven (dyaus , 722) or
1 5'
rajin] [228]
the ethereal spaces of heaven (rocani V r a n (ranati ; ratana ; dr i nit) . be
divas , or svar ) ,“where the l ight pleased ; Vedic. [ident. w. V ram ]
dwel leth ,”these being beyond the rajas , r ap a s ,
n. bodily injury ; di sease.
just as the is beyond the dim; V r a bh (rAbhate ; r ebbé ; ar abdha ; rapsused loosely in pl ., the skies, 71
7; the
sky conceived as divided into an upper
and a lower stratum ,and so dua l
, rajasi ,75 5-1 3 ; so f a r Vedic ;— 2. post
-Vedic : l ike the Greek dfip, the
thick air , mist, gloom , darkness ; — 3.
dust, e.g. 1 4 13 ; — 4 . in the philosophica l
system,darkness (cf . the second of the
thr ee qual ities (see guns ) , soul-darkening
passion (popular ly connected with r ings ,
66 ’
[since the orig. mg, as indicated by
usage, is‘ the cloudy (region ) , region of
gloom and dark’as distinguished from
the ever lasting l igh t beyond, the word is
prob. to be derived f r. Vraj in the sense
‘ be (colored, i.e.) not clear’: cognate are
t-peBos,‘ darkness, Erebus ,
’and Goth .
r iqis, neut., darkness’: for connection of
mgs 2 and 3, cf . Ger .Dunst, vapor ,’and
Eng. dust.]r aj j a , f . cord ; rope. [Verazg,
‘
plait’
: cf.
Lithuanian rezgis, plaited work, basket
Lat. restis,.resctis, erezg
-ti-s, rope
’: see
i j .] M 'm. 5M“
V r a ii j , see raj .
r ana , m. pleasure , gladness. [V ram ]r anv a,
a. pleasant, lovely . [V ran,r at i , j i — I . rest, quiet ; — 2. comfort,pleasure . [V ram , 1 1 57, cf . 954d.]
r atn a ,n. — 1 . gift ; blessing, riches,
treasure , as someth ing bestowed or given
(qr: rai ns -dh i ) ; so f ar Vedic ; — 2. post
Vedic : precious stone, jewel , pear l ; fig.,
as in Eng., jewel , i .s. the most excel lent of
its kind. [V1 r i ,
r a tn a - d h i a . bestowing bless
1 r fith a ,m. wagon , esp . the two-wheeled
battle-wagon ( ligh ter and swifter than theanas ,
‘ dray car or chariot of gods
(72 4-0, as wel l as of men
[V r, move,’1 163 : for mg, cf . Lat. currus,
ch ar iot,’
and cur r ere,
2 r a th a , m. pleasure, joy . [V ram, 1 163
cf . 954d.]
grasp ; take hold of . [prob. a col lateral
form of Vgrabh , and ident. w. labh, see
these : cf. 7 a Amp-spa, spoils, booty’
;
eI-Aqr a,‘took Lat. lab-ar ,
‘ undertaking,
labor’
; perhaps {Mp-cv, gat,
+ 6 ,— 1 . take hold upon ; touch , RV.
x. — 2. take hold of,i .s . under
take, 140 w. yatnam, undertake an effort,
i .s . exert one’s self, 1 1 9 ; — 3 . ( l ike Ger .
an-fangen and Lat. ia-cipere ) begin ;i rabhya : w. abl .
, beginning from or
s imply from 39 13 ; w. adya , from to
day on, 3619
.
+ auv - i , take hold of from behind,hol d on to.
+ s am - a n v - i , h old on to each oth er
(said of several ) sam-auv-i rabdha.
touching.
s am - i , under take (see i -rabb ) to
gether.
+ s am , take hold of each other (for
dance, battle, h old together ; take
hold (of a th ing ) together .
r am (rAmati , -te ; t ar ima. r emé
ar amsi t, Ar amata ; ramsyate ; rats
rathtum ; r arhtvi ; -ramya ; r i mayati ) .— 1 . act. stop, trans.
— 2. mid. stop, ia
trans. ; rest ; abide ; stay gladly with ;— 3. mid. ( rest, take one
’s case or com
fort, and so) find pleasure in ; rata, w. loc.,or at end of cpds, taking pleasure in, de
voted to ; — 4 . ca ns. bring to a stand-stil l ,
stay , 737. [cf. fi-
pe'
p-a,
‘
quietly’
; Goth .
r tmts, quiet’
; (papal , ( par as, Ofig o
pat ,
Ohm-r at,‘ love, loves
’
; l -pafl i-s,‘ lovely ,
’
formal ly ident. w. rata: for mgs 2 and 3,
cf. V2gam.]a bh i , mid. — 1 . stop, intrans. ;
— 2. find
pleasure ; please, intrans ., 1061.
+ 5 , act. stop, trans.
+ up a , stop ; uparata, ceased, (ofsounds ) hushed.
v i , act. stop, intrans. pause.
t am a ni y a , grdo. enjoyable, pleasant.
[V ram, 965,
r i j y a , n. kingsh ip.
r i t i , a . ready to give or bless ; gracious ;
as f . grace. [tu-a,
r i t r a ,n. f or r i tr i at end qf cpds. [ 131 5b.]
r i t r i , later r i tr i , f . nigh t. [perhaps fr .
V ram.V r ad h (radh néti ; radhyate [761a], -ti ;
rar itdha i r i tsit r i tsyati raddha
raddhv i ; -r$dhya ; radhayati ) . 1 . be
successful ; prosper, have luck ; be happy ,
103 7 ; - 2. trans. make successful or
happy ; gratify ; — caus. accomplish ; make
happy , satisfy . [akin w. V rdh .]+ a p a ,
- 1 . h it away ( from the mark ) ,miss ( the mark ) , fail ; - 2. be at fault,be to blame ; ofl
'
end, sin ; aparaddha,
gui lty , to blame, 331. [for 1 , cf. the
simple verb,‘succeed,
’i .e. ‘ make a h it
’
for 2, cf . th e relation of Eng. f a il and
i i ,caus. make happy , satisfy .
r i dh a s ,n. gracious gift, blessing. [V radii,
gratify’: for mg, cf . French gratifica tion,
r i m a,a . dark ; as m. Rama, h ero of the
epos Ramayana ; c raghava .
r i y a s- p o sa , m. development, i .e. ln
crease of weal th . [gcn. s. of rai , 1250d
1 71 1 ]r av a , m. cry ; yel l ; howl . [Vra,r agi , m. troop, h ost h eap. [perhaps
akin w. ragm i , q .v. : for connection of
mg, cf. Eng. l ine and French cordon, as
appl ied to soldiers]r i str a,
n. kingdom ; sovereignty . [Vraj 1 :
see 219 5, 1 1 85a.]r i att i , f . directr ix, sovereign. [V raj 1see 219 5, 1 182
r i str i y a ,a . be longing to the sovereignty ;
as m. sovereign ,ruler . [rastrm
r i h ti , m. Th e Seizer , Rahu, who is sup
posed to seize and swal low sun and moon,
and thus cause ecl ipses. [prob. fr . V r abh ,
1 178
V r i or r i (r ini ti ; riyate - 1 . act.
cause to run or stream , let loose ; - 2. mid.
fiow run ; disso lve. [cf . Lat. r‘
i-vus ,‘stream , brook
’
; prov incial Eng. run ,
‘ brook,’as in Bul l Run ; Ger . r innen, Eng.
run see al so Vl i pra .]
r i e (r indkti ; ricyate [761b] ; l'iréea,
r ir icé ; araiksit, Ar ikta ; reksyAti ; r ik
tA; pa ss. r icyate ; caus. reci yati ) . — I .
leave ; — 2. let go, let free ; — 3. veryrarely (l ike Eng. colloq. part with ) , se l l .
[w. r indkti cf . Lat. l inquit,‘ leaves
’
of . Lats -e,‘ left ’ ; Lat. l ie-ct, ‘ it is left, i.s .
permi tted’
(Eng. leave means ‘
permis
sion AS. leiin, elih-an, Ger . leih-en ,
‘ leave
a thing to a person for a time, einem
etwas iiber lassen, i.e. lend’
; AS. ll n,
gift, loan,’Eng.noun loan, whence denom.
verb loan ; fr . lEn comes L‘Enan,
‘
give,
loan ,
’Old Eng. li n-en, preterit li n-dc
,
whose d has become par t of the root in
Eng. lend ( though good usage has not
sanctioned the precisely similar blunder
in drownd
+ a t i , mid. ( through pass. sense be leftover ) surpass ; predominate ; caus. cause
to be in surplus ; overdo, 9612
r i p (rir épa ; r ipta). — 1 . smear ; stick
smear , and so — 2. as in Eng., defile ;
— 3 . (with the same metaphor as in the
Ger . an-schmieren ) ch eat, impose upon.
[the old form of V l ip : see under Vlip.]r i pu, m. impostor , cheat ; later foe. [V r ip,1 1 78b.]
r i p r a,n. defilement ; impur ity. [V r ip,
1 188e.]t i p r a - v ah a,
a . carrying ofi or removing
impurity . [acct,V r i g (r ight-i. -te ; was ). — 1 . pull ; — 2.
pul l or bite ofi, crop. [ol der form of
Vl ig.]V r i s (resati ; r isyati , -te [761a] ; r ista;
caus. resayati ; ar ir isat) . be hur t ; te
ceive harm ; caus . harm .
V r i , see ri .
V r u (rauti ruvhti ; rurava ; Lravit ;ruta ; r6tum ) . cry ; yel l ; h owl ; hum,
[cf . d-
pd-oy at,‘ howl
’
; Lat. raucus ,‘screaming, hoarse
’
; AS. ry'
n,
‘a roar
r uk m a,.m. ornament of gold ; as n. gol d.
[V rue, 1 166,V r ue (r écate, -ti ; rurueé, ruroca ; aruoat,hrocista ; rocisyate ; t acita; recitum ).— 1 . shine ; be brigh t or resplendent ; — 2.
appear in splendor ; 3. appear beautiful
or good, please. [cf . claw-Adm , twi
ligh t’
; Acme-6s,‘ brigh t
’
; Lat. lai r ,l i men,
for d i e-s , duc—men,‘ l igh t
’
; Irina , due-nu,‘ moon
’
; AS . leo'
h-t,Eng. l ight; cf . a lso
Lat. l i e-41s (a lucendo, after a l l‘a clear
ing (Eng. of U .S .) or Lich tung (Ger . ) or
glade or grove AS. ledh,Eng. lea
,field
meadow’
; -ley in Brom-ley,‘ broom-field,
p r a t i , appear good unto, please, 740.
r dc i , f . pleasure. [V rac,r uc i r a ,
a . splendid ; beautiful .r uc i r an a n a , a. fair-faced. [i naua1298 ]V r uj (rujati ; tur6ja ; rugna ; ruktvfi;
- 1 . break, break to pieces ;— 2. injure, pain. [cf. Airy-pets,
‘
painfulsad
’
; Lat. l ily-eo
,
r dj , f . pain , disease. [Vruj z for mg, cf .
Ger . Cc-brechen,‘ infirm ity ,
’w. brechen ,
‘ break’
; also t oga .)r a j fin a , f . perhaps breach , cleft, rift
(of the clouds ) . [V ruj .]V rud (roditi rudhnti ; ruroda ; r od
isyati radita rodi tum ruditvfi;-rtidya ) . — I . cry , weep ;
— 2. weep for ,
lament. [cf . Lat. rud-ere,‘roar
’
; AS.
refit-an,
r ud r h , a . connected by Hindus w. Vrud,‘cry ,
’
and so howling, roaring, terr ible,
appl ied to Agni and other gods ; true
meaning uncer ta in ; as m.— 1 a. s ing. in
the Veda : Rudra, leader of the Maruts or
Storm-
gods , RV.x.- 1b. in
pl . The Rudras, a class of storm-gods,
EV.x. — 2. sing. Rudra, received
into the H induTr inity in the later mythol
ogy, and known by the name Civa, q.v.
V l r ndh (runAddhi , runddhé ; rurodha ,rurudhé i r i utsit, druddha rotsya
ti , -te ; ruddha ; roddhum ; ruddhvi ;-rtidhya ) . - 1 . hold back ; obstruct ;
hold ; — 2. keep off ; h inder ; suppress ;— 3. shut up ; close.
a nu, as pa ss., or mid. intrans., i .e. as ofthe ya or ya-class, anurudhyate , also -ti ,
be held to, keep one’s self to be devoted
to, practice, 1013 have regard for .
+ a v a ,- 1 . hold 011 ; — 2. mid. (hol d
apart for one’
s self, lay up, and so)
[V tupaya
— desid. mid. desire to obtain,obtain ;
+ n i , hold ; stop ; shut up.
v i , h inder or disturb.
V 2r ud h ( rodhati ) . grow. [coll ateral formof Vruh , q .v. : cf . Lat. rud-is, fem .
,
‘rod
,
stafi’
: for mg, cf . w. V rudh and Ger.
wachsen,‘
grow,
’
the nouns vi -rudh and
Cc-wiiehs, a growth , i .s. plant
’
: kinsh ip of
Eng. rod, a growing shoot, rod, measure
of length ,’older road
,
‘ measure of length
or surface,’is improbable on account of
the 6 of AS. r6d.]V r ue (résati ; rdsyati ; mate. m ath ) .be cross or angry. [cf . Adaou, eAuo-j a,srage
t
]rue [rut, rudbhyam], j anger . [V r aa ]V r n h (rehati , -te ruroha, tar abe
Arabat, hruksat ; roksyati, -te ; rudharodh am ; rfidhv i ; -rubys ; ruruksatir ohhyati , later r ophyati 1 .
rise, mount up, cl imb - 2. spring up,
grow up ; — 3. grow, develop, th r ive ;— caus. — 1 . raise ; - 2. place upon. [seeV2m db : for euphony , see 222+ a d h i , caus. cause (e.g. one
’
s body ,
acc.) to rise to (e.g. the balance, i.e.
put (one’
s body ) upon ( the balance ) ,
a, mount or get upon (a stone ) ; seatone
’
s self upon ; cl imb (tree ) ; ascend to
(the head, h il l-top, l ife, place ) ; embarkupon (boat, sh ip ) ; fig. get into (danger ) ;— caus. cause to get upon ( stone, pel t) or
into (wagon, boat) , w. ace. of per son and
ace. or loc. ( 1051 1 ) qf th ing ; des id.
desire to cl imb up to.
r fipa,n.— 1 . outward look or appearance,
as well color as form or shape ; La t.
forms ; form , 48‘7, 77
9, rfipam kr,
assume a form ,14 3
, (reflected) image,—2. (l ike La t. forms , and Eng.
shape in shape-ly ) good form ,
i .e. beauty,
24, ctc. ;— 3. appearance, characteristic
mark, pecul iar ity . [ci . varpas : see also
vareas .]V r t
'
i pa y a (t i psyati [q]:1056, used
esp . in theatr ica l language (to have the
look or appearance of, i.s.) act. [rfiph,1058 ]
rfipap tapsaras]
+ ui , — 1 . l ike Eng. look into — tenta r i ukm a ,a . golden, adorned with gold.
tively, i.s . : investigate , seek, 2917; [rukmL l 2o8f .]
search , 3312; — 2. look into — successful ly,
i .e.: find out, 441 7; discover , - 3 .
act, see simple verb. l a k sa,n.
— 1 . rarely, mark, token ; — 2.
r fip a -j i tap s a r a s , a . surpassing th e a hundred thousand, an Anglo-Indian
Apsarases in beauty . lac ; — 3. ( like Eng. mark ) mark wh ich
r t'
i p a v a n t , a . l ike Eng. shape-ly and is aimed at. [Vlag,‘ be fastened to,
’ 751 : A
La t. formosus ; beautiful , handsome, 1 197s : for mg 1 , cf. connection of Eng.
“54“ 5
[rfipa 1238 ] verb tag,‘ fasten ,
’w. noun tag,
‘attach fin s -
76
r ii p a - s am p a d , j ? beauty of form , i.s. ment, appendage,’and so, esp. as used
A, a“.
beauty . in modern shops,‘a mark or label-tag
’
w ,..r
r fip a - s am p a n n a ,a . endowed with for 2, cf . the special ization of Eng. ma rd
‘f"
fl
beauty , beautiful. [Vpad ] or ma rk as‘a weigh t
’
(of gold or silver )r e , word of:address. 0 ; he. [cf . ar e.] and as
‘a money of account
’
; also that
V r oj (réj ati, -te) . — 1 . act. shake, trans. ; of Eng. taken as‘a coin
’and as
‘ten
- 2. mid. shake, intrans . ; tremble. [per quires printed on both
haps akin w. V iti-y in b at-Acts,‘caused to l a k sanh , n.
- 1 . mark, token ; ch arac
tremble, ter istic ; attribute , character , 10113;
r end ,m. dust. [perhaps connected w. V r i , essential characteristic, 4 1 14 special
dissolve, go to pieces,’
just as Ger . S taub, mark ; esp. lucky mark, mark of excel‘ dust,
’
w. stieben,
‘ fiy asunder’
: lence , 627,
mark in the sense ofr ev a, j : Revi , a river , the same as the determ inant at — 2. ( like Eng.
Narmada, q.v. designation ) name, 57u ; — 3. form,
r at [361b], m.,rarely j : possessions ; weal th ; kind, 65
13. [i r . the denom . laksaya
prosperity . [stem strictly rd: prop.‘ be ( 1 150.2a ) , or rather fr . the simpler
stowal ,’Vl ra, see 361b and rayi w. ace. but very rare form of the same denom.
r i -m, cf. Lat. nom . ré-s , V laksa.]r ok a, m. brigh tness , l igh t. [V ruc.] V l a k sa y a ( lakshyati mark,
r bg a , m. infirm ity , disease. [V raj , note, notice. [laksa, 1053 : so Lat.
for mg, see noun r tij .] notare fr . nota .]r ooa n h ,
a . shining, l igh t ; as n. l igh t ; + up a , mark, notice ; see ; pass . appear.
the place of the l igh t, ethereal space or l a k sa s amk h y a ,a . having lacs (see
spaces, 81 4-9 ; see rajas f or further lakes ) as th eir number , numbered by
descr iption. [V rue, hundred-th ousands. [laksa sarhkhyi ]r oc i snd ,
a . sh ining, brigh t ; fig. bloom ing. l a k sm i j : — 1 . mark, sign ;—2.
[V rac, 1 194s : or rath er perhaps fr . roots, with or without papi , bad sign or omen,
l l 94c.] someth ing om inous , bad luck ; — 3. ofienest
r o of s , n. brigh tness. [Vm e, 1 153 ] a good sign , in the older language usua lly
r bda s i , dua l f . the two wor l ds, i .e. heaven with punya good luck ; prosperity ,
and earth . weal th , 469; ( royal ) splendor , 51
19. [fr.
r odh a , a . growing. [V2rudh , laks the quasi-root of lak asa,
r 0p a y a , see 1042e end. wh ich is a deriv. of V ing : for connection
r om a n ,n. hair on the body of men and of mg 1 w. Vlag, see laksa : as for 2
beasts (usua l ly excluding that of the and 3, observe that Eng. luck sometimes
head and heard and that of the mane and means bad luck,’but oftener good
tai l ) later loman , q.v.
r em i n t s , m. loc. -e, in h air-vicinity , i.e. l a k sy a , grdv. to be noticed or seen ; to
on the hairy side (of the hand) . [roman be looked upon or considered as, 4 1‘4
.
1249a ’) anta.] [der ivation l ike that of laksana.]
form of Vr ikh : cf . l -peix-w,
‘ furrow
(x06va , i -pix-Oa ,
‘tear , rend
’
;
Lat. r ima ,t r io-ma ,
‘sl it, crack
’: for mgs ,
observe that Eng. wr ite is fr . the same
root as Ger . r itzen,
l i fig a ,n . mark (by wh ich one knows or
recognizes a th ing ) , Kenn-zeichen , char
acter isti c. [connected w. V lag in th e
same way as laksa , q .v.]l i ng a - d h ar a na , n . the wearing of one
’
s
ch aracter istic m arks.
l i p ( limpati , -te li lépa ; alipat,
dl ipta ; l ipta; -l ipya ) . — 1 . besmear or
rub over a thing (acc.) with a thing- 2. smear a th ing (acc.) over
or on a th ing stick (trans.) on to ,
pass. stick or stick to, intrans.
[younger form of Vr ip : orig. mg‘smear , stick
’: cf . 7 b Alt os,
‘
grease’
;
d-Aeip-v ,
‘anoint
’
; Lat. l ippus,‘ blear
eyed Ait apds, greasy , sh iny
furth er akin are the fo l lowing words,
but with cur ious divarication of mg
M s aplw, l ike Eng. stick to, i .e.
‘
persist’
;
AS. be-l'
if -an , Goth . bi-leib—an,Ger . bJec
'
b-en,
( li t.‘stick,
’
i.e. )‘remain
’
; AS. l ibban,
Eng. l ive, Ger . leben,
‘ be remain ing or
surviving, superstitem esse’
; AS . l if ,Eng. l ife ; fina l ly AS. lt
'
éf -a n, Eng. leave,‘cause to
a nu, smear over , cover with .
+ v i , besmear .
l i p i , j 1 — 1 . a rubbing over ; — 2. wr iting.
[Vlip,
V l i g ( l ights ; l i l igé ; filegista ; lista) .
tear , break. [younger form of V rig ]l i ga , tear ing, breaking, and so cutting, in
ku-l iga . [V l ig.]V l i (Myate ; liyate ; l ilyé ; fi esta ; l ina;
-liya ) . — 1 . cl ing to ; — 2. stick ; — 3.
( stay ,i.s.) of birds and insects, l igh t upon ,
sit upon ; - 4 . sl ip into ; disappear .
+ n i , - 1 . cl ing to ; - 2. ligh t upon (of
birds ) ; — 3 . sl ip into ; disappear ; h ide.
p r a , go to disso lution . [cf . V r i .]l i l i , f .
— 1 . play ; - 2. ( l ike Eng. ch ild’
s
play ) action that can be done without
ser ious effort ; l il ayi , without any
trouble.
V l a th ( luthati ; lalotha ; luthita) . rol l .
V lup ( lampati lalopa ; lupta
lbptum ; luptvii ; -11ipya ) . 1 . break
harm ; — 2. attack ; pounce upon ; — 3 .
rob, plunder . [younger form of V rup
cf. Lat. rumpere, AS. reo'
f -an,‘ break
’
; res]:‘spoil of battle, booty ,
armor , etc.,esp . clothing, garments,
’
Ger .
Raub,‘robbery , booty
’
; AS. retifian,‘ despoil , rob,
’whence Eng. reave
, ppl .
rel/I, and be-reave : fr . Old High Ger .
roubb'
n,
‘rob,
’through Old French rober
,
‘rob,
’comes French def-rober , Eng. rob
,
and fr . Old High Ger . roub,
‘robbery ,
booty, esp. pi l laged garment,’in l ike
manner, French robe,
‘
garment,’ Eng.
robe.]l ub dh a k a ,
m. hunter . [lubdha , Vlubh .]V i n b h ( lubhyati ; lul bbha, lulubh é
lubdha ; lbbdhum ) . — 1 . go astray ;— 2.
be lustful ; have strong desire ; lubdha ,
longing for . [cf. 1) AM, caup-s,
‘ longing’
;
Alt r ‘r r opa t,‘ long for
’
; Lat. lub-cl , l ib-ct,‘ is desired or agreeable
’
; l ibens,‘wil ling,
glad’
; l ibido,‘ desire
’
; AS . leéf,‘ dear ,
’
Eng. l ief ,‘ dear , gladly
’
; Ger . l ieb, dear’
;
also Eng. lose.]V i n ] ( lblati ; lul itd) . move hi th er and
th ith er .
V i n ( lunfiti lul i va ; hi nd) . cut
(e.g. grass, hair ) cut off ; gnaw off. [ci .Air-w,
‘separate, i .s. loose
’
; Lat. so-l it-tus ,
l ek h a ,m. a wr iting ; letter . [Vlil ]
1 0k ( l bkate ; lul oké ; lbkitum ; caus .
l okayati lokith ; -lbkya ; onlycaus . f orms a re in common use, and these
only with ava, 5, and vi ) . get a look at ;
behold ; — caus . [104 1 2] — 1 . look, look
on ; — 2. get a look at, behold. [onaccount of the guttural k, prob. a sec
ondary root fr . roka (V rac, for
connection of mg, cf. Acute-6s,‘ br igh t,
’
and Ad am , sh am-j ar,‘see
’
; Lat. lumen ,
‘ l ight,’then ‘
eye’
(see under V rac) ;also locana no connection w. Eng .
look.]+ a v a , caus. - 1 . look ; — 2. look at or
upon ; - 3. behold, see, perceive.
+ 5 , caus. —1 . look at ; - 2. see, per
ceive.
+ v i , cans. — 1 . look ;
spect,— 3. behold.
l okfi, perhaps a younger f orm of nl oka
(which appears regula r ly in the oldes t texts,
but divided as u lokfi, m.— 1 . open
space ; free room ; place, 8315; - 2a. the
vast space ; the wor ld, 1033; any imagin
ary wor ld or wor lds, 151°
, cf . antar iksaindr a j iva pati para manusya
svarga-loka — 2b. used of heaven avar
go lokas, the wor ld situate in the l igh t,
103 5: 1‘ 10; so sukrti m ulokas, the wor ld
of the r igh teous, 841 1; later , sukrtasya
lokas, wor ld of vir tue, so 5 27 ; — 2c.
0?ea rth : lokem e, in the whole earth ,
6 15 ; m in loke, in this wor ld (cf .
iha ) , 6612; in same sense
, loke, 679, 63
7;
— 2d. with senses merging imperceptibly into
those given under 3, e.g., in the wor ld or
among men, 262, 36
3, 47
91; — 3. ( like
Eng. wor ld and French monde ) people ;folks ; men or mankind ; sing. 6 7,
pl . 25: 1‘ 39 19
, 5715
. [etymology uncer
tain : no connection with Lat. locus, Old
Lat. stlocus,‘
place.
l ok a - k tt , a . wor ld-mak ing, wor ld-creat
ing.
l ok a - p i l a, m. pl. wor l d-protectors, either
four in number ( regents of the four
quarters of the wor ld) , or eigh t (regents
of the cardinal points and four pointsmid-way between ) .
l ok a -
p r a v i da ,m. wor ld-saying, com
mon saying. , 4 “ 4
l ok am p rua, a . wor ld-fil l ing ; f . -a (se.
istaki ) , Lokamprina, name applied to the
common bricks used in buil ding the sacred
fire-pile, and so call ed because al l laid
with th e recitation of th e one general
formula, lokan prna ,‘ fil l thou the
[1314b : for pm , V l pr, see
l oga, m. clod (of earth ) . [Vruj ,‘ break,
’
216. 1 : for mg, see under mid.]V l oc ( locayati ; locita; 4 603's ) . used onlywith 5. [derived fr. V rue ; just how, is
unclear : see V lok.]+ 5 ,
— I . rarely, cause to appear or be
seen ; - 2. usua lly, bring to one’s own
sight or mind, consider, reflect ; m ay“:
2. look at, in
[vaksana
Slocitam (impers., th e fishes reflected ;ity i l ocya, thus reflecting.
p a r y - i , see 100 6 ;
st ate .
s am - i ,see loo 5 ; reflect.
l o c a n a ,— 1 . a . enl igh tening ;
- 2. as n.
eye, usua l mg. [V 100: for mg, cf. lumen,under Vl ok.]
l obh a ,m. strong desire greed, avar ice.
[V lubh .]l oh b a - v i r a h a , m. freedom from avarice.
l om a n , n. hair on the body of men and
beasts (usua l ly excluding that of the
head and heard and that of mane and
tail ). [prop.‘clippings, shearings,
’
Vlfi,‘cut,
’1 168 . l a : cf . roman.]
l o l a ,a . — 1 . moving h ither and th ither ,
uneasy ; and so - 2. anxious for , desirous
of ; greedy . [VluL]l ostd , m. n. clod (of earth ) . [Vruj , cf .
for mg, see under mid.]1011 6 , a . reddish ; coppery ; as m. n. red
dish metal , copper . [cf . l éh ita, roh ita ,
and rudhira, al l meaning‘red
’: wi th the
last, cf. l -v -
pds, Lat. ruber,rdfus , Eng.
ruddy, red.]l oh i y a sa, n. coppery metal , any metal
al loyed with copper . [i yasfi ]l i n l y a , n. greediness. [l ola,l i uh i y a s a ,
a . meta ll ic ; as n. metal lic
ware. [1011 i 1208f .]
reflect, del ib
v a ngd , m. - 1 . cane or stock or stem , esp .
of the bamboo ; —2. ( l ike Eng. stock,and
stem [ra rely], and Ger . Stamm ) l ineage,family , race.
v a nca- v i gud dh a , a . — 1 . made of pers
fectly clear or unblemished bamboo
- 2. of pure l ineage. [l it.‘vanga
-pur e,
pure in its or h is vanga ,’ 1265 : Vgudh ]
V v ak (vi vakr é [786, rol l . [akin
w. Vvane, q .v.]v a k ta v y a, grdo. to be said or spoken ;
see 999 end. [Vvac,v ak r a, a . - 1 . crooked ; —2. fig. (near lylike Eng. crooked) disingenuous , ambig
uous . [Vvak,v ak sdni , j :pl. bel ly ; bel lies (of cloud
mountains).
[236]
v a c ( vAkti ; uvi ca, [784, 800c] ; v ixca s ,n. — l . speech , ctc. ; words
Avocat [847 end, vaksyati , -te
ukti , ; v itktum ; uktvfi ; -ucya ; ucydte ;v i cayati ) . say or speak (w. ace. of per
son, 1023; or w. acc. of per son and ace. of
th ing, announce or tel l ,
name or cal l , 587; punar uv i ca, repl ied,
ity uktvi , with saying so, i .s. with
the words saying 4 9 ;
so saying, 1923
, etc. ;
- ukta, — l . spoken ,sa id ; impers.pass.
[999 m id.] ki kenavuktam , th e crow said,
24 13, ctc. ; uktam , introducing a pr overb,’t is said, 19
9,2015, etc. ; — 2. spoken
unto ; evam ukta, thus addressed, 35,
etc.
— caus . - 1 . mid. cause or ask (e.g. the
Brahmans ) to pronounce for one’s self
(e.g. a benediction ) , 101 2, — 2. cause
(a written leaf ) to speak, i .e. read,
[cf . Jana, s rox-j a ,‘voice , rumor
’
; Lat.
ode-i re,‘cal l
’
; Ger . er-wiih-nen,‘ mention
’:
W. vac-as,‘ word,
’cf. ( was, stem er st -ea ,
word,
’w. labialization w. Avocam,
.a-va-no-am, cf. l ett er , c l -Fs-m -ar ,‘said
’:
w. nom . v i k, sv i k-s, stem v i e,‘voice,
’
cf . Lat. vox, svdc-s ,‘voice,
’and 5th, for
M , i .e. ra t -s,
+ a nu,— 1 . repeat or say (sacr ificial
prayers , etc.) for some one — 2.
mid. say after (the teacher ) , i.s. learn,study ; anfici na, per/Z mid. ppl ., who
studies, studied, learn-cd.
+ a b b y - a nu, say wi th regard to or
with reference to someth ing ; describe
(an occurrence ) in (metrical and Vedic)words.
n i s , speak out or clear ly ; explain.
+ p r a ,— 1 . te l l forth , proclaim ; tel l ,
announce , mention ; and so — 2. (as con
versely laudare ,‘
praise,’
comes to mean
‘ mention’
) praise ; — 3 . tel l of,colloq. tel l
on,i .s. betray ,
93 13 ; — 4 . say , —5.
declare to be ; name, 575.
p r a t i , say in retur n, answer.
s am , say together .
v a ca n s ,n. - 1 . speech ; words, etc. ;
dictum ; - 2. ( l ike Lat. e-dictum and Eng.
edict and word) command ; injunction,
[Vvac,
V v aj (V i jayati ) .
word ; counse l ; — 2. languagc, 541 1; — 3.
( l ike Eng. word ) order ; request, 53 3.
[ l vac, 1 151 . 1a : cf. ( was,
p robable root,with the
meaning be strong or l ively , inferr ed f romugra, ojaa, vaj ra, vitja ; see these words
v i j hyant, has tening, q/Z VV i jaya.
[ci . dr ahs,‘strong, heal thy
’
; AS. wac-ol,
‘awake
’
; Eng. wake,‘not to sleep
’
;
perhaps Lat. b ig-i re,
‘ be l ively or strong,’
vig-ii
, W I
4.f “
v dj r a , m. I ndra’s thunderbol t, 70
3, 88
15.
[orig., perhaps, a mere epithet,‘ The
Migh ty’
(was). l ike M io'
lm'
r, Th e
Crusher ,’name of Th or ’s hammer .]
v aj r a - b i hu, a . having the thunderbol t
on his arm (of Indra ) , ligh tning-armed.
v aj r i n , a . having th e thunderbol t (of
Indra ). [vaj ra,V v a ne (vaflcati ; vaiicayati ; vancita).
totter ; go crookedly ; caus . (cause to go
astray , i.s.) mislead, deceive ; cheat. [ci .Lat. vacilla re,
‘ totter , be unsteady’
; AS.
woh,‘crooked wrong,
’whence Eng. woo,
incline to one s self,+up a , totter unto.
v a noa k a , m. deceiver . [Vvafla caus .]v aflca y i ta v y a , grdo. to be deceived
as n. a to-be-practised deceit, w. obj ective
gen. (29Gb 262. [Vvano.]v a ta , m. Ficus indica ; cf nyag-rodha.
v ani k - put r a , m. merchant’
s son.
[vanij -Jv ani j , m. merchant. [Vpan,V v a t (vatati ; vfitéyati ) . only with api.
understand ; caus . cause to understand or
know, reveal , inspire (devotion ) . [cf.Lat. edt-es ,
‘ wise seer’: see under v i ta ]
v a tsa, m. young ; esp . young of a cow,
calf. [pr0p.‘
year l ing,’ from a not quot
able ovatas,‘
year’
with ovatas , cf.
Fi r es, year ,’Lat. vetus in vetus -tu-s,
‘ bejah rt, in years, old’
: akin are Lat.
vit-u-lu-s,‘
year l ing, i.s. calf,
’and Eng.
weth-er : for mg, cf. xlpapos,‘
goat,’
prop.
‘winter-l ing’
(see hima ) : see vatsara.]v a t s a r fi, m. year ; personified, 67 1
5. [ci .
vat-a ; also pari and safi -vatsara ]
vapa s] [238]
v ap a s ,a . - 1 . wondrous , admirabil is
— 2. ( l ike Eng. adm irable ) exciting wonder
mixed with approbation, esp . wondrous
fair— as n.
— 1 . a wonder ; wonderful ap
pearance ; vapur drgaye, a wonder to see,
Oau‘
ipa isl eOa i ,— 2. beautiful appear
ance ; beauty , 83; - 3. appearance ; form ,
48 3-4 . [for 2 and 3, cf . the converse
transition of mg in rfipa, l ,
v a y am ,we, see 491 . [cf . Ger. wi-r , Eng.
me.]1 v ay a s ,
n.— 1 . fowl , collective ; — 2. bird.
[see v i ,2 v 6y a s , n . food, meal . [prop.
‘enjoy
ment,’
Vl vi ,‘enjoy
’: for analogies, sec
V2bhuj ,‘enjoy ,
’and V l vi .]
3 v ay a s , n. — 1 . strength , of body and of
mind ; health ; - 2. the time of strength ,
youth ; marr iageable age, 25; — 3. gen
era l ized, any age or period of l ife ; years
(of l ife ) . [akin w. vi -t a, q.v.]v a y i , f . strengthening.
1 v ar a ,m. ch oice ; wish ; a th ing to be
chosen as gift or reward, and so gift, reward ; vararh vr, wish a wish
,make a
condition, 941; varam di , give a choice,
grant a wish , I"; prati vdram or va
ram 5, according to one’
s wish . [V2vr,‘choose
’: cf . Eng. well , li t.
‘according to
one’s
2 v a r a ,a . ( like Eng. choice or select) most
excel lent or fair , best, w. gen. or loc., 16
2,
3 21 ; w. abl ., most excel lent as distin
guished from i .s. better th an
varam '
, na oa°
, th e best thing is
and not i .s . is better than
[V2vr ,‘choose
’: for mg, cf. AS. cyst,
‘a
choice,’and then ‘ th e best,
’with cedsan,
v a r ana ,n. a ch oosing. [V2vr,
v a r a -v a r na ,m. most fair complexion.
v a r a v a r ni n , a . hav ing a fair com
plexion -ini , j : fair-faced woman. [va
ravarna ,
v a r as g a n a, j I most excel lent woman.
[saga s ]v a r i r o h a , a. h aving fair hips or but
tocks ; xaAAlr v-yos. [i rohaJ
v a r ah h , m. boar.
v ar i v a s , n. breadth ; fig. freedom fromconstraint, ease, gladness, w. kr. [belonging to urn,
‘ broad’: see 407
v h r i y ans ,a . very broad, wide extended.
[V l vr,‘cover , extend over
’see 467 9
and
v ar una , m. The Encompasser (of th e
U niverse ), Varuna, name of an Adi tya ;
or ig. the supreme god of the Veda (see
selection xxxvii . and notes ) , and so ca ll ed
king as wel l as god, 8319; omniscient
judge who punish es sin and sends sick
ness and death , selections xl iii., xl iv., xl v. ;
la ter , god of the waters, [a personi
fication of the ‘al l -embracing
’heaven,
Vl vr, cover , encompass ,’1 1 77c : cf .
oirpavdr ,‘ heaven,
’and Obpamls, Heaven ,
’
personified as a god ]v ar fith a , n. cover ; and so
,as in Eng.,
protection. [V l vg,‘cover ,
’1 163c.]
va r ii th y a,a . protecting. [varfitha ,
1212d
vAr eny a , grdv. to be desired ; and so,
longed for , excel lent. [V2vr,‘choosc,
’
121 7 1-2 3, 966b.]v a r g a ,
m. group. [V vrj , separate,’
216. 1 : for mg, cf . Eng. division,
‘a separ
rating into par ts,’
and th en ‘the part
separated,
v ar e a s , n. v ita lity , v igor ; the il luminat
ing power in fire and the sun ; and so,
splendor ; j ig. glory . [perhaps akin with
m a : cf . varpas with rfipa.]v 6 r na , m. - 1 . outside ; external appear
ance ; color , 370, etc. complexion ;
— 2. (color , and so, as in Eng.) kind,
species, sort, 989; — 3. (sort of men , i .s .)
caste, 2813; - 4 . letter ; sound ; vowel ,
59 16 ; sy l lable ; word, 983. [V 1 vr,
‘cover,
’
1 1 77a : for mg 1 , cf . Eng. coating, and
coa t (of paint) , and Lat. color , prop.
‘cover or coating,
’cognate w. oc-cul-ere,
cover
V v a r na y a (varnayati ) . — 1 . color ,
paint ;- 2.fly. ( l ike Eng. paint) , depict,
describe ; tel l about ; pass. 123. [varng
v a r t a n a , n. prop. an existing, and so
( like Eng. l iving ), means of subsistence
[e t, mgs 8, 5 : cf . vrtti .]
[239]
v a r tt, m. restrainer, stayer .
‘cover ,
’ mg 3,‘restrain
’:
v h r tm a n ,s . wheel-track ; path ,
vartmani , at end of cpds : by way of ,
or simply through ; i k i ga-vart
mani , through th e air, 39 1 . [e t,
1 168. l a.]v t r t r a ,
a . warding off, h olding back ;
as n. a water-stop, dam , weir. [V l vr,‘cover ,
’
q .v .]l var dh a n a ,
a . - 1 . increasing, trans. ;
as m. increaser ; 2. deligh ting in.
[V1 vrdh ,‘ increase,
’
q.v.]2 v a r dh a n a , n. the cutting. [V2vrdh ,
v dr p a s , n. assumed appearance ; image,
form . [akin with rfipa: cf . var eas.]v dr m a n , n. envelope ; coat of armor ;
protection ; at end of Kshatr iyamames,
59 13 s . [V l vr,‘envelop,
’1 168 . l a.]
v a r sa, n. - 1 . rain ; —2. (rainy-season,i.s .) year ; j : pl . —1 . the rains,
i.e. the rainy season ; - 2. very ra rely,
rain-water , [e s : of . l -spoau,‘rain-drops
’: for mg 2 of varsa, cf . Eng.
“gir l of sixteen summers ,
“man of
seventy winters,”abda and car
v a r sa -k a r m a n ,n. the action f rain
v a r sa - sa tk a ,n. year
-hexade, period of
six years.
v a r sm h n , m. h eigh t ; top ; crown of the
head. [see 1 168. 1c2 and 2b.)
v a l a,m. prop. an encloser , and so — 1 .
(enclosure, i.s.) cave ; — 2. personified,Vala, name of a demon who shuts up
the heavenly waters to withhold them
from man and is slain by Indra,
[V l vr,
[V3 vas
[v1 vr. v" 9 (me. ne w nv-‘sa (7841)- 1 . wil l , —2. desire, long for ;
ppls, pres. ugént, perf . v i vagi na [786]wi l l ing or (when qual ifying subj ect of verb)gladly , longing,
- 3. ( l ike
Eng. will in its rare or obsolete sense
order’
) order, command. [cf . l ads ,
stem ePex-or r ,
v 69a ,a . wil l ing, submissive ; as m. - 1 .
wil l ; —2. command ; and so control ling
power or influence. [Vvag.]v a ca
-ui a . bringing into one’s
power ; as m. control ler .
v a gi , f . - 1 . cow, esp. farrow cow ; - 2.
female elephant, Elephanten-kuh . [per
haps‘ the lowing
’
beast, fr . Vv i g: cf.
Lat. vacca ,‘cow
’: usua l name for ‘
cow’
is g6.]v acf n , a. having command or control ;
as subst. m. or f . master , mistress. [vaga ]v a gi
-k r , make submissive, enth ra l l , en
snare. [vaqa and Vl kr,‘ make,
’
v a gy a , grdo. to be commanded or ordered,
and so obedient, submissive, yielding.
[vac, 9683 e.]
v a s , encl. pron. you, 491 .‘
ye, yom’
]1 v a s (ucchhti [753, uvfisa
vatsyati [167] usta). grow bright ;
l igh t up (of the breaking day ) , dawn .
[for cognates, Lat. as-tuqs, burned,’east,
Easter, etc .
, see the col latera l form us,‘ burn
,
’and the derivs usas, usra , va
santa, vasu, v i car-a : cf. also hm .sesa
pap,‘ day
’
; l ap, eFea -ap, Lat. vEr , eve-er ,
sees-er , dawn of the year-l igh t, i .e.
spr ing’
; Ves-nu-ius , the burning’moun
tain.]v i , shine abroad, l igh t up, 97
13.
[cf . Lat. vo'
s,
v a l a -v r t r a , m. Vala and Vritra. [1252 ] V 2 v a s (vasto vavasé ; hvasista
v a l a v rt r a - nisfidana , m. destroyer of
Vel a and Vritra, i.s. Indra.
v a l a v rt r a - h a n a . slay ing Vel a
and Vritra ; as m. slayer of Vala and
Vritra, i.s . Indra.
v a l m ik a ,m. ant-hil l .
v a v r i , m. pr op. cover , and so — 1 . place
of hiding or refuge ; — 2. corporeal tegument (of the soul ) i.s. body . [V1 vr,‘cover ,
’1 155.2c.]
vatsyati ; vasita ; vi situm ; vasitvit ;-vasya ) . put on (as a garment) , clothe
one’
s self in . [cf. i nvent, cr ed -nun ,
‘
put on’
; i -so-r o,‘ had on
’
; Jpn,‘
gar
ment’
Lat. ces-tis,‘
garment’
; Goth .
ga-vas-j an,
‘clothe
’
; AS. wer-ian, Eng.
wea r .)3 v a s (vacati ; uvi as Av i tsit
vatsyati ; usita ; v6stum ; usitv t‘
t
d isya ; vi si yati ) . stay in a place ; esp .
V 4 vas]
stay over nigh t, 1008 (with r i tr im )dwel l , abide ; l ive. [cf . dar n, s eas -w ,
dwel ling-
place, town’
; Lat. ver -na , one
who l ives in the h ouse, i .e. slave’
or
‘one who dwel ls in the land, i.e. native ,
’
l ike Eng. domestic,‘servant,
’
and domestic,‘not foreign
’
; AS. wes-an,‘ be
’
; Eng .
was,were.)
+ 5 , take up one’
s abode in (a place ) ,occupy ; enter upon, 62
ud ,caus. (cause to abide out, i.e.)
remove from its place, 9714 ‘
l .
+ up a ,— I . stay with ; wait ; - 2. (with
a specia l ization of mg l ike that in Eng.
abs-tain,‘ hold ofi, esp . from food or
dr ink’
) wait, and so stop (eating ) , fast.ui , dwel l (of men and of beasts ) .
p r a t i , have one’
s dwel ling.
4 v a s (vi sayati ; v i sita) . cut. [ci .Lat.vo
’
mis, eves-mic, vdmer , plow-share,
ud ,cut away or off, 97
“t.
v a s a n ta, m. spring. [‘the dawning or
l igh ting-up
’
year-time, Vl vas ,
see 1 vas : Cf . l ap, eFea -ap, Lat. si r , eve-er
,
eves-er ,
v as i sth a , a . most excel lent, best ; — as m.
Vas ish tha, name of one of the most
famous Vedic seers, 7819 N. [formed as
super l . to vasu, fr . V l vas as a verbal
the verba l having the same trans
ferred sense as the adj . y asu, q .v.]v asu,
a . exce l lent, good ; — 1 . as m. good
(of gods ) , 76 1 1 ; — 2. as m. pl . The Good
Ones , the Vaana, a class of gods, RV .x.
— 3. as n. sing. and pl . good,
goods, weal th . [pr0p.‘sh ining, i.e. splen
did,’
VI vas,‘shine,
’but w. a transfer of
mg l ike that in th e Eng. splendid as used
by the vul gar for‘excel lent
’: connection
w. Ms, £63,‘
good,’and sh,
‘ wel l ,’is im
probable, see i yu.]v a su- dh ii a . yi elding good ; val u
dh i f . the earth ; the land.
v a sud h i dh i p a ,m. ( lord of the earth ,
i .e.) king, prince. [adhipa.]v a sum-d h a r a , a . holding good or
treasures ; -t'
i , f . the earth . [vasumdha ra , 1250s : we should expect vasu
(ace. s. neuter , or stem ) , not vasu-m
(mascul ine l ) ,
[240]
v asu-cr a v a s , a . perhaps [1298s ] hav
ing good fame, or else [1297 and 1280b]having weal th-fame, i.s . famed for weal th .
v a su- s a m pur na , a . treasur e-fil led.
[V1 pr,Vv a s ii y a (vasfiy5ti ) . crave good. [donom. of vasu, 1058 1 ,
v a sfiy i , f . desire for good ; longing.
[V vasiiya ,v a l tr , m. i l luminer ; or , as adj ., l igh tingup. [V 1 v a s , shine,
’
1 182,
v as t r a , n. garm ent, piece of cloth ing ;
cloth . [V2vas, clothe ,’
1 185a.]v a s t r a - v e sti ta , a . covered with clothes,
wel l dressed.
v a s t r i n ta , m. border of a garment.
[ante ]v a h (vahati , -te ; uvi ha, iih é ; dvi ksi
‘
t ;
vaksyati subs vodhum ; aehvt ;d ikya ; uhy‘ te ) . — 1 . conduct, 84 1 1 ;
carry , esp. the oblation , 851,
bring with team , 73n, 81
14, or car , 72
4,
87 14 ; draw (wagon ) , guide (horses ) ; — 2.intr ans. travel ; proceed ( in a wagon ) ;— 3. pass . be borne a long ;
— 4. flow,
carry with itself (of water ) ; — 5. (likeGer . h eimf iihren ) br ing home to the
groom’s house, wed ; — 6. carry , 43
1 1°
bear , 264 carry far and wide, i.e.
spread (a poem , fragrance ) , 54 3.
[for svagh : cf. 5x” , el-‘
oxos,‘ wagon
’
;
bxlopai ,‘r ide
’
; Lat. veh-ere,‘carry
’
; vehi
culum,
‘ wagon’
; AS. weg-cu, carry , bear,
’
whence Eng. weigh,‘ lift ’ (as in weigh
anchor ) ,‘ flnd weigh t of by lifting
’
(cf.
bhara ) ; AS. weyn or wwn, Eng. wa in,
Dutch wagen (whence the borrowed Eng.
wagon ) , th at wh ich is drawn, i .s . wagon’
;
further , Lat. vi-a , ve-a , eveh-ia , that which
is to he travel led over , way’
; AS . weg,
Eng. way,‘that which carries one to a
place ]it , bring h ith er or to.
+ ud ,— I . hear or bring up ; -2. esp.
lead out (a bride from h er father's house ) ,
wed.
+ p a r i ,— 1 . lead about ; — 2. esp . lead
about ( the bride or the wedding proces
sion ) , wed.
p r a , carry onward.
Vvi fich ]
Vv i nch (vi nchati ; vi tich iti ). wish . [for
evi nsk, orig. inchoative (cf. Vl is) to
Vvan , q.v.: cf . Ger. Wunsch, ‘a wish
’
;
AS. wiisc,‘a wish ,
’whence verb wyscan,
wish ,’whence Eng. verb wish , whence
noun wish .]v i ni j y a , n. merchant
’s business, trade.
[vanij ,v i ta , m. — 1 . wind ; air ; — 2. Vi ta , god
of the wind. [Vl v i ,‘ blow
’acct,
1 176c : cf. Icelandic 08-inn, AS. Wad-en,Old High Ger . Wuot-ou, names of the
highest Germanic god, Odin : the name
stil l lives in the Eng. Wednes-day, AS.
d n-es dwg some connect Wi den w.
Vvat,‘ inspire,
v i ta - s v a n a s , a . having the roar of the
wind, i .e. blustering, exhibiting noisy
violence, tumul tuous.
v i t i i k a b h a k sa , a . having wind as sole
food, i .e. fasting. [v i ta ekabhaksajv i d a , m. speech , expression, statement.
[Vvad.]v i da -yuddh a , n. speech
-figh t, i .s. con
troversy .
v i da yuddh a -pradh i na , a . devoted to
controversy ; as m. eminent controver
sialist.]v i d i n , a . speaking. [Vvad,v i n ap r a s th a , m. a Brahman of the
third order , who has passed th rough the
stages of student and householder ( see
i crama ) and dwel ls in the woods , 65 3m ;
h ermit. [vanaprasthrn for mg, cf.
lpnplvns, Eng. hermit, and l pnp la,
‘soli
tude,
v i n a r a , m. monkey , ape.
v i p i , f . oblong pond ; lake. [V2vap,h eap up, dam up,
’and so, perhaps, orig.
‘a dam
’
(cf . xo'
iua,‘ dam ,
’ from xdw,
‘ th row or heap and then, by metonymy , the pond made by the
v i p i -j a l a , n. lake-water . [perh aps thefirst element is here to be taken in its or ig.
sense of ‘ dam ,
’so that the whole means
pr0p. dam-water ,’and so pond
v i m , see 491 .
v i m i , a . lovely , pleasant ; as n. a lovely
thing, a joy. [Vvan : cf . dh i ma and
V 1 dhvam]
[242]
v i y a s i , m. - 1 . bird ; - 2. esp. crow ;-si , j : crow-hen. [1 v i yas,
‘ bird,
’1208a.]
v i yu, m. wind. [V1 vi ,‘ blow,
’
v i r , n. water. [cf. abp-o-r , or ig.‘ water ,
’
and so, as in Eng.,
‘ urine’
; Lat. i r iniir i,‘stay under water
’
; i r -ina , ur ine’
; U r-ia ,
Water-town} a port in Apul ia ; prob.
akin is AS. wa r ,
1 v i r a , m. tail -hair , esp. of a horse.
[prob. akin w. obph,2 v i r a , m. — 1 . choice treasure ; — 2.
moment chosen or determined for any
th ing, appointed time, turn - 3. time
(as used with numerals ) ; v i rarii vi ram ,
time and again ;— 4. the time or turn
(of one of the planets which rule in suc
cession the days of the week ), and so,
day of the week, day . [V2vr,‘choose
’:
identified by some w. Spa, time, season,’
see under Vy i ]v i r ani , a . warding 03 ( those that attackit) , and so strong or ungovernable (ofwi ld beasts ) ; as m. elephant. [Vl vr,cover , ward ofi,
’1 150. 1h .]
v i r i na s i , f . Varanas i , the modern
Benares .
v i r i , n. water . [see vi n ]v i r i - s th a , a . situated in the water , i.s.
(of the sun’
s disk ) reflected in the water .v i v i , pa rticle, emphas izing the word which
it f ollows. surely , just. [for doubleacct
, seeWhi tneyV v i g (vicyate [761c] ; vavi gé ; i vi
'
o
vaeat [861 ] v i citi ; vi gitvi ) . bleat
low ; cry (of birds ) . [see vagi , Lat.
vacca,
‘cow
,
’and vi grt ]
v i gr i , a . lowing (of kine) . [Vvi g1 188a.]
v i ed , m. — 1 . prop. a staying over nigh t
— 2. an abiding, 325 - 3. abiding-place,
[V 3vas,‘ dwel l
’: for mg, cf.
v i s a - b h ii m i , j : dwell ing-place.v i s i t i ,
— l . in Veda , as adj . of the
dawn ; hiptos — 2. in class ical Skt.,neuter , used as subst., a lso mascul ine, (prop.
time o f dawn, as distinguish ed fromnigh t, and so) day in general . [prop. a
secondary deriv. ( 1 1 88d) fr. an obsolete
svas-ar ,‘ dawn,
’Vl vas,
‘ dawn’: see
[243] [Vl vid
l vas : and for the form vas-at , cf . (up v i c a k sani , a . appear ing far and wide,
and vEr , there given, and ah -ar , i dh -ar ,
v i s a - v ecm a n , n. chamber for spending
the nigh t, sleeping-room.
v i s a s , n. garment. [V2vas ,v i s i n ,
a. dwelling. [V3 vas,‘ dwel l ,
’
v i s ta v y a, a . belonging to an abode ;
as m. inh abitant. [vi stu, 1212dv i s tu,
m. n. dwel ling. [V3 vas,‘ dwel l ,
’
1 161a.]v i s t o s- p i t i , m. lord or Genius of the
dwel l ing, 772m [v i stos, gen . of v i stu
( 1250d) pi ti : acct, 1267s and d.]v i h i ,
a . carry ing ; car rying 03 . [VvalL]v i h a n a , a . carrying off ; as n.
— l . beast
of burden, 563; beast for riding ; team ;
vehicle ; — 2. th e car ry ing, [Vvah ,1 150. 1b.]
1 v i [343c], m. bird. [cf. olewds, ebl-‘ t
a rcs, Lat. avi-s,
2 v i , prepos ition. apar t, asunder , away ,
out ; denoting intens ity in descr iptive cpds
cf : vi citra, vibudha ; denotingsepa ration or non-agreement in possessive
cpds cf . vimanas , etc. similar ly
in the prepositiona l cpd ( 1310a ) , vipr iya.
v i nga ti j : twenty . [cf . einem ,
Boeotian Fixa‘
fl , Lat. viginti ,
v i k a ta , a .— 1 . exceeding the usua l meas
ure ; and so — 2. ( l ike Eng. enormous )monstrous, h ideous ; — as m. Hideous,
name of a gander . [cf . 1245g.]v i k r am i , m. a stepping out, appearance ;
esp . bo ld or courageous advance , courage,m igh t. [Vkram -t-ViJ
v i g a t a - s amk a l p a ,a . with vanished
purpose, purposeless. [V gam vi
1299 ]v i gul p h a , a . abundant. [origin nu
clean ]v i g r a h a , m.
— l . separation ; and so - 2.
division ; and so — 3 . discord, quarrel ,war . [Vgrab. + vi.]
Vv i c (vin i kti ; vih ti ; véktum ; -vi cya ).separate, esp . grain from chafi by O
win
nowing ; separate, in general .
+ v i , separate out or apart ; vivikta ,
isolated, and so lonely .
conspicuous or, far-see ing. [Voaks vi.]
v i - c i t r a , a . — 1 . very var iegated ; — 2.
differently colored, varied ; — 3. (ful l ofvariety and surpr ises, and so ) entertain
ing, beautiful . [in mg 1 , vi has perhapsin tens ive force ; in 2, perhaps variative.]V v i j (vij i te ; v ivijé ; i vikta vij ia
yi ti ; vigni ) . move with a quick dartingmotion, dloa ew ; ( l ike Eng. star t) move
suddenly from fear . [cf . AS. wic-an,‘
give way’
; Eng. weak,‘
y ielding, soft,
ud , start up ; be affr igh ted ; udvigna,terr ified.
v iJa y i , m. victory ; personified, Victory ,name of a rabbit. [Vj i vi .]
v i j i t i , j i conquest.v i j i te n d r i y a ,
a . having the organs of
sense subdued. [vij ita indr iya.)v i j fiéy a , grdo. to be known or considered
as. [Vjfli V i, 9633 a.]
v i n-mfitr a ,n. faeces and ur ine.
226b, 161 : for cpd, 1253b.]v i ta th a , a. fal se. [
‘ difiering from the
so,’vi tath i , 1314a.]
v i ta th i bh i n i v ega , m. incl ination to
wards that wh ich is false. [abhinivegm]v i t a s t i , f . a span, about nine inches or
twelve fingers. [prob. fr . V tan vi , and
so‘a stretch
’ from the tip of th e thumb
to th at of l ittl e finger : for mg, cf . Eng.
noun span and verb span,‘extend over ,
’
and see vy i ma.)v i t i n a , m. n.
- 1 . spreading out, exten
sion ; — 2. canopy . [Vtan + vi : for mg
2, cf. Eng. expanse (of heaven ) and e:
pand.]v i tt i , ppl . gotten ; as n. ( l ike Lat. quaes
tus ) gettings, that wh ich is got, property .
[V2vid,V l v i d (vétti ; véda [790a] ; i vedit
[via
vedisyi ti, -te ; vetsyi ti, -te ; viditi
véditum, véttum ; viditvi ; -vidya ; vo
di yati ) . -1 . know ; understand ; per
ce ive ; ya ovumveda ,who knoweth thus,
who hath th is knowledge, f requent f ormula
in theBrdhmanas , 973; vidyi t, one should
know, it should be known or understood ;
v2vid] [244]
recognize me as N., know that I am N. ; [vidarbha does not stand in the rela
- 3 . notice ; be m indful of, 75 bethink tion of a gen. of appel lation : see 295
one’s self, - 4. bel ieve ; assume ; v i da r bh a -p a t i , m. lord or king of
cons ider a person (acc.) to be Vidarbha.
-ppl . vidvi ns, see s.v. v i da r bh a - r i j a n , m. king of Vidarbha.
[with veda. vidmi , cf . area, finer , AS. v i d i s i n , a. becoming exhausted, dryingic wdt, we
i witon, I know, we know’ Eng. up. [Vdu Vi , 1 183
I wot, gerund to wit, noun wit, under v i dy i , f . - 1 . knowledge ; a discipl ine or
standing’: cf. also «no», sta tor ,
‘saw
’
; science ; esp. trayi vidyi , the tr iple
Lat. vide‘
re, see
’
; AS. witan, see’
; science or knowledge of the holy word, as
whence wit-go, seer, soothsayer , wizard hymn, sacrificial formula, and chant, or
( Ice landic vii-ki ,‘ wizard wicca ,
‘ wizard,’
the Rigveda, Yajurveda, and Samavedawiece, witch ,
’Eng. witch, masc. and fem . : - 2. esp. the science xar
'
isoxhv, i .e.magic ;veda. is an old preter ito-present,
‘ have a magic formula, spel l . [V1 vid. 1213dseen or perceived,
’and so,
‘ know’— see for mg 2, observe the equa l ly arbitrary
V2vid : the forms of the other tense special ization in Eng. spell , wh ich in AS.
systems are comparatively modern.] meant a
a nu, know along, i.s . from one end to v i dy i -dh a r a ,a . keeping or possessed of
the other , know thorough ly . knowledge or the m agic art ; as m. a Vid
+ n i , caus . cause to know ; do to wit ; yi dhara, one of a class of genii , who are
announce ; communicate. attendants on i a, and reputed to be
2v i d (vindi ti, -to vivéda, vividé magicians.
v i d y i m a da m. knowledge intoxication,
véttum vittvi -vidya ) . — 1 . find, i.s . infatuated pr ide in one’
s learning.
etc. ; get, obtain (ch ildren ) , v i dy i v a y o -v rdd h a , a . grown old in
—2. get hold of, 807; - 3 . pass. knowledge and years, distinguished for
vidyi te : is found ; later , equiv. to there is, l earning and age. [vidyi 3 vayas ,
there exists ppl . vidi na [619 found,-ppl . vitta , see e.u. v i dy ti t ,
- l . a . lightening ; and so, as in
[orig. ident. w. Vl vid, of wh ich th is is Eng.,
27‘ligh tning. [ Vdynt vi.
only another aspect, namely that of see
ing esp. an object looked for , i .s. of v i dv aj -j a n a , m. wise man. [vidv i nafinding
’see 1 vid.] 1249s ,
+ a nu, find. v i dv i ns ppl. knowing ; wise,
v i d , vbl . knowing, at end of cpds. [Vl vid.] ctc. ; learned ; tvasti v idv i n , a cunning
v i da ,a . knowing, at end of cpds. [do.] workman (cf .Eng. cunning and Old Eng.
v i d a t r a , a. noticing, in cpds. [V1 vid, cunucu, [V1 vid,‘ know,
’
1 185d.] 79os , 803 1 ]v i d i th a , n. directions, orders. [prop. V 1 v i dh (vidh i ti ) . worsh ip a god (dat.)
knowledge given, i.e. instructions,’
with honor (acc.) with
V 1 vid, 1 163b [cf. vedh as.]v i da r bh a ,
— 1 . m. pl. the V idarbhans, V 2v i dh (vindhi te ). lack or be without s
V idarbha , name of a people, and of their th ing vidui ri ; be bereft or alone.
country , wh ich was south of the Vindhya
mountains , and is now cal led Berar ; - 2. V 3v i dh , see Vvyadh.m. sing.Vidarbha, i .s. a king of V idarbha, v i dh , vbl . boring th rough , wounding, at
4 3. [for mg 2, cf.“Norway, uncle of end qf cpds. [V3vidh or vyadh , 252, of.
young Fortinbras ,” Ham let, i .2.
v i da r bh a -n a g a r i , f . city or capital v i d h i v i , j :widow. [V2vidh ,‘ be bereft,
’
of Vidarbha, i.s. Randias (kundina ) . 1 190: cf. h- lfisos,‘
youth without a wife.
v ibhu]
vi : if so, we must suppose that the
name was first given to the die as die,
and applied secondari ly to nut and
tree .]v i b hu, a . — l . pervading, far-reach ing ;
unl im ited, — 2. powerful , m igh ty ,of Indra, 5
13 15; as subst. lord or ruler .
[Vbh ii vi , 354 : for 2, cf. vibhava 1
and 2, and vibhfiti .]v i bh fit i , f . — 1 . development or growth
- 2. ( the resul t of growth , i.e.) power ,esp . of a lord or ruler . [Vbhfi vi , l l 57d
cf . vibhava and vibhu.]v i -m a n a a , a . (hav ing an away
-removed
mind or h eart, i.s.) out of one’
s senses or
dishear tened. [ 1305 ]v im a r da , m. destruction ; (of sleep ) dis
turbance. [Vmrd +vi.]v im i n a , a . traversing, esp. the sky ;
as m. n. a palatial car of the gods that
moves th rough the air, sky
-chariot.
[VI mi vi,‘ measure,
’
q.v. :
v i -muk h a , a . having the face away ;
vimukh i yi nti, they go (with averted
faces, i.s .) h omewards. [ 1305 ]v i - r a j a s , a . having dust away , dustless,
pure. [1305 ]v i r a h a , m. — 1 . abandonment, separation
from ; - 2. absence, freedom.from . [V rah
+ v i .]v i r i m a , at. stop, end, pause. [V r am +vi .]v i r odh i n , a . h indering, disturbing.
[Vrudh vi, 1 183
v i l i an , m. joy .
v i v a r a, m. n. open ing ; hole (of creatures
that l ive in the ground) . [V l vr + vi,‘ uncover,
v i - v a r na ,a . having the color away ,
color less, pale. [1305 ]v i v a r na - v a da n a , a .pale
-faced. [1298a.]v i v as v a n , a . l igh ting up ; vivi svabhis ,
as adv. so that it l igh ts up ; as n.,
perhaps, flash , spark. [V l vas +vi ,‘ l ight
up,’1 1695 ]
v i v a l v a n t , a . ligh ting up ; as m. Vivas
vant, name of a god of the dawning day
ligh t or morning-sun, father of the twins
Yams and Yam i and of the Acvins,
85 13-14. [Vl val vi.‘ ligh t up,
’see
1233e.]
[246]
v i v i h a, nu. fetching home of the br ide,wedding, marr iage. [Vvah vi .]
v i v i h a - ca tusta y a , n. marriage-qua
ternion, i.s . the marrying of four wives.v i v i h ag n i , m. wedding
-fire. [agnL]v i v i dh a ,
a . having difierent kinds , i.s .
of difierent sorts , various. [2vi vidh i ,
334 9, 1305 ]v i v rddh i , f . growth ; increase in size ;
increase. [Vvrdh -i-vi , 1 157. 1d.]v i v ek a , m. - 1 . a separating apart ; — 2.
discr imination, discernment, good judgment [Vvic + vi , for mg 2, cf .
discr imination w. Lat. discr imina'
re, sepa
rate,’fr . discr imen of the same root as
discernere,‘separate
’
; cf . also discernment
with discernere.]v i e (vigati , -te ; viveca, viv icé ; Aviksat ;veksyi ti. -te ; vim ; véstnm ; M ays ;
veqayati ). settl e down ; go in ; go into ,
enter. [with veca,‘ house,
’cf. olxos ,
‘ h ouse’
(analogous to entry from enter ) ,Lat. vicus,
‘settlement, vi l lage,
’whence
the borrowed AS. wic,
‘vi l lage
’
; Goth .
veins ,‘vi l lage Lat. 40a , ovic(u)la , smal l
settlement, farm’: see furth er vie and
vega.]i , go into, enter ; pervade, RV .x. 125 6
i vista : actively, having entered ; passively ,
entered by , fil led with ; -caus . cause to
go into, put into, communicate.
+ up a , settle down upon ; sit down ;
upavista , seated.
+ ui , mid. go in ; go home (to house or
nest) ; settle down to rest.
+ a b h i -ui , settle down to ; be incl ined
towards, fig.,as in Eng. ; be bent upon.
+ p r a , enter , get in to ; an. acc., 85 3 ;
w. loc.,
without exp ressed obj ect
enter , go in, go h ome,
penetrate, pierce ;— caus . cause to enter .
s am - p r a , go iu; m. grham, go home ;
w. niveqanam , go to bed ; enter , an. loc.
+ s am , enter together , i.s. make their
appearance together or come hi ther to
gether,— caus. cause to enter upon,
put or set upon.
v i e (v s.vi9am.vmbh 1 - 1 .
settlement, i .e. dwel ling-place and so
house ; —2. a settlement, i.s . the com
munity , clan , folk ; vigan patis, lord of
peoples, i.s . simply prince ; tr ibe or host
[vis
r bway , 9213 - 2. sometimes, entire, whole ;
so 71 17.
(of gods ) , 711 3,78 4 ; — 3 . the folk , as v i ev a
- c a k sa s , a . al l-beholding. [see
distinguished from the Brahmans and 1296 8 : acct, 1298c.]Kshatr iyas, the th ird caste, later cal led v i gv ata s , adv. from or on al l sides,
v i igya ; a man of the th ird caste,
[Vv ie, q.v. : cf . Awpcées r pcxd-m-s r, th ree
tribed Dor ians ’
; also Kel tic vic in Ordo
vIc-se, people of North Wales, and Lemo
vicues , people of modern Limoges.]v i ga ii k i , j : hesitation. [a fik vi,
v i qi k h a , a. having spread-asunder
branch es, i .s . forked ; -e, dual j :Vicakhe,name of an aster ism . [2 vi gi kh i ,
1305, 334 1 ]v i ei k h i l a , m. Vicakh il a, name of a mer
chant. [vigi khm 1227 : perhaps named
after the asterism because various green
grocer’
s commodities belonged to it.]v i gi l a, a . capacious, spreading, broad.
v i g i sta t i , j ?condition of being distin
guished, distinction , superiority . [viciate ,
1237 : see gig v i .]v i gesa , m.
— 1 . that wh ich separates or
distinguishes one thing fr om anoth er ,
distinction or difference ; and so — 2. ( l ikeEng. di stinction ) eminence, excel lence
viceaena, as adv. [1 1 12b], to an eminent
degree, i .s . very much , especial ly ,l ike
French par excel lence. [Vcis 4» vi .]v i ge ea t a s , adv.
— 1 . at end of a cpd,
according to th e difference of
- 2. ( l ike vigesena ,see above ) especial ly .
[vigesa , 1098b.]v i g- pat i , m. master of the h ouse.
[euph ony , 218 5 : acct, 1267s : cf . Old
Prussian wa is-pa tti-n, house-m istress
Lithuanian v‘
e’sz-pa t
-s,
v i qr a bdh am , see Vgr ambh.
v i gr a m b h a , m. confidence.
vi .]v i gr am bh al ap a , m. confidence-talk,
fam il iar conversation . [i lapa n]v i gv a pr on. adj . 1 a. al l , every
every one ; common in Veda, but replaced
in the Breihmana and la
1h . vigve devi s : al l
[Vgrambh
everywhere. [vigva , 1098b : acct, 1298c.]v i cv dto
-muk h a ,a . having a face on
a l l sides, whose face is turned every
wh ither. [1305 ]v i qv a
- d a r ga ta ,a . to be seen by all ,
al l-conspicuous. [acct, 1273, 12985 ]v i ev a
- d ev a ,m. pl . the Al l-gods (see
deva 2b) , RV. x. 125 1 . [vigva deva:
acct, 1280a, 1298c.]v i ev a
- b h e sa j a , a . al l-healing. [vigvabh esaja: acct, 1280a, 1298c.]
v i ev a-gca n d r a , a . al l-sparkl ing. [v ieva
qcandra: acct, 1280a, l 298c.]v i gv a
- arj , a . a l l-creating ; as m. pl. Al l
creators, name of certain creative beings.
v i gv i d , a. al l-consuming. [vigva + sa jv i gvfiy n , assumed as stem of vigv i yoe,75 1 , prop . a f orm of trans ition to the n
declens ion of the stem vigvityus, and mean
ing either friendly to al l , al l -fr iendly ( iftaken with mama , i.s. varunasya ) , or else
a l l l iving cre
'
p turgs (if taken with rastram ,
lordsh ip over see v igvi yus 1 and 2.
v i gv i yus , 1 . a . be longing to or appear
ing to al l l ife or living creatures, i .s.
either friendly to al l or al l-known (appl ied
to gods ) , or else dwel l ing in al l (of the
Genius of Life ) , —2. as n. al l-l ife,i .e. al l l iving creatures, men and beasts .
[vigva i yus , acct, 1280a, 12980 : for
mg 1 , see 1294
v i gv i s a , m. confidence.
v i gv i s a- k i r a na ,
n.
fidence.
v i gv as a- bh fim i , f . pr0pcr vessel for
confidence, one who may safely be
trusted.
[Veves vi .]reason for con
v i gv i h i ,adv. always, for evermore.
[vigva ,see 1 100a and cf . acct,
cf . 12985 ]V v i s (vivesti ; vivésa ; veksyati,
-te
vista; -visya ) . work, be active, accom
pl ish .
v i e (vi t, visam, vidbh is ), f . excrement,
faeces.
v isa] [248]
i sa, n. poison. [prop.‘ the potent or
overpower ing,’ VVie: no less arbitrary is
the specia l ization in Eng. poison, fr . Lat.
potionem,
‘ draugh t’: cf . leis, r is es, Lat
vi rus ,
v i sa - kum b h a , m. jar of poison .
v i sa y a ,m. — 1 . prop . working, and so
sphere of activity or influence ; - 2. one’
s
department or l ine or pecul iar province ;and so
, general ized — 3. province, field,
domain, empire, country ; — 4 . fie ld of
activity of one of the sense-o rgans
sound is the visaya of the ear ) , a mere
specia l iza tion of mg 1 ; object of sense,
pleasure of sense ; — 5. object in general .
[Vv is : but the formation of the stem is
not clear .)v i si da , m. despondency , dejection. [Vand+ vi .]
v i su,adv. on both sides.
v i suv a t samkr i nti , j : equinox-passage
(of the sun from one zodiaca l sign to the
next) ; the time of equinox-
passage, the
equinox. [visuvantn]v i auv an t , — 1 . a . having or taking part
on both sides, i .s. keeping or being in the
m iddle ; — 2. m. m iddle day (e.g. of a
long sacr ifice ) ; — 3 . m. n. esp . m iddle
day between the solstices, the verna l or
autumnal equinox. [visu, l 233o and
b end.]V v i st (vestate ; vistita; -véstya ; vesti
yati ) . wind one’
s self about ; caus . windaround, envelope , wrap up, dress.
v i snu,m. V ishnu, name of a god, wh ose
chief work in the Veda is the measur ing
of the sky in th ree paces, andwho became
one of the Hindu Tr inity , and extremely
important in the later sectar ian devel
opment of India ; cf. brahm‘u 2 and
giva. [prob. the migh ty worker ,’ V vie,
v i snu-
ga r m a n , m. Vishnucarman,
name of a sage. having V . as h is
protection’or el se ‘
the de l igh t of V .
’
the mg of the cpd depends on its accent
(see 1302 1 and and this is not
known .] to M S“;v i snuga r m a - naman , a. possessing vis
nagatman as name, namedV. [ l 249a9.]
v i sv a fio a . directed in both ways or
parted asunder. [visa afic,
v i sar j a n a ,n. the letting go ; evacuation.
[Van“
vi -Iv i ap a sta ,
see l ag + Vi.
v i s p a sti r th a ,a . having clear or inte l
l igible meaning. [artha.]v i sm a y a , m. astonishment.
v i sm a y i n v i ta , a . fil led with astonish
ment. [anvita, Viv i -h a s ta , a . - 1 . having the hands away,
handless ; and so 2. ( l ike Eng. un
handy ) awkward ; and so - 3. perplexed,
confounded. [1305 ]v i h i r i n ,
a. wandering about. [Vl hr -t
vi,
l v i'
(veti ; vivi ya , vivyé ; vi ti ) . — 1 .
seek eager ly ;— 2. accept gladly ; enjoy ;
-3 . strive to get ; — 4 . fal l upon.
[cf. Lat. véna'
r i,
‘ hunt,’a denom . of
mé-na ,‘ hunt ’ ; AS. tad-6
,
‘ hunt’
; Old
High Ger. weida ,‘ 1 . the seeking, esp . of
food, i .e. hunting, fish ing, and then 2. place
for getting food, pasture, and 3. food,fodder ’
; weida appears w. mg 1 in Ger.
Wa id-mann, hunter’
(also as fam ilyname, Weidmann
, and w. mgs
2 and 3 in Weide,‘
pasture, food’: per
h aps 2 vayas ,‘ food,
’
q .v ., comes fr. Vvi
'
in mg 1 , seek for, hunt,’and in th is case
the development of mg is like that of
weida 3 and l ike that of Lat. vi na'
tio’
n-ent,
hunting, game,’whence Eng. venison.]
+up a , seek after.V 2v i , see vyi .
v ini , f . lute.
v i ta ,see V i + vi ; also ref erable to roots vi
and vy i .
v i t a - da r p a ,a . having one
’s pride de
parted ; humbled. [Vi + v i.]v i ta - r ag a , a . having one
’
s passions de
parted, i.e. having conquered one’s pas
sions. [do.]v i t a, m.
- 1 . man ; esp . man of m ight,
hero ; in pl . Miinner ; — 2. hero, appl ied
to gods ;— 3 . pl. ( l ike Eng. men ) re
tainers, Mannen, 86 5. [cognate with
3 vayas,‘strength cf . Lat. sir , AS. wer ,
‘ manly or h eroic man’
; Eng. were-wolf ,‘ man
M i] [250]
Vv rj (vrnékti , vriikté ; vavérja ; fivarkvarkeyéti. 4 0 ; vrkté ; "fir st ;
varjdyati ) . — 1 . turn ; twist off ; — 2.
turn or set aside ; — 3. ( turn aside, i .s.)di-vert or keep away or al ienate something
from some one
— caus. [104 19] — 1 . (set aside, i .s.)
abandon, shun ; avoid, 2591,104“ 2.
(set aside, take out, and so,l ike ex-e ipere )
except ; varj ayitv i , with an excepting ,
i.s. with exception of, leave out,
exclude, separate.
[or ig. br ing out of its original direction
or position , by bending or diverting or
keeping in ( in th is last sense, cf. vrjAna,‘enclosure,
’and l -(p
'
y-vv,
‘shut and
so the opposite of V1 rj , stretch or reach
straigh t out,’
q .v. : cf . also Lat. verger e,‘ bend, turn
’
; Eng. wr ick,‘to twist,
’and
wr iggle ; prob. cognate is wr ing,‘twist
’
;
also Eng. wrong,‘twisted, crooked (as in
wrong-nosed, Wycl if ) ,
‘ bad,’wh ich shows
the same metaphor as vrj ina and French
Eng. tort,from Lat. torquére,
v rj an a ,n. enclosure, esp . enclosed settle
ment, and so,either dwel ling
-
place ( 7413 )
or the dwel lers. [Vvrj , q .v. : 1 150.
v rj i n a , a . crooked, wrong, opp . of rju,‘straigh t, righ t.
’
[e j , 1 1 77b : for the
mg, see e j .]v r t (vArtate, -ti ; vavérta , v i vrté [786]avrtat vartisyati , -te ; vartsyhti,
-ts
vrtta; v i rtitum ; -v i'tya vartayati,
-te ) . 1 . turn or ro l l or move as does a
wh eel ; .in genera l , move or come from
-2. ( l ike Eng. take its
course ) go on, take place ; happen ; ski
pi yena vrt, go with a diminution-by-one,
i .s. decrease by one, 585; - 3. (move
one’s self about in a place, and so) abide,
exist, be, be present ; mfirdhni vrt, stand
at the h ead, he chief in importance, 2221 ;- 4 . be in a certain condition, case, occu
petion ; be concerned with 105 ;- 5. l ive ; l ive by i.s. l ive upon ,
104 2 ; — 6. proceed, behave ; - 7 . atten
acted in mg f rom sense 3 to that of a simple
copula , be, 51— vrtt5, see s.v.
[cf. Lat. cert-ere,‘ turn ’
; AS. weor'
8an,‘ become,
’ Eng. worth,
‘ become, be to’
(in
wo wor th the day ) , Ger . werden ,
‘ become
for transition of mg in Eng. and Gen, cf .
Eng. turn, wh ich al so means become (asin turn tra itor ) : — cf. also Eng.
-wa rd, as
in go south-wa rd
, i.e. turned to the south ,’
fly up-wa rd, i.s .‘ directed up,
’
etc . (seeafic) also Ger . Wirt-el , ‘
spindle-r ingChurch S lavonic vret-eno
, spindle
further akin is, prob., AS . wr i i
‘
fan,
‘ twist,’whence come : Eng. wr ithe ; AS.
wr i ts,
‘a twisted band,
’
Eng.wrea th ; wr ist,
ear lier hand-wr ist, s
-wr i S-st, hand-turner
— with vrttfi, cf. Lat. ver sus, turned
,
’
whence ver sa'
re, turn much
’: for mgs
3—6 of vrt, cf . Lat. verso'
r i, wh ose senses
are qui te paral lel , and the Eng. phrase“ in wh om we l ive and more and have our
being.
a n u, rol l after ; fol low ; and so, con
tinus .
5 , act. turn h ith er so at
74 1 1 (se. r i tharh vas,‘
your mid.
turn rol l back,
up aj , turn h ith er unto, 93 19
a bh i - p a r y - i , turn around unto.
v y - i , turn away , intrans. separate
from or part with 86 3, 96
5m
+ aam - i , turn back to meet ; go h ome,
used esp . of a rel igious preeeptor’s pupil
who has finished his studies.
a d , turn out (centrifugal ly ) , intrans .,
fly asunder ; caus. burst asunder or open
+ n i , - 1 . turn back ; — 2. flee ;
turn away ;— 4. turn from
, abstain ;
vri ta , see s.v.
p r a t i -n i , turn back fromn i l , rol l out, intrans ., and so (with a
metaphor like that in the Eng. e-vol ve itselfand Ger . sieh ent—wickeln ) develop, comeinto being, caus. e-volve from ,
i .s .
create from 57 1°
p a r i , turn around ; move in a circle.
+ p r a ,- 1 . turn or move forward ; — 2.
set out ; — 3 . begin, set about ; - 4. en
gage in ;-pr avrtta, see s.v.,
— caus. set
in motion.
+ v i , turn away ; part with
caus. whir l about, trans .
s am , unite, intrans., and so take shape,
form itself , come into being.
[251 ]
v i't , vbl . turning, in cpds. [e h ]
v rtt h , ppl .— I . happened (e t tad
vrttam , that took place ; — 2. existing
(vrt — as n.— 1 . th ing happened,
occurrence (vrt — 2. life, behavior
(Vrt 5.6 )v r tt i n t a , an. occurrence, adventures,
story . [anta : force of anta not clean ]v r tt i , f . prop. an existing, and so ( l ike
Eng. l iving ) means of subsistence, sup
port. [e t 3, 5 : cf. var tana.Jv ytt i - n i b a n dh a n a , n. means of sup
port.
v r tt i .uj a a a . possessing existing strength ,
i.s . m igh ty . [oju ]v rt r a,
- 1 . n. th at which wards ofl or
h ol ds in cheek, i.s. the enemy , 75l ‘; — 2.
m. coverer , encloser ; personified, Vritra,demon of drough t and darkness, principal
personification of the malign power that
covers or darkens the sky and encom
passes or withholds the heavenly
waters , selections xxxii. and lxvii . ; slain
by Indra , 7313; see 82
1 and 97 19. [V 1 vr,‘cover ,
’l 185b.]
v r t r a tar a , compa rative to vrtr a (see
the areh -withholder. [acct irregular , 471 , l 242a
v r t r h -put r a , a . having Vritra as son ;
-5, j : th e mother of V . [1302 ]v i
'th i , adv. at wil l , at pleasure ; for
pleasure, i .s. not for the sake of the gods.
[V2vr,‘choose, wil l ,
’
v r tba- p a cug h n a , a. slaying cattle for
pleasure ; as m. one who slays cattle for
pleasure, i.s . not for sacri fice. [1279 ]v rddh a, ppl . — 1 . grown , become great ;
increased (of weal th ) , — 2. as adj .
grown up, opp . of young ; old, aged ; a s
subst. old man, 2812; — 3. (grown great,
and so, l ike Lat. altus ) em inent, distin
guished. [Vvrdh ,
v rddh a tv a , n. condition of being old,
old age.
v f'ddh i , f . — 1 . growth , increase ; - 2.
interest (on money lent) , - 3. the
(second) increment of a vowel , see 235-6.
[wt-ah ,
V v rdh (vardhati, -te ; vavtrdha , va
vrdbe; avrdhat, Avardhista ; vartsyati ;
[v rsan
vrddha ; vArdhitum ; vardhhyati ,-te) .
act. trans -1 . elevate , make to grow,
make greater, strengthen ;- 2. f ig. ele
vate inwardly , excite pleasantly , ch eer ,
inspire (cf . the metaphor in slang Eng. high ,‘s ligh tly used of the effects
which the homage and sacrifices of men
are supposed to have on the gods
- mid. intrans — 3. grow, th rive,
vardhate, he thr ives, i.s. it goes
wel l with him, 653; grow strong or greater
or m igh ty , 813, 82
3; increase, 601°
— 4. f ig. be pleasantl y excited, take dc»
l igh t in ; be inspired ;- caus. -1 . make to grow make
strong ; bring up (a child ) , 46 ° increase,
trans., 6431; -2. fig. excite pleasantly ,
cheer , inspire ; distinction between the
phys ica l andfig. mgs not a lways to be made,
so 8019.
[cf . BMW -q, wh oa-m , growth , a shoot,
’
fih aa 'rdsm, grow bpads, sPopOOS, up
righ t’
; Lat. verb-er ,‘a shoot, rod
’
; verb
Ena, (sacred )+ p r a , grow on, grow up ; pravrddha ,
( l ike La t. al tus ) exal ted.
v i , grow, increase, 219
.
+ s am , grow ; caus. make to grow ; bring
up ; nour ish , feed.v tdh , vbl. being pleased,
[e tV v rs (v i-rmi. -te ; vavérsa. vm '
sé ;
i n n it ; varsisyflti.-te ; VIM ; vérsi
tum vrstvi , -vtsya ) . rain ; varas ti
[303b], bon es, wh il e it is raining. [or ig.
perhaps, more general , to pour down ,
esp . either the fructify ing water of heaven
(masc.) upon th e earth or semen
of the bul l or male animal upon the
female : with var sa,‘rain ,
’cf . l -epoau,
rain-drops with vrsan and vrsabha ,
‘ bul l ,’cf . Lat. verres , suers-se,
‘ boar ,’
so
named from h is great generative power ,
just as the sow (see air) from her fe
cundi ty .]v r sa ,
used only at end of cpds [1315a] inVeda , but later independently, instead of
rejoicing.
v f'
sa n [42Gb], adj . and subst. descr ibing
or denoting al l that was distinguished for
vrsabh a]
its strength and viril ity
opposed to a castrated person ,- 2.
— 1 . man, as 2 v éda s , n. ( l ike Lat. quaestus ) gettings ,
property , cf . vitta. [V2vid,of animals : stal l ion ; bul l ; boar ; — 3. of v ed i d h y a y a n a , n. Veda-study , scr ip
.
gods : manly , m igh ty , great ; of Indra , tare-reading. [adhyayana .]74 5 ; of the Maruts, of the Sun or v ed i , f . sacrificial bed, i.e. a spotof ground
Sun-horse, 797. [e s, q .v.
,1 160c : cf .
5pm”, stem sFapoer ,
v rea b h a, essentially the same as vrsan,
q.v. : esp. - 1 . hul l ; with sabaata-griiga ,
the thousand-horned steer , i .s. the sun or
the m oon ;— 2. bul l , as type of
greatness and m igh t ; most m igh ty one,
of Indra, 7313
. [Vvra, 1 198 ]v ysn l a, m. prop . man ikin,
i.e. l ittle man ,
and so,as term of contempt, a low person,
esp . a Cadre. [vrsa ,
V v rsa s y a (vrsasydti ). desire the male,
be lustful . [vrsa, l o59e, 1058 ]V v r si y a (vrsayti te) . act as a vrea, i.s
show one’s manly strength or courage ;
be lustful ; or simply, be eager . [vi-pa,
1059b, 1058 ]v rsti , j i rain . [e s,
V v r h or bph (n hati ; vavérha ; avrksat ;vrdhfi [224a] ; -vthya ) . pluck, tear .
v enu, m. reed, esp. bamboo-reed.
v ed a., m.- 1 . understanding, knowledge ;
— 2. esp. the sacred knowledge, handed
down in triple form of re, yajus , and
si man ,see these, and cf (tr ayi
'
) vidy i ;- la ter
, the wel l-known col lections cal led
Rigveda, Yajurveda, and Samaveda
(63 5 the holy scr iptures, h eld to be a
revelation and so ca l led gruti,
[Vl vid.]v eda, m. tuf t of strong grass (kuca or
mufija ) tied so as to form a broom , 6213
.
v ed a - t r a y a , n. the th ree Vedas .
v eda - n i n da k a , m. one who scoffs at
the Veda, infidel .
v eda - puny a ,n. Veda-merit,
acqui red by Veda-study .
v eda -b i h y a , a . being outside of th e
Veda, i .s. extra-Vedic, differ ing from or
conflicting with the Veda. [ 1265 veda
being in an abl . relation.]v ed a - v i d a .Veda-knowing.
1 v éd a s , n . knowledge ; possibly adj .,knowing, cf . na-vedas. [ V l vid,
‘ know
cf .
sancti ty
excavated two or th ree inches and covered
with straw and serv ing as a kind of al tar .
v ed i n ,a . knowing. [Vl vid,
v e d i -p a r i sa , n. loose earth of the vedi .
v odk ‘ a ,subst. adj . 1 . worsh ipper of the
gods, worsh ipping, pious, devoted ; — 2.
general ized, faithful , true, used of Indra,
75 ‘3. [V1 vidh ,‘ worship a god,
’
1 151 .
2b.]v é l i , f - 1 . end-point l im it ; — 2. esp.
l imit of time, point of time, hour .
v eca, m. — 1 . settler ; neighbor .— 2. (set
tlement, i.s.) dwe l l ing, house. [Vvig : cf .olxos,
‘ house,’
Old Lat. r eicus, Lat. vicus
,
houses, quarter of a town ,vi l lage hence
the borrowed AS. wic,
‘town ,
’as in q ort
wic, Eng. York, pr0p. Eber-stadt or
Boar-town ,
’and perhaps in Nor-wich ,
‘ Nor
v égm a n , n. (settlement, i.s.) dwel l ing,house, abode, chamber . [Vvig, 1 l 68.1a.]
v i i , postpositive pa rticle, emphasizing the
preceding word,e.g. 3 17, 96
13; ra re in
the ( in a quoted man
tra ) excessively common in the br i hmana
93 s 90 3 15 ) and EP“
etc. in h rahmana qflen marking
the preceding word as the first qf its clause
(cg/I atha , near end of mg 3 ) so 95 13,
96 12, and in the examples j ust given ; qfienused, esp. in Epos, as a mere expletive
[see so at end gt”
a pi da ,
v i i c i t r y a, n. variety , diversity . [vicitra,
v i i na v d , f . -i, a . of reed, esp. of bamboo.
[vana ,1208c.]
v i i d a r bh mf . -i'
,a . belonging to Vidar
bha ; as m. the Vidarbhan, i .s. king of
V . ; as j : the pr incess of V.,i.e. Dama
yanti , 87, etc. [vidarbha, l 2o8f .]
v i i d i k a , a . Vedic, prescribed by or con
formable to the Vedas. [veda , 1222ev i i dy a , 1 . a . having to do with science,
learned ; and so - 2. as m. (with a tran
vyém a]
v y i m h , m.
.Z/ a'
tffi
'
. o
a fit? "I f
5 5 57 4
v y i m a -m i t r a , a .
prop. a stretch -out; the dis
tance covered by the stretched-out arms,
a fathom , about s ix feet. [for vi-ys'
ima ,
V yam + vi : for mg, cf . the precise ly
paral lel Eng. f athom w. AS. f z‘Em,
‘the
extended arms’
; sm ut,‘ fathom ,
’and
bplyw, stretch French toise , Medieva l
Lat. tesa ,‘ fathom ,
’ from Lat. tensa , ppl .
of tenders ,
h av ing a fathomas its measure, see mi tr i . [m i trsy
v y ish r t i , f . - 1 . utterance ; — 2. esp .
fit s/aw f
‘d r
M)
U s )?M( 7M
't
b L“,
one of the three sacred and mystical
exclamations , bhfir , bhuvas, and avar ,
which see. [V 1 hr vy-i .]v yom a n , n . h eaven, sky .
V v r a j (vraj ati ; vavr i ja ; hvr i j it ; vraj is
yati vr aj ita ; vr hj itum vr aj itvz‘
t
-i a ) . march , proceed, go.
5 , come h ither , go unto.
p r a ty-a, march or go back.
p a r i , march round about ; wander
around.
+ p r a , march forth ; go unto ; wander ;esp . leave one
’s house to wander about as
an ascetic, 652.
v r a ta,n.— 1 . wil l ; devi niim ati vratam ,
beyond the wi l l of th e gods , 882—
c/i
(n ip A lb: c lear ; decree , command or
Gebot, statute ; a nd so — 2. (as Eng.
V ca ns (gam e ,-te ; M use.
[254]
present of VVprach and ml ech , which see
sec 221 9 and cf . 228 ]v i , cut asunder or to pieces.
w e“scann t ; cansisyati ; easta ; gastv i ,
or ig. say in a loud and solemn
way , and so : 1 . recite, esp . a sacred hymn
or text to a god by way of praise ; and
so — 2. general ized, praise ; gasta, see s.r .;
— 3. rarely, make a so lemn wish , whether
blessing or curse (see gansa ) , l ike impre
ci ri ; — 4 . announce ; communicate, 5213
.
[cf. Lat. ca rmen , seas-men, an utterance
in solemn, measured, or melodious way ,
i.s . song, oracle, magic charm C’
amé’
na,
ucasmenj a , name of the goddess of song ;
cens-ére, declare, pass judgment on AS.
heri an,
+ 5 ,— I . wish , esp. in the noun or
‘ wish ,’
q.v. ; and so — 2. h ope in , put
one’
s trust in — 3. pronounce a
b lessing upon, wish good to 101 4.
[mg 1 may be a mere special ization of
the mg‘speak so lemnly unto (cf . Vei n
i ) , and mg 2 a furth er development of
mg 1 ; for mg 3, cf. the simple verb,
mg
+ p r a , tel l forth ; praise,
simple verb.]command is applied to the f orces under gi ns a , m. - 1 . solemn utterance ; — 2. im
one’s command ) th at over wh ich one
exercises command, domain , Gebiet
further , directly f rom the root aga in— 3.
choice, determ ination ; firm resolution ,
14 0 ; — 4 . esp . resolve ( to keep a rel igious
or ascetic observance ) ; vow or holy work
(e.g. of ch astity , fasting, 59 5,
6 1‘33
,04 9, 65
3; — 5. religious duty , duty
in general . [J2vr,‘ wil l
,choose
’: for
mg 2, observe that Ger . Gebiet former lymeant
‘command
’
and now means ‘ do
v r s ce (vrecéti ; vrkna [957c] ; vrstvi ;-vtqcya ) . hew off ; fel l (a tree ) ; cut to
pieces. [or ig. form is vrh , as in vi'k-a ,
vrk-
na, vrk-sa, which see : vrgc is prop.
only a quasi-root of the present stem
vrgca ,for .vrk-ska , formed l ike the
precatio, blessing or curse ; as adj . 3.
cursing. [Vcan ]V ga k (A. caknbti ; caeika, eekds [794e] ;ésa-h t ; m m -to ; el i te
sakyfite.—B. desid. qiksate [1030, 108g l end] ;
caus . of desid. giksayati ; pa ss . of desid.
and qf caus. qf desid. giksyate , giksiti ).—A.. simp le verb: — 1 . be strong ; be
able, in pass. impersona lly, it is
possible ; with infin. be able , by the
instrumental ity of some person or thing
to become the object of an
action ; mayi nitixh gr i hayitum gak
yante, they are able to be caused by me
to get hold of nit-i, — 2. ra rely (be
strong for a person, i.s .) be serviceable or
helpful , h elp, w. dat.,
—p088 .
[255]
—B. desiderative — 1 . desid. to A. l , 9a th a ,~a . false.
(str ive to be able, i .s .) practice ; learn ; V 9s t (ei tAyati ; gi tith ) . cut in pieces ;caus . cause a person (acc.) to learn a make to fal l ofi.
th ing 52° pass. of caus . : pa th n. hundred ; also as erpression
ciksita, caused to learn or taugh t a thing of a large number ; f or construction,see
without noun, taugh t, 525; 486b. [ci . G-xar dr ,
‘oue hundred
’Lat.
ciksyami na, instructed, 5117; — 2. des id. centum, AS . hund, neut.,
‘ hundred’
; Eng.
to A. 2, be wil l ing to help ; aid ; (of hand-red ]gods ) bestow blessing upon 8013 ; ga t i tm a n
, a . having a hundred lives.
grant, give. [goth -rm : acct, 1300a.][cf . Lat. cac-ula ,
‘servant
’
( like help as gat t a , m. — 1 . (victor , i .s .) victorious
sometimes used in America for ‘ser opponent ; — 2. foe, enemy , in general .
w. angina, .gak-ma ,
‘ hel pful , [if mg 1 is the or ig. mg, we may take
friendly ,
’cf . Lat. co
'
mis,scoc-mi-s ,
‘ friend the word fr . Vgod and as standing for
ly’: prob. akin is Ger . be-hag
-en, AS. ou teat-tru, 1 185e, 232
hag-ion
,
‘suit, please
’
(cf . cak, A. if mg 2 is the orig. mg, we may analyse
up a , (br ing unto one’
s self by giving, thus, cat-m and compare Church
i.s .) attr act, [for mg, see th e nu Slavonic kot-ora , Ir ish cath,
‘ battle’
; AS.
compounded verb, B. hec tic in cpds, as hea'
So-weorc,
‘ battle
gak a l a ,— 1 . m. n. ch ip ; piece ; work
,
’Old High Ger. had-u in names,
half (of an egg-shel l ) . as Hadu-brant
,
‘Battle-flame,’ Hadu-wich ,
ga kun a, m. bird.‘ Battle-strife,
’Ger . Hedwig ; Ger . Hader ,
gak t i , j : abil ity , power .‘str ife ’
; cf . also the Kel tic proper name
ga k y a ,a .
- 1 . possible, practicable, 331° Ca tu-r ig
-es ( r ig under r i jan ),‘ The Battle
common with the infinitive : qakya being
used — 2. impersonally ; or — 3. in agree ga t r u-n a n da n a ,
a . causing joy to one’
s
ment with the subj ect, in which case the in] : enem ies.
[988] is to be translated a s a pass ive, ca t r u s amk a ta , m. danger from the foe.
Weak , 1218 ] V qa d (ci cada , ci cade distinguish
ga k r a,— 1 . a . powerful , migh ty , standing one
’s sel f ; get the upper hand, prevai l ;
epithet of Indra ;— 2. as m. The Migh ty Vedic only. [cf . xsxaop l ros, Doric res-s al
One, i .e. Indra (j ust as we use The Al p in s,
mighty as a name f or [Veal qa n a k ai s , adv. quietly ; gently ; slowly .
1 188a .] [instr. ( 1 1 120) of an unused stem ega
Vqa fi k (gé i kate ; agafikista ; ganh ta ; naka , diminutive to oqana , see qani is.]
cai kitum ;-qai kya ) . — 1 . be anxious ga n ai s , adv. quietly ; gently ; slowly
or suspicious ; — 2. hesitate . gradual ly . [instr . ( 1 1 120) of an unused
v i , hesitate. stem ceann, wh ich is prob. connected w.
ga fik i , j : hesitation. [Vcafih V2gam ,
‘ be
gh o i , f :— 1 . m igh t or help (esp. of the gamt i t i , j 2 benefit. 1238 ]
helping deeds of Indra ) ; — 2. Qach i or V ga p (qtpati, -to ; gagi pa , gepe; capleMigh t, as wife of Indra (der ived f rom the
misunderstood p oi -path 27. [V 900, curse, usua lly act.,— 2. mid. (curse
col lateral form of calm] one’s self , i.s .) assert with an oath , swear ,
gac i-pat i , m. — 1 . Vedic, lord of might vow,
w. dot. qr“
person, 977.
or of hel p, epith et of Indra, — 2. ga p h th a , m. curse ; oath . [Vcap, 1 1635 ]later (pi ti , q.v.
,being misunderstood as ga b h l a ,
a . brinded.
husband of Migh t or Cach i , gab da , m.— 1 . sound ; cry ; noise ; cab
name of Indra, 1514
, [acct, l 267s dam kr, make a noise, raise one’s voice ;
and d, Whitney 945 ] —2. word, 61 1 .
qabdaqastra] [256]
ca bd a-
ci s t r e , n. word-theory , word [caranh presupposes a root og or 43,compendium, i .s. grammar .
‘cover, protect
’
; w. such a root agree
V 1 9am (eamyati ; esgan e ; 49m m ; wel l in form and mg as derivs, cflr ira,
cami th ) . get weary by working, work. ear-man , and ci l i , see these
[cf . sdp -se ,
‘
get weary by working. fur ther agree as cognates KM ,
‘ hut,
V 29am (cimyati cagi n a, genus ; barn’
; AS. hea l , Eng. hall ; k i lt-of,‘ husk,
6eama ; ci nth [955a] ; camhyati ) . be pod’
; Ger. H i l ls,‘covering
’
; Eng. hull,
quiet or stil l or content ; stop ; for these ‘covering
’
of grain ; AS. hel -m,
‘
protec
senses, ej i V ram ; gi nta, see s.v. ; caus . tor’
(used of God and Ch r ist) , head
quiet, stil l ; euphemistica lly, kil l . protector , helmet,’
Ger . Helm, Eng helm
upa ,be quiet ; stop. Lat. ao-cul-ere,
‘cover
’
; color ,‘color
’
(see
+ p r a , come to rest ; stop ; , go out ; varna ) ; ce'
l-ére, Ger . hehl-en Chaucer’
s
praei nta , extinguished. hel-en, later hele,
‘concea l fur ther,
V 3 9am (gamnité) . harm . xah t
'm -r -w,
‘cover ,
’
and th e ident. xpirr -r -os,
V 4 9am (ei nta ; -gamya ; gamhyati, 95mi
yati ) . used only with ui . observe ; per ga r ani g a ta , a . come for refuge, seekingceive ; bear. 5 -6 ) o6 b ~
7 z for “
, protection with any one. [i gatan
chm [384 n. welfare ; happiness ; bless qa r h d , f . autumn ; pl . poetic f or yearsi118
cam a ,a word of doubtful mg at gar a v a , m. n. flat earthen dish .
perhaps tame (of . V29am, caus.) or indus gar i t a , n. the body , as distinguished fromtr ious (q/ZV i cam ) . the vita l breath or from the immor tal
ca m a y i tr , m. slayer . [V2gam, caus.] soul (so and from the soft
cam i , f . a fabaceous plant, either l’rosbpis viscera and inward fluid secretions, of
spicigera or M imées Sums ; a tree from which things the body , or the firm red
which th e sticks of attr ition (arani ) were flesh with the bones, forms as it were
taken. the hol low cover tegument, or
gam i m h y a , j i -i , a . of or made of Qami Hii l le ; used al so in pl ., body in
wood. [see maya.] genera l ; mrtam gar ir am , corpse, 6317;
gam i-
ci k h i , j : Cam i-branch. so [prop.‘ the corporeal tegumen t
’ Cfgam i
- sum a n a s , j ?Cam i-flower . of the soul , Vacr,‘cover
’see
cam i sum a n o -m i l a, j : gar land of under garana : for mg, cf . the cognate
Cami -flowers. Ger . Hel ls (under gar ana ) in sterbl iche
ghmy i , j l staff , envelope, i.s . body’
: cf .
ga y s , a . lying, sleeping, at end qf cpds.
[Vgi , 1 148. l a.]en y a n a , n. a lying, sleeping. [Vgi by the body.
l 150. 1a.] ga r i r i n ta k a r a , m. destroyer of the
ca y a n i y a ,— 1 . a . serving for lying ; bodies. [anta-kara.]
2. n. bed, couch . [gayana, 1215 ] gar u, f . missi le, either spear or arrow. [cf.
9a y y i , j 2— 1 . bed ; — 2. a lying, sleep garm ]ing. [Vgi 1213d, cf . 963
3 5 ] ca r k a t a ,m. brown sugar . [fr . the Pra
ga r a, m.-l . reed, esp. of the Saccharum krit form sakkara comes on the one
Sara, used for arrows ; - 2. arrow. [oh hand, through Arabic sokkar and Medic.
serve that Lat. arundo means ‘reed and val Lat. zuca ra , the Eng. suga r , and on
the other ocixxapov, Lat. saccha rum, al l
ga r a na,— 1 . a . protecting, affording borrowed words : cf. khanda ]
refuge, 87 7 ; a s n.— 2. shed, that gives V ca r d h (gardhati ) . be strong or defiant.
cover from the rain ; KM hut ; — 3. gar dh a ,m. troop, host. [cf . Ger . Herds,
protection refuge, 5017.
qi sana]
[perhaps reduplicated form of cans, 675 :
for the weak form qis, cf . 638 ]+ 5 , mid. wish or pray for , q]: i ci: and
Vgafm i . make suppl ication, 73n
.
pr a , instruct ; direct ; command, q]?
simple verb, and pragis.
qi s a n a ,n.— 1 . government, way of rul
ing ; — 2. command. [V955 ]
gi s i tr , m. teacher. [V
qi str h , n.— 1 . instruction ; - 2. rule ;
theory compendium (of an art or
science ) ; a scientific or canonica l work ;
science, 1713
. [V955 ]V gi k a, see 1030and Vgak.
qi k h a r a ,-I . a . peaked ; — 2.m. n. peak.
[gikh i 1228 ]
gi k h i , f .— 1 . tuft or braid of hair ;
—2. ( l ike Eng. crest) top in genera l ,
peak.
qi th i r a, a . loose ; flaccid ; unsteady , 93 2
opp. qf drdha , flrm, hard.
’
[perhapsfr . Vqrath , 1 1880 : for loss of r , cf .
gi b i , m. Cibi , name of a king.gi r a s , n. head. [ci . xdpa,
‘ head’
; Lat.
cerebrum,sceres-ru-m,
‘ brain’w. the col
lateral form qirshn, q .v., cf . Ger . H im
,
Old High Ger . hirni, nh irsni, brain akin
is also xpavlov,
qi r i’
sa , m. the tree Acacia Siri ssa ; a s n.
the blossom .
qi r o-muk h a , n. head and face. [ 1253b.]
qi l i , j l stone ; crag.
qi l i-bh i v a , m. condition of being stone ;
-am i p, turn into stone.
qi l i , f . the beam under a door.
qi l i-muk h a , m. Block-snout, name of a
hare.
qi l o cca y a , m. crag-pile, i.s . craggy h i l l .
gi v a,— 1 . a . kind
, 90°; friendly ; gracious ;
agreeable, lovely ; opp. qf ghora ; — 2. m.
The E 'iendly One, name euphem istical lyappl ied to the horrible god Rudra, who
under th is name (i a ) becomes the th ird
person of th e HinduTrinity . [for mg 2,cf . Eimevlbss,
‘Th e Gracious Ones, i.s . th e
Fur ies,’and nandi .]
gi ga , m. young ; chil d. [see V911 , and
1 147b and
[258]
V l ei s (tint-t i ; vivid ; dries t : 901mm.
4 0 ; gista; gistvi ; W u). leave, leave
remaining.
ud , leave remaining.
v i , ( leave apart or by itself, i.e.) separate, distinguish ; vigiata, ( separated, andso
,l ike Eng. distinguished) eminent, ex
cel lent.
V 2gi s , subsidia ry f orm to Vgi s, q.v.
gi ey a , grdv. to be taught ; as m. pupil .
[V 95s , weak form gig ]V l si (séte [see 628—915sisyé ; tw ists :
yitan ; qayitvi ; -g6yya ) . — 1 . l ie sti l l ;
l ie —2. sleep. [w. gé-te, cf. xs
'
i-flu,‘ l ies cf. al so sol-m ,
a dh i , lie in or on ; dwel l in.
a nu, l ie down after another.i , l ie in.
up a , l ie by .
s am , be undecided or in doubt. [lit.‘ l ie together
’: metaphor unclean ]
V 2ci , simpler f orm of Vgyi , q.v.
gi , vbl. lying. [Vgi ]
qi ta, a . cold ; as n. cold. [ppl . of n ior 295]
gi ta k a , f . gitiki , a . cool . [qi'
ta z cf.
l 222d.]
gi ta l a , a . cool . [qitm
qi t i r ta , a . distressed with the cold.
[m ]
gi t i k i v a n t , a . cool .
of gitaka : 1233, cf . b.]
qipal a , m. n. Blyxa octandra, a common
water-plant.
gi r gan ,n. head. [qirs-dn is to giras
as ire-yd is to iras-yi , see
these.]
qi l a , n. — 1 . natura l or acquired way of
being ; character , 23m; habit or habits,
in compos ition [1302] with that to
which one is incl ined or accustomed, 21
601 8 ; — 2. (character, i.s., as in Eng.)
good character , 987.
ci v a n , a . lying. 1 169. 1a.]
quk a ,m. parrot. [prop.
‘the bright one,
’
on account of its gaudy colors, u0
cf . 216. 1 , 1
[sshguk a v a t , adv. like a parrot.
[as if from fem .
[259]
ga k r a,a. clan , bright,
1 188 1 ,
quk l a,— 1 . a . clear ; brigh t ; white ; with
paksa , the brigh t lunar half-month , fromnew to ful l moon ; — 2. as m. (se. paksa ) ,the br igh t lunar for tnigh t, 65 5. [see1 189 and
quk l a- p a k sa , m. fortnigh t of the wax
ing moon.
quk l a p a k si d i , a . having the brigh t
lunar fortnigh t first, beginning with the
br igh t lunar fortnigh t. [i dh
quk l i m b a r a ,a . having a wh ite garment.
[ambar a .]V quc (qocati , -te ; quqbca ; aqoci
'
t ; gocis
yati ; qbcitum ; gocitv i ) . I . flame ,
l igh t, beam ; glow,burn ; — 2. f ig. suffer
burn ing pain ; gr ieve ; gr ieve at
— intens. flame brigh tly . [for mg 2,cf . Vtap, dagdh a and Vdah .]a p a , intens. [1002a], dr ive away by
flam ing brigh tly , 723.
a bh i , burn ,trans.
5 , bring h ither by flaming, 72°
quc i , a . — 1 . flaming, beam ing ; j ig. beam
ing (of a smi le ) ; l igh t, br igh t ; — 2. f ig.
clear , pure ; h oly (of a god) , 805 ; honor
able ( in business ) , pure ( in a r i tual
sense ) , 62 10. [V Que, 1 155. 2a, 216.
guc i- sm i t a , a . h aving a beaming smile,
brigh t-sm iling.
quddh a,a . pure . [ppl . ofudh ,
qudd h a-m a t i , a . pure-m inded.
ga dh or gandh (qundhati, -te ; gtidhyati ;
quddh é ) .— 1 . gundhati, -te : act. pur ify ;
mid. become pure ; — 2. qtidhyati, become
pure. [or ig., perhaps, to clear ,
’and
akin w. Vgcand, q .v .]v i , viqudhyati, become entirely pure ;
viquddha, perfectly clear .
qun a, a . grown , prosperous, fortunate ; asn. [cf . 1 176s ], growth , prosperity ; luck .
[perhaps fr . Vgii , 1 177a.]V gundh ,
see gadh .
qun d h y d , f . -yfi a . pure ; un
blemished ; fair . [Vqundh ,1 1655 ]
V I qubh or qambh (qfimbhate ) .
along l igh tly ; move onward,
haps akin w. r eaper ,‘ l igh t,
V 2qubh or qambh (gbbhate ; qdmbhate ;
[Vsue.
glide
[per
qumbhati ; gugubhé ; gobh isyhti ) act.
adorn ; mid. adorn one’s self, 73 19 ; look
beautiful , appear to advantage, sh ine
I qfibh , j : a gliding onward, esp. th rough
the sky ; onward progress ; so, perhaps,
course, 73 4 ; dat., infinitival ly [see],so as to gl ide onward, 79
1 1. [V 1 qubh .]
2 qubb , f . beauty ; so, perhaps,
[V2qubh .] A
qubh a , a . — 1 . fair, beautiful , agreeable to the eyes, 45 19, 62
13; — 2.
agreeable ( to other senses th an the eyes )
gubbi n gandh i n , perfumes ; — 3. agree
able ia general , 2013; — 4 . of good qual ity ,
- 5. fortunate, auspicious, 12 13.
[V2qubh,
gub h i n a n a ,a . fair-faced. [ananaJ
qubh i gubh a , a . agreeable and disagree
able,agreeable or disagreeable ; good and
had, good or bad, in eth ica l sense,
[aqubha ,
qubh i qub h a-p h a l a , a . h aving agree
able or disagreeable frui t, resul ting in
wea l or woe.
gubh r a, a . beautiful ; clear (of sounds ) .
[V2 qubh , adorn ,
’1 188a.]
V qua (q yati ; Quays ) . be dry , dry up.
[for .sus ( see gags ) , as shown by Avestan
t sh ,‘ dry
’: cf . atlas,
‘ dry’
; Syracusan
oau-xds, dry’
; AS. sedr ian,‘ dry up,
’
denom . of seiir , Eng. scan ]
guek a ,a . dry . see
qusm a , m.— 1 . wh istl ing, 73
5,78 7 ; — 2.
exha lation ,i .s. (fragrant ) odor (of the
Soma ) , - 3 . (exha lation , breath ,
and so,l ike Eng. spir it) courage , impetu
osity , 824. [V gvas, 252, 1 168 ]
V 95 or gva or qvi (qvayati ; qfici va
giinh [957a] ; gvhyitum ) . swel l ;
be greater or superior or victorious.
[orig. sense of root,‘swell ,
’but with
two diverse ram ifications
— 1 . negatively ,‘ be swol len ,
i.s . hol
low, empty’
; cf. gr‘
ma ,
‘vacuum
’
; uni-up,‘ hole
’
; Lat. cavus,‘ hol low
’
; caelum,
scav-i-lu-m,heaven
’s holl ow vaul t
’
; sow s,
‘ hol low’
;
— 2. positively ,‘ be swol len , i .s . ful l ,
strong’
; with special reference : (a ) to
1 7‘
[260]
the womb and its fruit ; cf. qi-qu and
gi va,‘
young ; s he ,
‘ bc pregnant’
; Lat.
ia-cions ,‘
;pregnant’
(b) to strength and
growth in genera l ; cf. qiir a ,‘ man of
migh t’
; gavas, gav istha , quna ; xiipos,‘ m igh t
’xfipa,
‘swel l ,
qfid r a, m. a man of the fourth caste, a
Gudra.
qun a ,n. emptiness. [V911 1 177a.]
gur a ,a . m 1gh ty , bold a s m. man of m igh t,
hero. [V911 1 1880 : qfira is paral lel w.
sxv-po-s ,
‘ migh ty ,’
whence r b kup-as,‘ migh t
’
(cf . olax-
pd-s w. vb olax
q ii r p a ,n. a plaited basket for winnowing
V 1 9; (qrni ti ; gaqr é ; hqar it ; gar isyAti ,40 ; git
-uh [957b] ; -
girya ; qi ryate ) .
crush ; break ; tear. [ci . Eng. har-m,
whi ch answers to a Skt. «gar-man ]
+ v i , pass. be broken to pieces ; per ish ,
+ s am , break (a bow) ; like zusammen
brechen .
V 2g ,see gr i ,
‘ boil.’
qtii g a ,n. h orn.
qr fig i n , a . horned ; as m. horned beast.
qr ta, see Vgra.
qév a , a . kind ; dear . [cf. giva.]
gesa ,— 1 . m. n. rest, remainder ,
goes , l ike Ger . im U ebrigen , for the rest,
— 2. a . remaining, [V1 gin,‘ leave!]
qésa s , n. ofl'
spr ing. those whom one
leaves beh ind him , one’
s relicts,’
q is,
qbk a , m. pain, grief. [Vqua, 216.
gok a-j a ,
a . grief-born ; cokajam v i r i ,
grief-born water , i.s. tears ,
qok i r ta , a . sorrow-stricken. [i rtah ]
qo c i s-k ega ,
a . h av ing flame-locks, with
locks of flame. [qocis , 187 : 1297, cf .
1280b.]
qbo i sth a , a . most or br igh t flaming.
[Vgas , 468 ]goa l s ,
n. flame ; beam ; heat. [Vgu0,1 158 ]
qéna ,— 1 . a . red, deep-red ; — 2. m. Sone
or Red River , afiluent of the Ganges.
[prop. flame-colored cf.‘ burned,
’nail-na,
Luau-ca ,
goni ta , n. blood ; also pl. [961m l 176d.]
qo bh a n h ,a . beautiful . [V2qubh ,
‘adorn,
’
1 150.2a.]qbbh i sth a , a. most swiftly moving on
ward or most beautiful , 78 5, according as
the word is ref er red to V l qubh or to
V2guhh — see these. [468 ]V goa n d ( intens. ppl . caniccadatshine, glance. [for oakandh : cf. carats,
gold-
yel low’
a apds, Dor ic nod-apds,‘elear , clean, pure
’
; eb b-apes,‘coal
Lat. sand-Ere,
gen a d r a, a . shining. [Vgcand, 1 188s : cf .viqva
-qcandra, and candr5 ]
c ut (qcbtati ; cuwéta ; hcuqcutat ;
gout , vbl . dr ipping. [VM t-J
qm a qi n a,n. the place for burning the
corpses and for burying the bones,
cemetery .
t qru, n. beard.
vsy i e mi rati. 4 . some ; as .
gina, gym ; qi'
yhte ) . freeze ; coagulate.
qy ena, m. eagle ; falcon ; hawk. [cf .l-xr
‘
ivo-s,
V gr a th (qr athni'
té ; qaqrathé ; Aqicrathat ;
qrth ith ) . become loose.
gr ad , i .ndecl meaning perhaps or ig. heart
used w. dh i (‘
grant, give,’see V1 dh i 4 )
and dot. qf'
per son, thus, gr i d al mi i
dhatta, (your ) heart to h im give ye, i .s .
trust ye him , have faith 1n him , RV. 1i.
12.5 ; ppl. grad-dadhat, trusting, trustful ,
qf. 1079 9.
[cf. xapbla , reap, s impb, Lat. cor , gen.
cord-is, Lithuanian szirdl s, Ger . Hers , Eng.
hea rt : further , w. grad-dhi , cf . Lat.
cre'
de're, sored-dem ,
‘ trust’: the regular
Skt. word for heart’is bid, and th 1s can
not be connected w. the above words,
since they require in th e Skt. an initial 9,
oqrd or gr ad ]
qr a ddh i , j : trust, faith ; desire.
grad :[see
qr a ddh i v a, a . [qr-addh i ,
1228a.]V gr am (gr imyati caqr ima ; i qra
credible.
mi'
t ; gr i nta be weary ;
take pains ; esp. castigate one’
s self,96 1°
[262]
+ v i , pass. be heard of far and wide, be
famous ; vigruta, known as, named,
s am ,— I . hear ; - 2. l ike Eng. hear ,
accede to the request of, make a promise
to [cf. eru-b-prati J
gr uta, ppl . heard ; heard of ; as n. that
wh ich is heard from the teacher, that
wh ich is learned ; learning. [Vcr ib ]
qr ut a v a n t , a. possessing learning,
learn-cd. [grates ]
gr at i , j :- 1 . a hearing ; - 2. ear ; - 3.
the th ing heard ; sound ; — 4. report,
hearsay ;— 5. utterance ; esp. a sacred
utterance handed down by tradition , a
rel igious prescription, a sacred text, the
Veda , 581° N. — 6. learning ; prob. in
correct f or qruta . [Vcm , 1 157. l a.]
gr a t im a n t , a . possessing learning ; prob.
incorrect f or grutavant, q.v. [crutt ]
qr d ty a ,a . worthy to be heard (of a
hymn ) , goodly. [Vera, 1213c.]
gr ey a s a , f or grey“ (greyans ) in cpds,
1315c.
gr éy i ns , a. fairer ; more beautiful orexcel lent ; better ; as n. ( the better , i .e.)welfare , prosperity , 35
1. [from an na
used root gr i corresponding to the noun
cr i, 4704 : cf . xpelaw , superior,
gr é sth a ,a. fairest ; most excell ent ;
best : w. gen.,
w. loc., at end
of cpd, best as distinguished fromequiv. to better than , [see
s wi m -J
gr ai sth y a , n. supremacy, precedence.
wreaths , 121 19 end.]
gr ot r a , 11 . car ; hearing. “911 1 , 1 185a .]
cr ot r i y a ,a. studied, learned ( in sacred
tradition ) ; as m. a Brahman versed in
sacred lore. [grotra, 1214c : for mg, cf .
Vern, mg 1 , and gruta, s.v.]
cl ak sna,a. sl ippery ; smooth .
1 195 ]V gl i gh (gl i ghats ; cacl i gbé ; gli ghita) .
1 . have confidence in ; —2. talk con
fidently
praise.
brag, praise one’s self ; 3.
ql i g h y a , grdo. to be praised, praise
worthy ; honorable. [V gl i gh ]gl ok a ,
m. — 1 . (th ing heard, i .s .) sound ;- 2. fame, f or mg, cf .Vgru; - 3. strophe ;
[cf.
later , esp . the anustubh-strophe, the epic
cloka, in wh ich , for example, the story
of Nala is composed. [Vem , 1 186
V qv anc (M eats ) . open itself ; receivein open arms (as a maid her lover ).ud , Open itself cut, open, 87 4.
gvan m. dog. [cf. minor , Lat. can-i-s ,AS. [tun-d
,Eng. hound,
gvagur a , m. father-ia-law. [for m s
cura : cf . éxvpds, Lat. soeer , socerus, Church
Slavonic swell—rs, AS. swear , csweohor , Ger .
Schwa‘
lcer ,‘ father-ia-law
’: for g in place
of s, cf . gags. and V9 19.)qv agr t
‘
i [355c], j : mother-ia-law. [eva
gura, 8550 : cf. (mod, Lat. fem. seem s,
AS. sweger , Ger. Schwieger ,‘ mother-ia
V cv a s (gvi s iti qvasati ; gagvi sa
qvasisyati ; cvasita, cvasta; gvasitnm
-gvasya ; gvasayati ) . — 1 . blow, blus
ter, wh istle, snort ; - 2. breathe ; - 3 .
sigh . [cf.AS. kweb'
e, preterit to Jud son,
Eng. wheeze ]-l i , get one
’s breath , become quiet ;
caus . quiet, comfort.n i s , breathe out, sigh .
pr a , blow forth .
+ abh i - p r a , blow forth upon, acc.,
94 7.
v i , have confidence, be unsuspecting ;
caus. inspire confidence.
cv as , adv. tom orrow, on the next day ;
cvah cvas from day to day.
qv a sath a , m. a snorting. [n1 163b.]
gvas ta n a , a . of the morrow ; as n. the
morrow, 92 [y as, l 245e.jgv i p a da , m. a beast of prey , [tobe pronounced cvapada (cf. pi vahn,
1 181s ) : prop., perhaps,
‘ having the feetof a dog,
’
gvan pi da ]
evav i dh [nom. w it], m. porcupine. [granvidh, dog
sa tk a ,- l . a . consisting of six ; - 2. as n.
a whole consisting of six, a hexade. [yas,l 222a, 22Gb.)
sat- t r i nqa t f . six and thirty .
[m ]
[263]
sh t-p a d a , j 2 -i, a. having ( taken ) six
steps. [eas t 1300a.]can-m i ca , a. semester , six months.
[sasz pr0p.‘that which has six months,
’
see
gas num. six. [see 182b 3, 14dil
cf . 35, Lat. sex, Eng. sin ]sa sti , j 2 sixty. [yas,Qa ath a, a . sixth . [sag cf . ‘n-r os,
Lat. sex-tits , AS. six-ta , Eng. six-th.]
I
1 s h , pron. see to.and 495.
2 ea , inseparable prefix denoting simil ar ity ,
commun ity , or connection — numerous ex
amples on the pages f ollowing ; esp. common
w. an adj . value in possess ive cpds [see1304c], having an accompanying
with [ l l 21b : prob. ident. ul timatelyw. 3 sa.]
8 us., one, in as -lq't, as -hasra . [ for em
(vocal ic m ) , root seem : cf . sis, s e ep -s,
pic, s op-1a, one i -nar dr ,‘one-hundred
’
;
herni as,‘one-fold ’
; Lat. sem-el ,‘once
’
;
sun-plat ,‘one-fold ’
; Lamas,‘ having one
( i.e. one and the same ) bed, spouse’
;
6-1rar pos,‘ having one ( i.s. one and the
same ) father’
; Lorna‘s, see under gar
bha.]s hmy a t en d r i y a , a . having restramed
senses, self-control led, [sanityata
(Vyam , 1085a ) + indr iya, 1208 ]s a rh y am a , m. restraint, control ,
s amv a t s a r a, m. year . [sam + vatsara,
q.v.]s amga y a , m. - 1 . doubt ; as.saxhqayas,
(there is ) no doubt ; - 2. danger ,
[V gi sam.]s ams h d , j : like Lat. consessus, a sitting
together and those who sit together , i .s .
assembly . [V sad sam.]s a rh s a r g a , m. m ixture , union ; contact.
[V arj sam, 216. l .]s ams i r a ,
m. the wandering of the soul
from one existence to another , metem
psychosis ; transmigration, the cycle
or round of existence, 181. [Var sam .]
s a rh sk i r a , m.- 1 . a working over, a
preparing or pur ification ; esp. a technical
[sakh igana
proceeding with a th ing ; an adorning or
adornment, — 2. a domestic rel igious
r ite to be performed upon or observed by
every member of the th ree upper castes,
prop . h is preparation or pur ification ; sac
rament, consecration,
592 11 . — 3 . im
pression ; an impress ion produced on the
m ind or a disposition formed in the mind
by someth ing past (e.g. deeds of a formerexistence, it past conversation , but
wh ich has ceased to work on th e mind,
404. [V 1 hr, do,’
sam , 1087d.]s am s k r ta , ppl . 1 . prepared ; adorned,
fine, cultivated ; as n . the cul tivated lan
guage, as opposed to the low vernaculars,Sanskrit, [V 1 hr, do ,
’
sam , 1087d.]samh i ta , ppl . put together ; 4 1 , f . a
puttmg together ; a text whose sounds
and words are put together according to
grammatical rules. [V 1 dh i sam , 954c.]s a -k a och a p a , a . having tortoises along
with them, i.s . along with tortoises.
[1304c.]s a k a l a , a . having its parts together , i .s.
al l , entire ; as n. every th ing, one’
s entire
property, [as ka li , 13040, 334 1 ]s ak i qa , m. presence ; tasya saki gam
gam, go to the presence of h im , i .e. go to
him ; « aki ce, at end of cpd, in the pres
ence of before [sa + ki ga
or ig., perhaps, having visibil ity , present,
’
and then
s a k i t , adv. for one time, a single time,
once. [3 8a 2krt.]s a -k op a ,
a . angry ; -am , angr i ly . [2sa,1304c.]
s h k tu, m. coarsely ground parched grains,
gr its , esp. bar ley gr its .
s a k h a , f or sakh i a t end of cpds
having as attendant, accompanied by
[ l 315b.]sak h i [343a], m. attendant, companion,
82 1 ; comrade ; friend, ctc. ; in con
nection with a j i nn , [V sacfor mg, cf . {r im s and soc-ins
, under
s ak h i j : female companion, friend
(of a woman ) . [sakh i z cf . 362b
s ak h i - g a na , m. (friend-crowd,fr iends.
i.e.)
sakh iiana]
s a k h i - j a n a , in. (friend-persons, collec
tively, i .s.) friends.s a k h y a, a . friendsh ip. [sam ,
sa-
g a na ,a . with ( their ) troops (of at
tendants ) . [2sa .]s h g a r a , m.
— 1 . the atmosph ere, Luftmeer ; — 2. Sagara, name of a myth ical
prince.
s amk a ta ,— 1 . a . narrow,
strait ; — 2. m.
Slender , name of a gander,- 3 . n.
narrow passage, a strait ; — 4. fig., l ike
Eng. strai t, a difi cul ty , 52 danger,
[cf. 1245g .]s amk a l p h , m. a decision of the m ind ;
the wil l or wish or purpose proceeding
from such decision, a defin ite intention.
[Vkip sam ,236 ]
s a rh k e ta , m. agreement ; esp . a meeting
agreed upon with a lover, a rendezvous.
[prop.‘
co-intention,
’mm keta.]
s amk r an t i , f . an entering, esp . entering
of th e sun upon a new zodiacal sign .
[Vkram sam ,cf. w. 955a.]
s a xh k h ya, j : the tale or number . [t yi
sam .]s a ii g a , m.
— 1 . a sticking to or hanging
upon ; — 2. j ig. an attachment (of th e
mind) to anything, desire for a thing ;
saiige, in case of desire, 642; pl . lusts .
[Vsafij ,aamg am a, m. a coming together , union .
[Vgum sam .]s amgam a n a , f . a . subst. causing to
assemble, gatherer . [caus. of Vgainsam .]
s amg a r a, m. agreement, promise. [Vl grsam ,
‘chime in
s amg h a ,m. (a combination, i .s .) com
pany , crowd. [Vhan sam, 333, cf .
and
V s a c (sisakti ; sacate ; sac s , sagcir é
— 1 . be with , be united with ;
be together , have intercourse together ,
79 14 — 2. accompany a person (acc.) to
a th ing i.e. help him to it,—3. be attach ed to ; fig. fol low (a com
mandment) , fol low up, i.s. attend to,82 1 7.
[orig.‘accompany ,
’i.e. 1 . go at the
side of, with help or favor,’and 2. ‘
go
[264]
after, seek, fol low’: cf . Gar-open,
‘aecom
pany,’é-fl r
‘ fol lowed ’
; Lat. sequ—ar ,‘ fol low ’
sec-undas ,‘ fol lowing, second
’
also is '- (m s,‘attendant,
’Lat. soc-ius ,
‘comrade
’: further , AS. sedu
, sseh (w)on,Eng. see, Ger. seh -en
, (seek, look for ,
fol low with the eyes, i .e.)s a c i v a , m. attendant, supporter .
1 190, with union-vowel i .]s a -j osa s , a . (of l ike pleasure , i.s.) unanimous, harmonious ; kindly disposed,
s aj j a , a.— 1 . a s used of a bow, having its
string on, strung, ready for use (the str ingbeing wound around the how when this
is not in use) ; — 2. general ized, ready , asused of persons and th ings . [for sajya,q.v.
,with assimil ation as in sajyate ,
sajjate — see Vsafij .]s a j j i - k r -karoti ) . - 1 . make strung,
string (a how) ; —2. make ready, 3417
.
[sajja ,s aj y a , a . having its str ing on
,strung.
[283 2jyi ,‘ bow
s amca y a , m. a pil ing together , accumu
lation, esp. of weal th ; supply (of food) .
[VI ci ,‘
pile up,’
sam .]s amca y a n a , n. the gather ing (of the
bones of the dead) . [do.]s amc a y a v a n t , a . possessing an accu
mulation (of weal th ) , rich ; with ar thi ia,
rich with money, i .e. having capital .
[saxhcaya .]s amc i r i n , a. wandering. [V ent + ean ,
1 183
s ame i t i , f . a pil ing ; pile. [V l ci,‘
pile
up,’
sam.]V s a fij or saj (shjati ; sashfija ; hai fiksi
'
t ;
saktA; si ktum ; -s£jya ; pass . sajyhteor sajjate ) . stick to, be attach ed to ;
sakté, attached (of a glance ) , immovable. [cf. Lat. seg-nis, stick ing, i.s. slow,
p r a , be attached to ; prasakta, cd
dicted to.
s a ta ta , only in acc. s. neut., -am, as adv.
continuously, constantly , always. [forsaxhtata, see Vtan + sam z for mg, cf .
Lat. con-tineas, con
aa t-k r , see aant 6.
[Va -c.
sadasadétrnaka]
s a d a s a d - atm a k a , a . h aving existence
and non-existence as its nature, whose
nature it is to exist and also not to exist
at th e same time. [sadasat.]s h d i ,
adv. always. [cf .
s a d - acar a , m. the conduct or practices
of the good. [sant.]s a -d f
'
ga , a . of l ike appearance ; equa l ,
used (29Gb ) w. gen.
s a dy as , ads . on the same day ; imme
diately . [see l i 22f.]aa dh a , adv. equi v. of 1 sahh, see
s a dk a -m i d a ,m. co-revel ry , avp t da
'
cov,
common feast ; sadh ami dam mad, revel
in bl iss with , w. instr .
s a d h a- s th a , n. (or ig., perhaps, cc
-place,
i .e. place of union,but genera l ized to the
simple mg of ) place.
san a ,a . old. [orig.
‘of long standing,
long continued’
: cf . fro-s,‘old
’
; Lat.
sen-er,
‘o ld man Goth . s in-ista ,
o ldest’
;
AS. sin-cea ld,
‘
perpetua l ly or extreme ly
cold’
; AS. and Old Eng. sin-gre’ne,
‘ever
green ,
’ Eng. sen-green,‘
(extremely green ,
i.e.) house-leek’
: from a not quotable
Goth . asina-skalks, Medieval Lat. sini
scalcus,‘oldest house-servant,
’
th rough
intermediate Romance forms , comes Eng.
senescha l ; Ger . S ilndj lut,‘sin-flood,
’is a
popular interpretation of Old High Ger .
sin-vluot,‘the long-continued flood, th e
Noach ian
san a ,adv. of old, always. [instr . of sdna ,
1 1 120, not a.]s a n i t , adv. from of old, always, forever .
[shna , acct l 1 14d.]s a n i th n a ,
a . everlas ting, eterna l . [sana,1245e.]
sa- n i l a , a . having a common nest or
origin , afil iated, un ited.
ah n em i , adv. always. [perhaps fromsam .]
s h n t , 1 . ppl . being otiose, see
V 1 as ; existing ; —2. a . real , genuine ;
true , good ; — 3. of people, good, noble,
[present ppl . of V l as, ‘ be,’
q.v. : cf .
M y , stem to" ,
‘ being’
; Lat. absens , stem
ah-sent,
‘ being off’
; sons, stem sont
,
‘the
real doer ,’the gui lty one
’
; Danish sand,
AS. « 318,
‘ true,’ Eng. sooth
,
‘true, truth
’
for mg 2, cf . the mg of satya , of 7 57
Myr a A61 0»,‘the true story ,
’
and of
Eng. sooth .)s dmta t i , f .
— 1 . continuation ; — 2. esp.
continuation of one’
s race or fam ily , i .s .offspring. E W i
s amtapa, m. pain, sor
row. [V tap + aam .]s amtap a v a n t , a . sorrowful . [1233 ]s amd tg , f . a beho lding ; sigh t. [Vdr§+sam.]
s amd e h a, m.— 1 . doubt ; i t, from (by
reason of ) uncerta inty — 2. dan
ger , [Vdih -i- sam : for mg 2,cf .
bhaya.]aamd h ft , f : - 1 . covenant, agreement
- 2. promise. [V 1 dhi ,‘
put,’
am : for
mg 1 , cf. ow es“,
‘covenant,
’and m
r lfimu, the counterpart of sarhdadh i mi ]s amdh i n a , n. a putting togeth er , ourGem s, mixing. [Vl dhfl
paroxytone, 1 150.
s amdh i , m.- 1 . a putting together , aim
Oem r ;— 2. l ike samdh i , compact, al l iance ,peace, 1 7
7; — 3. the putting together
of sounds in word and sentence (see
Wh itney euphonic combination ,
-4 . junction (of day and nigh t) , i .e .
morning or evening twi l igh t. [V1 dh i ,
put,’
sam , 1 155.2e.]samdh y a ,
a . pertaining to sarhdhi or
junction ; samdhyi , j : — 1 . time of junc
tion (of day and nigh t) , morning or even
ing twi ligh t ; da. morning and evening
twil igh t ; —2. morning twiligh t (of a
yuga ) , [sa rhdhLcf . 1212b.]s amd h y anga , m. ( l it. twi l igh t
-
portion )evening twi l igh t of a yuga. [afiga ]
s amdh y a- aam a y a , m. twil igh t-time,
evening.
excel lent, 28 1 1 ; - 4 . sati, j : a s amn i dh i n a , n. (a putting down to
true, good, virtuous wife (hence Anglo
Indian Suttee ) ; - 5. n. the existent ;
existence ; 6. sat-ks, make good, treat
wel l , receive kindly.
gether , juxta-position, approximation, and
so) a being near ; contiguity ; presence ;
neighborhood, [V1 dhi ,‘
put,’
saxh -ni , 1 150: cf . samnidh i ]
s amn i dh i , m. presence. [Vl dhi‘
put,’
+ sa1i1 -ui , for mg, cf . samnidhana .]V s a p (shpati , -te ; septis ) . fol low after ;be attached or devoted to. [identified bysome with Vsac.]
asp vbl . fol lowing after , in cpds. [Vup.]s a patn i , a . f . h aving a common hus
band ; as subst. one of two or more wives
of the same man , co-wife , fellow-wife,
concubine. [sa + pati, but in the fem.
form , since the masc. would not be used
13040 : cf. supatni .]V s a p a r y a (saparytti ) . pay devotion to,
worsh ip. [denom . of a not quotable
asapar ,‘ devotion,
’ from Vsap.]as - p i nda , a . subst. having the pinda
in common, said of persons who
h ave a common ancestor not more than
six generations back to whom th ey offer
a pinda together , persons related in the
sixth generation.
s a ptf num. seven, also,
as a favorite sacred number , the expr ession
of an indefin ite plurality , e.g.
[ci . i r rd, Lat. septem,AS. seof on, Eng.
seven.]aa p t a k a th i m a y a , j : -i
’
, a . consisting
of seven narrations. [sapta-katha : see
s a p ta- t a n tu a . having seven courses.
s a p th-p a d a , f . -i
'
, a . 1 . being for
seven , i .e. many or al l , steps (see 1294i.s . being at every step, constant ; 2.
having ( taken ) seven steps see 1004 N.
[1300a.]s a - p r a gr a y a , a . with respectful de
meanor ; -am, adv. respectful ly.
as -ph a l a ,a . fruitful , fruit-bear ing.
s d -b a n dh u, a . h aving a friend.
l a -basp a , a . tearful .a s - b r a h m a car i n ,
m. fel low-student.
a s - bh a y a , a . fearful ; -am,adv. in
terror .
s a bh i , j : house or hal l for public meet
ings, esp . gambl ing-house assembly,
society , 19 1 . [orig., perhaps, familycf . Goth . sibj a , relationsh ip,
’AS. sibb,
relationship, related Old Eng. god-sib
related in God,’i .e. a sponsor in baptism ,
[sam arth a
Eng. gossip , sponsor , fami liar friend,tattler Ger . S ipp , masc.
,
‘re lative,
’
S ippe, fem., re lationship,
s a bh ar y a , a . having hi s wife with him ,
i .s . w ith h is wife, [2 sa + bh i ry i ,13040,
sam , prep . along, with , together . [cf . 2sa .]1 s am a encl . pr on. any ; every ,
cf. samaha . [cf . hid -Ger ,‘ from
some place or other’
; ass-ants,‘not any
ebb-mas,‘ in not any wise
’
; AS. sum,
some one,’Eng. some.]
2 s am a, a .— 1 . even ; — 2. l ike,
equal , w. gen. (296b ) , -am, adv.
equa l ly with, along with , with , w. instr .
,
— 3. l ike or equa l ( to th e usual ) ,i .s . not distinguished, common, mediocre,
[cf . apa, Doric spa,‘at the same
time’
; buds,‘one and the same, common
’
;
spa-M
’
s, even, equa l Lat. simi-l is,
‘ l ike’
; AS . same,
‘ in l ike manner’
; Eng.
same ]s a m at i , j : equal ity ; mediocrity ,
[2sama,s am h d , j : figh t, contest. [sam , 383d °
cf . lines-ow,
‘confused voices of men, din
of battle,
s am - a d h i k a ,a . hav ing a surplus wi th
it ; mi satr ayam samadhikam, three
months and more. [ 1305 ]s am - a n a n ta r a , a . with a non-interval ,
immediately adjoining ; -am , adv. im
mediate ly thereupon . [1305 ]s am a y a, m.
— 1 . (a com ing together , i.s .,
l ike Eng. con-vention ) agreement ; — 2.
( like Eng. juncture ) a point of tim e ; and
so time or season, occasion ; — 3. a
con-currence (of circumstances ) , i.s . a
case —see iha . [Vi sam.]s a m a y o c i ta ,
a . suitab le to the occasion ;
-am ,adv. as th e occasion demands.
[neita , Vuc.]s am ar ana ,
n. battle ; Treffen. [prop.‘a
com ing together ,’
Vr sam,1 150. 1a : just
so, Eng. verb meet sometimes means‘come
together with hosti le purpose,’and Eng.
noun encounter is used mostly of a hosti le
aam - a r t h a , a . (having an agreeing or
accordant object i.s .) suiting its
sam a l ar’
n krta] [268]
object, and so sui table ; capable ; able, s am pad , j : — 1 . success ; — 2. (a fal l ingw. together, co—inciding, and so a fitting of
cam - a l amk r t a ,a . wel l adorned. [see the parts to each other , i .s .) correct pro
alam : sam intensive, 1077b end.] portion, beauty . [Vpad sam .]aam a v a tt a - d h ii n a , a . containing aam puta ,
m. hemispher ical bowl or dish ;
gath ered pieces. [see 1087e .] round casket for jewels ) ; sampute l ikh ,
s am a h a ,accentless adv. somehow, write a th ing (acc.) in the strong
-box of a
[ 1 sama : cf . 1 l 00a and 1 104 person (gem ) , i .e. credit it to h im . [aam
s am ag am a , m.— 1 . a com ing together , puta ,
‘a together
-fold,’
1289a.]fi4
meeting ;— 2. meeting with , i.s . inter s a m p r a t i , adv. — 1 . just opposite ; and
course. [V gam + sam -a.] so — 2. (to the same lim it) even, exactly ;s am an a, j : -i, a .
— 1 . l ike ; one and the — 3 . ( like Eng. even ) at th e very time ;
same , 7815; -am ,
adv. in the same way , and so just now. [am ( intensive, 1077b
103 13 ; — 2. common (to different persons end ) prati, l 314a.]or coun tr ies ) , 98 17 ; un ited, s hm - p r i y a ,
a . mutual ly dear . [pr iya,
[2 sama, l 245d.] 1289a .]s a m an a - g r i m a , m. the same vil lage. s am b a n dh a ,
m. con-nection ; and so,a s
s am an a g r i m i y a ,a . be longing to the in Eng.
, relationsh ip.
same vil lage. [sam i na-grama, s am b h a v a ,m or igin ,
at end of adj .
s am i aa ,m.
— 1 . a putting together ; and cpds, having as its or igin,originating
so (c La t. con-trah ere,‘ draw together ,
’
in bh ii + sam .]th en ‘
abr idge’
) — 2. a condensation ; s am bh a v y a , grdo. to be supposed, sup
abr idgment ; -ena and samasatas , suc posable. [caus. of Vbhu sam .]cinctly . [V2as, th row,
’
sam .] s am bh r am a , m. extreme agi tation , haste
s a m i dh , j : ( l ike Eng. kindl ings ) fuel . ar ising from excitement. [V bh r am
[V idh a n , sam.]s am i
'
p a ,— 1 . a . near ; - 2. as n. near sam -m i gl a , a . com-mixed, m ixed with ,
ness, neighborhood, presence ; used l ike un ited with . [1289a .]antika , q.v. ; — 2a. samipam,
w. gen . or in s am - r i j fi i , j : complete, i .e. sovereign
cpd, (to th e presence of , t.e., simp ly ) to , ruler ; m istress. [for sam , see 1289b
w. verbs of going, 44 1 1 ; end, and 1077b end : for m instead of in,
— 2b. san i'
po, w. gen. or in.
cpd ( in the see
presence or neighborhood of, i .e., simply ) : aa - y a tua ,a . (having, i .e. taking pains
before, near, h ard by , 34 1 1
; to, i .e.) try ing to, w. inf . engaged in ,
by ,403. [cf. pratipfl] w. 1
'
aam i p a - s th a ,
a . in cpd, situated in th e s a r a,a. runn ing, moving, going, in cpds.
neighborhood of , near . [V sr.]s amut s a r g a ,
m. an ejecting, discharge. s a r ana ,a . running ; as n. a running.
[ Jsrj sam-ud, 216. [Vsr, 1 150. l a.]s am ud r a,
m. a gathering of waters, a sea, V s a r a ny a (m anyati ) . run, hasten.
an ocean . [‘a con-fluence,
’Vud sam , [sax
-aria , l o59d.]
1 188b.] s a r anyu, a . hastening, swift ; -y1'
i
aamun n a t i , f . a rising ; elevation,i.e.
, f . Saranyu, daugh ter of Twash tar , and
fig.,d1stinction . [Vuan sam -ud, 1 157 spouse of V ivaswaut, to whom she bare
and d.] Yama and Yam‘
i, 85
15 11. [V saranya,sam r t i , j : (a coming together , and so) l 178 l 1 : cf . s pam,
‘ the swift ’ goddess ofcol -l ision , shock. [Vr sam , 1 157d : cf . vengeance ]samarana .] s a r am a , f . the bitch of Indra or of the
s am p a tt i , f . success ; prosper ity ; abund gods ; cf: 8317 11. the runner
’or
‘ mes
ance, 1 7 [Vpad sam, 1 157d.] senger ,’ V ar, cf .
savarna]
s h - v a r na , a. — 1 . having the same ex
ternal appearance, exactly simi lar ,
2. of the same caste, 627. [for mgs,
see varna .]as - v i tan a , a . having a canopy , with a
canopy.
aa v i t f'
, m. — l . (with the two mgs ofEng. quickener ) impel ler , en livener ; - 2.
Th e Enl ivener , Savita r , name of a god,
selection xxxvi. ; — 3 . th e sun,
[V2 su,na - v i n a y a , a . with pol iteness ; -am , adv.
pol itely .
as - v i ge sa , a . possessing distinction,dis
tinguish ed ; -am ,adv. in a distinguished
way , especial ly .
s a v y h , a . left, 101 as m.
the left h and or foot, [prob. for
asyavya (as woul d appear fr . the Church
Slavon ic form iuj , sinister and so per.
h aps akin with attends, t axaFw-S, Lat.
scaevus ,
aa v y a t h a ,a . with sorrow or trouble.
[ass a v y i v rt , a . with a turn to the left, i.e.turn ing to the l eft. [i vrth ]
s a -
gi ey a , a . with h is pupil s.
V s a s (sas ti ) . sleep, slumber.
s a s a, m . or n. herbs ; grass.
s a s amd h y a ,a . with the morning twi
l igh t. [saxhdhyi h ]s a - s a rh d h y i figs ,
0 . with th e evening
tw il igh t.
as - s am bh r am a , a . with excited haste.
a s - s a r p a , a . with a serpent.
s a s y a,n. standing crop ; produce of the
field, grain. [cf . anu .]s a s y a
-k as t r a ,n . field of grain.
s a s y a - r a k sa k a , m. keeper or watch er
of the standing crop.
V aa h (sahate ; sasi h a , sasabe; hsah ista ;sahisyate; sodh h shhitum , sé
dhum ; 1 . overpower , 99°
be victorious, 78° — 2. hol d out against,
withstand ; and so bear ; endure patiently ,
32 7.
[orig.‘ be powerful , with stand, hold
back , h old cf . the col lateral Vsagh ,‘ take on one
’s self, bear
’: cf . toxi n, M l
ex-w,
‘ hold back’
; (xiv, Lax-or ,‘ hold or
[270]
have, had’
w. sahas , ssagh -as , cf. the
Germanic stem seg-os
, as it appears in
Goth . neut. sigis, AS . sigor , prob. neuter ,
al l meaning‘victory
’
; the stem appears
also in S eges-tes, name of a Cheruscan
pr ince (Tacitus , Annal s ) , and in S igis
mund cf . al so AS. sige, Ger . S ieg,
a d ,— 1 . hold out, endure ; — 2. be
able, w. inf . ; h tha l il w i r tham ntanbe,
how can I (se. do, prosecute ) my own
object.
1 s a h h ,— 1 . adv. together ; saha na etad,
in common ours ( is ) that, i.e. we’l l own
that together , 971 ° — 2. prep . with , a long
with , w. instr ., [cf . 2as , and
2 s a h a, a . — l . powerful ; — 2. endurmg,
patiently bear ing. [V sah .]s a h a - c i r i n ,
— 1 . a . going together , se
companying ;— 2. as m. com rade. [for
2, cf . sahi yaJ
s a h a - j a,a . born together , con-nate , in
born , natural .
s a h a - b h a sm a n , a . with the ashes.
s a h h - v a t s a , a . with the calf.s a h a - v ah a n a , 0 . h aving their teams
along, with their teams. [1304c.]sah a s , n. superior power ; m igh t, 75
1 1;
victory sahasii , adv. (with violence,
i .e.) suddenly , straigh tway . [see under
V sah.]s a - h a s ta , 11 . having hands .
s a h n ay a, a . powerful . [ahbas , 1212d 1 .]s a baat a , n. a thousand ; esp. a thousand
kine ; a thousand, in the sense of a great
many , 87° f or constructions
,see 486.
[prop. one-thousand,’3 sa hasr a : with
ha sra, cf. -xiAo sxesAo, exeah o (in Bend
xih oi ) , and xih tot,s a baat a -ni th a ,
a . having a thousand
songs , r ich in songs. [nitha, 193, 1300a.]s a h as r a d a k si na , a . having a thousand
kine as his gift or as its reward as m., se.
yajna , a sacrifice at wh ich such reward is
given, 871° of persons who ofier such
gi fts , 91 [daksini , 1300a.]s a h h s r a - dv ar [388c], a . thousand
doored.
s a h h ar a -
gr i g a , a . thousand-horned.
s ah a s r i ngu, a. thousand-rayed ; as m
th e sun. [afigm ]s a h a s r i nQu
- s am a , a. sun-like.
s abas s i -m a g h a , a. having th ousand
gif ts.
ah h a s v a n t , a . migh ty. [sal ine ]s a h i y a , m. companion, attendant. [ lit.
going toge ther or with ,’
saha aya : for
mg, cf . Lat. comes , stem com-i-t, Vi, lit.
going with , i.s. companion,
’and al so
s a h i y a t a n a , a . along with the fire-place.
[i yatana .]s a h i ta , a . united ; pl . in company , al l to
gether . [perhaps sah (a ) its , Vi , gone
together ,
aa h e l a , a . with lev ity ; -am , adv. play
ful ly. [2as hel i ]s a or si (ayati [761d3] ; cini ti ; sisi ya ;“i t ; aisyhti ; sits ; situm ;
ai ydyati ) . bind ; used almost exclus ivelywith ava and vi. [cf . lads, stem s on-pan ,
‘strap, thong
’
; AS. si -ma ,
‘ bond’
; Church
Slavonic se'
-t’
i,Li thuanian sé-tas , AS. sii-da
,
Ger . Sa i-te,‘string
’
; Church S lavonic
si-lo, AS. sci-l, Ger . Sci-l ,
‘rope
’
: see also
V siv and sni yu.]+ a v a ,
— 1 . unbind or unharness (a
team ) ; and so turn in ; go to rest ; go
home, hvasita, having turned in ,
at rest ; — 2. come to a stop at, i.s. decide
upon (e.g. a dwel ling-
place ).
+ a dh y - a v a , caus. br ing one’
s self to
a stop at, i.s. decide upon, undertake,
ud - a v a , set out, esp. from the place
of sacr ifice, of . ai ava, 1 ; betake one’s
self , w. loc.,
+ v y - a v a , decide, determine, cf . 85 +ava, 2.
p r a , in praaiti ,‘continuation .
’
s i kfita , a . having a (definite ) intention ;-u.m , adv. significantly , impressively .
ai k sa , 11 . having or with the eyes ;— used
only in abl . si kai t, as adv. - 1 . wi th the
eyes ;— 2. plainly , actual ly , 51 exactly ,— 3. ( in reali ty , i.e.) in propria
persona, embodied, in person,
[akaa z 1 1 14c.]
[si m an
anu
s i g a r a , m. ocean. [cf . sagara : accord
ing to the legend, a basin hol lowed out
by the sons of Sagara , and fil led by
Bhagi ratha with the water of the Ganges.]nag a i k a ,
a . having Agni with them ,with
Agni . [aa + agni , 13040 : for see
1222c 2° and
s i fig n sth a , a . with th e thumb.
snubs ]s at a , m. Sata, name of a Yaksha.s i t a - v i h a n a , a . having Sata ( in the
form of a l ion ) as h is beast of burden,
riding on Si ts ; as m. Satavahana,name
of a king,
s i tt v i k a , f . -i'
,a .
— 1 . (real ly existent,
i.e.) real , — 2. standing in relation
to the qual i ty sattva proceeding
from aattva, governed by sattva, good.
[satt 12220
s i d a n a , a. dwel l ing. [V sad : for mg, cf .
sadana.]s ad a r a , a . with respect ;
-um, adv. re
spectful ly . [i dara.]V sadh (si dhati , -te ; si dh itum ; si dha
yati ) . — 1 . come straigh t to one’s aim,
attain one’s object ; — 2. bring straigh t to
one’s object ; — caus . — 1 . bring to its
object or end ; accompl ish ;— 2. attain ,
win . [cf . V2 sidh ,s i d h ti , j 2 si dhvi, a . — 1 . leading strai gh t
to th e goal ; straigh t (path ) , - 2.
good or noble (of people ) ; fai tt (wife ),as m. noble man , as j : excel
lent woman , 467 — 3 . as adv. righ t ;
regular ly , wel l ; as excl . bravo !14 8 ,
[V i dh , 1 1 78a ]s i d h fiy i ,
adv. straigh t, directly. [011t1 1 120 end.]
s i d h y a, grdo. to be won ; as m. pl .
Sadhyas, a class of deities![V si dh .]
s i nu, n. m. top ; sur face ; ridge ; back.
[ci . anu.]s anuqa y a ,
a . ful l of repentance.
says -Js i m a -dh v a n i , as. sound of th e si man.
s am a n , 11 . song ; as technical term, esp . a
Vedic stanza as arranged for chanting, a
si man ; the col lection of si man’s, the
Samaveda.
sam arth ya]
sam a r th y a , n. abil ity ; 4 111 kr, do one’s
utmost strength , [sm ar tha
a i m a - v ed h , m. the Veda of siman or
chants,
s i m p r a t a , a . of now, present ;-am , adv.
at present, new. [aamprati , 1208d.]s i m y a , n. equa l ity . [2samh ,a i m y a t i , f . condition of equal ity
or l ike
ness. [si myaJs i y a,
n.— 1 . a turn ing in, going to rest ;
— 2. evening ; sayhm , adv. at evening.
a i y a k a , a . suitable for hur ling, m issil e.
[V2 si ,‘ hur l ,
’1 1 81a.]
s i r a fig a , a. dappled ; as m. antelope .
sar am ey a, m. descendant of the bitch
Sarama, name of certain dogs,
[sarhmi 1216a.]s i r d h a , a . with a h alf ; dve gate ai rdh e,two hundred and fifty ; Bi rdhfim ,
adv.,
general ized, together ; a s p rep . a long with ,
w. instr . [ardha z the general ization of
mg is paral leled by that seen in
s i v i t r a, f . -i, a . be longing to Savitar ;
with or without re, a verse to Savitar , esp .
Rigveda m 62. 10 74 1° regarded as
the most sacred in the Veda, and cal led
also gi yatri , [savitfg 1208b.]s i gr u,
a . tearful ; si gru, adv.
tearful ly , with tears in (their ) eyes, 541°
[am -Ja i sti fig a p i ta ,
0. h aving or with an
asti figapi ta , q.v. ; -a.m, adv. with pro
foundest obeisance.
s i s ii y a , a . wi th impatience ; -am ,adv
impatiently. [asiiyi ]s ah a s r h , a. consisting of a thousand,
mi l liar ius. [sahasr au]s i h i y y a ,
11. office of attendant, and so
( l ike Eng. attendance ) service, aid.
[sah i ya,V 1 8 1 , bind, see Vsi .V 2 s i , hur l , in pra
-sita ,‘ darting along,
’
aftyaka,‘ missil e,
’and sén i ,
‘ weapon.
’
s i nh a, m. lion ; at end oj'
cpds, the best of
noble or brave qfivyagh ra. [‘th e
powerful beast, V sah .]V s i e (sifiehti , -te siséca , sisice ;
asieat, -ata ; seksyflti, -te ; siktA; sék
tum siktvi -sieys ; sieyhte ) . — 1 .
pour out ; sprinkle, 4920; — 2. esp. semen
infundere feminae ; - 3. ( l ikeEng. found)cast, e.g. molten metal ; ph enam vajram
asifiean, they cast the foam into ( th e
shape of ) a thunderbolt, [cf.
lx-
pds, moisture’
; AS. seo'
n, asih-an,
‘ fil ter , fiow,
’
Ger . seih-en, strain Church
Slavonic sic-a ti, Ger . seich-en,‘ mingere
’
cf. also Swedish sila , asih-la , strain ,’
whence Eng. sile,‘ drain
,strain ,
’whence
sil-t,drainings,
+ a b h i , — 1 . pour upon, sprinkle ; — 2.
sprinkle in token of consecration ,and so
( l ike Eng. anoint) consecrate.
a v a , pour upon.
a, pour into.
+ ui , pour down or in ; semen infundere
feminae.
s i c , f . hem of a garment or robe.
s i dd h a ,a . perfected ; as m. pl . the Sid
dhas, a class of dem i-gods, with super
natur al powers, esp. that of fly ing throughth e air . [see V2 sidh ,
s i dd h i , f . - 1 . success, accompl ish
ment (of a wish ) , 24 21 ; successful performance, attainment of an object,
— 2. (perfection, i.s .) magic power .
[prop.‘ the reach ing an aim ,
’
V2 sidh ,
hit the mark,’1 157. 1a.]
s i dd h im a n t , a . possessing magic power .
[1235 ]V l a i d h (sédhati ; aisédha ; setsyati
siddh h ; séddhum ; -aidhya ) . drive ofi ;
sca re away .
V 2s i d h (sidhyati , -te ; sisédha ; setsyati,-te ; siddhh ) . — 1 . reach an aim , h it the
mark ; — 2. succeed, 18 17 ; be aecom
pl ished, become rea l ized, be
of advantage, boot, avai l ,— siddha ,
h aving reach ed one
’
s (highest) aim,hav
ing attained perfection ; esp . perfect inthe sense of having attained supernatural
or magic powers ; a s m. a Siddha, q.v.
[cf. V si dh .]+ p r a ,
succeed ; prasiddha , known , if .
prasiddh i aham prasiddh o musakikhyayi , I go by th e name of M .
, 4721
s i n d h u,- 1 . in V.
, m. stream ; — 2. in V.
and later, f Th e Stream ,
i .e. th e Indus
( ineol is Sindus appel latus— PIiDY) ; — 3 .
Vi to lvi ./i.2 5 ,
2 suta]
2 s n t a ,m. son ; anti , f . daugh ter . [prop.
‘
generated, born ,
’
ppl . of V San , see V sitfor mg, cf . mi nd, and Eng. ba irn (under
[vbl . fr .eu- trp ,a . easily satisfied.
VI trp.]s n - d a r ga n a , a . having a beautiful ap
pearance, handsome, ( ft-M s ; as m. Su
darcana, name of a king, Baptism.
ou- d i m a n , a . h av ing good gif ts , bestow
ing blessings ; as m. cloud, as source of
rain and therewith connected blessings,
blessed ra in-cloud.
s n - d i n a , a . very br igh t or clear ; as n.
( l ike Lat. serenam ) c lear weather.
s n d i n a t v é ,n . ( l ike La t. sereni tas ) clear
weath er ; fig. auspicious or blessed time,
always in the phrase -tv6 i hni m,in der
Gl iickszeit der Tage, in the happy days.
s n - d i t i , f . beautiful fiam ing or fiame.
eu- dus t a r a ,a . very hard
-to-cross, hard
to get over ; (of a promise ) hard to per
form .
1 sudh i , f . (good place or position , i .s.)wel l-being. [as 1 dhi ]
2 sudh a, f . (good drink, i.e.) drink of the
gods, nectar . [en 2dh i ]ou- n as ak si b h r n v a , a . having beauti
ful noses-and-eyes—and-brows. [for ui
[274]
s n - ba dd h a, a .
[ 1288b and 1284a.]su-buddh i , a . having good wits ; as in.
Brigh tewits , Good-wits, name of a crow.
s n -b h ag a ,a . h aving a goodly portion,
fortunate, happy ; esp . loved (by one’s
husband ) , 89 10 charming ; amiable, 6113
.
[bhAga, 1304b.]sum a k h a , a . jocund.
makha.]s n -m a ngua , j ?-gali [355b], a . having
or br inging good luck. [mafigalaz acctirregular , cf . 1304b
9 end.]s n -m a dh y am a ,
a . fair-waisted.
s n -m h n a s ,a .
— 1 . good-hear ted, wel l
disposed, 902; kind ; — 2. (having good,
i .s . happy feelings, i .e.) cheerful ; glad,78 13 ; — 3. as f . pl. ( the cheerful ones,i.e.) the flowers ; in cpd, [cf . th esecond part of eb—p evtps, stem s ir-pen s,
wel l
V sum a n a s y a , only in ppl . snmanas
yami na , being cheerful ; joyous . [snmanas,
eu-m a h a n t [450b], a . very great or
important. [1288b.]s nm a h i k a k sa , a . having very
-
great
(enclosures, i .s.) hal ls or rooms . [snmaha kaksi , 1298s ,
s n -m ék a ,a . (having a good
wel l or fast bound.
[perhaps 06
4 4
i .s.) firm ly stabl ished.{mul l Wu
“eu- n edbas , a . having good insigh t or /WWisdom ,
Wise / s
saksibhrfi ( 1315c) , i .s. 11535 aksi bh rfi,
su- n i gca y a , a . h aving a very firm re
solve, very resolute.
sun da r a , j f -i , a . beautiful .sun v a , a . Soma-pressing. [V 1 sn,
‘
press’
see 1 148.3b and
s n patn i , a . f . having a good husband.
sum n h ,n. favor , grace ; welfare. [per
haps neuter of an adj . eu-mna ,
‘ kindly
minded’ — see mna : but of . l 224 o.]
aur a , m. a god. [a pendant to asura,
formed by popul ar etymology from
[su+ pati , but in the fem . form , since4;fi.
the masc. would not be used : l 3o4h z cf .
sapatni .]eu- p a r na,
a . with good wings ; as m. bird
of prey ; eagle, vul ture ; my th ica l bird.
asn-t a, as if thi s were a-snra,‘non-
god
— see naura.]s n - r a k si t a , a . wel l -guarded.
eu- r atn a , a . h aving goodly treasures . fi lf "
[ratna , 1304b.] W‘
[w .1304b sur a bh l a . sweet-smel ling, fragrant.su- put r a,
a . having good sons. [pntr6, sur a b h i s r a g - dh a r a ,a . wearing fra
1304b.] grant gar lands. [snrahhi -srajeu- p r a t i sth i t a ,
a . proper ly set up.
ou- p r av i [355b], a . very zealous. [ 1288b.]su- p r i ta ,
a . wel l pleased. [1288b and
sur a - s a tt am a , m.pl . the best of the gods .
s ti r i f . spirituous, and esp . distil led,
liquor ; brandy ; l iquor. [V 1 an ,
‘express
cf . 1 suta and son ]
[275]
cu- r i dh a s , a . having goodly blessings,
bounteous.
sur o t tam a , a . subst. ch ief of gods. [ut
cu- l a l i ta , a. very lovely ; (of meat)delicious .
eu- l o ca n a ,a. fair-eyed.
s n v ar ca s , a . having good vareas, i .s. :
ful l of life, blooming, 909; fiery ,
23 ; glor ious ,
s n - v h r na , a . having a beautiful color ;
as n. gold.
sn v a r na - k ank ana , n. gold-bracelet.
[ 1280b.]sn - v i dat r a , a . kindly noticing, i .e.
taking kind notice, kindly. [ 1288b.]s n v i d a t r i y a , a . kindly. [snvidatr a,l 214a.]
s n v i r a ,a . having good h eroes ; rich in
retainers, 87 ,1 heroic, 78 ,
4 88 14. [vi razacct, 13O4b
2 end ]f . excel lent praise, goodly
hymn. [511 rkti , with euphonic v .]su-
Qév a ,a . very kindly . [geva, 1288b.]
su-ql a k sna , a . very smooth .
s n - s amc i ta ,a . wel l-gathered ;
-am ,
adv. snsaxhcitam saxhcitya, having gath
ered ( in a wel l-gath ered way , i.s.)careful ly .
eu s am a h i t a , a . very intent, entire ly
concentrated upon one thing. [V 1 dh ii,‘
put’: acct, 1284
sn - s th a , a . (wel l situated, i .s .) safe and
well .
s n - h rd , m. friend. [prop. adj .,‘ having
a good hear t, kindly
suh rd - b h ed a ,m. a creating of divisions
among friends, separation of friends.suh rd - v ak y a ,
n. (speech , i.e.) words of
a friend.
V s ii or an (si te snsi va, snsnvé ;
daosta ; savisyati, -te sosyati, -te
si te, snta ; sfitvi ; generate
bring forth ; bear so perhaps at RV.x.
125. 7. [ci . 2suta ,
‘ bairn’
vitis, sav-so-s,‘son for pronunciation as trisyl lable,
64 -63, cf . Boeotian 015163 :
anand sand.)+ p r a , bring forth ; prasfita, born of
see also under
sfi vbl. bearing, in virasfi ; f .
mother . [V8fi, q.v . : with sit-s, cf . v ii-s,
B-s , Lat. sii-s, AS. si, Eng. sow (qua pecada
nih il genuit natura fecundius Cicero,cf . ver res under V vrs) ; al so AS. swin
,
ssu-ina , Eng. swine, prop. a diminutive of
ni .]sfik a r a, m. swine, boar . [origin uncer
s fik sm a , a . fine, smal l ; subtil e, intangi
ble, atomic, 56l”
.
V s ii c a y a (sficayati ) . indicate sficita ,
made recognizable. [suci , mg 3 : 1061suc i and add , f - 1 . needle ; — 2. general
ised, a pointed object ; and so — 3. (l il eEng. pointer ) indicator ; index. [prob. fr.
Vsi’
v , sin, q .v .]ant r a ,
n.— 1 . th read ; cord ; —2. br ief
rule or book of such rules (so cal led, per
h aps, because each rule was a short ‘ l ine
or because the col lection was a string of
rules ) , cf . Whi tney xvii . [V siv, q.v.]V sfid (sfidayati ) . — 1 . lead straigh t on
,
keep a-
going — 2. bring about, finish ;— 3. finish ( in its colloquia l sense) , put an
end to ,destroy.
ui , destroy , see simple verb.
s fin h r a , f . -i, a . gladsome, joyous. [cf .
sfin d , m. son ; once (at 57 as ] . daugh ter .
[Vni : cf . Church S lavonic sgm‘
t, AS.
sunu, Eng. son : for mg, cf . 2snta .]s ti n t-ta , f . joyousness, joy . [sunérm see
1237 8 ] v
sfin rt i v a n , f . -var i'
, a . joyous. [sti nt-ti ,
1234 and s : for fem ., 1 169.
sfip a , m. soup. [despite the identity of
mg, no etymological connection has as
yet been discovered.
sup a - k a r a , m. soup-maker , cook.
sfip a v a fica n a,a . (having an easy
fa l tering-approach , i.s .) to which one
easily or gladly totters (of the grave ) , i .e.
easy of approach or not repul sive. [upavai
‘icana , l 3o4b
s ii p i y a n a,a . (of easy approach , i .s.)
easy of access. [npi yansn 1304b
sfir a ,m. the sun. [cf . svkr , gen . sti r -as,
sun’: perhaps a transfer to the a-deelen
sion,
[276]
sur f , m. (prop. impel ler , inciter , i.s .) h e
who engages pr iests to perform a sacrifice
for h is own benefit and pays them for it,
a sacr ifice-mas ter ; the same as maghavan
and th e later yajami na. [V2 sn ,
‘ impel ,’
s ii r y a , m. the sun ,selection xl . ; the Sun ,
personified, selection xxxiii. ; sii ryi , f . 1 .
the Sun, personified as afizma le — 2. the
hymn of Surya’
s wedding, RV.x. 85,selec
tion lviii. [fr . svar ( siir ) , 1212a.]s l
'
i r y i - v i d , a . knowing the Suryfi-hymn ,
RV.x. 85.
V or (sisarti ; sasi ra , sasré ; asarat ; as
r isyéti ; at“; M um : urtvi ; a stral ;si rayati, -te ) . run sw iftly , gl ide, flow ;caus. act. set in motion. [cf . tip-p ip,
‘rush
,
onset, spring ,
’whence bpm ,
‘rush on
’
;
ta pe ,‘spr ing
’
; W anna ,‘spring
’
; alt-s o,‘ leaped Lat. sa l ire, spring
’
; cf . sar as ,‘
pool ,’
sar it,‘stream ,
’and, for the root
with l , sal -ila ,‘ fiowing
’
and ‘ fiuid, i.s .
a n n , run or go after.a p a , go off caus. remove ; take out.
a v a , go down,in avasara.
a , run unto ; run.
upa , go unto, approach .
n i s , go out ; caus . drive out or away .
p r a go forth ; caus. stretch for th or out.
+ud ,- 1 . cast ; hur l (a bolt) ; — 2. pour
out,
- 3. cast ofi ; lay down (acorpse ) — 4 . let go, 3
5
s am -ud , let go, discharge.
+ n p a , (hur l at, and so) plague, dis
tress, vex ; i ditya upasrstas , se. r i huni ,the sun vexed by Ri hu, i.e. ecl ipsed.
+ v i , - 1 . th row away ,— 2. dis
charge ; ( let go from the hand,i .s .) lay
down,
mid.,w. v i cam, let go the
voice, i .s . break silence by saying
1003 ; — 3. create , 573, qf. s imple verb.
s am , ( let go together ) m ix, uni te.
arj , vbl . creating. [V an ]V (06mm ,
-te ; m ime ; flaw“sarpsyati , sr apsyati ; srptA; shrpitnm
srptvi ; -stpya ; sisrpsati ) . creep, crawl ;
gl ide ; used of gentle and cautious motion.
[cf . Spa-w,
‘creep, go
’
; Lat. serp-ere,
creep r ipen , ssrep-ere, creep,
’rep
-ti-l is,
‘creeping
’
; AS. scalf , Eng. salve, so
named from its slipper iness, l ike sarpis
and srpra , see these ; cf . a lso épw- e‘ rdv and
Lat. serpens , snake no connection w.
Eng. sl ip .]+ ud , creep out or up ; rise ; desid. wish
to rise.
n p a , go gently unto, approach gently .
+ v i , — 1 . move asunder,disperse ; - 2.
move about.
+ aam ,- 1 . flow together ;
— 2. go s rp r h ,a . sl ippery , fatty ; smooth . [V an) ,
wander , sam intens ive, 1077b end ;about
esp . wander from one existence to another 1 s én i , f . a missile ; weapon.
(of the soul ) .
ask s , us. perhaps missile, lance.
ar g i l a,m. jackal .
V s r j (atjati, -te ; sasdrja , sasrjé ; harak
; sraksyati , -te ; are“; srastnm ;
l 188a.][V2Bi.
‘ hur l ,’l 177a.]
2 s én i , f . l ine of battl e ; acies ; army .
[akin with sita, fur row,
’si
'
mén ,
‘
par ting
of the hair from these a root ssi , draw
a straigh t l ine,’may perhaps be inferred ]
sratva ; -arjya ; sisrksati ). - 1 . let loose s e r ay a ,a . with jealousy ; -am ,
adv. with
( from the hand ) , dart, hur l ; th row ; — 2. jea lousy . [u irsy i Jlet go, pour out ( streams, rain ) , discharge ; V s e v ( sévate ; siséva, sissvé ; sevisyéti
- 3. let loose (herds ) ; — 4 . spin or twist
(cord or gar land ) ; - 5. (discharge fromone
’s self, cf . 57 1 , and so) procreate , eu
gender ; create.
a v a ,— 1 . shoot off (arrows ) ; th row or
put in , 579; — 2. let loose (streams ) ;
loose ( from a bond) , del iver over ,
84 13 ; — 3. ( l ike Eng. colloq. let slide ) let
pass unnoticed, forgive, 78 13.
sevita; sévitnm ; sevitv i ; -s6vya ) .
stay by the app . of tyaj — 2. stay
by , and so ( l ike Eng. wait upon ) serve or
reverence, 3017; 3. devote one
’
s sel fto ; practice, 21 66 9, 68
9. [no connec
tion w. aéflopa t, reverence ,’see Vtyaj .]
up a , reverence be devoted to.
ui be devoted to, i.s. cohabit wi th.
s am , practice.
stigend,‘rising or sty,
’
Eng. stg,‘swel ling
(on eye for change of gh to i in
present, cf . 1611 and t ]
+ p r a , get ahead in attacking, succeed
in one’
s attacks,
v s tn (swan stute tust‘isva, tusthuvé h ti nsi
'
t, Astosta astavi t
stavisyati , -te ; stosyati, -te atutA
stotum ; stntvti ; -stutya , -sti1ya ; stu
yate ). praise ; extol (a god) ; stnvant,
(praising, as subst.) worsh ipper .
+ p r a ,— 1 . praise ; — 2. bring forward
as object of mention or subject of con
versation (qfi La t. laudare, prop.‘
praise,’
but a lso ‘ mention and so — 3 . general
ized, introduce, begin.
s tuk a , j : lock or tuft (of wool or hair )[see stoka.]s tr (strni ti, Btrnité, in mg 1 in Veda ;
strnbti , strnuté, in mg 2 ; tasti ra, ta
ataré ; astar i'
t starisyate ; strta,
stirna [957b] ; strtva, stirtvi '; -stf'tya,
-stirya ) . 1 . strew,esp . the sacrificial
straw, spread out — 2. (l ike La t.stem ere ) overth row (an enemy ) .
[cf . avdp-w -pt, Lat. ster -n-ere, strew,
spread out’
; “pa ge , ( l ike Eng. spread )‘ bedding,
’
a ‘rpat-M ,
‘ bed,’
Lat. strd-men,‘straw,
’storca
, straw mat,’torus, stator -us ,
‘ bed AS. strea-w,streo-w-ian, Eng. straw,
strew ; “pm-7 63 , Lat. strd-tus, bespread’
(via ) strata , (way ) bespread with stones,
i .s. ‘
paved,’whence borrowed AS. strfit
,
Eng. street Old Lat. stld-tus,Lat. li tus,
‘spread out, spreading, and so broad,
wide’
; see also under noun
a n n , cover over .
i , spread out.
n p a , spread upon, spread as a cover ;
as techni ca l term of the r itua l,with or with
out i jya, pour the sacrificial butter over
(e.g. the hand) so as to make a coating,
p r a , spread out.
s t f'
[371 13, ti n s, stf'bhis ], m.
, plural only.
th e stars. [if fr . Vstr, we may interpretthe name as mean ing either (a )
‘ the
ligh t-str ewers,’or (b) the scattered
’ones,
th ose that are spread out over the vault
of heaven ; but the connection w. Vstr is
very uncertain : cf . M p, stem d-o'rsp,
Avestan star , Lat. stel la,
ester -la, Ger .
S tem , AS. steor ra,Eng. sta r : see also
a . deligh ting in
s ten a, m. th ief. [V ati ]s tok a,
- l . m. drop ; - 2. as adj . smal l ,insignificant. [akin with stuk i , ‘
tuft ’
from these, a root sstn,‘ dr op, dribble ,
run togeth er, be compacted into a round
mass,’may perhaps be inferred : for mg
2, cf. Eng. dr ibble w. driblet.]
s tot t, m. praiser (of a god) , worshipper ,singer. [V stu, 1 182a.]
s tbm a , m. praise, song of praise. [Vstm1 166a.]
s tom a - v h r dh a n a ,
praise.
at r i j : woman , female individual,
wife, opp. of pumans, e. .g [prob.
for asiitr i,‘
generatrix,
’ V 8 11 , 1 1822 ]s t r i - k am a , a . having desire for femal e
(ch ildren ) . [ 1296 ]s th a,
— 1 . cbl in cpds. standing ; and so,
general ized ( like Eng. stand, be
situated, staying, being ;— 2. sometimes,
perhaps, substantively, place ( l ike Eng. noun
stand, in go-stha , sadh a-stha .
[V sth i , 333 : sometim es -sth a,ath al a , n. dry land (a s opp . to water ) ,terra firma, Fest-land ; sthal i , J
‘I place .
[prob. akin w. V ath i , ‘that wh ich stands
s th av i r a , a . — 1 . firm , th ick, massy ,
sturdy - 2. ful l -grown, old ; as 771 . old
man. [from athu, col lateral form of
Vstha, 1 188e : for mg 1 , cf . Eng. steady,
cognate w. stand, and cf . sth ira ; for 2,
cf . Eng. of long standing.]V s th a (tisthati , -te [671 , 749a] ; tasthad,tasthé ; asth i t, asth ita [884 ] sth i syati ,-te ; sthi ta; sth fttum ; sth itva; -atk$ya ;sthiyate ; sth i payati ,
-te
— 1 . stand, 807,
stand stil l , 70191 31
; remain stand
ing ;— 2. stand by (a fr iend) ; hold out
faith ful ly , 63 1° - 3. remain ,
wait, abide, poss., imper s
sarv iiih sth i’
yati m, let al l remain,
atra sth i'
yati m, stay h ere, 3921; — 4 .
remain or be in a condi tion, continue in
[279]
r an action [l o75c] : w. adj . or .ppl.,
vy i pi ditas tisthati , l ies dead, 44“
w. gerund, 26 w. i nstr .,
— 5. exist ; be present,- 6.
be situated, be , 15, 26
13,33 4 ; — 7. (remain
standing, i.s . unmoved or untouched, and
so,l ike Ger . dahingestel l t b leiben ) remain
unconsidered or unmentioned ; thus , diire
tisthatu tadvrddhis , ( let the interest of
i t stand afar off, i.s .) to say nothing of
the interest of it, — 8 . sthi ta, see s .v.,—9. caus . cause to stand, set ; put,
[for sati : cf . Dor ic in f. ova-p ee , Epic
n ij-vac, Church Slavonic sta-ti , Lat. std-re,
Old High Ger . std-n,Ger . steh-en,
‘stand
’
thi s old form of the root appears also in
Ger . S tatt, AS. stede, Eng. stead,‘
place’:
the prevai l ing form of the root in Ger
manic is stand ; cf . AS. stand-ou,Eng.
stand Ger . preterit stand,‘stood
’ — w ith
‘ r-Sth i -t, cf . K-o'
r n, stood w. ti -qth i -mi ,cf . l-m -m, set,
’Lat. si-sti-t, sets — for
mgs of V ath i , cf . in general those of
Eng. stand.]a dh i , stand upon .
+ a n u,— 1 . (stand along by , t.e.) take
one’
s place along by , and so support,
help ; — 2. devote one’s self to a th ing,
e g. virtue, devote one’
s self to (an
undertaking ) , and so carry out (a plan ) ,accompl ish ; pass. imper s evam
anusth eyam , it must be done so,
so 38 ‘5 tath i w anusthite, it having been
thus accompl ished, th is being done,
see 3o3h ‘ and cf . 89 15-23
+ ab h i , set the foot upon ,vanquish ;
with stand.
+ a v a ,— 1 . stand ofi
,— 2.
stand ; — 3. remain ,abide ; — avasth.ita
standing ; posted, situated ; abiding,
dwe l l ing ; - caus. (cause to stand apart,
i.s .) leave beh ind,i , take one
’
s place at ; resort to, 101.
ud , stand up ; r ise up (from sleep or
inactivity ) , 3020; spring up, 2617; get out
of caus. cause or bid to r ise,
102 7 ; pul l out (of a m ire, a vat) ,
[a lost, 233a.]+ p r a t y
- n d , rise up to meet (in token
of respect).
s th i t r a,n. station , place.
[sth avara
s am - n d ,r ise up, spring up.
+ up a ,— 1 . stand by , set one
’s
sel f near ; stand opposite, — 2. ap
proach , esp. with reverence or supplica
tion — upasthi ta : (having) approachedor appeared ; near at hand, 4 1
8
+ a n nv up a ,mid. approach one after
anoth er ; 10. 1 115 (the pronoun ) , come to myside,
s am -up a , approach ; fal l to one’
s
lot ; samupasthi ta , on hand.
ui , stand in, rest on.
p a r i , stand round about, encompass ;
restrain.
+ p r a , mid. arise, and so set out to go ;
go ofi prasth ito‘bhavat, profectus est ;
caus. send away , dism iss,
+ p r a t i , stand ; be establ ish ed ; get a
place or foot-ho ld, pr atisthi ta : os
tablished, resting upon ; set up ; — caus.
set.
+ v i , mid. (stand asunder , i .e.) spread
itself .
a n n - v i , spread one’s self over , per
vade RV .x. l 25.7.
s am ,mid.
— 1 . remain with ; — 2. in the
r itua l , come to a stand-stil l (sam, intsu
sive ) , i .s. get th rough , finish ; samsthi te,loc. absolute, if h e (end, i.s .) die,
[V stha, 1 185for mg, cf . Eng. stead w. root sta under
ath i n a , n. - 1 . a standing ; — 2. a {e
maining, abiding ; - 3. standing, i:e., as
in Eng., rank ; — 4. an abode (see bha
vana ) ; place, ctc. ; — 5. pregnantly
(qf. pi tra ) , a proper place ; — 6. a proper
occasion ; concrete, a proper object for
giving occasion to anyth ing ; tatki vya
syavarpana-sth i nam ekah s of this
poem 8 . is the sole consignment-occa
sioner , i .s. the only one wor thy of having
this poem entrusted to him , 541. [Vsth i ,
1 150.
ath i n a -b h r anga ,m. abode-ruin , loss
of abode.
s th av a r a, a . standing ; not endowed with
the power of locomotion ,and so, as col
lective n. sing.,the plants , as 171 . pl .
plants, 671. [Vathi , 1 1 71a.]
sth avarata]
s th i v a r a t i , j : condition of being a
phun; [1237]s th i ta,
a. — l . standing (as opp. to going,
ly ing) , — 2. (of animate and inani
mate beings ) standing in a place ; abid
ing ; sth itas (supply, as is oflen necessa ry,
some f orm q as, was abiding, i. .s
abode, 2913; situated ; bh ii ta l e sth itam,
being on the ear th , i . .s ,s imply , on the
earth , sthi tam, it was
waited by i .s. (he ) waited, 34 1°
— 3. existing ; present, 613;
- 4 . being or remaining in a situation
or condition (cf. V ath i which is ex
pressed . by an adj . in the same case, 1
by an adv.° tath i , kah sthito ‘tr a,
wh o ( is ) being here, i .s . who is here , 497;
by a gerund i tm i nam i cch i dya sth itas ,
after conceal ing h imself (was) remaining,
i .s. kept h idden ,so
upavigya sthiti s, waited sitting,
jflfir'
vyi pya.
’
bhav i nl sar vi n dflfito
mahan ,with wh ich th e intel lect, pervad
ing al l be ings, stands, i .s. with wh ich it
constantly pervades al l beings,
[ppl . of V ath i , 954c : cf . or a-r d-s, Lat.
sta-tu4,
‘standing, set
’: for mgs above,
c£. Vsuni ]s th i t i , f . - 1 . a standing ; — 2. a rcmain
ing by a th ing ; and so - 3. devotion to
15 17 ; — 4 . (l ike Lat. status ) con
dition ; and so — 5. way , method of pro
,cedure, 26
7. [V ath i , 1 1 57. 1a, cf . 954c.]
ath i n , vbl . standing, in cpds. [V sthi
s th 1 r 6 a . steady ; steadfast, firm ;
a lso of per sons, 997; enduring (of migh t ) ,
[V ath i , cf . 954c : for mg, cf
swhavhnu]V athu, as sumed as colla ter a l f orm of sth i ,
(fl sthavir a, and see under V ani .s th fini , f . post, pil lar . [for satul -na, fr .
V estul or estal , an extended form of
V esta , Skt. sth i : cf . Ger . S tolle (n ) , OldHigh Ger . stollo
,astol-no
,
‘
prop, post’
;
w ait-as,‘
post, pil lar’
; these words , l ike
urban, Doric m m ,
‘
prop, post,’
presup
pose th e root in causal mgs ,‘cause to
stand,’i .e. (a )
‘ keep from fal l ing, propup,
’and (11 )
‘set up,
’as a pil lar : the root
opponent foe.
appears. also in Ger . S tall , Eng. stall ,‘stand, t.e. standing-place ,
’
and in Ger.
stil l,Eng. still
,standing, not
V s n i . (m i ti ; sasni ti ; sni syati , -te ;
snata; sni tum ; sni tv i ; bathe ;
perform a rel igious ablation, esp . at the
end of religions studentsh ip or of a
vow. [orig. anti or and (so ath i , athu)cf . Vm in ( n eon, s l -ovsF-ov,
‘swam
’
; Lat.
nii-re,
‘swim see also under mi d.]
s n i ta k a , a. who has performed the
ablution customary at the end of religious
pupil age. [sni tL 1222 ]s n i n a , n. a bathing, religious ablution.
[V sni ,s n an a -
ci l a , a . (having bathing as a
habit, i.s .) practicing religious ablutions.
[1302 ]s n i y i n , a . perform ing rel igious ablutions.
[Vw i , 1 183 3,s n i yu, f n.
— 1 . sinew,25 7. [perhaps
‘ l igament,’ from Vai or si , bind, ligi re ,
’
q.v. . if so, it is formed from the present
stem sin'
s'
. (see 1 148. 3b and cf . sunva ) ,abbrev iated to and, with sufix n ( 1 178b )and interposed y cf . Old High
Ger . sé’
nawa , Ger . Sehne, AS. sinu, Eng.
sinew,wh ich point to a Goth . asinava :
that sni -Jn and its older equiv. uni -van
are abbreviated form s (for sina would
appear from the Germanic cognates.]s n i yu-b a n dh a , m. sinew-band, 1 .e. bow
str ing.
stha , V an i h (snihyati ; snigdha) . - 1 . be Al‘ i ctoyz .supple, greasy , moist ; and so — 2. stick
5’
to,i.e.
,as in Eng.
,.be attached to, be
fond of.
an d ,n . col la tera l f orm of si nu. surface.
s n eh a ,m.
— 1 . sticki ness ; — 2. viscid and
smooth stufi ; oil ; fat ; - 3. attachm ent,
love, friendsh ip. [V sni h : for connection
of 1 and 3, see m ih .]V s p a g, older f orm q l pag, q.v.
V s p rdh (spArdh ate ; pasprdhé ; spar
dhita; spardh itum ). contest th e pre
cedence among one anoth er ; emulate ;
str ive.
ap t-db . J:
[Vaprdh -lV 8 pm (sprsfiti. -te ; pupi l
'
s». pumvé ;
sruc] [282]
Ger. S tro-m, Eng. stream , with t between s v a -dh a r m a , m. own duty .
s and r (see under usra and svasr) : 1 s v a dh i , f . — I . wont, habit, custom,
fur ther pea-pa,‘stream Lat. Rii-mo,
‘ The River ,’old name of the Tiber : w.
fi-srav -a—t, cf . lppee, s l -o'
psF-s-TJ
s ru'
c , j ? one of the large sacrificial ladies
(as long as th e arm ) , of which there are
three, jnh ii , upabhrt, and dhruva, see
102 1 1 1c ; used for pouring ghee in th e
fire. [akin w. Vsru.]s ruv h , m. a smal l sacrificial ladle (a cubit
long ).used for dipping from the pot and
pour ing into the sruc. [akin w.Vsr n.]s r bt a s ,
n. stream . [Vsru, 1 1 52a.]sv a — l . pron. adj . own ; my own,
thy own ,h is
own or his, ctc. ; her , their
own or (each ) h is own, indef , one’
s
own, very often at the beginning
of cpds : my , h is, ctc. ;
their, our, etc., seef ollowing words ;—2. m. kinsman, fr iend ; — 3. ( l ike
i tman ) one’s se lf, see one
’s natural
sel f or condi tion ; — 4 . n. ( like Goth. sves )
possessions, property . [cf. i6s, w eed-s,
and 8s, h, by , and cards,‘own
’
; Old Lat.
sovo-s, Lat. suu-s, own’
; Goth . sveas, AS.
swfis,‘own
’
; also 8, vol , Lat. sci , Goth .
si-k, Ger . si-eh,
s v a k a ,a . own ; his own, etc. , equiv. to
sva. [sva, 1222a.]av e-k sa t r a , a .
free.s v a - cch a n d a , m. own wil l . [ohanda,
s v a cch a n da -vanajata, a . (by its own
wi l l , i .e.) spontaneously wood-grown, i.s.
growing wild in the wood.
V av a j (svajate ; sasvajé ; svaj isyate ;
(having self-rule, i.s.)
embrace.
+ p a r i , embrace.
V av a d (svadati, -te ; sasvadé ; svatta;svadAyati, svadayati ) . 1 . act. make
savory , season ; fig. make agreeable ;- 2. mid. be savory , rel ish , intrans .; - 3.
mid. relish , trans.; take pleasure in. [cf .dub-dam
,
‘
please,’aorist ( babe, s l -oFab-e,
pleased 580m , rejoice see al so
under sviidn.]
76 7 ; rule ; (Gas ; — 2. accustomed place,home, Mos ; — 3 . (wonted condition, i.s .)comfort ; joy ; bliss, pleasure,
svadh itm i nn nas, according to our
pleasure, i.e. exactly to our wish ,
wise ; with pleasure, gladly ; (gladly , i .s .)wil lingly , freely , 84 13. [cf . (Gas, custom ,
’
fleas,‘ wonted p lace, haunt,
’si -wO-a ,
‘am se
customed AS. sidu,Ger .S itte,
2 s v a dh fi, j : sweet drink ; esp. a libation
of gh ee to the Manes. [perhaps for2 sndh i : for the etymology , cf . sva
dh t‘
t adhayat, he drank the‘
sweet
dr inks,’RV.]
s v adh i v a n t , a .— 1 . (having h is wont,
i.e.) keeping to h is custom , faithful , constant ; - 2. (having bl iss, i .e.) blessed,
[ 1 svadh i , 1233 : see mgs 1and
s v i dh i t i , m.
s a n (“v i nit ; m uita) . sound, resound, roar .
[cf . Lat. sonus,
‘sound
’
; Old Lat. son-it,‘sounds
’
; AS. swinsian,‘sound ’
; Eng.
swan, so named from its song ; sim il ar ly
in Ger. the cock is ca l led Hahn,a name
akin w. Lat. can-ere,‘sing
’— ci . Ham let
i. 1 . 160, the bird of dawning
s v ana, m. sound ; roar (of wind) .
[V svan .]av a n a s , n. roar . [do.]V ev a p (svapiti susvi pa
asvaps'
it svapsyati sapti. [954b]svaptum ; suptvi ; sv i péyati ). sleep ;
fal l asleep ; snpté , sleeping ; caus. put
to sleep. [cf . Lat. sop-or ,
‘sleep w .
caus., cf . Lat. sbp ire,‘
put to sleep’
; see
also under svapna.]ui , go to sleep ; caus. put to sleep.
p r a , fal l asleep ; prasupta, fall enasleep, asleep, sunk in sleep.
sv ap a s , a . having goodworks, i.e.wonder
working. [sd apas , 1304b.]perhaps besom . [perhaps
for ou-pt‘
t,‘cleaning wel l
’: for va in
place of n, cf. 2svadh5 : for mg, cf .
svapn a , m. - 1 . sleep ; - 2. dream.
[s ap, q.v. : cf. bs -vo-s, Lat. som-nu-s,‘sleep
’
; AS. swe -n,‘sleep, dream
’
;
Chaucerian swe/31, dream Lat. samnium,
‘ dream’: for connection of 1 and 2, cf .
51 wh ere either sense flts .]s v a p n a
-m i na v a k a , m. the Dream
manikin, name of a certain magic whose
performance brings dreams that become
real ized,
s v a - b h i v a , m own way of being, in
h erent nature, ingenium , as distinguished
from acquired quali ties , see guna 2, and
2231 ; svabh i v i t, by nature
natural ly .
s v a bh i v a - dv s sa , as. natural hatred.
[ l 280b.]s v a y am-v a r a , m. self-choice ; esp . freechoice of a husband
,wh ich was al lowed
to gir ls of the warrior (ksatr iya ) caste, aSwayamvara.
s v a y hm pron. own self, self ; h imself, etc. ref err ing to subj ect, etc. ; al l
by itself, of its own accord, referr ingto predicate, 1
10. [from sva with nom .
case ending -a.m (cf. tv-um , a-y
-am ), andinterposed y , cf . 258 ]
s v ay am-bh it a . self-existent ; as m.
epithet of Brahma.
sv a y a m-m rta , a. dead of himself.
sv a-yuk t i , j 2pl. own team . [acct, 1274 :
for mg, cf . the Dutch and the American
Eng. span (of horses ) w. AS. spannan,
V s v a r (svar ati ; fisvi rsit ; asvi r it) .sound. [cf esp
-175,‘
pipe, flute’
; Lat.
smear-rue,
‘a humming
’
; Eng swar-m.]av b r [388d], pronounced sdar in the Veda
,
n. — 1 . the sun, 71 1s; - 2. sun l igh t, sun
shine ; ligh t, - 3. ( the place of the
l igh t, c rajas ) heaven, - 4 .
one of the three utterances,”
see
[cf. S crip-tor, sun, dog-star
’
;
G i lt-as, l igh t’
; a sh -hm, moon’
; Lat.
ser-énus ,‘ brigh t
’
; s6l , AS. sol,
‘sun ’
;
AS swel-a n , Eng.swea l ,‘ burn, glow, waste
away by heat and the kindred swelter ,‘ be overcome by heat,
’whence sweltry or
sultry : if the forms with r and l are fr .
[svastyayana
extended forms of a root can, to ligh t,’
and if svhr is a direct deriv. of the same
V can (nu-ar ) , we may compare Ger. Sauna,AS. su-nne, Eng. sun
,AS. sunnan dag,
Eng. Sun-day ]s v a - rupa , n. own form or shape ; true
nature, 40
s v a rup a -b h i v a , m. the becom ing or
being the true form (of names ) , i.s. the
use of the true form (of a person’
s name) .
[ l 280b : svarfipa is used predicatively.]sv a r - gA,
— 1 . a . going or leading to the
ligh t or to heaven ; situate in the heaven ly
l igh t, heavenly ; esp. w. loka, svargo lo
kas, the heavenly wor ld, heaven, 1035 "3
also as one word, see svargaloka ; — 2.
m. without loka, heaven,
sv a r g a-g i m i n , a . going to or attaining
heaven.
s v a r g a - l ok a , m. the heavenly wor ld,
heaven, 1037.
s v ar -bh anu, m. Suarbhanu, name of a
demon causing the eclipse of the sun,
cf. the later r i hu. [poss. having, i.s .
withholding the sun’s
s v a r y a, pronounced w astes, a . soundingof a thunderbol t, wh izzing. [V svar ,1213 ]
s v a l amk r ta , a . wel l adorned. [sn +alamkrta : see alam .]
s v h gv a , a . with goodly horses. [ad -t
agva, 1304b.]s v h s r f . sister. [cf. Lat. sam ,
AS. sweoster , swuster , Eng. sister . cf .
369° and 1 182f : for t between s and r,
cf . Easter , under nara , and stream under
Vsru.]av a nt i , pronounced suasti in Veda, - 1 .
j : ( l ike the Eng. wel l-being, i.s.) welfare ;blessing ; - 2. svasti , instr . [336° end],with luck, happily ; hence - 3. the inde
cl inable nom.-ace. neut. svasti, luck, hap
pincas, 841; n asty astu to, a blessing on
th ee. [ati an unused asti ,‘ be-ing,
’fr.
V l as , ‘ be ,’1 157 1a . acct, 1288b.]
s v a s t i -d i a . bestowing welfare.
s v a s ty ti y a n a ,n. sing. and pl. ( luck
progress, i.s .) wel-fare , prosperity ; blessing ; and so benediction ,
pl. the blessings, i.s. Vedic hymns eon
svasth a]
taining the word avasti , 106 [avantidyana : acct, 1271 : with -ayana , cf . f arein wel f are ]
sv a - s th a , a . being in one’
s natural con
di tion, self-contained, healthy , wel l .av i d a s , n. agreeableness, in pré -sv i das .
[s ad, 1 151 . 1b : cf . Mos (sic ) , DoricR os,
sv i dd , a . tasting good, savory ; sweet.
[284] 3°w l i s l l ?“
noting that the author gflees with the
or method mentioned,- v?r°y common at end of half -plaka,esp a 3d n
'
ns perf 9 ‘
so iti ha. 12° — combinations iti
hov i ca , h e said, so kov i ca,
hocns, 95‘3, 96
13. [this word appears
also as gha in the Veda : cf . 7 s, Doric 7a ,encli tic asseveratives.]
[V avad, q.v., 1 178a : cf . Doric £1863 , h a nsa, m. goose, gander ; perhaps appl ied
sc ri be-s, Lat. svdvis, cavado-i-s, AS. swéte,
Eng. swash ]s v i dh y i y a, m. the reading or repeat
ing to one’s self, study (of the Veda ) .
[adhyiiym]s v i m i -k i r y a , n. master
’
s business.
av@n i -kum i r a , m. the Lord Kum‘
ara,
name of Skanda , god of war , see ki rtti
kcya and knm i ra.
s v am i - guna , m. rul er-virtue.
s v am i n ,
a lso to the swan and l ike water-fowl .
[prob. a consonantal stem , transferred
(399 ) to the ar-declens ion, and so orig.
tghana : cf . xi v, Lat. ans-sr,Li thuanian
2983-3 , Ir ish goss, Ger . Guns, AS . gds,
Eng. goose : even the s of sghans may be
derivational ; cf . AS. gan-d-ra
, sgan-ra
,
Eng. gander ; Old High Ger . gan-azzo
,
‘
gander’
; AS.gan-et, Eng. gannet,
‘seae
m. owner , proprietor , master , h a th ,see 954d.
lord ; opp. qf servant, subject, wife . [sva , h a ty a , n. slay ing. [Vhan , 12130 and it
‘own ,
’1231 ] (middle ) , cf . 954d.]
av i m i - s ev a, f . th e serving one’
s mas V h a n (hhuti jagh i an [794d]te r .
s v i m i -h i ta , n. master’
s welfare.
s v i r th a ,m. own affair or cause. [artha .]
s v i h i , excl . used when making oblations,
hail , w. dat., at the end of an invoca
tion, l ike Amen,
V av i d (svédate ; svidyati , -te ; sisvidé ;
svinna) . sweat. [svidyi mi - laiw,‘sweat
’
;
cf . lbos, iB-pé s,‘sweat,
’
lapl a ,
‘sweat
Lat. siidd-re,
‘sweat,
’denom. of osuda-s,
‘sweat
’
; s lid-ar,
‘sweat Lettish swidrs,
‘sweat
’
; AS. noun swat,Eng. swea t
observe that though there is a word for‘sweat
’common to most Indo-European
tongues, there is no such common word
for ‘ be
s v e c ch a , fi own wil l ; svecchayi , accord
ing to one’
s incl ination, at wil l . [icchs'
m]s v 6da , m. sweat. [s id ]
h a , encl itic and sl ightly asseverative particle,
in the Veda , 92 13 ; in the
Br i hmanas,
and very often (so pages95 103 1° (quotation f rom a Brdhmana ) ;in the Sutras
,to be sure, of course, desig
hanisyati ha ta [954d] hantum ; hatv i.M tya ; banyata ; j igh i nsati- 1 . str ike ; strike down ; sm ite or slay ,
702, etc. ki l l , etc. overcome ;
- 2. destroy , br ing to nough t ; (of
darkness ) dispe l , - desid. wish to
smite or afilict, 781°
- hata, 1 . smi tten, slain, 984 kil led,
- 2. destroyed, ruined ; lost,
42 1 ; — 3. pounded.
[with bi n-mi , cf . Oelmv, easy‘smite
w. ja-ghu-ti s, cf . -t e-¢r-ov, slew
’
; w.
hath , eghata , cf. par tly, slain’
; w. ghan‘ ,
q.v., a slaying,
’cf. ipdvos,
‘slaugh ter
’
; w.
ha-ti,‘a smi ting, slaying,
’cf . Old High
Ger . gun-d, AS. gii
‘li, sgun
-‘
b,
‘ battle AS.
glib-fund , Old High Ger .gundf ano,
‘ battle
flag’fr . th e last form (not fr . the
th rough the French , comes Eng. gonf anon ,
gonf a lon ; for 111g of grid, cf. Ger . schlagen,‘sm ite , slay ,
’wi th Schlacht,
‘ battle’: for
senses under 1, observe that AS. sieifa
(whence Eng. slay ) means‘smite
’and
then also
a v a , str ike down ; bring to nough t.
i , strike upon ; hur l (a bol t) upon ( lac.
vs ha]
V2 h i em u jah i d ; th i sith i syati ; h int [95711] hatum h itva
-haya h iyhte, h iyate) . I . leave, i.s
quit , leave in the lurch , 821; desert,
leave beh ind, abandon, cast
ofi ; lay aside, 83“ rel inquish ; - 2.
h iyate, be forsaken or left beh ind ; fal lshort or be deficient ; become deficient,
decrease ; deteriorate, be lowered,— h in6 : — 1 . forsaken ; —2. ( l ike Eng.
abandoned) vicious, low, low-lived,- 3. at end of cpds, abandoned by
i .s . destitute of free from [cf .
xii-poo r, (forsaken ) destitute,’
xfi-pa,‘ widow
’
; Lat.f ez-mes, lack,+ p a r i , - l . forsake ; - 2. pass. be
lacking, decrease ; come to an end, see
simple verb.
v i , leave ; vih i ya, passing over.
[286]
tary ; - 3. as n. wel fare, safety. [V 1 dhi ,‘
put,’
954c : -dhita in Veda : cf. Ow l s,
h i ta -k i m a , a . wishing one’s welfare,
well -wishing. [see h i m ]h i te cch a, f l desire for the welfare (ofanother ) . [icch i ]
h i top a dega , m. salutary instruction ;Hitopadeca, name of a col lection of
fables. [upadeca .]h im ‘ , m. the cold , winter .
sxma,‘ Winter,
’appears in xlpa-po-s, l it.
winter-l ing, i. .e a one-winter-old or year
ling goat,’named xlptapos precisely as is
the dialecticGer .Ein-winter, a one-winter
old goat’
; cf .xlpm pa,‘she-goat, chimera
’
;
see similar names under vatsa : cf. further-x1po in bba -xipo-s,
‘very wintry
’
; Lat.
-hi'
mu m bimas,obi-himu-s,
‘of two winters
[the stem $6
7h i , excl . of pa in or astonishment. [ l 135s ]h i r y a , grdv. to be taken away or stolen.
[V l hr,‘seize,
’963m]
h i s i n , a . laugh ing. “has ,
or years’
; also xcé s , snow,
’
xeapé s ,‘ winter
’
; Lat. hiems,‘ winter .
h i r any a , 11. gold. [akin w. har i , q.v.] ..Z’
b i t any a g a r b h a, m. fruit or scion or
h i s y a , grdv. to he laughed at ; as n.
laugh ter ; ridicule. [Vhas, 963 3 0]Vh i (hinbti, hinuté ; j igh i ya ; ah i isit ;hesyati ; bith ). set in motion, dr ive,
impel .
p r a send 03 or away ; del iver over .
h i , pa rticle. 1 . asseverative surely ,
verily , indeed, 183 -93
,23 21 , 28
15,
35 21 , 83 1 , ctc. ; —2. giving a
because ; for , etc., 53
3, 70
1 1; 3. w.
inter rogatives, pray , l l1, 13 finite verb
accented w. h i [595d], 72 1s h i never a t beg.
of sentence
V h i ns (binasti j ihinsa ; ahinsi'
t ;
hinsisyati ; hih sita; hinsitum ; h ih s itva ;
”h insya ) hurt, harm , slay . [perhaps,orig., desid. of Vhan, see
h i ns ii , f . a harming, injur ing. Wh ite,
h i ns r a, a . harming ; as m. a savage or
cruel man. [Vh im, 1 188a.]h i t ‘ , ppl ., adj . 1 . put, set ; placed ; and
so - 2. pregnantly ( l ike Eng. in place, i .s.‘ in the r igh t place,
’and Ger . gelegen ,
‘ lying ar igh t, i .s . fit, con
venient, agreeable ; yadi tatra to hitam,
if it suits thee there ; advantageous, salu
child oi the gold ( i.s. of the golden
egg, 57 Hiranyagarbha or Gold-scion,
name of a cosmogonic power , the personal
Brahman,
V h id ( Vedic f orms [Wh itney 54,
ham . hélsmi na ; j ihfla. j ihné : hints :Ep ic, hélami na ). be angry ; be incoa
siderate or careless.
h iuh , see V2hi .V h u (juhbti , juhuté ; juhava, juhvé ;ahanait ; hosyati ; huta; h btum ; hutv i )pour into the fire, cast into the fire ; and
so offer ; make oblation even of things
not cast into the fire ; huta: offered ; as
n. oblation.
[orig. .ghu: cf . xiv , exsF-a ,
‘
pour’
;
xv-Ado s,‘ liquid, jnice
’w. l in-ti , cf.
xv- ‘rdo s,‘
poured’
; w. i -hn-ti , cf . xh-a to s,
a pouring,’Lat. fi -ti-s
,water-pot
’
;
further , f ans , stem f ont, Jos-ont, pour
ing,’i.s . ‘ fountain ’
:
with the extended form oghud, cf.Lat.
Vf ed in fund-ere,‘
pour ,’AS. geo
’
t-a n, Ger.
giessen, pour’
; provincia l Eng. gut,‘ water-course
’
; and Eng. gut, w. like
sense, in Gut of C'anso.]
+ 5 , offer in ( loc.) i huta : ofiered ; laid
[287]
in the fire (of a corpse ) , 84 19 ; as n. obla
tion.
h ut a -h om a ,a . having ofiered oblation.
b a t i ga , m. fire ; the fire-god, Agn i. [prop.
‘ having th e oblation as his food,’59a :
h utaga n a , m. fire ; the fire-god, Agni.
[pr0p.‘ having the oblation as his food,
’
agana :
V h fi or hvi (hsvato and hnvste, Vedic ;
class ical , hvayati , -te [761d juhava ,
juhuvé ; dhv i sit hvayisyati , -te
[935c] hfita; hvittum , hvéyitum ; hfitvfi;-hfiya ) . cal l ; cal l upon ; invoke, esp. a
god [orig. sghfi: w. h it-ta,‘ca l led upon ,
invoked,’
some identify the Goth . stem
gu-ba , gu
-da , God,’AS. and Eng. God.]
a,— 1 . cal l to or h ither ; summon, ih
vi te ; - 2. mid. cha l lenge.
+up a ,mid. — 1 . cal l or summon to
one’s se lf ; - 2. ca l l encouragingly unto.
hut i , j : invocation . [Vh ii .]V l h r (har ati , -te ; jah i ra, j ah re; Ah i rsit,fi lms : har isyfiti. 4 0 ; hr“; M rtnm ;
hrtvi ; -hf'tya ; h r iyate ; I .
carry , 1025, hol d ; — 2. carry unto,
bring ; offer , — 3. carry away ,
remove, - 4. esp . take away by
violence or un lawful ly , 46 4 , 53 7 ; stea l ,302, 68 4, 97
5-9; seize ; - 5 . take
lawful ly , receive (a gift) ; come into
possession of (as h eir ) , 4591 15
; — 6. get
hold of , 9622; become master of ; - 7 .
( l ike Eng. take ) charm , captivate ;
(carry ofi, i .e. remove, and so) destroy .
[cf . xeip, dialectic xe'
p-s,
‘ hand’
; s io-xep
he,‘easy to h andle
’
; Lat. lair ,‘ h and
’
;
hérc'
s,‘ heir ,
’see root, mg
a v a , (carry down ,1 e.) move down.
+ v y - a v a , move h ither and thither , go
to work, proceed, act.+ 5 ,
- 1 . bring h ither , 843; fetch ; fetch
or get back, 97 - 2. receive, 4712;
accept ; - 3. used ( like Eng. take ) esp .
of food, take, eat ; - desid. be will ing to
get back, 97
ud - a, bring out, and so utter , say , tel l .
+ p r a ty -a, get back again ; at in
correct reading f or pra-vy-i
+ v y- a, br ing out, and so utter ;
[t h i s
with vacam , speak words to a per
son 3 1 ; similar ly,
+ p r a -v y -a , utter ; speak.
ud , take out.
p a r i , carry around.
+ p r a ,— 1 . (br ing forward, i.s. reach
out, e.g. feet, fists, and so) strike, attack,dea l blows ; — 2. throw,
esp. into the fire.
a nu- p r a , throw into the fire or on a
fueCl-pile.
-1 . take apart, divide ; - 2. pass
(part of one’s life ) , 04 23 ; - 3. pass one
’s
time, esp. pleasantly ; wander about for
pleasure , enjoy one’s self, 109: 13, 49 18 ; —4.
wander about.
s am bring or draw together , contract ;
withdraw.
+ up a - aam , bring or draw together to
one’
s self, mid. ; withdr aw.
V 2 h r (hrnité) . be angry .
h roch a y d ,a . lying or abiding in the
heart as m. love, [hr
qaya , 159, 203 : acct,
h r cch a y a -p idi ta ,a . love-pained, love
sick.
h rc ch a y a -v a r d h a n a , a. increasing or
arousing love.
h rcch a y i v i sta , a . entered by or fil led
wi th love. [i vistg Vvig, 1085a : acct of
cpd,
h r cch a y ft v i sta cetana , a. possessing a
love-fil led m ind. [hrcchayi vista 06
tani , l 298a, 334 1 ]brd n. heart ; esp. as seat of th e
emotions and of menta l activity in gen
eral ; also, proper ly, region of the h eart.
[see under grad.)h td a y a , n. h eart ; - 1 . prop. heart, as an
organ of the body ,— 2.fig . h eart,
as seat of th e feel ings. [see hrd and
V h r s ( literati.4 0 ish im ».jahrsé ;11t hmé ; -ktsyn ; W yattbe excited, esp . with pleasure or fear ; (ofthe hair ) br istle or stand on end by rea
son of frigh t or pleasure ; be impatient ;- hrsta , del igh ted ; - hrsith : (of th e
ha ir ) standing on end ; (of flowers ) notdrooping, unwithered, fresh ; - intens . be
very impatient, 8417 - caus. exci te pleas
h rsitasragrajoh ina] [288]
antly, gladden. [for ghrs : cf . Lat. horr sacr ifice ; observe that the older word is
Ere, shore-ere,‘ br istle, shudder
’
; hirsi tus, i hati . [V hn,‘ bristly , rough
’
; hor-deum, Ger . Ger s-te, h r a da, m. pool , lake. [cf . Vhl i tl ]‘ bar ley ,
’so cal l ed from its bristly ears ] h r a a (hr i sati, -te ; h r aaita, hr ast‘ ;
p r a , give one’s self up to joy , exul t ; h r i shyati ) . become less ; caus . dimin
prahrsta, deligh ted, glad. ish . [w. bras-iyans,‘ less,
’
cf . xelpo r ,
h rsi t a s r a g r ajohina , a . having unwith sxlpaj w ,
‘ worse,’
and for the mg,
ered gar lands and free from dust. [hrsita cf . Lat. de'
tero, lessen,’w. déter ior
,
sraj rajo-h ina,h e tu, m. - 1 . prop . an impel ler, and so V h r i d (hr i date h ri dita ; h r i dhyati ) .
occasioner, causer , occasion, cause ; hetos, sound (of drums ) ; rattle (of stones or
( l ike La t. causa) on accoun t of ; tr i sa dry bones ) . [for aghr ad : cf. “Xmas ,hetos, from fear ; 2. reason, argument, m a-XMB-j w,
‘sound (of liquids, breakers ,
proof ; - 3. means, [ V h i , 1 161a.] rain ) , xc-xm -é s,‘resounding
’
( song of
h e tu-
gaett a , n. reason-book, rational victory ) ; AS. gra-an, obsolete Eng. greet,
istic work ; dialectics.‘cry , lament
’
; xapdb-pa, noisy moun tain
h em a or h eman, n. gold. torrent’: see hr i duni ]
h em a n ta, m. winter . [ci . hima : s am , strike ( intrans.) together so as to
h e l i , j : carelessness ; levity . [for h eli , rattle ; caus . cause to rattle.
from Vh id, q .v.] h r addn i , f . hail-stones, h ai l . [so cal led
h a i m a , a . go lden. [h ema, 1208f .] from its rattl ing sound, V hr i d : cf .xm ca ,h btr , m. 1 . priest, chief priest, whose axaAaB
-j a, Church Slavonic grads, Lat.
assistant in ol dest times was the adhvar gr ando, stem grand-in,
Y“; Agni, 3 8 the chiefest kotr, V h l i d (hladate ; hl iidhyati , -te ). cool
in the h ighly developed r itua l, the first off, intrans., refresh one
’
s self ; caus. cool
of the four chief priests, see rtvij . [prop. or refresh , trans.‘offerer ,
’ from t ,
‘ofier
’: but the sense h l ad a k a , f . -iki , a . cool ing, refreshing.
of ‘ invoker ,’natural ly suggested by h is [V hlad, 1 181 and
function in the r itual , was popularly asso h l ad i k av a n t , a . r ich in cooling. [from
ciated with it and the word thus connected fem . of h ladaka , substantively jwith Vhfi, vb v g (ma ma,
-te ; shv i rsit ; hvrti :
k ot r a, n. ofier ing, sacrifice, both the action hvarayati ) . go crookedly ; bend over,
and the thing offered. [Vhu, 1 185a.] fal l .h bm a ,
m. a pouring into the fire ; ablation ; v i , fall ; caus. overturn.
[290]
An “etc. fol lowing a reference that stands after a certain definition signifies that
th e word is of common occurrence in that mean ing.
The abbreviation [do .] is used to avoid repetition of identica l items in the square
brackets at the end of articles ; for examples, see the three words fol lowing abhi vi da,
p. 1 19.
The etymologica l cognates are usual ly introduced by the conventiona l “cf . this
impl ies that the words wh ich the reader is h idden to“compare are akin . The fact
that two rel ated words are compared impl ies as a rul e only that they are radical ly akin,
and not that their formative sufiixes are identical . Thus with anta is compared English
end, al though th is corresponds strictly only to the Sanskr it secondary derivative antya.
So asthan , 6m m ,and as are radical ly identical , though not of entirely para l lel formation .
On th e other h and, where it is desired to cal l attention, not to radical ly kindred
words, but to words analogous on ly in metaphor or in transfer of meaning, the brief
ph rase,“for mg, is used ; and th is is to be understood as standing for the ph rase,
for a paral lel ism in the development of meaning, compare,”
or,“ for an analogous
instance of transition of meaning, compare.
”
Special ly impor tant references to the Grammar are marked by the word “see
thus under n i r i yana (p. special attention is cal led to 5 1219, which sh ows that
th is word is a simple patronymic of nara, and is not what the text (at says it is, a
compound of ni ts ayana .
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE VOCABULARY.
The order of the articles is str ictly and solely alph abetical (see below ) . Respecting
words wh ose alphabetic p lace changes with th eir inflection, the fol lowing remarks may be
made for beginner s.
Al l nouns, wheth er th ey be substantives or adjectives, are given under the stem . In
order to know the stem ,a pre l im inary study of the m ore important paradigms and rules
of euphonic combination is necessary . Thus the nom . sing. raj i . must be looked for
under rajan , and the ace. sing. ni ma under n i man (Whitney , 424 ) but nalo, as standing
for na l a -s ( 175a, must be looked for under nala . The stems in r or ar are entered
in th e form r. The stem s of the perf. act. ppl . and of the primary comparatives are
given as ending in vans and y i ns. The stem s in at or ant are given in the ful ler form ,
ant, and sim i lar ly those in mant and vant ; and the fem inines of these and of the in-stemsare not given, since they are always made in anti or ati , mati , vati , ini .
Al l verb-forms must be sough t under th e root. Thus i sit wi l l be defined on ly underthe root l as and not in th e a lphabetic place wh ich th e augment gives it, under
long 5 . Likewise prepositional compounds of verbs wi l l be found under th e roots (see
and not in the alphabetic place under the preposition. Th e beginner is advised
to make h im self thorough ly fam il ia r with the l ist of prepositions ( 1077 ) at the outset.
Of the verbal adjectives and nouns (W hitney , chapter xiii , p. 307 on ly the
gerundives ( in ya , tavya , and aniya ) h ave been given regular ly in alphabetic place.
The participles in ta and us.are usual ly given under the roots ; but in some cases, wh ere
they have assumed a distinctly adjectival or substantival coloring or h ave an incoa
veniently large var iety of meanings and uses , they are treated at length in a lphabetic
place ; such , for example , are rta , krta , gata , jata, nivrtta , bhfita , sthi ta , hita , etc.
Gerunds with a or su (e.g. a-citva) are of course treated in alphabetic place.
Such adverbs as are merely case-form s of substantive or adjecti ve stems, are
general ly to be sough t for under those stems. Those from pronomina l stem s (e.g. kim,
tad, yad ) receive separate treatment.
[291 ]
The pronouns of th e first and second person would require a dozen different arti
cles apiece if al l their forms were given alph abetical ly . The same is true to a greater
or less extent of the other pronouns. Th e student should therefore learn, as ear ly as
possible, the forms given at 491 , 495, 4995, 501 (especial ly ayam : asi uis less impor tant) ,504
,and 509. The uses of sa-s, etc.
, as“ , etc., and ayam, etc., are given under ta , stad.
and idam respective ly .
As for compounds, th ey are given with completeness for the Vedic selections,and
with great freedom for the remaining texts, especial ly for the Nala . The mean ing of
such as are lacking can be easily learned by looking out their component parts .
THE ALPHABETIC ORDER.
The order of the letters is given by Wh itney at 5 5 (compare 5 but several
matters wh ich are frequent occasions of stumbl ing, may be noticed here.
The visa rga has the first place after the vowels. Thus antah-pura (for antar
pure.) stands next after anta , p. 1 16, and not after antardh i na . But the visa rga
which is regarded as equivalent to a sibilant and exchangeable with it (Wh itney ,stands in the a lphabetic place of the sibilant Thus the visa rga of
equivalent to g brings this word just betlore adhas (p. 1 15
,top ) , and not between
adh a and adhanya.
The sign in, as representing“the anusvc
'
ira of more independent, origin (Whitney ,has its place before al l th e mutes etc . (Whi tney , Thus in ang
-a , the a repre
sents a nasal ization of the radical vowel , and the word comes immediately after a. So
bati sa comes jus t after ha , p. 284 ; dang and danstr in , at the beginning of the letter (1.
Th e sign m, as representing an assim i lated m,is differently placed, according to its
phonetic value. On the one hand, if m, as product of a m ass imi lated to a sem ivowel ,
sibilant, or h ( see 2130, d) , represent a nasal sem ivowel or anusvc'
ira,then its place is like
that of it. Thus saxhyatendr iya fo l lows as , and samhita comes just before sakacchapa
(p. and paths before puta (p.
On the other hand,if , for instance, as product of a m assimilated to a guttura l , the
sign m represent guttura l ii , then its place is that of ii ; and a simi lar rule appl ies
to a l l the other cases under 2l 3b. Thus samkata and samkalpa fol low sagara , an d
samgama fol lows saiiga, p. 264 ; so sarhcaya (whosem: it) foll ows sajya ; and saxhtati
(whose m n ) fol lows sant, p . 266.
Vedic l is placed after d, and 111 after dh .
THE CONTENTS OF THE SEPARATE ARTICLES.
Homonyms, unless difierentiated by accent, are distinguish ed by a prefixed number
(cf . afiga, v ayas ) sim ilar ly homonymous roots (cf . kr ) .References to the Grammar in square brackets immediately af ter a decl inable stem
refer to some pecul iar ity of declens ion. Occasiona l ly , typical cases of stems are given.
Thus under dig are given the nom. and sec. sing. and instr . dua l ; from these, the oth er
cases (drk-sn, drg- i , etc.
, drg-bhi s , etc.) are easi ly known.
Each root is fol lowed by a synopsis of its conjugational form s, so far as they actual lyoccur in the l iterature. The finite forms are given in the th ird person singular of the
indicative, and in th e order in wh ich they are treated in the Grammar , namely , present,
perfect, aorist, and future ; then fol low the past participle, the infinitive, and the two
gerunds (e.g. i p“, fiptam aptva, -apya : observe the al ternation of the accents ) ; then
fol low in order the th ird sing. present indicative of the passive, intensive, desiderative,
and causative, so far as they seemed of importance for the users of th is Reader.
1 9'
[2923
Meaning which are synonymous or near ly so, are separated by commas ; those
which differ considerably from each oth er, are separated by semi colons or by ful l-faceddashes and figur es The colon is often used to show that several meanings
which fol low it and are separated by semicolons are co-ordinate wi th each other . Thuson p. 268
,under samipa 2b.
, the meanings before,” “
near ,”
hard by,”and by are
co-ordinate, and are equivalent to in the presence or neighborhood of cf . suvarcas.
The arrangement for matter in heavy brackets at the end of articles is : in the case
of primary deri vatives, first, the root from which the word comes, with reference, ifnecessary , to the section giving the sufiix of derivation ; second, cognate words fromal l ied languages ; and third, words showing a development of meaning ana logous to that
shown by the Sanskrit word or i l lustrati ve of it. If the der ivation of a simple word is
not given, it is because it is unknown or too uncertain to be worth mentioning. In the
case of secondary derivati ves, the primary is given, with a reference to the section showingits treatment. Th e ana lysis of compounds is often indicated by a hyphen ; but if one
member ends and the next begins with a vowel or diph thong, the latter member is given
in square brackets at the end of the article ; cf. naIOpi khyi na.
Where words of different languages are given together, separated only by commas ,
the definition given after the last appl ies to them al l ; or , if no definition is given, the
English word in i ta l ics at the end is both a cognate and a defin ition of al l at the same
time ; for examples, see Aksa asta, firna .
The references to the Grammar may seem too numerous ; but they are real ly a
device for avoiding the frequent repetition of explanations which would otherwise have
to be given in ful l . I t woul d take h alf a dozen lines to exp lain the etymology of
manmatha , for instance ; but the references to and 1002b make this needless ;
cf . th e references under daridra , qiqu, sanva.I t often happens that th e statement in the section referred to does not directly cover
the point aimed at in citing it ; but a moment’
s though t wil l show what is meant. Thus
under sarhkranti , the two references to be compared mean that the derivative suflx is
ti , and that before it the root-vowel suffers th e same pecul iar change th at is seen in the
pas t participle. Under samyatendr iya reference is made to 1298, wh ich states that
possessive descriptives“are very much more common than [simple] descriptives of the
same form.
”The real point of the reference is plainly , not to bring out this fact, but to
show th e beginner in what category of compounds this word belongs. So 1290 states
that “other compounds with adverbia l prior members are quite irregular ly accented
but the section is cited, e.g., under sadha-mi da , to indicate that this is a descriptive
compound (see the h eading of the preceding right-hand page, 441 ) in wh ich the first
member is an adverbial element wi th the function (cf . 1289) of an adjective. Many roots
form verb-stems in aya, but without causative signification ; this is br iefly indicated byth e reference 1041 3. In th e case of secondary derivatives in vant, mant, ti , and tva, a
simple ref erence to one of the sections treating of these endings ( 1233, 1235, 1237, 1239)is put instead of a repetition of the prim itive.
